Below you will find brief information for 850, 1650, 1850. These double PID temperature controllers are designed for precise temperature management in various industrial applications. Key functionalities include configurable alarms, heater break detection, auto-tuning, and programmable steps to suit different thermal process requirements. Available with various outputs, analog ports and serial communication option. Ethernet connectivity is also provided for remote monitoring.
Advertisement
Advertisement
850 - 1650 - 1850
code: 80290E - 06-2021
CONTENTS ................................................................ 1
INTRODUCTION ....................................................... 7
Device data ......................................................................................7
Warnings and safety .........................................................................7
Typographical conventions used in this manual ..............................8
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ..............................
1.1. Profile ...................................................................................10
1.2. Differences among models ..................................................11
1.3. 850 Controller .......................................................................12
1.3.1. Display and keys ........................................................13
1.3.2. Drilling dimensions and templates .............................14
1.4. 1650 Controller .....................................................................15
1.4.1. Display and keys ........................................................16
1.4.2. Drilling dimensions and templates .............................17
1.5. 1850 Controller .....................................................................18
1.5.1. Display and keys ........................................................19
1.5.2. Drilling dimensions and templates .............................20
2. INSTALLATION ................................................
2.1. Mounting the controller ........................................................21
2.1.1. General installation rules ............................................21
2.1.2. Drilling dimensions .....................................................21
2.1.3. Protection against infiltration of dust ............................
2.1.4. Vibrations ...................................................................22
2.1.5. Minimum space for ventilation ...................................22
2.1.6. Positioning .................................................................22
2.1.7. Fastening to the panel ...............................................22
2.2. Connections .........................................................................23
2.2.1. General rules for connections ....................................23
2.2.2. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) .........................23
2.2.3. Cables ........................................................................23
2.2.4. Power supply .............................................................23
2.2.5. Connecting inputs and outputs .................................24
2.3. 850 connection diagrams .....................................................25
2.3.1. General diagram.........................................................25
2.3.2. Power supply .............................................................26
2.3.3. Inputs .........................................................................26
2.3.4. Outputs ......................................................................26
2.3.5. Digitali inputs .............................................................27
2.3.6. Serial line ....................................................................28
2.3.7. CT Inputs ...................................................................28
2.3.8. Auxiliary inputs ...........................................................28
2.3.9. Auxiliary outputs ........................................................28
2.4. 1650 connection diagrams ...................................................29
2.4.1. General diagram.........................................................29
2.4.2. Power supply .............................................................30
2.4.3. Main input (MAIN) .....................................................30
2.4.4. Outputs ......................................................................30
2.4.5. Digital inputs ..............................................................31
2.4.6. Serial line ....................................................................32
2.4.7. CT Inputs ...................................................................32
2.4.8. Auxiliary inputs (AUX1) ...............................................32
2.4.9. Third Analogue input (AUX2) .....................................33
2.4.10. Analog outputs ...........................................................33
2.5. 1850 connection diagrams ...................................................34
2.5.1. General diagram.........................................................34
2.5.2. Power supply .............................................................36
2.5.3. Main input (MAIN) ......................................................36
2.5.4. Output ........................................................................36
2.5.5. Digital inputs ..............................................................37
2.5.6. Serial line ....................................................................38
2.5.7. CT Inputs ...................................................................38
2.5.8. Auxiliary input (AUX1) .................................................38
2.5.9. THIRD ANALOGUE INPUT (AUX2).............................39
2.5.10. Analog outputs ...........................................................39
2.5.11. Connections with option optional ..................................
.............................................................. I/O (N) =10, 01,
11 ...............................................................................39
2.7. Ethernet port wiring diagram ...............................................42
3. COMMISSIONING ...........................................
3.1. Information on displays and use of keys..............................43
3.1.1. Navigating the menus ................................................43
3.1.2. Displays ......................................................................43
3.1.2.1. Display characters .............................................43
3.1.2.2. Scrolling messages ...........................................44
3.2. Sequence at power-on .........................................................44
3.3. First power-on ......................................................................45
3.3.1. Fast configuration ......................................................45
3.4. Setting up quick configuration .............................................49
3.4.1. Setting up the Alarm ..................................................49
3.4.2. Setting up the Heater Break Alarm ............................50
3.4.3. Setting up the PID ......................................................51
4. CONFIGURATION ...........................................
4.1. Programming/Configuration Menu .......................................52
4.1.1. First: know what you’re doing ....................................52
4.1.2. Passwords .................................................................52
4.1.3. Password in the User Menu .......................................52
4.2. Main menu ...........................................................................53
4.2.1. Functional schema .....................................................55
4.3. Legend for submenus and parameters ................................56
4.3.1. Submenu ....................................................................56
4.3.2. Parameter ..................................................................56
4.4. Submenu INFO - Information display...................................57
4.4.1. SW.VER - Software version ........................................58
4.4.2. CODE - Identifying code of controller ........................58
4.4.3. ERR.1 - Main input error ............................................58
4.4.4. ERR.2 - Auxiliary input error.......................................58
4.4.5. Auxiliary input error 2 (IN3) .........................................59
4.4.6. M.ERR.x* - Math function block x* error ...................59
4.4.7. SAP.C - SAP code ......................................................59
4.4.8. SER.N - Serial number of controller ...........................59
4.4.9. xxxxx - Model of controller .......................................60
4.4.10. xxxxx - Type of controller ...........................................60
4.4.11. FUNC.B - Logic and Math functions option available 60
4.4.12. CALEN – Calendar Available ......................................60
4.4.13. IN.AUX - Auxiliary input available ..............................60
4.4.14. I.AUX2 - Auxiliary input 2 available ............................61
4.4.15. OUT.AN - Analog output available .............................61
4.4.16. CTx - Current transformer input available..................61
4.4.17. x.IN.DG - Digital input available .................................61
4.4.18. RS485 - RS485 serial port available ..........................61
4.4.19. MAC.E – Controller Ethernet Address .......................62
4.4.20. IO.AUX – Auxiliary digital I/Os available .....................62
4.4.21. IO.RELE – Auxiliary relays available ...........................62
4.4.24. OUT1 - Type of output 1 ............................................63
4.4.25. OUT2 - Type of output 2 ............................................63
4.4.26. OUT3 - Type of output 3 ............................................63
4.4.27. OUT4 - Type of output 4 ............................................63
4.4.28. OUT1.S - Number of switchings output 1 .................63
4.4.29. OUT2.S - Number of switchings output 2 ................64
4.4.30. OUT3.S - Number of switchings output 3 ................64
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 1
4.4.31. OUT4.S - Number of switchings output 4 ................64
4.4.32. NDG.S - Digital input switchings number .................64
4.4.33. T.DAYS - Total working days ......................................64
4.4.34. P.DAYS - Partial working days ...................................65
4.4.35. T.INT - Internal temperature of controller ...................65
4.4.36. T.MIN - Minimum internal temperature of the controller
4.4.38. TIME - Internal time....................................................65
4.4.39. DATE - Internal date ..................................................65
4.5. INFO.E Submenu - Displaying Ethernet Information ..........66
4.5.1. VERS.E – Ethernet Software Version .......................67
4.5.2. TY.S.E – Ethernet assignment mode status ...............67
4.5.3. CON.E – Ethernet Connection status ........................67
4.5.4. LIN.E – Ethernet link status ........................................67
4.5.5. SPD.E – Ethernet speed status ..................................67
4.5.6. IP.E – Ethernet IP Address .........................................68
4.5.7. SUB.E – Subnet mask Ethernet .................................68
4.5.8. GAT.E – Ethernet Gateway address ...........................68
4.5.9. STA.E – Ethernet Network status ...............................68
4.6. MASTER Submenu - Display of Master Modbus communication
.............................................................................................69
4.6.1. STAT – Master communication status........................70
4.6.2. MAS.xx – Master communication value xx (*) ............70
4.6.3. ERR.xx – Master communication error xx (*) .............70
4.7. RECIP Submenu - Configuring parameters recipes ............71
4.7.1. RECP.N - Selecting a recipe ......................................71
4.7.2. ACRxx* - Parameter xx** of recipe ............................71
4.8. Submenu PR.OPT - Configuring programs..........................72
4.8.1. PR.OP.N - Selecting program ....................................73
4.8.2. FI.STP - Number of first step assigned to program ...73
4.8.3. LA.STP - Number of last step assigned to program ..73
4.8.4. STRT - Restart mode .................................................73
4.8.5. RST.SP - Type of control after program restart ..........73
4.8.6. WAIT.S - Option to start execution of program ..........74
4.8.7. END - Action at end of program ................................74
4.8.8. LIMIT - Limitation of step duration .............................74
4.8.9. MSG.EN - Message assigned to end of program ......74
4.9. Submenu PR.STP - Configuration of program steps ...........75
4.9.1. PR.NUM - Program selection ...................................76
4.9.2. PR.ST.N - Programming step .....................................76
4.9.3. ST.END - End step of the program configuration ......76
4.9.4. REFE – Step reference programmer ..........................76
4.9.5. SETP - Programming step setpoint ...........................76
4.9.6. RAMP.T - Step time ramp ..........................................77
4.9.7. HOLD.T - Hold time in step........................................77
4.9.8. HBB - Enable Hold Back Band function ....................77
4.9.9. BAND - Maximum deviation for HBB.........................77
4.9.10. HBB.R - Enabling HBB during ramp ..........................78
4.9.11. HBB.H - Enabling HBB during hold ...........................78
4.9.14. SUB.SP - Setpoint value of slaved controller ...........79
4.9.15. S.RM.EN - Enabling ramp for slaved controller .........79
4.9.16. ENBL.1 - Consent 1 to execute step .........................79
4.9.17. ENBL.2 - Consent 2 to execute step .........................79
4.9.18. ENBL.3 - Consent 3 to execute step .........................80
4.9.19. ENBL.4 - Consent 4 to execute step .........................80
4.9.21. EVN.R.1 - Event 1 during step ramp ..........................80
4.9.22. EVN.R.2 - Evento 2 durante la rampa del passo .......81
4.9.23. EVN.R.3 - Event 3 during step ramp ..........................81
4.9.24. EVN.R.4 - Event 4 during step ramp ..........................81
4.9.25. EVN.H.1 - Event 1 during step hold ...........................81
4.9.26. EVN.H.2 - Event 2 during step hold ...........................82
4.9.27. EVN.H.3 - Event 3 during step hold ...........................82
4.9.28. EVN.H.4 - Event 4 during step hold ...........................82
4.9.29. GROP.R - Group of parameters assigned to ramp ....82
4.9.30. GROP.H - Group of parameters assigned to hold .....83
4.9.31. MSG.R - Message associated with the ramp ............83
4.9.32. MSG.H - Message associated with the maintenance 83
4.10. Submenu INPUT - Configuring analog inputs ......................84
4.10.1. Functional schema .....................................................85
4.10.2. INP.N - Selecting the analog input .............................85
4.10.3. TYPE - Selecting sensor type ....................................86
4.10.4. SBR.E - Enabling SBR error ......................................89
4.10.5. FUNC - Selecting auxiliary input function ..................90
4.10.6. LIN - Selecting linearization type ..............................91
4.10.7. UNIT - Selecting the displayed unit of measurement 91
4.10.8. FILT - Digital filter .......................................................91
4.10.9. FILT.D - Digital filter on PV display .............................92
4.10.10. DEC.P - Number of decimals displayed ....................92
4.10.11. LO.SCL - Lower limit of scale ....................................93
4.10.12. HI.SCL - Upper limit of scale .....................................93
4.10.13. OF.SCL - Scale offset correction ...............................94
4.10.14. LO.SP - Lower limit for setpoint.................................94
4.10.15. HI.SP - Upper limit for setpoint ..................................94
4.10.16. LO.AL - Lower limit for alarms ...................................94
4.10.17. HI.AL - Upper limit for alarms ....................................94
4.10.18. MSG.LO - Selecting the message assigned to Low ..95
4.10.19. MSG.HI - Selecting the message assigned to HIGH .95
4.10.20. MSG.ER - Selecting the message assigned to Err ....95
4.10.21. MSG.SB - Selecting the message assigned to Sbr ...96
4.11. Submenu IN.CT - Configuration of current inputs ...............97
4.11.1. Functional diagram ....................................................97
4.11.2. IN.CT.N – Configuring current transformers ...............98
4.11.3. FILT - Digital filter .......................................................98
4.11.4. HI.SCL - Maximum scale limit ...................................98
4.11.5. OF.SCL - Scale offset correction ...............................98
4.12. Submenu ALARM - Configuration of alarms ........................99
4.12.1. Functional diagram ..................................................100
4.12.2. ALARM -Selecting the alarm to be configured ........100
4.12.3. REFE - Selecting the alarm reference ......................101
4.12.4. DI.IN - Selecting direct or inverse alarm ..................102
4.12.5. AB.RE - Selecting absolute or deviation alarm ........102
4.12.6. NO.SY - Method for applying hysteresis .................102
4.12.7. PWON.E - Disabling the alarm at power-on ............102
4.12.8. SP1C.E - Disabling alarm on Setpoint1 change ......103
4.12.9. SP2C.E - Disabling alarm on Setpoint2 change ......103
4.12.10. LATCH - Memorizing the alarm ................................103
4.12.11. HYSTE - Hysteresis..................................................103
4.12.12. DELAY - Alarm trip delay .........................................104
4.12.13. MSG.AL - Message associated with tripping of alarm ..
4.12.14. BLK.AL - Flashing of PV display ..............................104
4.13. Submenu AL.HB - Configuring the Heater Break alarm ....105
4.13.1. Functional diagram ..................................................106
4.13.2. LOW.ON - Alarm due to insufficient current draw ...106
4.13.3. HIG.ON - Alarm due to excessive current draw ......106
4.13.4. HI.OFF - Alarm due to excessive current draw ........107
4.13.5. TIME - HB alarm trip delay .......................................107
4.13.7. OUT - Control output associated with HB alarm .....107
4.13.8. LOAD - Selecting type of connected load ...............108
4.13.10. BLK.HB - Flashing of PV display .............................108
4.14. Submenu AL.PW - Configuring power alarm .....................109
4.14.1. Functional diagram ..................................................110
4.14.2. AL.PW - Select the Power alarm to configure .........110
4.14.3. PV.BND – Process variable stability band ................110
4.14.4. PW.BND – Power stability band ...............................110
4.14.5. TIME - Power alarm trip delay .................................111
4.15. Submenu PID - Configuring control parameters ................112
4.15.1. Functional diagram ..................................................113
4.15.2. PID.N – PID Configuration .......................................115
4.15.3. S.TUNE - Enabling Self-Tuning ................................115
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 2
4.15.4. SOFT.S - Enabling Soft-Start ...................................115
4.15.5. SOFT.T - Soft-Start Time .........................................115
4.15.6. A.TUNE - Enabling Auto-Tuning...............................115
4.15.7. AUT.T - Selecting type of Auto-Tuning.....................116
4.15.8. CNTR - Selecting type of control .............................116
4.15.9. DERV.S - Derivative sampling time ..........................116
4.15.10. H.PB - Proportional heating band or hysteresis in ON-
OFF control ..............................................................117
4.15.11. H.IT - Integral heating time ......................................117
4.15.12. H.DT - Derivative heating time .................................117
4.15.13. H.P.HI - Maximum limit of heating power ................117
4.15.14. H.P.LO - Minimum limit of heating power ................117
4.15.15. COOL - Selecting cooling fluid ................................118
4.15.17. C.PB - Proportional cooling band or hysteresis in ON-
OFF control ..............................................................118
4.15.18. C.IT - Integral cooling time......................................118
4.15.19. C.DT - Derivative cooling time .................................118
4.15.20. C.P.HI - Maximum limit of cooling power .................119
4.15.21. C.P.LO - Minimum limit of cooling power ................119
4.15.22. RESET - Manual reset ..............................................119
4.15.23. P.RST - Power reset .................................................119
4.15.24. A.RST - Antireset .....................................................119
4.15.25. FEEDF - Feedforward power ...................................120
4.15.26. DEAD.B - Deadband ................................................120
4.15.27. FAULT - Fault action power .....................................120
4.15.28. GRAD.I - Setpoint gradient in increase ....................120
4.15.29. GRAD.D - Setpoint Gradient in decreasing .............121
4.15.30. UNIT - Unit of measurement of gradient ..................121
4.15.31. GRAD.O - Gradient of control output ......................121
4.15.32. LBA.TM - Tripping delay ..........................................121
4.15.33. LBA.PW - Power delivered when LBA alarm trips ...121
4.16.1. PID.N - Selecting PID for parameters to be configured .
4.16.3. H.PB - Proportional heating band or hysteresis in ON-
OFF control ..............................................................123
4.16.4. H.IT - Integral heating time ......................................123
4.16.5. H.DT - Derivative heating time .................................123
4.16.6. H.P.HI - Maximum heating power ............................124
4.16.7. H.P.LO - Minimum limit of heating power ................124
4.16.8. C.PB - Proportional cooling band or hysteresis in ON-
OFF control ..............................................................124
4.16.9. C.IT - Integral cooling time.......................................124
4.16.10. C.DT - Derivative cooling time .................................124
4.16.11. C.P.HI - Maximum limit of cooling power .................125
4.16.12. C.P.LO - Minimum limit of cooling power ................125
4.17. CAL.EV sub-menu - Enable Calendar events ....................126
4.17.1. CAL.E - Enable calendar ..........................................126
4.17.2. MONDA - Enable Monday .......................................126
4.17.3. TUESD - Enable Tuesday .........................................127
4.17.4. WEDNE - Enable Wednesday ..................................127
4.17.5. THURS - Enable Thursday .......................................127
4.17.6. FRIDA - Enable Friday..............................................127
4.17.7. SATUR - Enable Saturday ........................................127
4.17.8. SUNDA - Enable Sunday .........................................128
4.18. CALE.C sub-menu - Enable Event Calendar .....................129
4.18.1. D.O.E - Event day selection ...................................129
4.18.2. EVE.N - Event number selection ..........................129
4.18.3. HH - Hour of the event .........................................130
4.18.4. MM - Minute of the event.........................................130
4.18.5. SS - Seconds of the event .......................................130
4.18.6. ACt - Seconds of the event ....................................130
4.19. Submenu IN.DIG - Configuring digital inputs .....................131
4.19.1. Functional diagram ..................................................132
4.19.2. I.DIG.N - Selecting the digital input .........................133
4.19.3. STAT - Defining the input state ................................133
4.19.4. F.IN - Selecting the assigned function .....................133
4.19.5. ST.EN.N - Setting assigned consent number ..........135
4.19.8. MSG.IN - Selecting the digital input message .........136
4.20. Submenu OUTPU - Configuring outputs ...........................137
4.20.1. Functional diagram ..................................................138
4.20.2. OUT.N - Selecting the output ...................................139
4.20.3. STAT - Defining the output state ..............................139
4.20.5. TYPE - Defining the type of continuous output .......141
4.20.7. EVNT.N - Setting the event number .........................142
4.20.8. FB.O.N - Setting the Function Block output number.....
4.20.9. IN.DG.N - Setting the digital input number ..............142
4.20.11. SWTCH - Setting the number of switchings for signal ..
4.20.12. FAULT - State of output with broken input ..............143
4.20.13. MSG.OU - Selecting the output message ...............143
4.20.14. LO.C – Low limit for continuous output / HI.C .........143
4.20.15. HI.C – Massimo di scala per uscita continua ...........143
4.20.16. CY.TIM - Cycle time of output ..................................144
4.21.1. Functional diagram ..................................................146
4.21.2. OU.AN.N - Selecting the output ..............................146
4.21.3. STAT - Defining the state of the analog output ........146
4.21.4. TYPE - Defining the type of analog output ..............147
4.21.7. CY.TIM – Output cycle time .....................................148
4.21.8. LO.SCL - Scale minimum ........................................148
4.21.9. HI.SCL - Scale maximum .........................................148
4.22. Submenu VALVE - Configuring valve parameters ..............149
4.22.1. FUNC - Defining valve function ...............................150
4.22.2. KEY.MO - Enabling valve operation with keys .........150
4.22.3. TRAVL - Valve actuator travel time ..........................150
4.22.4. TIM.LO - Minimum power change for valve drive ....150
4.22.5. TIM.HI - Impulse mode setpoint ..............................151
4.22.7. TIM.OF - OFF time in impulse mode........................151
4.22.8. DEAD.B - Deadzone symmetrical to setpoint ..........151
4.23. Submenu EN.FUN - Configuration of enablings ................152
4.23.1. PID2.E – Enabling PID.2 ...........................................153
4.23.2. APP.T – PID control application type .......................153
4.23.3. CAS.R – Cascade control reference .......................153
4.23.4. PROGR - Enabling the setpoint programmer ..........153
4.23.5. RECP.N - Number of parameters recipes ................154
4.23.6. ALRM.N - Number of alarms enabled ......................154
4.23.7. ON.OF - Enabling software shutdown from keys ....154
4.23.8. DIG - Defining type of digital inputs .........................154
4.23.9. T.SAMP - Main and Auxiliary input sample time ......154
4.23.10. FREQZ - Defining power line frequency ..................155
4.23.11. S.PROG - Enabling Simplified Programming mode 155
4.23.12. EN.EDI - Enabling Editor configurator Menu ..........155
4.23.13. WEB.E - Enabling webserver mode .........................155
4.23.14. MAP.T - Map type ....................................................155
4.24. Submenu MODE - Configuring functioning mode .............156
4.24.1. MODE.N - Selecting function mode ........................157
4.24.2. PID.G.N - Number of groups of control parameters 157
4.24.3. MA.AU - Defining transition from Manual to Automatic .
4.24.4. AU.MA - Defining transition from Automatic to Manual .
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 3
4.24.5. LO.RE - Defining transition from remote SP to local SP
4.24.6. MA.P.L - Enabling manual power latch ....................158
4.24.7. MAN.P - Enabling change of manual power value ..158
4.24.8. TMER - Enabling Timer function ..............................158
4.24.9. MUL.SP - Enabling Multiset function .......................159
4.24.10. SP.REM - Enabling the remote setpoint ...................159
4.24.11. SPR.T - Defining absolute or deviation remote setpoint
4.24.12. T.PRO - Setting the programmer base time .............159
4.24.13. ENERG - Enabling the energy counter function.......159
4.25. Submenu TIMER - Configurazione parametri timer ...........160
4.25.1. Functional diagram ..................................................161
4.25.2. TIME.N - Selecting timer ..........................................162
4.25.3. FUNC - Selecting Timer function mode ...................162
4.25.4. ST.ST - Selecting the Start/Stop timer command ...162
4.25.5. S.S.T - Defining the Start/Stop timer command logic 162
4.25.6. RESE - Selecting the Reset timer command ...........163
4.25.7. RES.T - Defining the timer reset command logic.....163
4.25.8. BAND - Band for timer count ...................................163
4.25.9. END - Selecting the function activated at end of count
4.25.10. TIMER - Timer value ................................................164
4.25.11. MSG.TM - Selecting message assigned to end of count
4.26. Submenu ENERG - Configuring energy counter parameters 165
4.26.1. Functional diagram ..................................................166
4.26.2. ENRG.N - Selecting energy counter ........................167
4.26.3. ENERG - Selecting the output for energy calculation 167
4.26.4. V.LINE - Nominal line voltage ...................................167
4.26.5. P.LOAD - Nominal power of load .............................167
4.26.6. E.COST - Nominal cost per kWh .............................167
4.27. Submenu SERIA - Configuring serial communication .......168
4.27.1. CODE - Identification code ......................................168
4.27.2. KBAUD - Selecting communication speed ..............168
4.27.3. PAR - Selecting parity ..............................................169
4.28. ETHER Submenu - Ethernet parameter configuration .......170
4.28.1. TYP.E – Network parameter assignment method ...171
4.28.2. CODE.E – Ethernet identification code ...................171
4.28.3. IP.AD1 – Address IP 1 .............................................171
4.28.4. IP.AD2 – Address IP 2 .............................................171
4.28.5. IP.AD3 – Address IP 3 .............................................171
4.28.6. IP.AD4 – Address IP 4 .............................................172
4.28.7. SUB.M1 – Subnet mask 1 .......................................172
4.28.8. SUB.M2 – Subnet mask 2 .......................................172
4.28.9. SUB.M3 – Subnet mask 3 .......................................172
4.28.10. SUB.M4 – Subnet mask 4 .......................................172
4.28.11. GT.AD1 – Gateway Address 1 .................................173
4.28.12. GT.AD2 – Gateway Address 2 .................................173
4.28.13. GT.AD3 – Gateway Address 3 .................................173
4.28.14. GT.AD4 – Gateway Address 4 .................................173
4.28.15. TIM.NT – Network Time Protocol server update time 173
4.28.16. IP.NT1 – IP address 1 for Network Time Protocol server
4.28.17. IP.NT2 – IP address 2 for Network Time Protocol server
4.28.18. IP.NT3 – IP address 3 for Network Time Protocol server
4.28.19. IP.NT4 – IP address 4 for Network Time Protocol server
4.28.21. GMT.OF – Offset in relation to GMT (Greenwich Mean
Time) ........................................................................175
4.29. Submenu HMI - Display configurationy .............................176
4.29.1. HOM.S - Selecting Home page ...............................176
4.29.2. BAR.E - Enable bargraph display on Home menus .177
4.29.3. LANG - Selecting language for messages ...............177
4.29.4. SPEED - Message scrolling speed ..........................178
4.29.5. BACKL - Backlighting level ......................................178
4.29.6. QUICK - Quick configuration menu .........................178
4.30. Submenu HOME - Configuration of display and keyboard in
Home1 and Home2 ............................................................179
4.30.1. HOME - Selecting Home..........................................180
4.30.2. BUT.1 - Selecting function key 1..............................180
4.30.3. BUT.2 - Selecting function key 2..............................180
4.30.4. BUT.3 - Selecting function key 3..............................180
4.30.5. DS.SP - Selecting the SV display ............................181
4.30.6. DS.F - Selecting the F display .................................182
4.30.7. BAR.1 - Selecting bargraph 1 display ......................183
4.30.8. BAR.2 - Selecting bargraph 2 display ......................184
4.30.9. BAR.3 - Selecting bargraph 3 display ......................185
4.30.10. LED.1 - Enable RUN led flashing .............................186
4.30.11. LED.2 – Enabling MANUAL led
.................................................................................187
4.30.12. LED.3 – Enabling TUNE led .....................................187
4.30.13. LED.4 – Enabling RAMP led .....................................187
4.30.14. LED.5 – Enabling REMOTE led ................................187
4.30.15. LED.6 – Enabling SP1/2 led .....................................187
4.31.1. LNR.4.N - Selection of custom 4-point linearisation 188
4.31.3. X1 - Selection of custom 4-point linearisation mode .....
Ordinate of the first 4-point linearisation point ..189
4.31.5. X2 - Abscissa of second linearisation point .............189
Ordinate of the second 4-point linearisation point ..
4.32. Submenu LINRZ - Configuring custom linearization..........190
4.32.1. LNRZ.N - Selecting custom linearization .................190
4.32.2. STP.xx - Value of step xx .........................................190
4.32.3. MV.STA - Setting mV at start of scale ......................191
4.32.4. MV.FUL - Setting mV at full scale ............................191
4.32.5. MV.50c - Setting mV at temperature of 50 °C..........191
4.33. Submenu US.CAL - Calibrazioni utente .............................192
4.33.1. U.CAL - Selecting the user calibration .....................193
4.33.2. FI.CAL - Resetting the factory calibration ................194
4.33.3. C.LOW - Calibrating minimum current / voltage ......194
4.33.4. C.HIGH - Calibrating maximum current / voltage ....195
4.33.5. RTD.LO - Calibrating minimum resistance value .....195
4.33.6. RTD.HI - Calibrating maximum resistance value .....195
4.33.7. HOUR - Setting hours ..............................................195
4.33.8. MIN - Setting minutes ..............................................195
4.33.9. SEC - Setting seconds .............................................196
4.33.10. DAY - Setting day of week .......................................196
4.33.11. DATE - Setting day ...................................................196
4.33.12. MONT - Setting month .............................................196
4.33.13. YEAR - Setting year .................................................196
4.33.14. C.LO - Setting analog output minimum ...................196
4.33.15. C.HIG - Setting analog output maximum ................197
4.34. PASC0 - Setting level password 0 .....................................197
4.35. PASC1 - Setting level 1 password .....................................197
4.36. PASC2 - Setting level 2 password .....................................197
4.37. FI.CFG - Entering the reset code .......................................197
5. EXAMPLES AND APPLICATION NOTES .....
5.1. Heat/cool control application .............................................198
5.1.1. Connection diagram.................................................198
5.1.2. Quick configuration procedure for model 850–D-R00-
00000-1 ....................................................................199
5.2. Heating control and current (CT) application .....................200
5.2.1. Connection diagram.................................................200
5.2.2. Quick configuration procedure for model 850–D-R00-
00000-1 ....................................................................201
5.3. Ingresso ausiliario...............................................................202
5.4. 4-point input correction ......................................................202
5.4.1. Entering linearisation parameters with the LINRZ menu
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 4
5.5. Current inputs ....................................................................203
5.6. Alarms ................................................................................204
5.6.1. AL1...AL4 Generic alarms ........................................204
5.6.2. HB alarm ..................................................................205
5.6.3. LBA alarm ................................................................206
5.6.4. Power alarm .............................................................206
5.7. Retransmission output .......................................................207
5.8. Switching the software on/off ............................................207
5.8.1. How to switch it off ..................................................207
5.8.2. How to switch it on ..................................................207
5.9. Soft-Start ............................................................................207
5.10. Tuning .................................................................................208
5.10.1. Tuning actions ..........................................................208
5.10.2. Manual tuning ..........................................................208
5.10.3. Self-Tuning ...............................................................208
5.10.4. Auto-Tuning ..............................................................209
5.10.5. Examples of tuning ..................................................209
5.10.6. Heat/Cool tuning with relative gain ..........................210
5.10.7. Cascade controls .....................................................210
5.10.7.1. Tuning two PIDs configured for cascade control ..
5.10.8. Ratio control .............................................................211
5.10.8.1. Activating the ratio controller ..........................211
5.11. Timer ..................................................................................212
5.11.1. Start/Stop Timer ......................................................212
5.11.2. Stabilization timer ....................................................213
5.11.3. Start timer ................................................................213
5.11.4. Variables available for the user configuration menu 213
5.12. Multiset, setpoint gradient .................................................214
5.13. Setpoint programmer .........................................................214
5.13.1. What is a program ....................................................214
5.13.2. Example of setting a program from digital inputs ....215
5.13.3. Programmer functions .............................................215
5.13.4. Programmer behavior ..............................................217
5.13.5. Program examples ...................................................217
5.13.5.1. ONE STEP program ........................................217
5.13.5.2. ONE STEP program ........................................217
5.13.5.3. Program with assigned events ........................218
5.13.5.4. Cyclical program with 3 setpoints and 3 steps 219
5.13.5.5. Program with HBB (hold back band) function .219
5.13.6. Fast simulation of program ......................................219
5.13.7. Controlling the program from the ...................................
.......................................................................................
5.13.8. Programmer Reset mode .........................................219
5.13.9. Restart with step search ..........................................219
5.13.10. Managing a double programmer .............................220
5.13.10.1. Programmers in asynchronous mode .............220
5.13.10.2. Programmers in synchronous mode ...............222
5.13.11. Program times ..........................................................222
5.13.12. SIMPLIFIED PROGRAMMER MODE ......................223
5.14. Managing motorized valves ...............................................224
5.14.1. Valve control parameters .........................................224
5.14.2. Valve control modes .................................................225
5.15. Energy counter ...................................................................228
5.16. Logic Oforations .................................................................229
5.16.1. Function logic blocks ...............................................229
5.16.2. Groups of variables ..................................................229
5.16.3. Programming logic Function Blocks ........................233
5.16.3.1. Configuration page ..........................................233
5.16.3.3. Configuring input variables ..............................235
5.16.3.4. Configuring the output ....................................236
5.16.3.5. Configuring delays ...........................................236
5.16.3.6. Copy of a Logical Function Block ...................236
5.17. Math oforations ..................................................................237
5.17.1. Math function blocks ...............................................237
5.17.2. Groups of variables ..................................................237
5.17.3. Programming Math Function Blocks .......................238
5.17.3.1. Configuration page ..........................................238
5.17.3.3. Configuring input variables ..............................243
5.17.3.4. Configuring the output ....................................243
5.17.3.5. Copy of Math Function Blocks ........................243
5.18. Recipe management ..........................................................244
5.18.1. Defining parameters recipes ....................................244
5.18.2. Setting the active recipe ..........................................244
5.18.3. Saving parameters in active recipe ..........................244
5.18.4. Copying recipes .......................................................244
5.19. Master Modbus Communication........................................245
5.19.1. Master communication blocks .................................245
5.19.2. Programming Master communication blocks ..........246
5.19.2.1. Set-up page .....................................................246
5.19.2.2. Enabling communication block .......................247
5.19.2.3. Selecting scanning speed ..............................247
5.19.2.4. Selecting remote device parameters ...............248
5.19.2.5. Selecting an internal variable to be retransmitted
5.19.3. Setting the Master Modbus serial port ....................249
5.19.4. Modbus object summary page ................................249
5.20. Slave Communication in Modbus TCP ..............................250
5.20.1. Setting network parameters using the tool on a PC .....
5.20.2. Modbus TCP communication diagnostics .............251
Bridge with other devices ......................................252
5.20.4. Synchronising the internal clock via NTP server .....252
5.20.5. Private networks and public networks .....................253
5.20.6. Firewall .....................................................................253
5.20.7. Router ......................................................................253
5.21. Webserver function ...........................................................254
5.22. Instrument menu set-up .....................................................258
5.23. Calendar .............................................................................259
5.23.1. Calendar management via keyboard .......................261
5.24. Customisable Modbus memory map .................................261
5.24.1. Custom map ............................................................262
5.24.2. Rescalable user map in WORD (16bit access) .......262
5.24.5. User map with BIT access .....................................263
5.24.6. Support variables ...................................................263
5.25.1. Password Setting ...................................................265
5.25.3. Opening a password-protected configuration file with
GF_eXpress ............................................................266
6. PROGRAMMING WITH PC ..........................
6.1. Controller-PC connection ...................................................267
6.2. Programming Tool ..............................................................267
6.2.1. GF_eXpress ..............................................................267
6.2.1.1. System requirements ......................................267
7. OPERATOR GUIDE .......................................
7.1. Displays and keys ..............................................................268
7.1.1. Navigating the menus ..............................................268
7.2. Power-on ............................................................................268
7.3. Operation as controller .......................................................268
7.4. Operation as programmer ..................................................269
7.4.1. Activating the programmer ......................................269
7.4.2. Display indication .....................................................269
7.5. Errors during operation ......................................................270
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 5
7.6. Configuration (User menu) .................................................271
8. MAINTENANCE .............................................
8.1. Replacing the controller .....................................................273
8.2. Replacing the gasket..........................................................273
8.3. Cloning the configuration ...................................................273
8.4. Cleaning .............................................................................274
8.5. Troubleshooting ..................................................................274
9. TECHNICAL DATA ........................................
9.1. Controller 850 .....................................................................275
9.2. Controller 1650 ...................................................................280
9.3. Controller 1850 ...................................................................285
9.4. Isolation block diagram 850 ...............................................290
9.5. Isolation block diagram 1650 - 1850..................................291
10. ORDER METHODS .......................................
10.1. Controller 850 .....................................................................293
10.2. Controller 1650 ...................................................................294
10.3. Controller 1850 ...................................................................295
11. ACCESSORIES .............................................
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 6
In the space below, write the order code and other plate data shown on the label attached to the outside of the controller
(see figure).
If you need technical assistance, this information must be given to Gefran Customer Service.
Numero di matricola
Codice prodotto finito
Codice di ordinazione
Tensione di alimentazione
Versione firmware
SN
CODE
TYPE
SUPPLY
VERS.
Make sure that you always have the latest version of this manual, downloadable at no cost from Gefran’s website
(www.gefran.com).
The devices described in this manual must be installed by trained personnel in conformity to current laws and regulations, following all of the instructions in this manual.
Installers and/or maintenance personnel MUST read this manual and scrupulously follow all of the instructions contained herein and in the attachments.
Gefran will not be liable for any damage/harm caused to persons and/or property, or to the device itself, if all of such instructions are not followed.
This manual must always be available to people who use or work on the devices described herein.
Before using the 850-1650-1850 controllers, the operator must be adequately instructed with regard to operating, emergency, diagnostics, and maintenance procedures.
If the 850-1650-1850 controllers are used in applications with risk of harm to persons or damage to machines or materials, auxiliary alarm devices must be installed.
It is advisable to provide the possibility, during normal operation, of checking whether any alarms have tripped.
DO NOT touch the terminals when the device is powered.
In case of supposed malfunction, and before contacting
Gefran Customer Service, we advise you to consult
“Troubleshooting” in the Maintenance section and the F.A.Q.
(Frequently Asked Questions) section on Gefran’s website
(www.gefran.com).
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 7
Pay attention when you see these symbols in the manual.
Indicates very important information on correct product function or on safety, or an instruction that MUST be followed.
Indicates risk for the safety of the installer or user due to the presence of high voltage WWW
Indicates a point to which the reader’s attention is called
Indicates a suggestion that could be useful for better use of the device
Indicates a reference to other technical documents that can be downloaded from www.gefran.com.
4...20 mA
Allarme
ON-OFF
Auto Tune
Cool
Heat/Cool
Heat
Hysteresis
Current used as signal transmitted by certain sensors or in a specific way to control a device, such as a motorized valve.
Output that trips when a certain condition is reached, for example, a defined temperature.
Function that lets you calculate and easily set the P, I and D parameters thanks to the controller’s self-learning.
Control used for cooling.
Control used for both heating and cooling
(requires two control outputs).
Control used for heating.
When, at a precise moment, the value of the controlled quantity depends not only on another reference quantity but also on the values that the controlled quantity had previously, there is hysteresis. Hysteresis can therefore be considered inertia that influences the control system, causing variable delays between the change of the reference quantity and the change of the controlled quantity.
Control procedure based on activation and deactivation of the output. For heating, the output stays on until PV is less than SV by a certain quantity (offset), and then stays off until PV is not greater than SV by the same quantity (or different quantity, depending on controller configuration). For cooling, the output stays on until PV > SV - offset and stays off until PV < SV + offset. This type of control is not intelligent, does not consider noise, and is not very accurate, but ensures a limited number of switchings of the output.
Overshoot
PID
Pt100
PV
Solid state relay
Sensor
Setpoint
Situation in which PV exceeds SV because the control action stopped too late. The ON
OFF controls have an overshoot greater than the PID controls.
Acronym for Proportional-Integration-Differentiation, indicating a system with negative feedback, i.e., a device that acquires a value from a process in input, compares it to a reference value, and uses the difference (error) to calculate the value of the controller output variable, which is the variable that controls the process. The output is controlled based on the current value of the error (proportional action), on a set of previous error values (integral action), and on the speed of change of the error value
(derivative action).
A commonly used temperature measurement device. At 0°C its resistance is 100 ohm, and at room temperature about 106 ohm. The Pt100 can be tested for galvanic continuity and normal extension cables can be used.
Acronym for Process Value, i.e., the value that the process variable (temperature, valve opening, etc.) has at that moment.
Also known as SSR, this is a relay designed specifically for frequent switching. It has no moving parts or mechanical contacts, but may still break or short circuit. This type of relay is often used in temperature control systems such as PID.
Device that translates physical phenomena (such as change in resistance based on temperature) into electrical signals that can be acquired and processed by the controller.
Set value (see SV).
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 8
SV Acronym for Set Value, i.e., the value that the process variable (temperature, valve opening, etc.) has to reach and maintain.
Thermocouple Sensor that transmits an electrical signal of a few millivolts. Cannot be tested for galvanic continuity. It needs specially designed extension cable.
Undershoot Situation in which PV does not reach SV because the control action stopped too soon. The ON OFF controls have an undershoot greater than the PID controls.
Controll output
Output that controls the process and is switched on and off as needed.
Although all of the information in this manual has been carefully checked, Gefran S.p.A. assumes no liability regarding the presence of any errors or regarding damage to property and/or harm to individuals due to any improper use of this manual.
Gefran S.p.A. also reserves the right to change the contents and form of this manual, as well as the characteristics of the devices described herein, at any time and without notice
The technical data and performance levels specified in this manual are to be considered a guide for the user in order to determine the device’s suitability for a defined use, and do not constitute a guarantee. They may be the result of test conditions at Gefran S.p.A., and the user must compare them to his/her real application requirements.
Under no circumstances will Gefran S.p.A. be liable for any damage to property and/or harm to individuals due to tampering, incorrect or improper use, or use not conforming to the characteristics of the controller and to the instructions contained in this manual.
This manual and its attachments may be freely reproduced provided its contents are not changed in any way and provided every copy includes the above Disclaimer and the statement of ownership of Gefran S.p.A..
Gefran and GF_eXpress are registered trademarks of Gefran
S.p.A.
This manual may make reference to or reproduce trademarks and logos of third parties. Gefran S.p.A. acknowledges such parties’ ownership of these trademarks and logos.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 9
850 1650 1850
Operator Interface
Large backlit LCD screen with high visibility and high contrast. Two to three rows on the screen display variables, setpoints and alphanumerical information, scrolling up to
75 configurable messages of 32 characters each in three different languages. The selection of languages and easily comprehensible scrolling texts regarding diagnostics, alarms, and process statuses ensure that the controllers speak the users’ language.
dback when a button is pressed and guide the user by indicating the appropriate operations. Factory settings can be restored if necessary, either on the keyboard or using the
GF_eXpress software tool. Diagnostics, preventive maintenance and consumption monitoring.
Exhaustive diagnostics for breakage or incorrect connection of probes, total or partial load breakdown, off-scale variables and anomalies in the control ring. Counters for the number of relay and comparator switches, with alarm thresholds, permit scheduling of preventive maintenance to replace worn actuators. Two internal energy counters with alarms for anomalous variations count total energy consumption in kWh and its cost, permitting ongoing energy monitoring.
Control
One or two PID control loops with two universal inputs configurable for thermocouples, thermoresistances and linear inputs. They may be used independently to manage two different forms of control or they may interact with cascade or ratio control. An optional third linear analogue input may be used to acquire signals such as remote setpoints or retroactive valve feedback, while also supplying the necessary potentiometer power supply.
If the appropriate four-point calibration is performed in the field, the controller meets the requirements of standard AM-
S2750E and may be used in applications requiring the NA-
DCAP directive.
Diagnostics, preventive maintenance and consumption monitoring.
Exhaustive diagnostics in the event of breakage or incorrect connection of probes, total or partial breakage of the load, off-scale variables and anomalies in the adjustment ring.
Relay switch counters and comparators with alarm signals permit planning of preventive maintenance work for replacement of worn actuators. Two internal energy counters with alarms for signalling anomalous variations totalise energy consumption in kWh and its cost, permitting uninterrupted energy monitoring.
Easy Configuration
Set-up wizard for manual-free programming with only a few indispensable parameters, commented by online help messages. Opportunity to create your own password-protected
“User menu” containing only the parameters required for the application.
Advanced set-up and work recipe creation can be achieved via PC and GF_eXpress software, even without powering the controllers. GF_eXpress may be used to define, for each menu and parameter, which values will be shown to the controller to ensure easy use in the field.
Controllers can still be configured directly in the field using only four keys, associated with led lights that provide fee-
Functional application blocks
Thirty-two logical AND, OR, Flip-Flop, Comparator, Counter and Timer Function Blocks permit creation of customised logical sequences for complete, flexible machine control. Eight mathematical Function Blocks permit processing of analogue variables and calculation of differences, sums, multiplication and division, averages, top and bottom values, square root calculation and logarithms. Function Blocks also permit management of 8+8 additional inputs/outputs available for models 1850 ¼ DIN.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 10
Tuning
Advanced tuning algorithms refined over time guarantee stable, accurate control even with critical or very rapid thermal systems, automatically activated when necessary.
Timers
Three different types of timer permitting waiting times to be set before activating control, maintenance times on setpoint values, and scheduled set changes over time.
as power controllers or other controllers
-RJ45 Ethernet Modbus TCP port, which can also be used as a bridge toward Modbus RTU slave devices.
An Ethernet connection may be used to access the Web Server service offering a number of monitoring, diagnostics and configuration pages, accessible via local or remote networks with an ordinary browser and two password levels.
General features
Performance controllers are entirely configurable using the software and keyboard, without accessing their internal electronics, but the controller can be replaced at any time by simply pulling it out from the front, with no further operations, maintaining IP65 protection for the front.
Setpoint programmers
Up to 192 steps are available for applications with setpoint profiles, each with a ramp and maintenance time, which can freely be grouped into up to 16 programmes. Each segment may be associated with enabling inputs, event outputs, and configurable messages to be displayed. In models 1850, the display also permanently shows the step number and programme number underway. Double programmer mode, with a synchronous or asynchronise timing base, permits activation of two different setpoint profiles which may be independent of one another and may be associated with two control loops. The clock/weekly calendar function with a real-time clock and buffer battery facilitate starting and stopping of various programmes in default automatic mode.
Simplified keyboard configuration permits creation and editing of simple programmes with only three parameters per step, with no need for a PC, cables, or configuration software, while the extended configuration with Gf_ eXpress also offers graphic functions for displaying the profiles created.
Valve positioner
Models are available for motorised valve control, with or without position feedback. The position of floating valves is calculated; for valves with potentiomenters, auxiliary inputs can be used to control valve position and display it in numerical form or in one of 3 configurable bar graphs (for models
1650/1850)
Connectivity
850/1650/1850 “Performance” controllers have three different levels of communication with automation and supervision devices:
-RS485 Modbus RTU slave serial communication for interface with Master Modbus
-RS485 Modbus RTU master serial communication for reading/writing information toward Modbus slave devices such
Main features
• Models 1/16 DIN ( 850 ); 1/8 DIN ( 1650 ); ¼ DIN ( 1850 )
• Accuracy 0.1%, AMS2750E compliance
• Sampling time 60ms
• Operator interface with large LCD display and three configurable bar graphs (mod. 1650/1850)
• Diagnostic scroll messages, configurable, in the selected language
• Easy setup, wizard, copy/paste parameters even without power
• Preventive maintenance, with energy counters (kWh) and load switching
• 32 logical application blocks
• 8 mathematical application blocks
• Timers, setpoint programmers and algorithms to control motorised valves
• Advanced control parameter tuning
• Differentiated password levels
• 2 universal inputs configurable for thermocouples, thermoresistances, linear inputs
• 3rd linear input for remote setpoint and potentiometer feedback (mod. 1650/1850)
• 2 PID control loops
• • 2 setpoint programmers (192 steps in 16 programs, or
12 programs with 16 fixed steps each)
• Relay, logic, isolated analogue outputs
• Up to two TA inputs for interrupted load diagnostics
• Modbus RTU Master and Slave communication
• Ethernet Modbus TCP and Modbus bridge communication
• Weekly clock\calendar with RTC
• Extractable from the front for immediate replacement
Display dimensions
PV display
SV display
Display F
Bargraph PV/SP
Configurable Bargraph
Keys
Max. digital inputs
Power dissipation
Dimensions
Weight n/a = not available n/a n/a n/a
4
3
850
35 × 30 mm
4 digit, 7 seg., H = 17 mm
37 × 68 mm
1650
4 digit, 7 seg., H = 17 mm
5 digit, 14 seg., H = 7,5 mm 4 digit, 7 seg., H = 14 mm
5 digit, 14 seg., H = 9 mm dual, 11 segments
11 segments
4
5
10 W
48 × 48 mm (1/16 DIN)
0,16 kg
10 W
48 × 96 mm (1/8 DIN)
0,24 kg
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 11
1850
83 × 68 mm
4 digit, 7 seg., H = 23 mm
4 digit, 7 seg., H = 11 mm
7 digit, 14 seg., H = 9 mm dual, 11 segments
11 segments
6
5 + 8
12 W
96 × 96 mm (1/4 DIN)
0,35 kg
Dimensions 48 × 48 × 100 mm (1/16 DIN)
Main features
• Operator interface with large LCD Display
• Scrolling diagnostics messages, configurable, in the selected language
• Easy, guided configuration, copy/paste parameters even with power off
• Preventive maintenance with energy counters (kWh) and load switching
• 32 function block applications
• 8 Math application blocks
• Timer, setpoint and algorithm programmer for controlling motorized valves
• Advanced tuning of control parameters
• Different password levels
• 2 configurable universal inputs for Thermocouples, resistance
Thermometers, Linear inputs
• 2 PID control loops
• 2 setpoint programmers (192 steps in 16 programs, or 12 programs with 16 fixed steps each)
• Relay, logic, isolated analog outputs
• Up to two TA inputs for interrupted load diagnostics
• RS485 serial communication in Modbus RTU slave
• RS485 serial communication in Modbus RTU master for reading/writing information to Modbus slave devices
• Ethernet Modbus TCP communication in Slave mode
• Web server for browser access to web pages residing in the device, for monitoring and setting parameters
• Bridge function for creation of Modbus RTU 485 sub-network
• Weekly clock\calendar with RTC
• Removable faceplate for immediate replacement
• Accuracy 0,1%, sampling time 60 ms
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 12
1
2
3
4 5 6
8
7
9
1 Unit of measurement or number of program running or number of loop displayed.
2 State of outputs OUT1, OU2, OUT3, OUT4.
3 Controller function states::
● RUN = functioning (flashing = normal functioning, steady on = program running);
● _/- = rsetpoint ramp active;
● TUN = PID parameters tuning active;
● MAN = manual/automatic (off = automatic control, on = manual control);
● REM = remote setpoint enabled;
● SP1/2 = setpoint active (off = setpoint 1, on = setpoint 2).
4 Work mode key (manual/automatic) in standard mode. A function can be assigned via parameter but1. The key is active only when the display shows the process variable (HOME).
5 TUp/down keys: raise/lower the value of the parameter displayed on the SV or PV display.
6 F key: lets you navigate among controller menus and parameters.
Confirms the parameter value and selects the next parameter.
7 Key pressed signals.
8 SV display: setpoint value, description of parameters, diagnostics and alarm messages. Configurable with parameter dS.SP (default
= setpoint).
9 PV display: process variable, parameter values.
Figure 1 - Description of 850 display and keys
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 13
Figure 2 - 850 drilling dimensions and templates
Note : the electronic components of a 850 instrument made after January 2020 cannot be inserted in the casing of an instrument made prior to this date. If it should be necessary to replace an 850 controller manufactured before January
2020 with a similar controller manufactured after this date, the casing anchored to the panel must also be replaced.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 14
Dimensions 48 × 96 × 80 mm (1/8 DIN)
Main features
• Operator interface with large LCD Display and three configurable bargraphs
• Scrolling diagnostics messages, configurable, in the selected language
• Easy, guided configuration, copy/paste parameters even withe power off
• Preventive maintenance with energy counters (kWh) and load switching
• 32 function block applications
• 8 Math application blocks
• Timer, setpoint and algorithm programmer for controlling motorized valves
• Advanced tuning of control parameters
• Different password levels
• 2 configurable universal inputs for Thermocouples, Resistance thermometers, Linear inputs
• 1 ingresso analogico lineare configurabile per funzioni ausiliarie
• 2 PID control loops
• 2 Setpoint programmers (128 steps in 16 programs
• Relay, logic, isolated analog outputs
• Up to two TA inputs for interrupted load diagnostics
• RS485 serial communication in Modbus RTU slave
• • RS485 serial communication in Modbus RTU master for reading/writing information to Modbus slave devices
• Ethernet Modbus TCP communication in Slave mode
• Web server for browser access to web pages residing in the devvice, for monitoring and setting parameters
• Bridge function for creation of Modbus RTU 485 sub-network
• Weekly clock\calendar with RTC
• Removable faceplate for immediate replacement
• Accuracy 0,1%, sampling time 60 ms
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 15
1
2
3
12
11
10
9
8
7
4 5 6
Figure 3 - Description of 1650 display and keys
1 Unit of measurement or number of program running or number of loop displayed.
2 State of outputs OUT1, OU2, OUT3, OUT4
3 Controller function states:
● RUN = functioning (flashing = normal functioning, steady
on = program running);
● _/- = setpoint ramp active;
● TUN = PID parameters tuning active;
● MAN = manual/automatic (off = automatic control,
on = manual control);
● REM = remote setpoint enabled;
● SP1/2 = setpoint active (off = setpoint 1, on = setpoint 2).
4 Work mode key (manual/automatic) in standard mode.
A function can be assigned via parameter but1.
The key is active only when the display shows the process variable (HOME).
5 Up/down keys: raise/lower the value of the parameter displayed on the SV or PV display.
6 F key: lets you navigate among controller menus and parameters. Confirms the parameter value and selects the next parameter.
7 Key pressed signals.
8 Displays percentage of power or current, configurable with parameter bAr.3.
9 Display of percentage of process variable and of setpoint.
10 F display: parameters, diagnostics and alarm messages.
Configurable with parameter dS.F (default = % control power).
11 SVdisplay: parameter values. Configurable with parameter dS.SP (default = setpoint).
12 PV display: process variable.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 16
Figure 4 - 1650 drilling dimensions and templates
Note : the electronic components of a 1650 instrument made after January 2020 cannot be inserted in the casing of an instrument made prior to this date. If it should be necessary to replace an 1650 controller manufactured before January
2020 with a similar controller manufactured after this date, the casing anchored to the panel must also be replaced.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 17
Dimensions 96 × 96 × 80 mm (1/4 DIN)
Main features
• Operator interface with large LCD Display and three configurable bargraphs
• Scrolling diagnostics messages, configurable, in the selected language
• Easy, guided configuration, copy/paste parameters even with power off
• Preventive maintenance with energy counters (kWh) and load switching
• 32 function block applications
• 8 Math application blocks
• Timer, setpoint and algorithm programmer for controlling motorized valves
• Advanced tuning of control parameters
• Different password levels
• 2 configurable universal inputs for Thermocouples, Resistance
Thermometers, Linear inputs
• 1 linear analogue input configurable for auxiliary functions
• 2 PID control loops
• 2 setpoint programmers (192 steps in 16 programs, or 12 programs with 16 fixed steps each)
• Relay, logic, isolated analog outputs
• Up to two TA inputs for interrupted load diagnostics
• RS485 serial communication in Modbus RTU slave
• RS485 serial communication in Modbus RTU master for reading/ writing information to Modbus slave devices• Ethernet Modbus
TCP communication in Slave mode
• Web server for browser access to web pages residing in the device, for monitoring and setting parameters
• Bridge function for creation of Modbus RTU 485 sub-network
• Weekly clock\calendar with RTC
• Removable faceplate for immediate replacement
• Accuracy 0,1%, sampling time 60 ms
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 18
1
2
3
4
5 6 7 8
Figure 5 - Description of 1850 display and keys
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
1 Unit of measurement or number of program running or number of loop displayed.
2 State of outputs OUT1, OU2, OUT3, OUT4.
3 Displays program number, step number, unit of measurement
(%, A, kW, kWh).
4 Controller function states:
● RUN = functioning (flashing = normal functioning, steady
on = program running);
● _/- = setpoint ramp active;
● TUN = PID parameters tuning active;
● MAN = manual/automatic (off=automatic control, on = manual control);
● REM = remote setpoint enabled;
● SP1/2 = setpoint active (off = setpoint 1, on = setpoint 2).
5 Work mode key (manual/automatic) in standard mode. A function can be assigned via parameter but1. The key is active only when the display shows the process variable.
6 Key function configurable with parameters but2 and but3. The keys are active only when the display shows the process variable (HOME).
7 Up/down keys: raise/lower the value of the parameter displayed on the SV or PV display.
8 F key: lets you navigate among controller menus and parameters.
Confirms the parameter value and selects the next parameter.
9 Key pressed signals.
10 Displays percentage of power or current, configurable with parameter bAr3.
11 Display of percentage of process variable and of setpoint
12 F display: parameters, diagnostics and alarm messages.
Configurable with parameter dS.F (default = % control power).
13 SV display: parameter values. Configurable with parameter dS.SP
(default = setpoint).
14 PV display = Process variable
15 Display of inputs/outputs state (only with 8 INS/OUTS and/or 8 relays).
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 19
Figure 6 - 1850 drilling dimensions and templates
Note : the electronic components of a 1850 instrument made after January 2020 cannot be inserted in the casing of an instrument made prior to this date. If it should be necessary to replace an 1850 controller manufactured before January
2020 with a similar controller manufactured after this date, the casing anchored to the panel must also be replaced.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 20
Attention!
The devices described in this manual must be installed by trained personnel in conformity to current laws and regulations, following all of the instructions in this manual.
Before installing, check that the controller is in perfect condition and was not damaged in shipment. Make sure that the package contains all of the accessories listed on the accompanying document, especially the gasket and the fastening brackets.
Check that the order code matches the configuration required for the intended application (supply voltage, number and type of inputs and outputs). See Chapter 10 - Ordering code - to check the configuration corresponding to each order code.
Attention!
If even one of the requirements mentioned above (trained technician in, device in perfect condition, correct configuration) is not satisfied, interrupt the installation and contact your Gefran dealer or Gefran
Customer Service.
The controller is designed for permanent indoor installation.
It must be mounted on electrical panels or on panels controlling machines or production process plants that are able to protect the exposed terminals on the rear of the controller.
Attention! DO NOT install the controller in a potentially inflammable or explosive atmosphere.
It can be connected to elements that work in such atmospheres only by means of appropriate interfaces that conform to safety regulations in force in the country of installation.
Attention!
the controller is used in applications with risk of harm/damage to persons/property, it MUST be connected to dedicated alarm devices.
It is advisable to provide the possibility, during normal functioning of the controller and of the system or equipment that it controls, of checking whether any alarms have tripped.
For correct installation, respect the dimensions of each hole and the distance between adjacent holes shown in the figures
for each model (Figure 2 - 850 drilling dimensions and tem-
plates 14, Figure 4 - 1650 drilling dimensions and tem-
plates 17, Figure 6 - 1850 drilling dimensions and templates 20).
Attention!
•
The support on which the operator panel is mounted must:
• be sufficiently rigid and robust to support the device without bending during use; be from 1 to 4 mm thick to allow the device to be fastened with the supplied bracket.
The controller must be installed in a location that is not subject to sudden temperature changes or to freezing or condensation, and no corrosive gases must be present.
The controller can work in Pollution Degree 2 environments
(presence of non-conductive dust, only temporarily conductive due to possible condensation).
Do not allow scrap or metal particles from machining or condensation products to reach the device.
The controller is sensitive to strong electromagnetic fields.
Do not position it near radio devices or other equipment that may generate electromagnetic fields, such as power contactors, relays, thyristor power units (especially phase angle), motors, solenoids, transformers, high-frequency welders, etc.
The front of the controller has an IP65 protection index, so the device can be installed without problems in rooms that are very dusty or subject to splashing water provided:
• the housing in which the device is inserted is dust-tight and watertight;
• the support on which the device is installed is perfectly smooth and without undulations on the front;
• the hole on the support scrupulously respects the specified drilling dimensions;
• the device is fully tightened to the support to ensure that the gasket inserted between the device and the panel is watertight
Attention! If not adequately protected, the controller has an IP20 protection index (rear container and terminal board.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 21
The controller can support vibrations from 10 to 150 Hz,
20 m/s2 (2 g),in all directions (X, Y and Z).
If the device is mounted on a support that exceeds these limits, it is advisable to provide a suspension system to reduce vibrations.
The temperature in the housing containing the controller must NEVER exceed 55°C.
NEVER block the ventilation slits.
Advice.
The lower the temperature in which the device works, the longer the life of its electronic components.
Attention!
Forced cooling (for example, with a fan) of the rear of the controller may cause measurement errors.
The controller must be positioned so that the display is not subject to direct sunlight or to very strong sources of light.
If necessary, filter direct light, for example, with a reflective screen.
The controller must be tilted between 30° and 120°, as shown in the figure.
The following figures show how to fasten the three controller models.
Figure 8 - Fastening the 850
Controllers not in scale 120 °
Figure 9 - Fastening the 1650
30 °
Figure 7 - Positioning the controller
1. Insert the die-cut rubber gasket between the controller and the panel. The gasket (supplied) is indispensable for ensuring the declared protection index of the faceplate.
2. Insert the device into the hole previously made on the panel.
3. Place the supplied bracket(s) onto the rear of the controller.
4. Tighten the screws to fasten the device to the panel.
The tightening torque must be between 0,3 and 0,4 N m
Figure 10 - Fastening the 1850
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 22
Attention! Failure to follow the instructions in this section may cause problems in electrical safety and electromagnetic compatibility, in addition to voiding the warranty.
1. Connected external circuits must have double isolation.
2. In case of shielded cables, the shield must be grounded at a single point, possibly near the controller.
3. Input cables must be physically separated from power cables, output cables, and power connections.
4. Do not connect unused terminals.
5. Tighten the terminals without forcing. Loose terminals may cause sparks and fires.
The recommended tightening torque is 0.5 Nm.
6. When making connections, respect polarity where required.
7. Do not bend or twist the cables beyond the limits specified by the manufacturers.
8. After connecting the cables, apply the transparent cover to protect the terminals.
The terminal teeth limit and define the correct direction for applying the cover.
Cable / terminal
Rigid cable
Twisted
Tag terminal
(to be crimped)
Fork terminal
(to be crimped)
Ring terminal
(to be crimped)
Cable / terminal section
0,8...2,5 mm 2
(18...14 AWG)
0,8...2,5 mm 2
(18...14 AWG)
0,25...2,5 mm 2
(23...14 AWG)
Terminal size
5,8 mm max
5,8 mm max
Attention!
Anchor the cables, at least in pairs, so that mechanical stresses do not discharge on the terminal connections.
For electromagnetic conformity, the strictest general rules have been applied, using the following test configuration:
Connection
Power supply
Relay
Serial port
Thermocouple
Cable section
1 mm 2
1 mm 2
0,35 mm 2
0,8 mm 2
Length
1 m
3,5 m
3,5 m
5 m compensated
3 m
3,5 m
4 m
Attention!
Before powering the controller, make sure that the supply voltage matches the one shown on the controller data plate.
Because the controller does not have a switch, a bipolar switch with fuse must be inserted upline. The switch, or isolator, must be positioned in the immediate vicinity of the device and must be easily reached by the operator.
A single switch can control multiple controllers.
Potentiometer, linear,
“PT100” resistance thermometer
Analog retransmission output
Digital input/outputs
Ethernet port
1 mm 2
1 mm 2
1 mm 2
UTP 4x2xAWG24 cat 6
3,5 m
The controller must be powered by a line separated from the one used for electromechanical power devices (relays, contactors, solenoids, etc).
It is advisable to install a ferrite core on the power line, as close as possible to the device, to limit the controller’s susceptibility to electromagnetic noise.
Always use cables appropriate for the voltage and current limits specified in the Technical Characteristics.
If the controller’s power line is heavily disturbed by the switching of thyristor power units or by motors, it is advisable to use an isolation transformer only for the controller, grounding the shield.
Use copper cables with 60/75°C insulation.
Use twisted and shielded cables for non-power connections.
Use appropriate line filters in the vicinity of high-frequency generators or arc welders.
Use a voltage stabilizer if there are wide shifts in line voltage.
The controller’s terminal board has screw terminals (M3) that accept stripped cables and crimped terminals for a tightening torque of 0.5 N m.
Two ring or crimped fork terminals can be connected on each terminal
The following table shows the characteristics of the cables and terminals that can be used.
20...27 VAC/VDC models must be powered by a class II or low-voltage limited-energy source.
The power supply must use a line separated from the one used for electromechanical power devices, and low-voltage power cables must run along a path separated from the system or machine power cables.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 23
Attention!
Make sure the ground connection is efficient. Absent or inefficient grounding can make the device unstable due to excessive noise.
Specifically, check that:
• voltage between mass and ground is < 1 V;
• resistance is < 6 Ω
The controller’s input and output lines must be separated from the power line.
To prevent noise, the controller’s input and output cables must be kept away from the power cables (high voltages or high currents).
The input and output cables and the power cables must not be placed parallel to one another.
Use shielded cables or separate cable trays.
To connect the output to an inductive load (relay, contactor, electrovalve, motor, fan, solenoid, etc.) that works in AC, mount a snubber, i.e., an RC group (resistor and condenser in series) placed parallel to the load. Installing this filter lengthens the life of the relays.
NOTE: All condensers must conform to VDE (class X2) standards and support voltage ≥ 220 VAC.
The power of the resistor must be ≥ 2 W.
C
Out L
R
~
Figure 11 - Snubber connection diagram (AC)
For inductive loads that work in DC, mount a 1N4007 diode parallel to the coil.
Attention! If the controller is connected to devices that are NOT electrically isolated (such as thermocouples), ground with a specific conductor to prevent grounding directly through the machine structure.
Out D L
+ -
Figure 12 - Snubber connection diagram (DC)
The filters must be connected as close as possible to the controller.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 24
NO
OUT 2
(AL1)
C
NO
OUT 3
(AL2)
C
+
-
+
-
~
~
OUT 2
OUT 3
OUT 4
COM
~
PWR
~
21
22
23
24
19
20
16
15
14
13
18
17
9
10
11
12
7
8
4
3
2
1
6
5
NO
+
-
C
+
-
-
+
A G
B (Data+)
A (Data-)
OUT 1
T T
+
5 V, 10 V
+
VT1
+
60 mV, 1 V, 20 mA
-
Main input
Without Ethernet communication option
B (Data +)
COM
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
A (Data -)
16
15
18
17
14
13
9
10
7
8
11
12
+
-
-
+
A1
OUT 4
(AL3 / HB)
CT1
CT2
CT1 = current transformer
CT2 = second current transformer for 2-phase /3-phase load
-
+
T T
60mV
+
+
VP
+
VT2
+
1 V, 5 V, 10 V, 20 mA
-
Auxiliary input for models with the auxiliary input option
= 1
-
= 2 o 3
-
With Ethernet communication option
RS485 Bridge
B (Data +)
A (Data -)
COM
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
16
15
18
17
14
13
9
10
7
8
11
12
CT1 = current transformer
CT2 = second current transformer for 2-phase /3-phase load
+
OUT 4
(AL3 / HB)
CT1
CT2
LEGEND
~
PWR
~
Power supply
+
Linear input voltage / current
-
Input for current transformer
-
+
T
NO
Isolated digital inputs
Thermocouple input
~
~
C
+
-
T
Input
PT100
JPT100
2 / 3 wires
+
-
Relay output
Long-life solid state relay output
Logic output
Isolated logic output
Isolated analog output
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 25
B (Data +)
A (Data -)
RS485 serial line
VT
-
+
+
VP
-
Supply transmitter
Supply potentiometer
3
2
5
4
1
Power supply
6
3
2
5
4
1
4
3
2
1
TC Inputs
5
4
3
2
1
+
-
5
4
22
23
24
Standard: 100...240 VAC/VDC ± 10%
50/60 Hz, max 10 W
Optional:: 20...27 VAC/VDC ± 10%
50/60 Hz, max 10 W
(*) ground connection for option
20...27VAC/DC only
Linear input (V)
65
2
1
4
3
+
-
Linear input in direct voltage
0...5 V / 0...10 V Ri > 400kΩ
Available thermocouples::
J,K,R,S,T,C,D, B, E, L, L-GOST, U, G,
N, Pt20Rh-Pt40Rh
ITS90 or custom linearization
Respect polarity
For extensions, use a compensated cable suitable for the type of TC used
Transmitter supply (VT1)
5
4
3
+
2
1
VT1
-
24 VDC ±10%, max 30 mA
Characteristics of outputs are defined when the controller is ordered.
Output Out 1 - relay 5 A
T
Attention : with this type of connection the line resistance can introduce measurement error, we recommend that you use wires of adequate.
T
Attention : with this type of connection the line resistance can introduce measurement error, we recommend that you use wires of adequate screen.
The resistance of the three wires must be equal, the line resistance must be less than 20 ohm.
4
3
6
5
2
NO
C
Output Out 1 - logic
+V
6
5
4
Relay 250 VAC, 5 A
+
-
L
Logic 24 V ±10%
(min 10 V a 20 mA)
+
-
Linear input voltage
0...60 mV
0...1 V Ri > 100 MΩ
Linear input in direct current
0/4...20mA, Ri = 50 Ω.
4
3
6
5
2
Output Out 1 - analogue
+
-
0...10 V, max 20 mA Rout > 500 Ω
0...20 mA / 4...20 mA Rout < 500 Ω
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 26
OUT1 - Master Modbus output [with optional Output 1 (B) = G]
6
5
4
3
2
B (Data +)
A (Data -)
Output Out 2 - relay 5 A
Master Modbus RS485
NO
C
19
20
21
22
23
24
Output Out 2 - logic
+V
L
-
+
19
20
21
22
Relay 250 VAC, 5 A
Logic 24 V ±10%
(min 10 V a 20 mA9)
Output Out 2 - logic isolated
~ / =
Fuse
L
19
20
21
22
Logic 30 V AC/DC max max 100 mA
Isolated 1500 V
Output Out 3 - logic isolated
~ / =
Fuse
L
19
20
21
22
Logic 30 V AC/DC max max 100 mA
Isolated 1500 V
Output Out 3 - Triac
Output Out 2, Out 3, Out 4 - relay group 5 A
NO 2
NO 3
NO 4
C
19
20
21
22
23
24
Digital inputs
Relay 250 VAC, 5 A
COM
IN3
IN2
IN1
16
15
14
13
Triac 75...240 VAC max 1 A
Isolated 3 kV
Digital inputs voltage-free contact
Output Out 3 - logic
L
-
+
19
20
21
22
+V
Logic 24 V ±10%
(min 10 V a 20 mA)
Digital inputs
COM
IN3
IN2
IN1
16
15
14
13
NPN digital input
24 V, 4,5 mA
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 27
Digital inputs
GND
COM
IN3
IN2
IN1
16
15
14
13
PNP digital inputs
+12/24 V max 3,6 mA
Serial line [with (M) = M0 communication option]
B (Data +)
A (Data -)
18
17
Serial line
RS485 2-wires
PT100/JPT100 Auxiliary input - 2-wires connection
10
11
5
4
12
T
Attention : with this type of connection the line resistance can introduce measurement error,we recommend that you use wires of adequate screen. The resistance of the three wires must be equal, the line resistance must be less than 20 ohm.
4
10
6
[with option (H-I) = 02, 03]
5
+ linear input voltage
0...1 V Ri > 400 KΩ
0...5 V / 0...10 V Ri > 400 KΩ
11
12
-
Linear input in direct current
0/4...20 mA Ri = 50 KΩ
CT inputs [option]
CT1
CT2
10
11
12
5
4
+
VP = 1 VDC ±1%, max 30 mA
[with option (H-I) = 02]
VP o VT2
-
VT2 = 24 VDC ±10%, max 30 mA
[with option (H-I) = 03]
10
11
12
~
~
~
Current transformer
50 mA, 10 Ω, 50/0 Hz second current transformer for 2-phase /3-phase load
with options (H-I) = 01
5
4
10
11
12
+
-
Available thermocouples::
J,K,R,S,T,C,D, B, E, L, L-GOST, U, G,
N, Pt20Rh-Pt40Rh
ITS90 or custom linearization
Respect polarity
For extensions, use a compensated cable.
Output Out 4 - logic
+V
7
8
9
-
+
Output A1 - analogue
L
Logic 24 V ±10%
(min 10 V a 20 mA)
PT100/JPT100 Auxiliary input - 2-wires connection
6
5
0... 60 mV Ri > 100 MΩ
4
10
11
12
T
Attention : with this type of connection the line resistance can introduce measurement error, we recommend that you use wires of adequate screen
9
3
7
8
2
+
-
0...10 V, max 20 mA Rout > 500 Ω
0...20 mA / 4...20 mA Rout < 500 Ω
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 28
with option OUT1
Master Modbus (B) = G
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
26
25
28
27
OUT 4
~
~
IN 5
IN 4
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
COM
Option
Modbus RTU
(M) = M0 communication or ME
B (Data +)
A (Data -)
C
NO
43
44
41
42
39
40
37
38
47
48
45
46
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
26
25
28
27
Current transformer
CT1 second current transformer for 2-phase /3-phase load
CT2
Option CT (H) = 2
OUT A2
-
+
5V, 10V, 20mA,
+
VP2
+
1V, 1.2V, 2.4V, high impedance
-
Optional third input AUX2 (H) = 3
+
OUT A1
-
+
-
T T
+
60 mV
+
+
5 V, 10 V
+
VP1 VT2
+
1 V, 20 mA
-
Auxiliary input
for model with option auxiliary input (Aux1)
= 1 = 2 o 3
-
6
5
8
7
10
9
12
11
2
1
4
3
~
PWR
~
C
NO
C
NO
C
NO
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
C
-
VT
-
+
OUT 3
OUT 2
OUT 1
+
5 V, 10 V
T T
+
60 mV, 1 V, 20 mA
-
Main input (Main)
With Ethernet communication option(M) = E0 or ME
3
2
1
6
5
4
8
7
10
9
12
11
LEGEND
~
PWR
~
Power supply
+
Linear input in voltage / current
-
Input for current transformer
-
+
T
NO
Isolated digital inputs
Thermocouple input
~
~
C
-
+
T
Input
PT100
JPT100
2 / 3wires
+
-
Relay output
Long-life solid state relay output
Logic output
Isolated logic output
Isolated analog output
B (Data +)
RS485 serial line
A (Data -)
VT
+
-
+
VP
-
Supply transmitter
Supply potentiometer
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 29
Power supply
22
23
24
12
11
10
~
~
Standard:
100...240 VAC/VDC ± 10%
50/60 Hz, max 10W
Optional:
20...27 VAC/VDC ± 10%
50/60 Hz, max 10W
(*) ground connection for option
20...27 V AC/DC only
Linear input (V)
Linear input in direct voltage
0...5 V / 0...10 V Ri > 400kΩ
TC Input
4
3
6
5
2
1
+
-
Available thermocouple:
J, K,R, S, T, C, D B, E, L, L-GOST,
U, G, N, Pt20Rh-Pt40Rh
ITS90 or custom linearization
Respect polarity
For extensions, use a compensated cable
6
5
5
3
Characteristics of outputs Out1, Out2, Out3, Out4 are defined when the controller is ordered.
Outputs Out 1 - relay 5 A
Relè 250 VAC, 5 A
C
NO
Input PT100/JPT100 - 2-wires connection
4
3
6
5
2
1
T
Attention : with this type of connection the line resistance can introduce measurement error, we recommend that you use wires of adequate screen.
Outputs Out 1 - logic
+V
6
5
+
-
L
Logic 24 V ±10%
(min 10 V a 20 mA)
Input PT100/JPT100 - 3-wires connection
6
5
4
3
2
1
T
Attention : with this type of connection the line resistance can introduce measurement error, we recommend that you use wires of adequate screen.
The resistance of the three wires must be equal, the line resistance must be less than 20 ohm.
Outputs Out 1 - continuous
6
6
5
+
-
4...20 mA
3
2
Linear input (V, I)
6
5
4
3
2
1
+
-
Linear input in direct voltage
0...60 mV
0...1 V Ri
Linear input in direct current
0/4...20mA, Ri = 50 Ω.
Outputs Out 2 – relay 5 A
19
20
8
7
23
24
C
NO
Relay 250 VAC, 5 A
Rout < 500 Ω
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 30
Output Out 2 – logic
+V
19
20
8
+
-
+
7 -
L
Logic 24 V ±10%
(min 10 V a 20 mA)
Output Out 2 - logic isolated
19
+
20
8
L
Fuse
~ / =
Logic 30 V AC/DC max max 100 mA
Isolated 1500 V
7
Transmitter supply VT1
19
20
10
9
23
24
+
VT1
-
Output Out 4 – relay 5 A
C
NO
37
38
39
40
24 VDC ±10%, max 30 mA
Relay 250 VAC, 5 A
Output Out 4 –Triac
Output Out 3 – relay 5 A
19
20
10
9
23
24
C
NO
Relay 250 VAC, 5 A
Output Out 3 – logic
+V
19
20
10
+
-
+
9 -
L
Logic 24 V ±10%
(min 10 V a 20 mA)
Output Out 3 - logic isolated
19
+
20
10
L
Fuse
~ / =
9
Logic 30 V AC/DC max max 100 mA
Isolated 1500 V
Triac 75...240 VAC max 1 A
Isolated 3 KV
Digital inputs
IN5
IN4
IN3
IN2
IN1
COM
41
42
43
44
45
46
Digital inputs
IN5
IN4
IN3
IN2
IN1
COM
Digital inputs voltage-free contact
41
42
43
44
45
46
NPN Digital inputs
24 V, 4,5 mA
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 31
Digital inputs
GND
IN5
IN4
IN3
IN2
IN1
COM
44
45
46
41
42
43
Digital Inputs PNP
+12/24 V max 3,6 mA
Input PT100/JPT100 - 2-wires connection
[with option auxiliary input = 1]
Attention : with this type of connection the line resistance can introduce measurement error, we recommend that you use wires of adequate screen.
Serial line
B (Data +)
A (Data -)
46
47
48
7
8
9
36
35
34
33
32
31
Inputs CT1, CT2
~
~
~
~
CT1
CT2
Input PT100/JPT100 - 3-wires connection
[with option auxiliary input = 1]
6
5
4
27
26
25
T
Attention : with this type of connection the line resistance can introduce measurement error, we recommend that you use wires of adequate screen.
The resistance of the three wires must be equal, the line resistance must be less than 20 ohm.
Serial line
RS485 2-wires
Linear input (V) [with option auxiliary input = 1]
4
27
6
5
26
25
+
-
Linear input in direct voltage
0...60 mV Ri > 100 MΩ
Current transformer
50 mAac, 10 , 50/60 Hz
Second current transformer for 2-phase / 3-phase load
Input TC [with option auxiliary input = 1]
6
5
4
27
26
+
Available thermocouples:
J, K,R, S, T, C, D, B, E, L, L-GOST,
U, G, N,
Pt20Rh-Pt40Rh
ITS90 or custom linearization
25
-
Respect polarity
For extensions, use a compensated cable
Linear input (V, I) [with option auxiliary input = 2 o 3]
4
27
26
6
5
25
Linear input in direct voltage
0...1 V Ri > 400 KΩ
+
Linear direct current input
0/4...20 mA, Ri = 50 Ω.
-
6
[with option auxiliary input = 2 o 3]
5
28
27
26
25
+ Linear input in direct voltage
0...5 V / 0...10 V Ri > 400 KΩ
-
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 32
5
28
27
26
25
+
VP1 o VT2
-
VP1 = 1 VDC ±1%, max 30 mA
[with option auxiliary input = 2]
VT2 = 24 VDC ±10%, max 30 mA
[with option auxiliary input = 3]
High impedance linear input (V)
35
36
36
35
34
+
-
Linear input with direct voltage
0...1V Ri >100MΩ
0…1.2V Ri>100MΩ
0…2.4V Ri>100MΩ
Linear input (V/I) [with third input option (H) = 3]
36
35
36
35
34
+
Linear input with direct voltage and current
0…1V / 0…5V / 0…10V Ri>400kΩ
0…20mA / 4…20mA Ri=50Ω
33
-
Analog output A2
+
-
32
31
7
8
28
25
0...10 V, max 20 mA Rout > 500 Ω
0...20 mA / 4...20 mA Rout < 500 Ω
35
36
35
34
33
VP2
+
-
VP2= 1VDC + - 1% max 30mA
Analog output A1
+
-
30
29
7
8
28
25
0...10 V, max 20 mA Rout > 500 Ω
0...20 mA / 4...20 mA Rout < 500 Ω
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 33
with option OUT1
Master Modbus (B) = G
33
32
31
36
35
34
28
27
30
29
26
25
OUT 4
~
~
IN 5
IN 4
IN 3
IN 2
IN 1
COM
Option
Modbus RTU
(M) = M0 communication or ME
B (Data +)
A (Data -)
C
NO
46
47
48
43
44
45
39
40
37
38
41
42
27
26
25
30
29
28
34
33
36
35
32
31
Current transformer
CT1 second current transformer for 2-phase /3-phase load
CT2
Option CT (H) = 2
OUT A2
-
+
5V, 10V, 20mA,
+
VP2
+
1V, 1.2V, 2.4V, high impedance
-
Optional third input AUX2 (H) = 3
+
OUT A1
-
-
+
T T
+
60 mV
+
VP1
+
5 V, 10 V
+
VT2
+
1 V, 20 mA
-
Auxiliary input
for model with option auxiliary input (Aux1)
= 1 = 2 o 3
-
3
2
1
6
5
4
10
9
12
11
8
7
~
PWR
~
C
NO
C
NO
C
NO
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
C
-
+
VT 1
-
OUT 3
OUT 2
OUT 1
+
5 V, 10 V
T T
+
60 mV, 1 V, 20 mA
-
Main input (Main)
With Ethernet communication option(M) = E0 or ME
4
3
6
5
2
1
10
9
12
11
8
7
LEGEND
~
PWR
~
Power supply
+
Linear input in voltage / current
-
Input for current transformer
+
-
T
NO
Isolated digital inputs
Thermocouple input
~
~
C
+
-
T
Input
PT100
JPT100
2 / 3wires
-
+
Relay output
Long-life solid state relay output
Logic output
Isolated logic output
Isolated analog output
B (Data +)
RS485 serial line
A (Data -)
+
VT
-
+
VP
-
Supply transmitter
Supply potentiometer
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 34
27
26
25
30
29
28
33
32
31
36
35
34
46
47
48
43
44
45
40
41
42
37
38
39
3
2
1
6
5
4
9
8
7
12
11
10
46
47
48
43
44
45
40
41
42
37
38
39
27
26
25
30
29
28
33
32
31
36
35
34
3
2
1
6
5
4
9
8
7
12
11
10
8 (PNP) digital Inputs/Outputs
External power supply
24 VDC ±25%, max 27W
GND
+
IN 6
OUT 6 LOAD
IN 7
OUT 7 LOAD
IN 8
OUT 8 LOAD
IN 9
OUT 9 LOAD
IN 10
OUT 10 LOAD
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
OUT 11
OUT 12
OUT 13
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
IN 11
45
46
IN 12
IN 13
47
48
28
27
30
29
26
25
36
35
34
33
32
31
8 Relays
4
3
6
5
2
1
12
11
10
9
8
7
+
GND
C
NO
NO
NO
External power supply
24 VDC ±25%, max 3.5W
C
COM 14...18
NO
OUT 14
NO
OUT 15
NO
OUT 16
NO
OUT 17
NO OUT 18
COM 19...21
OUT 19
OUT 20
OUT 21
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 35
12
11
10
22
23
24
Power supply
28
27
26
31
30
29
25
36
33
32
35
34
45
46
47
42
43
44
48
37
40
41
38
39
12
9
8
11
10
37
40
41
38
39
36
3
2
5
4
7
6
42
43
46
47
44
45
31
30
29
28
27
26
33
32
35
34
1 48 25
3
2
5
4
1
12
9
8
11
10
7
6
~
~
Standard:
100...240 VAC/VDC ± 10%
50/60 Hz, max 12W
Optional:
20...27 VAC/VDC ± 10%
50/60 Hz, max 12W
(*) ground connection for option
20...27 V AC/DC only
Linear input (V)
43
44
45
41
42
39
40
37
38
36
35
30
29
28
32
31
34
33
46
47
48
27
26
25
12
11
37
38
43
44
45
41
42
39
40
6
5
4
8
7
10
9
3
2
1
46
47
48
27
26
25
30
29
28
32
31
34
33
36
35
3
2
1
6
5
4
8
7
10
9
12
11
Linear input in direct voltage
0...5 V / 0...10 V Ri > 400kΩ
Characteristics of outputs Out1, Out2, Out3, Out4 are defined when the controller is ordered.
Input TC
6
5
2
1
4
3
29
28
27
26
25
32
31
30
36
35
34
33
44
45
46
47
48
41
42
43
37
38
39
40
37 36
41
42
43
38
39
40
32
31
30
35
34
33
44
45
46
29
28
27
47
48
26
25
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
12
11
10
9
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
12
11
10
9
+
-
Available thermocouples:
J, K,R, S, T, C, D, B, E, L,
L-GOST, U, G, N,
Pt20Rh-Pt40Rh
ITS90 or custom linearization
Respect polarity
For extensions, use a compensated cable
Input PT100/JPT100 - -2 wires connection
29
28
27
26
25
32
31
30
34
33
36
35
44
45
46
47
48
41
42
43
39
40
37
38
32
31
30
34
33
36
35
41
42
43
39
40
37
38
44
45
46
29
28
27
47
48
26
25
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
10
9
12
11
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
10
9
12
11
Attention : with this type of connection the line resistance can introduce measurement error, we recommend that you use wires of adequate.
Output Out 1 - relay 5 A
Output Out 1 - logic
Relay 250 VAC, 5 A
Logic 24 V ±10%
(min 10 V a 20 mA)
37
38
36
35
41
42
39
40
32
31
34
33
43
44
30
29
47
48
45
46
26
25
28
27
12
11
37
38
8
7
10
9
41
42
39
40
6
5
43
44
2
1
4
3
47
48
45
46
32
31
34
33
36
35
30
29
26
25
28
27
8
7
10
9
12
11
6
5
2
1
4
3
27
26
25
30
29
28
33
32
31
36
35
34
46
47
48
43
44
45
40
41
42
37
38
39
3
2
1
6
5
4
9
8
7
12
11
10
46
47
48
43
44
45
40
41
42
37
38
39
27
26
25
30
29
28
33
32
31
36
35
34
3
2
1
6
5
4
9
8
7
12
11
10
Input PT100/JPT100 - 3 -wires connection
4
3
6
5
2
1
T
27
26
25
30
29
28
33
32
31
36
35
34
46
47
48
43
44
45
40
41
42
37
38
39
27
26
25
30
29
28
33
32
31
36
35
34
46
47
48
43
44
45
40
41
42
37
38
39
3
2
1
6
5
4
9
8
7
12
11
10
3
2
1
6
5
4
9
8
7
12
11
10
Attention : with this type of connection the line resistance can introduce measurement error, we recommend that you use wires of adequate.
The resistance of the three wires must be equal, the line resistance must be less than 20 ohm.
Output Out 1 - continuous
4...20 mA
Output Out 2 – relè 5 A
Linear input (V, I)
Linear input in direct voltage
0...60 mV Ri > 100MΩ
0...1 V Ri > 100MΩ
27
26
25
30
29
28
33
32
31
36
35
34
46
47
48
43
44
45
40
41
42
37
38
39
27
26
25
30
29
28
33
32
31
36
35
34
46
47
48
43
44
45
40
41
42
37
38
39
3
2
1
6
5
4
9
8
7
12
11
10
3
2
1
6
5
4
9
8
7
12
11
10
Linear input in direct current
0/4...20mA, Ri = 50 Ω
Relay 250 VAC, 5 A
32
31
30
34
33
36
35
41
42
43
39
40
37
38
44
45
46
29
28
27
47
48
26
25
8
7
6
10
9
12
11
41
42
43
39
40
37
38
5
4
3
44
45
46
2
1
47
48
29
28
27
26
25
32
31
30
34
33
36
35
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
10
9
12
11
Rout < 500 Ω
45
46
43
44
28
27
30
29
47
48
26
25
33
32
31
36
35
34
40
41
42
37
38
39
4
3
6
5
45
46
43
44
2
1
47
48
9
8
7
12
11
10
40
41
42
37
38
39
28
27
30
29
26
25
33
32
31
36
35
34
4
3
6
5
2
1
9
8
7
12
11
10
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 36
Output Out 2 – logic
Logic 24 V ±10%
(min 10 V a 20 mA
27
26
25
30
29
28
32
31
34
33
36
35
46
47
48
43
44
45
41
42
39
40
37
38
3
2
1
6
5
4
8
7
10
9
12
11
46
47
48
27
26
25
43
44
45
41
42
39
40
37
38
36
35
30
29
28
32
31
34
33
3
2
1
6
5
4
8
7
10
9
12
11
Output Out 2 – logic isolated
27
26
29
28
32
31
30
25
36
35
34
33
46
47
44
45
41
42
43
48
37
38
39
40
37 36
41
42
43
38
39
40
32
31
30
35
34
33
46
47
44
45
27
26
29
28
48 25
3
2
5
4
8
7
6
1
12
11
10
9
3
2
5
4
8
7
6
1
12
11
10
9
Logic 30 V AC/DC max max 100 mA
Isolated 1500 V
Transmitter supply (VT1)
19
20
10
9
23
24
+
VT1
-
Output Out 4 – relay 5 A
27
26
25
30
29
28
32
31
34
33
36
35
46
47
48
43
44
45
41
42
39
40
37
38
12
11
37
38
43
44
45
41
42
39
40
6
5
4
8
7
10
9
3
2
1
46
47
48
27
26
25
30
29
28
32
31
34
33
36
35
3
2
1
6
5
4
8
7
10
9
12
11
24 VDC ±10%, max 30 mA
29
28
27
26
25
32
31
30
36
35
34
33
44
45
46
47
48
41
42
43
37
38
39
40
12 37
41
42
43
38
39
40
8
7
6
11
10
9
5
4
3
44
45
46
2
1
47
48
29
28
27
26
25
32
31
30
36
35
34
33
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
12
11
10
9
Relay 250 VAC, 5 A
Output Out 3 – relay 5 A
Relay 250 VAC, 5 A
29
28
27
26
25
32
31
30
36
35
34
33
44
45
46
47
48
41
42
43
37
38
39
40
37 36
41
42
43
38
39
40
32
31
30
35
34
33
44
45
46
29
28
27
47
48
26
25
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
12
11
10
9
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
12
11
10
9
Output Out 4 – Triac
27
26
25
30
29
28
32
31
34
33
36
35
46
47
48
43
44
45
41
42
39
40
37
38
12
11
37
38
43
44
45
41
42
39
40
6
5
4
8
7
10
9
3
2
1
46
47
48
27
26
25
30
29
28
32
31
34
33
36
35
3
2
1
6
5
4
8
7
10
9
12
11
Triac 75...240 VAC max 1 A
Isolated 3 KV
Output Out 3 – logic
Logic 24 V ±10%
(min 10 V a 20 mA
29
28
27
26
25
32
31
30
36
35
34
33
44
45
46
47
48
41
42
43
37
38
39
40
37 36
41
42
43
38
39
40
32
31
30
35
34
33
44
45
46
29
28
27
47
48
26
25
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
12
11
10
9
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
12
11
10
9
Output Out 3 – logic isolated
27
26
25
30
29
28
32
31
34
33
36
35
46
47
48
43
44
45
41
42
39
40
37
38
3
2
1
6
5
4
8
7
10
9
12
11
46
47
48
27
26
25
43
44
45
41
42
39
40
37
38
36
35
30
29
28
32
31
34
33
3
2
1
6
5
4
8
7
10
9
12
11
Logic 30 V AC/DC max max 100 mA
Isolated 1500 V
Digital inputs
IN5
IN4
IN3
IN2
IN1
COM
41
42
43
44
45
46
Digital inputs
IN5
IN4
IN3
IN2
IN1
COM
41
42
43
44
45
46
27
26
25
30
29
28
33
32
31
36
35
34
46
47
48
43
44
45
40
41
42
37
38
39
3
2
1
6
5
4
9
8
7
12
11
10
46
47
48
43
44
45
40
41
42
37
38
39
27
26
25
30
29
28
33
32
31
36
35
34
3
2
1
6
5
4
9
8
7
12
11
10
Digital input voltage-free contact
29
28
27
26
25
32
31
30
36
35
34
33
44
45
46
47
48
41
42
43
37
38
39
40
12 37
41
42
43
38
39
40
8
7
6
11
10
9
5
4
3
44
45
46
2
1
47
48
29
28
27
26
25
32
31
30
36
35
34
33
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
12
11
10
9
NPN Digital input
24 V, 4,5 mA
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 37
Digital inputs
GND
IN5
IN4
IN3
IN2
IN1
COM
27
26
25
30
29
28
32
31
34
33
36
35
46
47
48
43
44
45
41
42
39
40
37
38
3
2
1
6
5
4
8
7
10
9
12
11
46
47
48
27
26
25
43
44
45
41
42
39
40
37
38
36
35
30
29
28
32
31
34
33
3
2
1
6
5
4
8
7
10
9
12
11
44
45
46
41
42
43
PNP Digital inputs
+12/24 V max 3,6 mA
Inputs PT100/JPT100 - 2-wires connection
[with option auxiliary input = 1]
27
26
25
30
29
28
32
31
34
33
36
35
46
47
48
43
44
45
41
42
39
40
37
38
12
11
37
38
43
44
45
41
42
39
40
6
5
4
8
7
10
9
3
2
1
46
47
48
27
26
25
30
29
28
32
31
34
33
36
35
3
2
1
6
5
4
8
7
10
9
12
11
Attention : with this type of connection the line resistance can introduce measurement error, we recommend that you use wires of adequate screen.
Serial Line
27
26
25
30
29
28
33
32
31
36
35
34
46
47
48
43
44
45
40
41
42
37
38
39
27
26
25
30
29
28
33
32
31
36
35
34
46
47
48
43
44
45
40
41
42
37
38
39
3
2
1
6
5
4
9
8
7
12
11
10
3
2
1
6
5
4
9
8
7
12
11
10
Inputs PT100/JPT100 - 3-wires connection
[with option auxiliary input = 1]
27
26
25
30
29
28
33
32
31
36
35
34
46
47
48
43
44
45
40
41
42
37
38
39
3
2
1
6
5
4
9
8
7
12
11
10
46
47
48
43
44
45
40
41
42
37
38
39
27
26
25
30
29
28
33
32
31
36
35
34
3
2
1
6
5
4
9
8
7
12
11
10
Attention : with this type of connection the line resistance can introduce measurement error, we recommend that you use wires of adequate screen.
The resistance of the three wires must be equal, the line resistance must be less than 20 ohm.
B (Data +)
A (Data -)
46
47
48
7
8
9
Serial line
RS485 2-wires
Linear Inputs (V)
[with option auxiliary input = 1]
29
28
27
26
25
32
31
30
36
35
34
33
44
45
46
47
48
41
42
43
37
38
39
40
12 37
41
42
43
38
39
40
8
7
6
11
10
9
5
4
3
44
45
46
2
1
47
48
29
28
27
26
25
32
31
30
36
35
34
33
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
12
11
10
9
Linear input in direct voltage
0...60 mV Ri > 100 MΩ
Inputs CT1, CT2
36
35
34
33
32
31
~
~
~
~
CT1
CT2
Current transformer
50 mAac, 10 , 50/60 Hz
28
27
30
29
26
25
33
32
31
36
35
34
45
46
43
44
47
48
40
41
42
37
38
39
45
46
43
44
28
27
30
29
47
48
26
25
33
32
31
36
35
34
40
41
42
37
38
39
4
3
6
5
2
1
9
8
7
12
11
10
4
3
6
5
2
1
9
8
7
12
11
10
Second current transformer for 2-phase / 3-phase load
5
4
27
26
25
Input TC
[with option auxiliary input = 1,available only if
+
26
25
28
27
31
30
29
34
33
32
36
35
41
42
39
40
37
38
43
44
47
48
45
46
2
1
4
3
7
6
5
10
9
8
12
11
47
48
45
46
26
25
28
27
41
42
39
40
43
44
37
38
36
35
31
30
29
34
33
32
2
1
4
3
7
6
5
10
9
8
12
11
Available thermocouples:
J, K,R, S, T, C, D, B, E, L, L-GOST,
U, G, N,
Pt20Rh-Pt40Rh
ITS90 or custom linearization
-
Respect polarity
For extensions, use a compensated cable
Linear Inputs (V, I)
[with option auxiliary input = 1]
Linear input in direct voltage
0...1 V Ri > 400 KΩ
27
26
29
28
32
31
30
25
36
35
34
33
46
47
44
45
41
42
43
48
37
38
39
40
12 37
41
42
43
38
39
40
8
7
6
11
10
9
3
2
5
4
46
47
44
45
1 48
27
26
29
28
32
31
30
25
36
35
34
33
3
2
5
4
8
7
6
1
12
11
10
9
Linear input in direct current
0/4...20 mA, Ri = 50 Ω.
Linear Inputs (V)
[with option auxiliary input = 2 o 3]
28
27
26
31
30
29
25
36
33
32
35
34
45
46
47
42
43
44
48
37
40
41
38
39
12 37
42
43
44
40
41
38
39
7
6
5
9
8
11
10
4
3
2
45
46
47
1 48
28
27
26
31
30
29
25
36
33
32
35
34
4
3
2
7
6
5
1
12
9
8
11
10
Linear input in direct voltage
0...5 V / 0...10 V Ri > 400 KΩ
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 38
35
36
36
35
34
Potentiometer VP1 or
5
28
27
26
25
+
VP1 o VT2
-
27
26
25
30
29
28
32
31
34
33
36
35
46
47
48
43
44
45
41
42
39
40
37
38
3
2
1
6
5
4
8
7
10
9
12
11
46
47
48
27
26
25
43
44
45
41
42
39
40
37
38
36
35
30
29
28
32
31
34
33
3
2
1
6
5
4
8
7
10
9
12
11
VP1 = 1 VDC ±1%, max 30 mA
[with option auxiliary input = 2]
VT2 = 24 VDC ±10%, max 30 mA
[with option auxiliary input = 3]
High impedance linear input (V)
+
-
Linear input with direct voltage
0...1V Ri>100MΩ
0…1.2V Ri>100MΩ
0…2.4V Ri>100MΩ
Linear input (V/I) [with third input option (H) = 3]
36
35
36
35
34
+
Linear input with direct voltage and current
0…1V / 0…5V / 0…10V Ri>400kΩ
0…20mA / 4…20mA Ri=50Ω
33
-
VP2 potentiometer power supply
36
35
36
35
+
34
33
VP2
-
Analog outputs A1
+
-
7
8
30
29
28
25
29
28
27
26
25
32
31
30
36
35
34
33
44
45
46
47
48
41
42
43
37
38
39
40
37 36
41
42
43
38
39
40
32
31
30
35
34
33
44
45
46
29
28
27
47
48
26
25
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
12
11
10
9
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
12
11
10
9
0...10 V, max 20 mA Rout > 500 Ω
0...20 mA / 4...20 mA Rout < 500 Ω
Analog outputs A2
+
-
7
8
32
31
28
25
29
28
27
26
25
32
31
30
36
35
34
33
44
45
46
47
48
41
42
43
37
38
39
40
12 37
41
42
43
38
39
40
8
7
6
11
10
9
5
4
3
44
45
46
2
1
47
48
29
28
27
26
25
32
31
30
36
35
34
33
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
12
11
10
9
0...10 V, max 20 mA Rout > 500 Ω
0...20 mA / 4...20 mA Rout < 500 Ω
Characteristics of optional inputs and outputs are defined when the controller is ordered.
8 Inputs / Digital outputs (PNP)
[with option I/O = 10, 11]
GND
External power supply
OUT 6
OUT 7
OUT 8
OUT 9
OUT 10
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
OUT 11
OUT 12
OUT 13
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
IN 6
IN 7
IN 8
IN 9
IN 10
IN 11
IN 12
IN 13
28
27
26
31
30
29
25
34
33
32
36
35
45
46
47
42
43
44
48
39
40
41
37
38
7
6
5
10
9
8
12
11
37
38
42
43
44
39
40
41
4
3
2
45
46
47
1 48
28
27
26
31
30
29
25
34
33
32
36
35
4
3
2
7
6
5
1
10
9
8
12
11
40
41
42
43
37
38
39
44
45
46
47
48
PNP digital inputs
24 V, max 5 mA
PNP digital outputs
24 V, max 100 mA
12
11
3
2
5
4
1
10
9
8
7
6
8 Relay
[with option I/O = 01, 11]
27
26
29
28
32
31
30
25
36
35
34
33
46
47
44
45
41
42
43
48
37
38
39
40
12 37
8
7
6
11
10
9
41
42
43
38
39
40
3
2
5
4
46
47
44
45
1 48
27
26
29
28
32
31
30
25
36
35
34
33
3
2
5
4
8
7
6
1
12
11
10
9
+
GND
COM 14...18
External power supply
24 VDC ±25%, max 3,5W
OUT 14
NO
OUT 15
NO
OUT 16
NO
OUT 17
NO
OUT 18
COM 19...21
NO
Relay 5A (3A for certification UL),
250VAC
OUT 19
OUT 20
OUT 21
NO
NO
NO
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 39
Configurazione linearizzazione custom
Up to 31 controllers may be connected in parallel on physical line RS485, independently of which option is selected
(Master Modbus (G), rete bridge RS485 (ME), Modbus RTU
Slave (M0) ); they may even be of different models.
The line must be terminated with a resistor (120 Ω, 1/2 W) at each end.
Output 1 type G options have an integrated 120 Ohm termination, while options M0 and ME require addition of termination outside the instrument.
120 Ω
Host computer
RS485
B (+)
A (-)
Frame ground (FG)
Shield
21
22
19
20
+ -
16
15
18
17
850
No. 1
9
10
7
8
4
3
6
5
21
22
19
20
+ -
16
15
18
17
850
No. 31
9
10
7
8
120 Ω
1/2 W
4
3
6
5
Figure 13 - RS485 connection for 850 controller with optional communication (M) = M0
120 Ω
Host computer
RS485
B (+)
A (-)
Frame ground (FG)
Shield
45
46
47
+
48
-
26
25
28
27
1650 - 1850
No. 1
2
1
4
3
120 Ω
1/2 W
45
46
47
+
48
-
26
25
28
27
1650 - 1850
No. 31
2
1
4
3
Figure 14 - RS485 connection for 1650 and 1850 controllers with optional communication (M) = M0
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 40
19
20
21
22
Shield
+ + -
18
17
16
15
7
8
9
10
4
3
6
5
19
20
21
22
18
17
16
15
Slave No. 1
7
8
9
10
4
3
6
5
19
20
21
22
Host
Figure 15 - Master Modbus connection of 850 controllers with option Output 1 (B) = G
18
17
16
15 10
Slave No. 31
7
8
9
120 Ω
1/2 W
4
3
6
5
Figure 16 - Pin Output_CVP cable
The accessories listed in the table may be used for connection of the Master Modbus port with other devices.
Pinout Rif. accessory Lenght
1 - GND
2 - TX/RX+
3 - TX/RX-
CVP-03 Cod. F081138 0,3m
CVP-1 Cod. F081140 1m
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 41
Shield
120 Ω
1/2 W
45
46
47
+
48
-
28
27
26
25
1650 - 1850
Host
4
3
2
1
45
46
47
+
48
-
28
27
26
25
1650 - 1850
Slave No. 1
4
3
2
1
120 Ω
1/2 W
45
46
47
+
48
-
28
27
26
25
1650 - 1850
Slave No. 31
Figure 17 - RS485 bridge connection of controllers 1650 and 1850 with communication option (M) = ME
4
3
2
1
Controllers 850, 1650 and 1850 may, on request, be equipped with an Ethernet 10/100BaseT port with direct connection via RJ45 connector.
For this connection, use a type UTP cable of category 5 or greater, crimped with a standard non-shielded RJ45 connector.
The instrument automatically recognises the polarity of the cable used, and so you may use either a straight or a cross cable equally well for point-to-point connections with a PC or to a switch.
The maximum connection length supported is 100m, according to standard IEEE 802.3u; if segments longer than 100 m are required, insert signal repeaters (switches) to break up the network.
Connector RJ45 has two signal and diagnostics LEDs:
- Amber LED: when steady on, indicates the presence of
the signal carrier (link)
- Green LED: when flashing, indicates data exchange
underway on port (activity).
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 42
The general description of the displays and keys for each model is in paragraphs “1.3.1. Display and keys” on page
13 for the 850, “1.4.1. Display and keys” on page 16 for the
1650, and “1.5.1. Display and keys” on page 19 for the
1850.
4 keys are used for navigating the menus and submenus and for changing parameters and confirming choices.
Their function depends on the context and on how long they are pressed.
The LEDs above the keys not only give confirmation that each key has been pressed (by flashing), but also show which keys can be used in each situation.
The navigation functions assigned to the keys are:
At first power-on, scrolls the fast configuration menu; otherwise, the user configuration menu
(Setpoint, Alarm limits, Control output, etc.).
Each time you press the key, the value of the displayed parameter is confirmed and you go to the next menu item.
Keep the key pressed for more than 2 seconds to enter the Programming/Configuration menu.
Each time you press the key, you return to the previous menu item or to the higher menu level, as appropriate. Keep the key pressed for more than 2 seconds to return to the Main menu.
Press the key to enter a submenu or to reduce the value of the displayed parameter, as appropriate.
Keep the key pressed to progressively increase the speed of reduction of the displayed parameter.
Press the key to raise the value of the displayed parameter.
Keep the key pressed to progressively increase the speed of raising the displayed parameter.
When the process variable is displayed, in standard configuration the key switches the controller function mode (manual/automatics).
The controllers have 2 or 3 displays, depending on the model.
The Main menu shows:
• PV display: value of process variable.
• SV display: value of parameter (default = setpoint, if parameter dS.SP = SETP).
• F Display (models 1650 and 1850 only): value of control output (if parameter dS.F = OUT.P).
On models 1650 and 1850, the percentage value of the control output is also shown graphically on a bargraph.
On model 1850, an additional display shows the program number, step number, and unit of measurement (%, A, kW, kWh).
According to the situation (programming, alarm, etc.), the controller displays can show other information, such as the name of the parameter, description of the parameter, diagnostics messages and alarm messages..
Attention! The displays show only the parameters and menus for a defined configuration.
3.1.2.1. Display characters
The displays reproduce the various characters by combining
7 or 14 segments. The following tables show the shape of the various characters.
*
4
>
H
R f
\ p z
!
+
5
?
I
S
] g q
|
“
,
6
@
J
T
^ h
˜ r
#
-
7
A
K
U
_ s i
$
.
8
B
L t j
`
%
/
9
C
M
V W a k u
&
:
0
D
N
X b v l
Figure 18 - 14-segment font
;
‘
1
E
O
Y c m w
2
<
F
P
Z d n x
( y
)
3
=
G
Q
[ e o
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 43
*
4
>
H
R
!
+
5
?
I
S
“
,
6
@
J
T
#
-
7
A
K
U
$
.
8
B
L
V
%
/
9
C
M
W
&
0
:
D
N
X
‘
1
;
E
O
Y
(
2
<
F
P
Z [
)
3
=
G
Q
Figure 19 - 7-segment font
The following diagram shows the controller sequence at power-on.
Note : the USB-TTL programming cable must be disconnected.
3.1.2.2. Scrolling messages
The SV (850) and F (1650 and 1850) displays can show scrolling alphameric messages. These messages, up to 32 characters in length, appear:
• during configuration, describing the active parameter;
• during functioning, after the tripping of alarms, digital inputs and logic function outputs, if the relative messages were enabled
Message texts can be set via PC with GF_eXpress software.
There are 3 message groups, one for each of the 3 languages
LAnG provided, selectable from the HMI menu with the parameter.
Each group contains up to 25 messages.
By setting LAnG=NONE the subdivision of the three groups is lost, obtaining up to 75 messages settability
9. Program code self-diagnostics.
10. Configuration read by EEPROM.
11. Check of data consistency. *
12. Recognition of available options.
Initialization of input and output devices based on configuration.
DISPLAY ON
All display segments are on.
3 flashes at interval of about 1 second
CONTROL ON
As per the set configuration.
True AUX IN +
PID2
False
HOME
You have 2 home page.
The home page on the display in use is identified by its number, which alternates, at the top left, with the symbol ° C or ° F.
True
HOME
The displays show the process variable and the % value of power.
** MANUAL
CONTROL
False
HOME
The displays show the process variable, the setpoint or other defined parameter.
AUTOMATIC/MANUAL switching via key
or digital input or serial communication.
(*) Any error is signaled by the message EEPROM CHECKSUM ERROR.
(**) Only if MANUAL mode was used before the controller was powered off.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 44
At first power-on, after the controller has run the self-diagnostics test, press the key to access the Fast Configuration Menu.
The parameters shown are a subset of all the controller parameters and let you rapidly configure the inputs and outputs.
The number and type of the parameters shown depends on the controller HW configuration and on the choices made with the parameters previously shown.
For example, minimum and maximum scale limits are shown only if you have chosen an mA or V type temperature sensor.
Fast Configuration also appears if the HMI menu is set to parameter QuiCk = On
Fast configuration is not enabled at first power-on with programmer or valve model, and is not present when the optional auxiliary input is available.
Home
Selecting sensor type
> 2 s
> 2 s
> 2 s
A
Selecting unit of measurement
The unit of measurement can be °C or °F only if a TC or Rtd sensor is selected.
Raises the value
Lowers the value
Raises the value
Lowers the value
Minimum scale limit
Only if the selected sensor is in mV or V, the scale limits LO.SCL, HI.SCL and the settable limits of the LO.SP, HI.SP setpoint for TC or RTD sensors are automatically set according to sensor type and unit of measurement.
Maximum scale limit
Only if the selected sensor is in mV or V.
A
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 45
Home
A A
> 2 s
> 2 s
> 2 s
> 2 s
> 2 s
B B
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 46
Selecting output 1 function
The proposed functions depend on output type
(relay, logic).
Selecting output 2 function
The proposed functions depend on output type
(relay, logic).
Selecting output 3 function
The menu item appears only if the optional output is availableis available.
Selecting output 4 function
The menu item appears only if the optional output is availableis available.
Selecting analog output function
The menu item appears only if the output continuous
Out1 4-20mA.
Home
B B
> 2 s
> 2 s
Raises the value
Lowers the value
Full-scale value of current transformer CT1
The menu item appears only if the optional input is available.
Raises the value
Lowers the value
Full-scale value of current transformer CT2
The menu item appears only if the optional input is available.
Selecting digital input 1 function
The menu item appears only if the optional input is available.
> 2 s
Selecting digital input 2 function
The menu item appears only if the optional input is available.
> 2 s
> 2 s
> 2 s
C
Selecting digital input 3 function
The menu item appears only if the optional input is available.
Selecting digital input 4 function
The menu item appears only if the optional input is available (for models 1650 and 1850 only).
C
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 47
Home
C C
Selecting digital input 5 function
The menu item appears only if the optional input is available (for models 1650 and 1850 only).
> 2 s
Raises the value
Lowers the value
Setting Setpoint
> 2 s
Raises the value
Lowers the value
Setting Allarms 1
> 2 s
Raises the value
Lowers the value
Setting Modbus address
The menu item appears only if the optional RS485 port is available.
> 2 s
Raises the value
Lowers the value
Selecting baudrate
The menu item appears only if the optional RS485 port is available.
> 2 s
Enabling / Disabling Fast Configuration
> 2 s
Selection of probe type
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 48
The quick configuration menu lets you quickly configure and start a controller.
To do this, it uses default values for many of the parameters assigned to the functions and other parameters are not activated.
With this configuration, the controller can satisfy the majority of operating requirements.
You can set up the first configuration with the main configuration menu (see paragraph “4.1 Programming/Configuration
Menu” on page 51), which gives access to all of the parameters.
For purposes of example, some of the controller’s main functions are listed below, with a list of parameters to be changed after running fast configuration to adapt the controller to specific working conditions.
If at least one output was configured as Alarm in the fast configuration.
0000
0000
Home page
Press > 2 seconds
0
PASS1 Enter password (default = 1) with the and
Press 3 times (if the model does not have remote setpoint input and current transformer options and is not the Programmer)
ALARM
Submenu
ALARM
ALRM.N
Select the Alarm number (default = 1) with the and keys
Description of parameter and list of options on page. 137
Press twice di.in
Set the alarm as direct or inverse (default = Direct) with the and keys
Description of parameter and list of options on page.90
Ab.rE
Set the alarm as absolute or deviation (default = Absolute) with the and keys
Description of parameter and list of options on page. 90
Press 4 times
HYSTE
Set hysteresis (default = -1) with the and keys
Description of parameter and list of options on page. 92
Press twice
MSG.AL
Select the message assigned to the alarm (default = 0) with the and keys
Description of parameter and list of options on page. 92
Press > 2 seconds
0000
0000
Home page
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 49
The ALARM submenu also lets you:
• select the input or value to be monitored for the alarm
(parameter rEFE, default = PV);
• select the method for applying hysteresis (parameter no.Sy, default = NORML);
• enable or disable the power-on alarm (parameter
PWON.E, default = OFF);
• latch/not latch the active alarm state (parameter LATCH, default = OFF);
• set the alarm trip delay (parameter DELAY, default =
0.00);
• activate or deactivate flashing of the PV display in case of alarm (parameter BLK.AL, default = OFF).
If at least one output was configured as Heater Break Alarm in the fast configuration.
0000
0000
Home page
Press > 2 seconds
0
PASS1
Enter password (default = 1) with the and keys
Press 4 times (if the model does not have remote setpoint input and current transformer options and is not the Programmer)
AL.HB
Submenu
AL.HB
PV.BND
Press 4 times
THR.PE
Set the percentage of HB current compared to calibration (default = 80%) with the and keys. Description of parameter and list of options on page. 95
Press twice
LoAd
Select the connected load (default = MONO) with the and keys
Description of parameter and list of options on page. 96
MSG.HB
Select the message assigned to the HB alarm (default = 0) with the and keys
Description of parameter and list of options on page. 96
Press > 2 seconds
0000
0000
Home page
The AL.HB submenu also lets you:
• set an HB alarm due to low current draw (parameter
LOW.ON, default = 0.0);
• set an HB alarm due to high current draw (parameter
HIG.ON, default = 0.0);
• set an HB alarm due to excess current draw (parameter
HI.OFF, default = 0.0);
• set the HB alarm trip delay (parameter TIME, default = 0);
• select the control output assigned to the HB alarm
(parameter OUT, default = 1);
• activate or deactivate flashing of the PV display in case of alarm (parameter BLK.AL, default = OFF).
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 50
0000
0000
Home page
Press > 2 seconds
0
PASS1
Enter password (default = 1) with the and keys
Press 5 times (if the model does not have remote setpoint input and current transformer options and is not the Programmer)
PID
Submenu
PID
If the optional auxiliary input is present and PID.2 is enabled in EN.FUN, the menu to select the reference PID.N number appears before S.TUNE.
S.TUNE
Enable or disable Self-Tuning (default = OFF) with the and keys
Description of parameter and list of options on page. 103
SOFT.S
Enable or disable Soft-Start (default = OFF) with the and keys
Description of parameter and list of options on page. 103
A.TUNE
Enable or disable Auto-Tuning (default = OFF) with the and keys
Description of parameter and list of options on page. 103
Cntr
Select the control (default = H.PID) with the and keys
Description of parameter and list of options on page. 104
Press > 2 seconds
0000
0000
Home page
The PID submenu also lets you:
• set the Soft-Start time (parameter SOFT.T, default =
0.0
);
• select the type of Auto-Tuning used (parameter Aut.t, default = CONTI );
• set the derivative time (parameter DERV.S, default = 1 );
• set the proportional heating band or hysteresis in ON-
OFF control (parameter H.PB, default = 1.0
);
• set the integral heating time (parameter H.IT, default =
4.00
);
• set the derivative heating time (parameter H.DT, default
= 1.00
);
• set the maximum heating power limit (parameter H.P.HI, default = 100.0
);
• set the minimum heating power limit (parameter H.P.LO, default = 0.0
);
• select the cooling fluid (parameter COOL, default =
FAN );
• set the cooling setpoint compared to the heating setpoint (parameter C.SP, default = 0.0
);
• set the proportional cooling band or hysteresis in ON-
OFF control (parameter C.PB, default = 1.0
);
• set the integral cooling time (parameter C.IT = 4.00
);
• set the derivative cooling time (parameter C.DT = 1.00
);
• set the maximum cooling power limit (parameter C.P.HI, default = 100.0
);
• set the minimum cooling power limit (parameter C.P.LO, default = 0.0
);
• set the Manual Reset value (parameter RESET, default
= 0 );
• set the Reset Power value (parameter P.RST, default =
0.0
);
• set the Antireset value (parameter A.RST, default = 0 );
• set the Feedforward Power value (parameter, default =
0.0
);
• set the deadband (parameter DEAD.B, default = 0 );
• set the fault action power (parameter FAULT, default =
0.0
);
• set the setpoint gradient in raise (parameter GRAD.I, default = 0.0
);
• set the setpoint gradient in lower (parameter GRAD.D, default = 0.0
);
• select the gradient unit of measurement (parameter
Unit, default = DIG/S );
• set the control output gradient (parameter GRAD.O, default = 0.0
);
• set the LBA alarm trip delay LBA (parameter LBA.TM, default = 30.0);
• set the value of power delivered when the LBA alarm trips (parameter LBA.PW, default = 25.0).
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 51
The fast configuration described in the previous chapter lets you rapidly put the controller into operation.
To do this, the procedure configures the controller’s main parameters only, which satisfies the most common application requirements.
On the other hand, to satisfy all application requirements and to configure the controller in detail, you have to set the parameters that are accessible only on the Programming/
Configuration menu.
because optimum controller function depends a great deal on correct configuration and programming of the control parameters provided.
This type of configuration is also useful for common applications (the ones covered by fast configuration),
The controller can be configured with the buttons on its panel and from the PC with GF_eXpress software (see chapter
“6.PROGRAMMING WITH PC” on page”6. PROGRAM-
Correctly setting the parameters needed to configure the controller requires thorough knowledge of the problems and techniques involved.
If you are unsure of your know-how, or are not fully aware of the consequences of incorrectly setting the parameters, we advise you not to configure the controller with this menu.
Attention!
To prevent harm to persons and damage to property, the user must check that the parameters are correctly set before commissioning the controller.
In case of doubts, or if you need any explanations, please consult www.gefran.com or contact Gefran Customer Care.
The configuration menu is protected by 2 passwords that allow access to two different menu sections.
The first section, accessed with password 1, groups the most operative submenus and parameters, i.e., the ones most involved in daily functioning of the controlled machine or system.
The second section, accessed with password 2, groups the submenus and parameters used to configure HW resources
The factory password settings are:
• Password 1 = 1
• Password 2 = 2
The passwords can be changed and even disabled if
Two passwords can be entered in the User menu, respectively:
- Password 0 (default = 1 See paragraphs “4.28. PASC0 -
Setting level 0 password 0” on page 169 )
- Password 1 to inhibit navigation to parameters in positions subsequent to that assigned to the password.
Once one of the two passwords is reached:
- if the value entered matches the value expected, navigation continues in the User Menu
- if the value entered does not match the value expected, the Home screen will be displayed
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 52
Home1
0000
0000
Home2
0000
0000 only for models with auxiliary input and PID2 enabled
> 1 s time = 0 with only PID1
> 2 s
0
PASS1
Insert password 1
User configuration menu
(max 100 parameters)
If password is correct, enter menu, if not, Home
> 6 s
0
PASS2
Insert password 2
If password is correct, enter menu, if not, Home
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 53
Home
0
PASS1
F
Insert password 1
INFO
F
Display information
INFO.E
F
Displaying Ethernet information
MASTE
F
Displaying Master information and communication values
RECIP
F
Parameter recipe configuration
PR.OPT
F
Configuration of programs
PR.STP
F
Configuration of programs steps
INPUT
F
Configuration analog input
IN.CT
F
Configuration of current transformer input
ALARM
F
Configuration of intercepts
AL.HB
F
Configuration of
Heater Break alarm
AL.PW
F
Configuration of power alarm
PID
F
Configuration of control parameters
PID.GR
Configuration of groups of control parameters
Submenu pag.
CAL.EV
F
CALE.C
F
0
PASS2
F
Insert passwod 2
IN.DIG
F
Configuration of digital inputs
Configuration of outputs OUTPU
F
Configuration of analog retransmission output OUT.AN
F
Configuration of valve parameters VALVE
F
Configuration of enablings EN.FUN
F
Configuration of function modes MODE
F
Configuration of timer parameters TIMER
F
Configuration of energy counter parameters ENERG
F
Configuration of serial SERIA
F
Ethernet Setup
ETHER
F
HMI
Configuration of display
Submenu pag.
LINRZ
F
Configuring the display and keyboard Home 1 and Home2
Submenu pag.
HOME
F
LIN.4.P
F
Linearization custom configuration
Lilinearization custom configuration
US.CAL
F
Calibrations user
Setting password level 0 PASC0
F
Setting password level 1 PASC1
F
Setting password level 2 PASC2
F
FI.CFG
F
0000
0000
Reset code insertion
Home
If you correctly enter the reset code, the factory configuration is restored and all custom c onfigurations are lost; if not, Home
ATTENTION!
The reset procedure is not reversible.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 54
INPUTS
Linearization
LINRZ.1
PROCESSING SOFTWARE local / remote
Setpoint
SET1
Timer
TIMER.1
Linearization
LINRZ.2
local / remote
Setpoint
SET2
Timer
TIMER.2
Analog input
IN.1
Analog input
IN.2
Analog input
IN.3
Current input
CT.1
Current input
CT.2
Setpoint programmer
PROGR.1
16 Programs
192 Steps
Programmatore di setpoint
PROGR.2
Ratio controller
PID control
PID.1
Controller in cascade
PID control
PID.2
Digital input
INDIG.1
Alarm
FAULT.1
Alarm
FAULT.2
Multiset
M.SP1.1...
...M.SP4.1
Multiset
M.SP1.2...
...M.SP4.2
Alarm
POWER.1
Alarm
POWER.2
Digital input
INDIG.2
Double functions
Digital input
INDIG.3
Digital input
INDIG.4
Digital input
INDIG.5
Digital inputs function
Alarm HB
Outputs function
Alarm 1...4
Valve control
PID parameters
PIDGR.1
PID parameters
PIDGR.2
Counter energy
ENERG.1
Counter energy
ENERG.2
Alarm
LBA.1
Alarm
LBA.2
8 Digital inputs
EXP
OUTPUTS
Output
OUT.1
Output
OUT.2
Output
OUT.3
Output
OUT.4
Analog output
OUT.A1
Analog output
OUT.A2
Other functions
Weekly
Calendar
Recipes 1...5
1...25 param.
Logic functions
1...32
User menu 1...100
param.
Mathematical functions
1...8
Master Modbus
1….20 communication functions
Scrolling messages
1...3 languages with
1...25 posts or
1...75 posts
Funzioni con definizione da GF_eXpress
8 Digital outputs
EXP
8 Relay outputs
EXP
Master Modbus serial
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 55
The purposes and characteristics of submenus and parameters are described and summarized in the following tables.
Acronym
INFO
Scrolling message
INSTRUMENT STATUS
Password
Livello 1
Description
Gives information on controller state and HW configuration
1 2 3 4
1. Acronym of submenu as it appears on controller display.
2. Text of scrolling message as it appears on controller display.
3. Password needed to access submenu items.
4. Description of functions that manage submenu..
5
6
7
1 2
Acronym Scrolling message
Out1 OUTPUT TYPE
The parameter specifies the type of output 1.
Unit of measurement: -
Options:
RELAY = Relay output
DIGIT = Logic output 24 V
CONTS = Continuous output
8 9
3
Submenu
INFO
Attributi
R
4
1. Acronym of parameter as it appears on controller display.
2. Text of scrolling message as it appears on controller display.
3. Submenu to which parameter belongs.
4. Attributes of parameter: R = readable, W = writable. If only R, the operator or technician can read the parameter value but cannot change it.
5. Description of use of parameter, including any warnings or suggestions.
6. Unit of measurement of value managed by parameter.
The unit of measurement can be unique or depend on other configuration choices, for example, the unit of measurement of temperature, which can be set in degrees Centigrade or Fahrenheit. Not all parameters require the use of units of measurement.
7. Description of parameter values or information that can be read or written, as appropriate.
8. Value that the parameter can have. Value can be two types: discrete or pertaining to an interval of values, typically numerical. For a discrete value, all possible values are listed as they appear on the controller display. For intervals of values, the minimum and maximum parameter values are shown.
9. Any additional description of value of individual parameter.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 56
Password
Acronym
INFO
Scrolling message
INSTRUMENT STATUS Level 1
Description
Gives information on controller state and HW configuration.
Parameter Pag.
Parameter Pag.
Parameter Pag.
SW.VER
Software version
CODE
Identifying code of controller
850.LV
Model of controller
CT1+2 x.IN.DG
Digital input available
Out1
Current transformer input available
Type of output 1
ERR.1
Main input error
ERR.2
Auxiliary input error
RS485
RS485 serial port available
MAC.E
Controller Ethernet
Address
ERR.3
Auxiliary input error 2
(IN3)
M.ERR.x
Math function block x* error
IO.AUX
Aux I/Os available
IO.RELE
Auxiliary digital I/Os available
SAP.C
SEr.n
SAP code
Serial number of controller
PS.MAI
Sensor power supply available for main input
PS.AUX
Sensor power supply available for auxiliary input
CONTR
Type of controller
FUNC.B
Logic and Math functions option available
Out2
Out3
Type of output 2
Type of output 3
CALEN
Calendar Available
IN.AUX
Auxiliary input available
I.AUX2
Auxiliary input 2 available
OUT.AN
Analog output available
OUT4.S
Number of switchings output 4
INDG.S
Digital input switchings number
T.DAYS
Total working days
P.DAYS
Partial working days
T.INT
Internal temperature of controller
T.MIN
Minimum internal temperature of the controller
T.MAX
Maximum internal temperature of the controller tiME dAtE
Internal time
Internal date
Out4
Type of output 4
OUT1.S
Number of switchings output 1
59
OUT2.S
OUT3.S
Number of switchings output 2
Number of switchings output 3
* Appare solo se la funzione è disponibile nel regolatore.
** Appare solo se l’uscita 1 è di tipo relè o logica.
*** Appare solo se è disponibile la relativa uscita ed è di tipo relè o logica.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 57
Acronym Scrolling message
SW.VER
SOFTWARE VERSION
The parameter shows the version (major.minor) of the controller software.
Unit of measurement: -
Options: -
Acronym
CODE
Scrolling message
INSTRUMENT ID CODE FOR SERIAL COMM
The parameter shows identifying code of the device for serial communication.
Unit of measurement: -
Options: 0...247
Submenu Attributes
INFO R
Submenu Attributes
INFO R
Acronym Scrolling message
ERR.1
INPUT ERROR
The parameter shows error detected by the main input.
Unit of measurement: -
Options: Lou = Value below minimum scale limit
HIGH = Value above maximum scale limit
Err
Sbr
= PT100 in short circuit or value below minimum limit
(for example TC with wrong connection)
= Sensor break or value above maximum limit
ECAL = Calibration error
EAdC = AD converter error
Submenu Attributes
INFO R
Acronym
ERR.2
INPUT ERROR
Scrolling message
The parameter displays the error (if present) detected on the optional auxiliary input (if available).
Submenu Attributes
INFO R
Unit of measurement: -
Options: Lou = Value below minimum scale limit
HIGH = Value above maximum scale limit
Err = PT100 in short circuit or value below minimum limit
(for example TC with wrong connection)
Sbr = Sensor break or value above maximum limit
ECAL = Calibration error
EAdC = AD converter error
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 58
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
ERR.3
INPUT ERROR
The parameter displays the error (if present) detected on the optional auxiliary input 2 (if available).
INFO R
Unit of measurement: -
Options: Lou = Value below minimum scale limit
HIGH = Value above maximum scale limit
Err
Sbr
= PT100 in short circuit or value below minimum limit
(for example TC with wrong connection)
= Sensor break or value above maximum limit
ECAL = Calibration error
EAdC = AD converter error
Acronym Scrolling message
M.ERR.x* MATH FUNCTION BLOCK x ERROR
Submenu
INFO
Attributes
R
The parameter displays the error (if present) detected on math function block (MFB) x* only when MFB.x* has been configured.
Unit of measurement: -
Options: Lou = Value of an MFB input is below minimum scale limit
HIGH = Value of an MFB input is above maximum scale limit
Err
Sbr
= PT100 in short circuit or value of an MFB input is below minimum scale limit
= Sensor break or value of an MFB input is above maximum scale limit
CALC = MFB calculation error
O.Lou
= Value of MFB output is below minimum scale limit
Acronym
SAP.C
SAP ORDER CODE
Scrolling message
The parameter shows the product number (Fxxxxxx).
Unit of measurement : -
Options : -
Acronym Scrolling message
SEr.n
SERIAL NUMBER
The parameter shows the serial number of the controller (number shown on data plate).
The serial number is displayed in the form yy.ww nnnn , where yy = last two digits of year of production ww = week of production nnnn = progressive in week of production
Unit of measurement : -
Options : -
Submenu Attributes
INFO R
Submenu Attributes
INFO R
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 59
Acronym Scrolling message xxxxx MODEL
The parameter shows the model of the controller.
xxxxx indicates the controller model (850LV, 850HV, 1650LV, 1650HV, 1850LV, 1850HV).
Unit of measurement : -
Options : 850.LV
= 850 controller powered at 20...27 VAC/VDC
850.HV
= 850 controller powered at 100...240 VAC/VDC
165.LV
= 1650 controller powered at 20...27 VAC/VDC
165.HV
= 1650 controller powered at 100...240 VAC/VDC
185.LV
= 1850 controller powered at 20...27 VAC/VDC
185.HV
= 1850 controller powered at 100...240 VAC/VDC
Submenu Attributes
INFO R
Acronym xxxxx MODEL OPTION
Scrolling message
The parameter shows the type (xxxxx) of function of the controller.
Submenu
INFO
Unit of measurement : -
Options : CONTR = The device functions only as a controller
PROGR = The device functions as a programmer and controller
VALVE = The device functions as a controller with valve control
PR+VA = The device functions as a programmer and controller with valve control
Attributes
R
Acronym Scrolling message
FUNC.B
LOGIC AND MATH FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE
Submenu
INFO
If present, the parameter indicates that the Logic and Math Functions option is installed on the controller.
Attributes
R
Unit of measurement : -
Options : -
Acronym Scrolling message
CALEN CALENDAR AVAILABLE
If present, this parameter indicates that the calendar option is installed in the controller.
Unit of measurement: -
Options: -
Acronym
IN.AUX
Scrolling message
AUXILIARY INPUT AVAILABLE
If present, the parameter indicates that an auxiliary input is installed on the controller.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : -
Submenu Attributes
INFO R
Submenu Attributes
INFO R
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 60
Acronym Scrolling message
I.AUX
AUXILIARY INPUT 2 AVAILABLE
If present, the parameter indicates that an auxiliary input 2 is installed on the controller.
Unit of measurement: -
Options: -
Submenu Attributes
INFO R
Acronym Scrolling message
OUT.AN
ANALOG OUTPUT AVAILABLE
Submenu
INFO
Attributes
R
If present, the parameter indicates that one or two analog outputs, configurable in voltage or current, are installed on the controller.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OUT.A1
O.A1+2
= The device has 1 analog output
= The device has 2 analog outputs
Acronym
CTx
Scrolling message
CURRENT TRASFORMER AVAILABLE
Submenu
INFO
If present, the parameter indicates that one or more current transformer inputs are installed on the controller.
Attributes
R
Unit of measurement : -
Options : CT1+2 = The device has 2 current transformer inputs
Acronym x.IN.DG
DIGITAL INPUT AVAILABLE
Scrolling message
If present, the parameter indicates how many digital inputs are installed on the controller.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : 3.IN.DG
5.IN.DG
= 3 digital inputs installed on the controller.
= 5 digital inputs installed on the controller.
Submenu Attributes
INFO R
Acronym Scrolling message
RS485 FIELDBUS AVAILABLE
If present, the parameter indicates that an RS485 is installed on the controller.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : -
Submenu Attributes
INFO R
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 61
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
MAC.E
INFO R
If present, this parameter indicates that the controller has an Ethernet communication module. The parameter shows the physical MAC address of the Ethernet in the scrolling message.
The information is shown in the format xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx.
Unit of measurement: -
Options: -
Acronym
8.I/O 8.I/O EXPANSION AVAILABLE
Scrolling message Submenu
INFO
Attributes
R
If present, the parameter indicates that the 8 digital input/output expansion board is installed on the controller (model
1850 only).
Unit of measurement : -
Options : -
Acronym
8.RELY
Scrolling message
8 RELAY EXPANSION AVAILABLE
Submenu
INFO
Attributes
If present, the parameter indicates that the 8 relay expansion board is installed on the controller (model 1850 only).
R
Unit of measurement : -
Options : -
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
PS.MAI
MAIN SENSOR POWER SUPPLY AVAILABLE INFO R
If present, the parameter indicates that the controller has a transmitter power supply on the main input (model 850 only).
Unit of measurement : -
Options : VT1 = Power supply for 24V transmitter.
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
PS.AUX
AUX SENSOR POWER SUPPLY AVAILABLE INFO R
If present, the parameter indicates that the controller has a transmitter power supply or potentiometer power supply on the auxiliary input.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : VT2 = Power supply for 24V transmitter.
VP1 = 1V potentiometer power supply.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 62
Acronym
Out1 OUTPUT TYPE
Scrolling message
The parameter specifies the type of output 1.
Submenu Attributes
INFO R
Unit of measurement : -
Options : RELAY = Relay output
DIGIT = 24 V logic output
CONT.A
= Continuous output configurable in current and voltage (model 850 only).
CONT.C
= Continuous output in current (models 1650 and 1850 only).
Acronym
Out2 OUTPUT TYPE
Scrolling message Submenu
INFO
If present, the parameter indicates that output 2 is available on the controller and specifies the type.
Attributes
R
Unit of measurement : -
Options : RELAY
DIGIT
MOS
= Relay output
= 24 V logic output
= Optomos isolated logic output
Acronym
Out3 OUTPUT TYPE
Scrolling message Submenu
INFO
If present, the parameter indicates that output 3 is available on the controller and specifies the type.
Attributes
R
Unit of measurement : -
Options : RELAY
DIGIT
MOS
VT24
TRIAC
= Relay output
= 24 V logic output
= Optomos isolated logic output
= Triac output (only for model 850)
= Power supply output for transmitter (models 1650 and 1850 only).
Acronym
Out4 OUTPUT TYPE
Scrolling message Submenu
INFO
If present, the parameter indicates that output 4 is available on the controller and specifies the type.
Attributes
R
Unit of measurement : -
Options : RELAY
DIGIT
TRIAC
= Relay output
= 24V logic output (model 850 only)
= Triac output (only for models 1650 and 1850)
Acronym
OUT1.S
NUMBER X 1000 OF CYCLES
Scrolling message
If output 1 is relay or logic, the parameter shows the number of switchings (in thousands).
Unit of measurement : Number (× 1000)
Options : -
Submenu Attributes
INFO R
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 63
Acronym
OUT2.S
NUMBER X 1000 OF CYCLES
Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
INFO
If output 2 is available on the controller, the parameter shows the number of switchings (in thousands).
R
Unit of measurement : Number (× 1000)
Options : -
Acronym
OUT3.S
NUMBER X 1000 OF CYCLES
Scrolling message Submenu
INFO
Attributes
R
If output 3 is available on the controller, and if it is relay or logic, the parameter shows the number of switchings (in thousands).
Unit of measurement : Number (× 1000)
Options : -
Acronym
OUT4.S
NUMBER X 1000 OF CYCLES
Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
INFO
If output 4 is available on the controller, the parameter shows the number of switchings (in thousands).
R
Unit of measurement : Number (× 1000)
Options : -
Acronym
INDG.S
Scrolling message
NUMBER OF DIGITAL INPUT CYCLES
Submenu
INFO
Attributes
R
If a digital input with the F.in=CY.CNT function is configured on the controller, the parameter shows the number of switchings performed.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : -
Acronym
T.DAYS
TOTAL DAYS OF OPERATION
Scrolling message Submenu
INFO
Attributes
R
The parameter shows total number of working days of the controller since first power-on. Each working day equals 24 hours of actual functioning.
Unit of measurement : Day
Options : 0...9999
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 64
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
P.DAYS
PARTIAL DAYS OF OPERATION INFO R
The parameter shows the number of working days of the controller since the last counter reset, Each working day equals
24 hours of actual functioning.
The counter can be reset with the Us.cal function.
Unit of measurement : Day
Options : 0...9999
Acronym
T.INT
INTERNAL TEMPERATURE
Scrolling message
The parameter shows the instantaneous internal temperature of the controller.
Unit of measurement : °C
Options : -
Submenu Attributes
INFO R
Acronym Scrolling message
T.MIN
MIN INTERNAL TEMPERATURE
The parameter shows the minimum internal temperature of the controller measured during work.
Submenu Attributes
INFO R
Unit of measurement : °C
Options : -
Acronym Scrolling message
T.MAX
MAX INTERNAL TEMPERATURE
The parameter shows the maximum internal temperature of the controller measured during work.
Submenu Attributes
INFO R
Unit of measurement : °C
Options : -
Acronym tiME
Scrolling message Submenu
INFO
Attributes
R
The parameter shows the internal time in 24-hour format. Hours, minutes and seconds are shown with scrolling text: hours, minutes and seconds.
Unit of measurement : hh:mm:ss
Options : -
Acronym dAtE
Scrolling message Submenu
INFO
Attributes
R
The parameter shows the complete internal date of the controller: month, day, year, day of week, with scrolling text.
Unit of measurement : MM / DD / YYYY
Options : -
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 65
Acronym
INFO.E
Scrolling message
ETHERNET STATUS
Submenu
Level 1
Attributes
Supplies various information on the state of Ethernet communications.
Parameter
VERS.E
Ethernet software version
Pag.
ty.S.E
Ethernet assignment mode status
Con.E
Ethernet connection status
Lin.E
Ethernet link status
SPd.E
Ethernet speed status
IPE
Ethernet IP address
Sub.E
Ethernet Subnet mask
Gat.E
Ethernet Gateway address
StA.E
Ethernet network status
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 66
Acronym Scrolling message
VERS.E
ETHERNET SOFTWARE VERSION
This parameter displays the software version (major.minor) on the controller’s Ethernet card.
Unit of measurement: -
Options : -
Submenu Attributes
INFO.E
R
Acronym ty.S.E
Scrolling message
ETHERNET ASSIGNMENT MODE STATUS
Submenu
INFO.E
Attributes
This parameter shows the assignment mode of the Ethernet IP address, subnet mask and gateway parameters.
R
Unit of measurement: -
Options : FIXED
DHCP
= Manually entered parameters are used
= Parameters received from the network DHCP server are used
Acronym Scrolling message
Con.E
CONNECTION STATUS
This parameter shows the status of the controller’s Ethernet connection.
Unit of measurement: -
Options : NO.CON
= No connection
CONNE = Active connection
DUP.IP
= Duplicate IP address
Acronym Scrolling message
Lin.E
ETHERNET LINK STATUS
This parameter shows the status of the controller’s Ethernet connection
Unit of measurement: -
Options : UP = Rete attiva
DOWN = Rete non attiva
Submenu Attributes
INFO.E
R
Submenu Attributes
INFO.E
R
Acronym
SPd.E
ETHERNET SPEED STATUS
Scrolling message
This parameter shows the status of the controller’s Ethernet connection
Unit of measurement: -
Options : NONE = Speed not detected
10/H = 10Mbps Half Duplex
10/F = 10Mbps Full Duplex
100/H = 100Mbps Half Duplex
100/F = 100Mbps Full Duplex
Submenu Attributes
INFO.E
R
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 67
Acronym Scrolling message
IP.E
-
This parameter shows the IP address identifying the controller on the Ethernet network.
This information is displayed in the form of a scrolling message with the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Submenu Attributes
INFO.E
R
Unit of measurement: -
Options : -
Acronym
Sub.E
-
Scrolling message
This parameter shows the Subnet mask identifying the controller on the Ethernet network.
This information is displayed in the form of a scrolling message with the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Submenu Attributes
INFO.E
R
Unit of measurement: -
Options : -
Acronym
GAt.E
-
Scrolling message
This parameter shows the Gateway adress identifying the controller on the Ethernet network.
This information is displayed in the form of a scrolling message with the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Submenu Attributes
INFO.E
R
Unit of measurement: -
Options : -
Acronym Scrolling message
StA.E
ETHERNET STATUS
This parameter shows connection status identifying the controller on the Ethernet network.
Unit of measurement: -
Opzioni : OK = Nessun errore
FAIL.N = NTP server not available
Submenu Attributes
INFO.E
R
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 68
Acronym
MASTE
Scrolling message
MASTER ACTUAL DATA
Password
Level 1
Description
It provides information relating to the status of the Modbus Master communication and provides to configure and set the 20 remote parameters definable via GF_eXpress.
The submenu appears if the model has a serial communication port. The
Modbus Master has been updated at least one remote parameter.
Parameter
StAt
Stato della comunicazione Master Modbus
Pag.
Parameter
ERR.07
Communication error
Master 7
Pag.
Parameter
ERR.14
Communication error
Master 14
Pag.
MAS.01
Valore comunicazione
Master 1
MAS.08
Valore comunicazione
Master 8
MAS.15
Valore comunicazione
Master 15
ERR.01
Communication error
Master 1
ERR.08
Communication error
Master 8
ERR.15
Communication error
Master 15
MAS.02
Valore comunicazione
Master 2
ERR.02
Communication error
Master 2
MAS.03
Valore comunicazione
Master 3
ERR.03
Errore comunicazione
Master 3
MAS.04
Valore comunicazione
Master 4
ERR.04
Communication error
Master 4
MAS.05
Valore comunicazione
Master 5
ERR.05
Communication error
Master 5
MAS.06
Valore comunicazione
Master 6
ERR.06
Communication error
MAS.07
Valore comunicazione
Master 7
MAS.09
Valore comunicazione
Master 9
ERR.09
Communication error
Master 9
MAS.10
Valore comunicazione
Master 10
ERR.10
Communication error
Master 10
MAS.11
Valore comunicazione
Master 11
ERR.11
Communication error
Master 11
MAS.12
Valore comunicazione
Master 12
ERR.12
Communication error
Master 12
MAS.13
Valore comunicazione
Master 13
ERR.13
Communication error
Master 13
MAS.14
Valore comunicazione
Master 14
MAS.16
Valore comunicazione
Master 16
ERR.16
Communication error
Master 16
MAS.17
Valore comunicazione
Master 17
ERR.17
Communication error
Master 17
MAS.18
Valore comunicazione
Master 18
ERR.18
Communication error
Master 18
MAS.19
Valore comunicazione
Master 19
ERR.19
Communication error
Master 19
MAS.20
Valore comunicazione
Master 20
ERR.20
Communication error
Master 20
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 69
Acronym Scrolling message
StAt MASTER STATUS
This parameter shows the status of the Master Modbus communication function.
Submenu
MASTER
Unit of measurement: -
Options : RUN = Communication active
M.ERR
= Communication error (at least one invalid response message)
TIM.OU
= Communication timeout (at least one response message not received)
DISAB = Communication disabled
Attributes
R
Acronym Scrolling message
MAS.xx
(1)
The parameter shows and sets (if R/W) the remote value.
The parameter is visible only if configured via GF_eXpress.
Unit of measurement: -
Options : (3)
(1) Descizione definita tramite GF_eXpress
(2) Tipo dato definito tramite GF_eXpress
(3) Intervallo di impostazione definito tramite GF_eXpress
(*) xx = da 01 a 20
Acronym Scrolling message
ERR.xx
MASTER ERROR
The parameter shows the status of the remote parameter in the event of malfunctioning.
The parameter is visible only if configured via GF_eXpress.
Unit of measurement: -
Options : m.ERR = Error response message tim.O = Timeout response message
(*) xx = da 01 a 20
Submenu Attributes
MASTER (2)
Submenu Attributes
MASTER R
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 70
Acronym
RECIP
Scrolling message
RECIPES
CONFIGURATION
Password
Level 1
Description
Lets you display 5 recipes of 25 parameters each, userdefinable with the GF_eXpress template.
The Recipes function must previously be enabled with the
EN.FUN menu, parameter RECP.N <> 0.
Parameter
RECP.N
Selecting a recipe
Pag.
ACR01*
Parameter 1 recipe
( ** )
ACRxx*
Parameter xx recipe
(*) The acronym shown is that of the parameter set with GF_eXpress at element xx of the recipe template.
(**) The description shown is the one for the parameter set with GF_eXpress at element xx of the recipe template.
Acronym
RECP.N
RECIPE NUMBER
Scrolling message
Parameter n lets you select the recipe to be displayed.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : 1...5
= Number of recipe to display
Submenu Attributes
RECIP R W
Acronym
ACRxx* RECIP.1 ***
Scrolling message
Lets you display the value of parameter xx of the recipe selected with RECP.N.
The parameter appears if it is enabled for the recipe via the GF_eXpress application.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : = -
Submenu
RECIP
Attributes
(*) The acronym shown is that of the parameter set with GF_eXpress at element xx of the recipe template.
(**) xx = 01...25
(***) The description shown is the one for the parameter set with GF_eXpress at element xx of the recipe template.
R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 71
Acronimo
PR.OPT
Messaggio a scorrimento
PROGRAMMER
CONFIGURATION
Password d’accesso
Livello 1
Descrizione
Lets you configure the 16 programs manageable by the programmer.
The parameters are configured for each program to be used.
The Programmer function must previously be enabled with the
MODE.1 and/or MODE.2 menus, assigned, respectively, with
PID.1 and PID.2, with parameter PROGR = On.
If “Simplified Programmer” mode is active (S.PROG parameter set to EN.FUN )), the controller can manage 12 programs, each of which has up to 16 configurable steps.
For more information on configuring the programmer, see
paragraph “5.13. Setpoint programmer” on page 214.
Parameter
PR.OP.N
Selecting program
Pag.
FI.STP
Number of first step assigned to program
LA.STP
Number of last step assigned to program
Strt
Restart mode
RST.SP
Type of control after program restart
WAIT.S
Option to start execution of program
End
Action at end of program
LIMIT
Message associated at the end of the program
MSG.EN
Messaggio associato alla fine del programma
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 72
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
PR.OP.N
PROGRAM NUMBER PR.OPT
R W
The parameter lets you select the program to be configured. During normal functioning, the controller shows the number of the program running and its state P.STAT, viewable in the User Configuration menu.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1...16
Acronym
FI.STP
Scrolling message
PR.OPT.1 (o PR.OPT.2… PR.OPT.16) FIRST STEP OF PROGRAM
Submenu
PR.OPT
The parameter lets you select the first step of the program.
This parameter is visible only if “Simplified Programmer” is deactivated (S.PROG parameter set to OFF)
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement: Number
Options : 1...192
Acronym
LA.STP
Scrolling message
PR.OPT.1 (o PR.OPT.2… PR.OPT.16) LAST STEP OF PROGRAM
Submenu
PR.OPT
The parameter lets you select the last step of the program.
This parameter is visible only if “Simplified Programmer” is deactivated (S.PROG parameter set to OFF)
Attributes
R W
ATTENTION: LA.STP cannot be less than FI.STP.
Unit of measurement: Number
Options : FI.STP...192
Acronym
Strt
Scrolling message
PR.OPT.1 (o PR.OPT.2… PR.OPT.16) RESTART TYPE AFTER POWER-ON
The parameter defines program restart mode after Power-on.
Submenu
PR.OPT
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : FI.STP
= Program restarts from first step, with setpoint attributed or equal to PV based on the
following parameter RST.SP
ST.STP
= Program restarts from condition in which it stopped (last step in execution, setpoint
RSRCH = Program restarts with search for step (see programmer function...).
Acronym
RST.SP
Scrolling message
PR.OPT.1 (or PR.OPT.2… PR.OPT.16) CONTROL TYPE AFTER RESET
Submenu
PR.OPT
The parameter defines the type of control that the controller runs after a reset while waiting for restart.
With RST.SP = On the setpoint takes the value of PV with reset command active.
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= The controller continues the control, maintaining the active setpoint
= The setpoint assumes the value of the process variable (PV) by imposing the control
output to zero.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 73
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
WAIT.S
PR.OPT.1 (or PR.OPT.2… PR.OPT.16) DEF OF START EXEC PROGRAM PR.OPT
R W
The parameter enables or disables the automatic execution of the time base reset the program after a switching STOP /
START.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= Disables automatic execution
= Enables automatic execution
Acronym Scrolling message
End PR.OPT.1 (or PR.OPT.2… PR.OPT.16) CONDITION AT END OF CYCLE
The parameter defines what happens when the program in execution ends (last step done).
Submenu
PR.OPT
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : NONE = Nothing happens. The controller continues control
RESE = switching in the RESET state, the control type will depend on the parameter RST.SP
LOOP = The program restarts from the first step
OFF = The program ends and puts the controller in the OFF position, with control output to zero
Acronym
LIMIT
Scrolling message
PR.OPT.1 (or PR.OPT.2… PR.OPT.16) DEF OF STEP TIMING LIMITATION
Submenu Attributes
PR.OPT
The parameter enables or disables limitation of step duration. It is useful for quick execution of the program.
Eventuale HBB è disabilitato e l’uscita di controllo è forzate al valore di FAULT.
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= Disables limitation of step duration
= Enables limitation of step duration: limits ramp times to 20 seconds and hold times to 10
seconds, in order to have a step time that never exceeds 30 seconds.
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
MSG.EN
PR.OPT.1 (o PR.OPT.2… PR.OPT.16) SCROLLING MESSAGE AT THE END PR.OPT
R W
The parameter shows and sets the number of the message assigned to the end of the program, i.e., the message that will be scrolled on the display at the end of the program.
The message is displayed if (and only if) parameter End is NONE or Off.
If the parameter is set to “0” no message will be displayed.
For more information on scrolling messages, see paragraph “3.1.2.2. Scrolling messages” on page 44.
Unit of measurement : Message number
Options : 0...25 (con LAnG=LANG1 oppure LANG2 oppure LANG3)
0…75 (con LAnG=NONE)
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 74
Acronym
PR.STP
Scrolling message
STEP DEFINITION
Password
Level 1
Description
Lets you configure the steps that make up the program.
The parameters are configured for each step to be used.
The Programmer function must first be enabled with the
MODE menu, parameter PROGR = On.
For more information on configuring the programmer, see
paragraph “5.13. Setpoint programmer” on page 214.
Parameter Pag.
Parameter Pag.
Parameter Pag.
PR.NUM
Program selection (only if “Simplified Programmer” mode is active
S.PROG = ON nel menu EN.FUN)
S.SP.EN
Enabling retransmission of setpoint to analog output
EVN.R.4
Event 4 during step ramp
PR.ST.N
Programming step
SETP
Programming step setpoint
SUN.SP
Setpoint value of slaved controller
ST.END
Last step of program (only if
“Simplified Programmer” mode is active – S.PROG parameter = ON in EN.FUN menu)
S.RM.EN
Enabling ramp for slaved controller
ENBL.1
Consent 1 to execute step
EVN.H.1
Event 1 during step hold
EVN.H.2
Event 2 during step hold
EVN.H.3
Event 3 during step hold
RAMP.T
Step time ramp
ENBL.2
Consent 2 to execute step
EVN.H.4
Event 4 during step hold
HOLD.T
Hold time in step
HBB
Enable Hold Back Band function
ENBL.3
Consent 3 to execute step
ENBL.4
Consent 4 to execute step
GROP.R
Group of parameters assigned to ramp
GROP.H
Group of parameters assigned to hold
BAND
Maximum deviation for HBB
EN.ST.N
Other programmer step as consent
MSG.R
Message assigned to ramp
HBB.R
Enabling HBB during ramp
EVN.R.1
Event 1 during step ramp
MSG.H
Message assigned to hold
HBB.H
Enabling HBB during hold
EVN.R.2
Event 2 during step ramp
HBB2
Enabling HBB with respect to the auxiliary input
EVN.R.3
Event 3 during step ramp
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 75
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
PR.NUM
PROGRAMMER ACTUAL PROGRAM PR.STP
R W
This parameter shows and sets the program number that you intend to modify. Appears only if “Simplified Programmer” mode is selected - parameter S.PROG = ON).
Unit of measurement : Program number
Options : 1...12
Acronym Scrolling message
PR.ST.N
PROGRAMMER ACTUAL STEP
Submenu
PR.STP
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the number of the programming step being configured. Appears only if simplified programming mode is selected.
Unit of measurement: Number step
Options : 1...192 if S.PROG = OFF; 16 if S.PROG = ON (“Simplified Programmer” mode)
Acronym
ST.END
Scrolling message
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) END STEP OF THE PROGRAM se modalità “Programmatore semplificato” disattiva; (o PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16) END
STEP OF THE PROGRAM se modalità “Programmatore semplificato” attiva)
Submenu
PR.STP
Attributes
R W
This parameter shows and sets the current step as the last step in the program selected by the PR.NUM. parameter.
Appears only if simplified programming mode is selected.
Unit of measurement: -
Options : No
YES
= the current step is not the last in the program selected by the PR.NUM parameter
= the current step is the last in the program selected by the PR.NUM parameter
Acronym rEFE REFERENCE PROGRAMMER
Scrolling message
The parameter shows and sets the step reference programmer.
Unit of measurement : Step number
Options : BOTH = Entrambi I programmatori
PROG1
PROG2
= Programmer 1 only
= Programmer 2 only
Submenu Attributes
PR.STP
R W
Acronym
SETP
Scrolling message
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) SETPOINT se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16 SETPOINT se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
The parameter shows and sets the setpoint for the current programming step.
Unit of measurement : °C, °F, % based on chosen scale
Options : -1999...9999
Submenu Attributes
PR.STP
R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 76
Acronym Scrolling message
RAMP.T
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) RAMP TIME se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16 RAMP TIME se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
Submenu
PR.STP
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the time taken to go from the previous setpoint to the setpoint of the current programming step.
Unit of measurement : hh.mm or mm.ss (hours.minutes or minutes.seconds). Depends on time base set with
submenu MODE, parameter t.Pro
Options : 00.00...99.59
Acronym Scrolling message
HOLD.T
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) HOLD TIME se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16 HOLD TIME se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
The parameter shows and sets the time the program waits before going to the next step.
Submenu
PR.STP
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement: hh.mm or mm.ss (ore.minuti o minuti.secondi). Depends on time base set with submenu MODE,
parameter t.Pro
Options : 00.00...99.59
Acronym
HBB
Scrolling message
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) HOLD BACK BAND FUNCTION se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16 HOLD
BACK BAND FUNCTION se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
The parameter enables and disables the Hold Back Band function
Submenu
PR.STP
Attributes
R W
The HBB function checks that the variable remains in the required tolerance interval. If the maximum deviation is exceeded, the program time base is stopped. The function is settable independently for each programming step. In addition, it can be enabled for the time ramp only, for the hold time only, or for both.
Unit of measurement: -
Options : OFF
On
= Disables HBB function
= Enables HBB function (band symmetrical to SP)
On.P
= Enables HBB function (band positive only with respect to SP)
On.n
= Enables HBB function (band negative only with respect to SP)
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
BAND PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) HOLD BACK BAND VALUE se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16 HOLD
BACK BAND VALUE se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
PR.STP
R W
If the HBB function is enabled, the parameter shows and sets the maximum deviation allowed for PV compared to SV.
Unit of measurement: °C, °F, % based on chosen scale
Options : 0...999
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 77
Acronym
HBB.R
Scrolling message
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) ENABLE HOLD BACK BAND DURING
STEP RAMP se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…
PR.STP.16 ENABLE HOLD BACK BAND DURING STEP RAMP se modalità
“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
If the HBB function is enabled, the parameter enables and disables it during the step ramp time.
Submenu Attributes
PR.STP
R W
Unit of measurement: -
Options : OFF
On
= Disables HBB function during ramp time
= Enables HBB function during ramp time
Acronym Scrolling message
HBB.H
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) ENABLE HOLD BACK BAND DURING
STEP HOLD se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…
PR.STP.16 ENABLE HOLD BACK BAND DURING STEP HOLD se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
If the HBB function is enabled, the parameter enables and disables it during the step ramp time.
Submenu Attributes
PR.STP
R W
Unit of measurement: -
Options : OFF
On
= Disables HBB function during ramp time
= Enables HBB function during ramp time
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
HBB2 PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) HOLD BACK BAND FUNCTION
REFERRED TO AUX INP se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16 HOLD BACK BAND FUNCTION REFERRED TO AUX
INP se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
PR.STP
R W
If the HBB function is enabled, the parameter enables and disables it with respect to the remote setpoint input, which can be enabled on the MODE submenu, SP.REM parameter = On
When the function is enabled with respect to the auxiliary input, if deviation PV1-IN2 exceeds BAND value, the program’s time base is blocked.
The parameter is significant only if the step pertaining to PROGR.1 with optional auxiliary input is present and PID.2 and
PROGR.2 are not enabled (parameter PID2.E=OFF and PROGR=On1 on EN.FUN submenu).
Unit of measurement: -
Options : OFF
On
= Disables HBB function with respect to remote setpoint input
= Enables HBB function with respect to remote setpoint input
Acronym Scrolling message
S.SP.EN
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) SUBDUED SETPOINT RETRANSMITTED
ENABLE se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.
STP.16 SUBDUED SETPOINT RETRANSMITTED ENABLE se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
Submenu
PR.STP
Attributes
R W
The parameter enables and disables retransmission of the setpoint value to other slaved controllers.
The setpoint value is transmitted by analog output A1 or A2 if configured on submenu OUT.AN, parameter Func=SLV.S1 or Func=SLV.S2.
Unit of measurement: -
Options : OFF
On
= Disables retransmission
= Enables retransmission
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 78
Acronym Scrolling message
SUB.SP
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) SUBDUED SETPOINT ASSOCIATED TO
STEP se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.
STP.16 SUBDUED SETPOINT ASSOCIATED TO STEP se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
Submenu
PR.STP
Attributes
R W
If the S.SP.EN function is enabled, the parameter shows and sets the setpoint value to be retransmitted as a percentage of the controller setpoint value
EXAMPLE If the setpoint of the main controller is 180°C and you want the setpoint of the secondary controller to be
85°C, then SUB.SP should be set to 47.2 (47.2% of 180 is about 85).
Unit of measurement : %
Options : 0.0...100.0
Acronym Scrolling message
S.RM.EN
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) SUBDUED SETPOINT RAMP ENABLE se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16
SUBDUED SETPOINT RAMP ENABLE se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
Submenu
PR.STP
Attributes
If the S.SP.EN function is enabled, the parameter enables and disables the setpoint ramp for the slaved controller.
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= Disables setpoint ramp for slaved controller
= Enables setpoint ramp for slaved controller
Acronym
ENBL.1
Scrolling message
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) STEP ENABLE FOR STEP START se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16 STEP
ENABLE FOR STEP START se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
The parameter shows and sets consent 1 condition to enable execution of the step.
Submenu
PR.STP
Attributes
R W
The consents automatically check that certain conditions have been met before the program continues.
There are 4 different consents (1, 2, 3 and 4) and, at the start of the step, the state of each must match the programmed state.
Consents can be set via digital inputs, function block outputs, and the RS485 serial input.
If even one of the consents does not match the programmed state, the step is not executed.
If all consents are set to nonE, execution of the step is not conditioned and is always executed.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : nonE = Consent state is ignored, i.e., step is always executed
On
OFF
= Consent must be on to execute step
= Consent does not have to be on to execute step
Acronym
ENBL.2
Scrolling message
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) STEP ENABLE FOR STEP START se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16 STEP
ENABLE FOR STEP START se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
The parameter shows and sets consent 2 condition to enable execution of the step.
See ENBL.1 for details.
Submenu Attributes
PR.STP
R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 79
Acronym
ENBL.3
Scrolling message
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) STEP ENABLE FOR STEP START se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16 STEP
ENABLE FOR STEP START se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
The parameter shows and sets consent 3 condition to enable execution of the step.
See ENBL.1 for details.
Submenu Attributes
PR.STP
R W
Acronym
ENBL.4
Scrolling message
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) STEP ENABLE FOR STEP START se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16 STEP
ENABLE FOR STEP START se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
The parameter shows and sets consent 4 condition to enable execution of the step.
See ENBL.1 for details.
Submenu Attributes
PR.STP
R W
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
EN.ST.N
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) STEP FOR STEP START se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16 STEP FOR
STEP START se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
PR.STP
R W
The parameter shows and sets step n of the other programmer used as consent to execute the step of the programmer being configured.
Value n = 0 disables the function.
The parameter is present only with double setpoint programmer.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : 1...128
= Number for start step
Acronym Scrolling message
EVN.R.1
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) EVENT DURING STEP RAMP se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16 EVENT
DURING STEP RAMP se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
The parameter shows and sets the configuration of event 1 during the step ramp.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : nonE
On
OFF
= Event not modified
= Event becomes active
= Event becomes inactive
Submenu Attributes
PR.STP
R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 80
Acronym Scrolling message
EVN.R.2
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) EVENT DURING STEP RAMP se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16 EVENT
DURING STEP RAMP se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
The parameter shows and sets the configuration of event 2 during the step ramp
Unit of measurement : -
Options : nonE
On
OFF
= Event not modified
= Event becomes active
= Event becomes inactive
Submenu Attributes
PR.STP
R W
Acronym Scrolling message
EVN.R.3
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) EVENT DURING STEP RAMP se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16 EVENT
DURING STEP RAMP se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
The parameter shows and sets the configuration of event 3 during the step ramp
Unit of measurement : -
Options : nonE
On
OFF
= Event not modified
= Event becomes active
= Event becomes inactive
Submenu Attributes
PR.STP
R W
Acronym Scrolling message
EVN.R.4
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) EVENT DURING STEP RAMP se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16 EVENT
DURING STEP RAMP se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
The parameter shows and sets the configuration of event 4 during the step ramp
Unit of measurement : -
Options : nonE
On
OFF
= Event not modified
= Event becomes active
= Event becomes inactive
Submenu Attributes
PR.STP
R W
Acronym Scrolling message
EVN.H.1
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) EVENT DURING STEP HOLD se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16 EVENT
DURING STEP HOLD se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
The parameter shows and sets the configuration of event 1 during the step hold.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : nonE
On
OFF
= Event not modified
= Event becomes active
= Event becomes inactive
Submenu Attributes
PR.STP
R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 81
Acronym Scrolling message
EVN.H.2
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) EVENT DURING STEP HOLD se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16 EVENT
DURING STEP HOLD se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
The parameter shows and sets the configuration of event 2 during the step hold.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : nonE
On
OFF
= Event not modified
= Event becomes active
= Event becomes inactive
Submenu Attributes
PR.STP
R W
Acronym Scrolling message
EVN.H.3
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) EVENT DURING STEP HOLD se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16 EVENT
DURING STEP HOLD se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
The parameter shows and sets the configuration of event 3 during the step hold.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : nonE
On
OFF
= Event not modified
= Event becomes active
= Event becomes inactive
Submenu Attributes
PR.STP
R W
Acronym Scrolling message
EVN.H.4
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) EVENT DURING STEP HOLD se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16 EVENT
DURING STEP HOLD se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
The parameter shows and sets the configuration of event 4 during the step hold.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : nonE = Event not modified
On = Event becomes active
OFF = Event becomes inactive
Submenu Attributes
PR.STP
R W
Acronym Scrolling message
GROP.R
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) CONTROL PARAMETER GROUP DU-
RING STEP RAMP se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o
PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16 CONTROL PARAMETER GROUP DURING STEP RAMP se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
Submenu
PR.STP
The parameter shows and sets the group of control parameters assigned to the step during the ramp.
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...4
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 82
Acronym Scrolling message
GROP.H
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) CONTROL PARAMETER GROUP DU-
RING STEP HOLD se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o
PR.STP.1…PR.STP.16 CONTROL PARAMETER GROUP DURING STEP HOLD se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
Submenu
PR.STP
The parameter shows and sets the group of control parameters assigned to the step during the hold.
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...4
Acronym
MSG.R
Scrolling message
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) SCROLLING MESSAGE DURING STEP
RAMP se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.
STP.16 SCROLLING MESSAGE DURING STEP RAMP se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
Submenu
PR.STP
Attributes
R W
The parameter displays and sets the message number associated with the step during the ramp, which is the message that will appear on the display to scroll to the step you are configuring
Setting it to “0” will not show any messages.
Unit of measurement : ID number of the message
Options : 0...25 (with LAnG=LANG1 or LANG2 or LANG3)
0…75 (with LAnG=NONE)
Acronym
MSG.H
Scrolling message
PR.STP.1 (o PR.STP.2…PR.STP.192) SCROLLING MESSAGE DURING STEP
HOLD se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”disattiva; o PR.STP.1…PR.
STP.16 SCROLLING MESSAGE DURING STEP HOLD se modalità“Programmatore semplificato”attiva.
Submenu
PR.STP
Attributes
R W
The parameter displays and sets the message number associated with the step during the ramp, which is the message that will appear on the display to scroll to the step you are configuring
Setting it to “0” will not show any messages.
Unit of measurement : ID number of the message
Options : 0...25 (with LAnG=LANG1 or LANG2 or LANG3)
0…75 (with LAnG=NONE)
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 83
Acronym
INPUT
Scrolling message
INPUT CONFIG
Password
Level 1
Description
Lets you configure the controller’s analog inputs (main and auxiliary).
Parameter Pag.
Selecting the analog input
INP.N
F
Selecting sensor type
tYPE
F
Enabling SBR error
SBR.E
F
FUnC
F
Selecting auxiliary input function
Selecting linearization type
Lin
F
Unit
F
Selecting the displayed unit of measurement
Digital filter
FILT
F
FILT.D
F
Digital filter on
PV display
DEC.P
F
Number of decimals displayed
LO.SCL
F
Lower limit of scale
HI.SCL
Upper limit of scale
Parameter
OF.SCL
F
Scale offset correction
LO.SP
F
Lower limit for setpoint
HI.SP
F
Upper limit for setpoint
LO.AL
F
Lower limit for alarms
HI.AL
F
Upper limit for alarms
MSG.LO
F
Selecting the message assigned to Low
MSG.HI
F
Selecting the message assigned to HIGH
MSG.ER
F
Selecting the message assigned to Err
MSG.SB
Selecting the message assigned to Sbr
Pag.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 84
Analog input signal
Sensor type
TYPE
Signal linearization
LIN
Scale limits
LO.SCL
HI.SCL
Offset
OF.SCL
Decimal point
DEC.P
Unit of measurement
UNIT
Low pass filter
FILT
Setpoint scale limits
LO.SP
HI.SP
Absolute alarm scale limits
LO.AL
HI.AL
Acronym
INP.N
INPUT NUMBER
Scrolling message
The parameter shows and sets the identifying number of the analog input.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1...3
Input value ( IN.x
)
Process variable ( PV.x
)
Digital filter
FILT.D
Process variable shown on the display
Setpoint scale limits
Absolute alarm scale limits
Submenu Attributes
INPUT R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 85
Acronym
TYPE
Scrolling message
INPUT.1 (or INPUT.2) or INPUT.3 TYPE OF PROBE
Submenu
INPUT
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the sensor type of the main or auxiliary input.
The functions for calibrating Custom sensors are on the US.CAL menu.
When a 4...20 mA input is used and the current is less than 2 mA, an Err message is generated and the relay state specified with the FAUL.T parameters is activated.
The table shows the scale limits for each sensor type or input based on the set number of decimals.
Sensor type Sensor
Unit of measurement
Scale limits for
DEC.P = 0
Scale limits for
DEC.P = 1
Error @ 25°C
J
K
°C
°C
-210…1200
-270…1372
-199.9...999.9
-199.9...999.9
±0,05
±0,06
Thermocouple
R
S
T
C
D
B
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
-50…1768
-50…1768
-270…400
0…2315
0…2315
40…1820
-50.0...999.9
-50.0...999.9
-199.9...400.0
0.0...999.9
0.0...999.9
40.0…999.9
±0,02
±0,02
±0,04
±0,011
±0,023
±0,03
±0,19 per T<-200°C
Infrared characteristic of the Tc K model see note
E °C -270…1000 -199.9...999.9
L
L-GOST
U
G
N
Pt20Rh Pt40Rh
1
2
3
4
PT100
PT100 LIM
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
-200…900
-200…800
-200…600
0…2315
-270…1300
0…1888
10...70
60...120
115...165
140...260
-200...850
-50...250
-199.9...900.0
-199.9...800.0
-199.9...600.0
0.0…999.9
-199.9...999.9
0…999.9
10.0...70.0
60.0...120.0
115.0...165.0
140.0...260.0
-199.9...850.0
-50.0...250.0
±0,03 per T>-200°C
±0,09
±0,014
±0,135
±0,042
±0,047
±0,017
±0,06
±0,06
±0,06
±0,06
±0,062
±0,062 Thermoresistance
Voltage /Current
JPT100
0...60 mV
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
0...10 V
2...10 V
0...5 V
1...5 V
0...1 V
0...2,4V HI
0...1,2V HI
0...1V HI
RTD
0...60 mV
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
0...10 V
°C -200...600
-1999...9999
-199.9...600.0
-199.9...999.9
±0,062
-
Custom
2...10 V
0...5 V
1...5 V
0...1 V
0...2,4V HI
0...1,2V HI
0...1V HI
-1999...9999
-199.9...999.9
-
Note: the infrared temperature sensor has an output in voltage for direct connection to the input terminals of the temperature controller. An external thermometer is needed in order to correct the sensor error.
After identifying the work temperature range (for example, 140 – 260°C), set an SP near the minimum scale value, and after reaching it make a note of value A1 indicated by the instrument and of value A2 indicated by the external thermometer. Set an SP near the maximum scale value, and after reaching it make a note of value B1 indicated by the instrument and of value B2 indicated by the external thermometer.
Enable 4-point linearization (see Correcting 4-point input) and enter the four requested values (A1, B1 and A2, B2) .
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 86
Unit of measurement:
Options:
-
TYPE 1
J.TC
K.TC
R.TC
S.TC
T.TC
C.TC
D.TC
B.TC
E.TC
L.TC
L.GO.TC
= Thermocouple L.GOST
U.TC
G.TC
N.TC
PT2.TC
INFR1
INFR2
INFR3
INFR4
= Thermocouple J
= Thermocouple K
= Thermocouple R
= Thermocouple S
= Thermocouple T
= Thermocouple C
= Thermocouple D
= Thermocouple B
= Thermocouple E
= Thermocouple L
= Thermocouple U
= Thermocouple G
= Thermocouple N
= Thermocouple Pt20Rh / Pt40Rh
= IR type sensor 1
= IR type sensor 2
= IR type sensor 3
= IR type sensor 4 with model 850 (without option VT1), 1650 and 1850:
PT100
PT.LIM
JPT10
60MV
20MA
= Thermoresistance Pt100
= Thermoresistance Pt 100 limitated
= Thermoresistance JPT100
= Sensor 0...60 mV
4-20M
10V
2-10V
5V
1-5V
1V
0.2-1V
C.RTD
C.60MV
C.20MA
C.4-20
C.10V
C.2-10
C.5V
C.1-5V
C.1V
C.0.2-1
= Sensor 0...20 mA
= Sensor 4...20 mA
= Sensor 0...10 V
= Sensor 2...10 V
= Sensor 0...5 V
= Sensor 1...5 V
= Sensor 0...1 V
= Sensor 0,2...1 V
= Sensor RTD with custom calibration
= Sensor 0...60 mV with custom calibration
= Sensor 0...20 mA with custom calibration
= Sensor 4...20 mA with custom calibration
= Sensor 0...10 V with custom calibration
= Sensor 2...10 V with custom calibration
= Sensor 0...5 V with custom calibration
= Sensor 1...5 V with custom calibration
= Sensor 0...1 V with custom calibration
= Sensor 0,2...1 V with custom calibration with model 850 (with option VT1):
60MV = Sensor 0...60 mV
20MA
4-20M
10V
2-10V
= Sensor 0...20 mA
= Sensor 4...20 mA
= Sensor 0...10 V
= Sensor 2...10 V
= Sensor 0...5 V 5V
1-5V
1V
0.2-1V
C.RTD
C.60MV
C.20MA
= Sensor 1...5 V
= Sensor 0...1 V
= Sensor 0,2...1 V
= Sensor RTD with custom calibration
= Sensor 0...60 mV with custom calibration
= Sensor 0...20 mA with custom calibration
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 87
with model 850 (with option VT1):
C.4-20
C.10V
C.2-10
C.5V
C.1-5V
C.1V
C.0.2-1
= Sensor 4...20 mA with custom calibration
= Sensor 0...10 V with custom calibration
= Sensor 2...10 V with custom calibration
= Sensor 0...5 V with custom calibration
= Sensor 1...5 V with custom calibration
= Sensor 0...1 V with custom calibration
= Sensor 0,2...1 V with custom calibration
TYPE 2 without options VP o VT2,
J.TC
K.TC
R TC
S TC
T.TC
C.TC
D.TC
B.TC
= Thermocouple J
= Thermocouple K
= Thermocouple R
= Thermocouple S
= Thermocouple T
= Thermocouple C
= Thermocouple D
= Thermocouple B
E.TC
L TC
U.TC
= Thermocouple E
= Thermocouple L
L.GO.TC
= Thermocouple L.GOST
= Thermocouple U
= Thermocouple G G.TC
N.TC
PT2.TC
INFR1
INFR2
INFR3
INFR4
= Thermocouple N
= Thermocouple Pt20Rh / Pt40Rh
= IR type sensor 1
= IR type sensor 2
= IR type sensor 3
= IR type sensor 4 without options VP o VT2:
PT100
PT.LIM
JPT10
60MV
= Thermoresistance Pt100
= Thermoresistance Pt 100 limitata
= Thermoresistance JPT100
= Sensor 0...60 mV with options VP o VT2:
20MA
4-20M
10V
2-10V
5V
= Sensor 0...20 mA
= Sensor 4...20 mA
= Sensor 0...10 V
1-5V
1V
0.2-1V
= Sensor 2...10 V
= Sensor 0...5 V
= Sensor 1...5 V
= Sensor 0...1 V
= Sensor 0,2...1 V with options VP o VT2:
C.RTD
C.60MV
= Sensor RTD with custom calibration
= Sensor 0...60 mV with custom calibration with options VP o VT2:
C.20MA
= Sensor 0...20 mA with custom calibration
C.4-20
C.10V
C.2-10
C.5V
C.1-5V
C.1V
C.0.2-1
= Sensor 4...20 mA with custom calibration
= Sensor 0...10 V with custom calibration
= Sensor 2...10 V with custom calibration
= Sensor 0...5 V with custom calibration
= Sensor 1...5 V with custom calibration
= Sensor 0...1 V with custom calibration
= Sensor 0,2...1 V with custom calibration
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 88
TYPE 3
20MA
4-20M
10V
2-10V
5V
1-5V
= Sensor 0...20 mA
= Sensor 4...20 mA
= Sensor 0...10 V
= Sensor 2...10 V
= Sensor 0...5 V
= Sensor 1...5 V
2.4VHI
1.2VHI
1VHI
C.20MA
C.4-20
C.10V
C.2-10
C.5V
C.1-5V
C2.4VH
C1.2VH
= Sensor 0…2.4V high impedance
= Sensor 0…1.2V high impedance
= Sensor 0…1V high impedance
= Sensor 0...20 mA with custom calibration
= Sensor 4...20 mA with custom calibration
= Sensor 0...10 V with custom calibration
= Sensor 2...10 V with custom calibration
= Sensor 0...5 V with custom calibration
= Sensor 1...5 V with custom calibration
= Sensor 0...2.4 V high impedance with custom calibration
= Sensor 0...1.2 V high impedance with custom calibration
Acronym
SBR.E
Scrolling message
INPUT.1 (or INPUT.2) SBR ENABLE
Submenu
INPUT
Attributes
R W
Enables open thermocouple probe error detection, also permitting infrared sensor management with maximum 4Kohm output impedance.
This parameter only appears when a thermocouple type input is selected.
When OFF, the parameter will be forced to ON (see options) at each Power On
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF = Disable SBR alarm
On = Enable SBR alarm
On.t = Enable SBR alarm with timing
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 89
Acronym Scrolling message
FUnC FUNCTION OF AUX INPUT
The parameter shows and sets the function assigned to the auxiliary input.
The parameter is shown only for the auxiliary input.
Unit of measurement: -
Options : FUNC 2
NONE = No function (only IN2 display)
SETP = Remote setpoint of Process Value (PV1) for PID.1 (*)
POWER = Remote setpoint of Power for PID.1 (*)
RST.PW
= Reset power for PID.1
RATIO = Reference of ratio controller for PID.1 (**) if model has valve control:
VALV.P = Valve position signal
PV2 = Process Value (PV2) per PID.2
FUNC 3
NONE = Nessuna funzione (solo visualizzazione IN3)
SETP = Remote setpoint of Process Value (PV1) for PID.1 (*)
POWER = Remote setpoint of Power for PID.1 (*)
RST.PW
= Reset power for PID.
RATIO = Riferimento per regolatore di rapporto per PID.1 (**) if model has valve control:
VALV.P
= Segnale di posizione valvola
SETP2 = Remote setpoint of Process Value (PV2) for PID.2
POWE2 = Remote setpoint of Power for PID.2
RST.P2
= Reset power for PID.2
Submenu Attributes
INPUT R W
(*) Remote setpoint mode is obtained with function keys/digital inputs /Logic Function Blocks /serial after having enabled remote setpoint SP.rEM=On.
(**) In remote setpoint mode, the controller tends to maintain PV1 = SSP1 = IN2 (o IN3) x RATIO, where RATIO (range from
0.01 to 99.99) is the value of the ratio required between PV1 and IN2 (o IN3). It is calculated in manual switching manual
> automatic (with MA.AU = BUMPL) and can be modified on the User menu.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 90
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
Lin INPUT.1 (or INPUT.2 or INPUT.3) CUSTOM LINEARIZATION INPUT R W
The parameter sets linearization for the selected sensor type.
The function corrects any linearity and proportionality errors in the correlation between the value sent by the input and the actual value of the physical quantity measured..
T ideal correlation correlation of input
V
This correction can be made with two different algorithms: 32-step linearization and 4-point linearization. Values are set (33 for 32-step linearization and 4 for 4-point linearization) with the LINRZ submenu parameters.Z and LIN.4.P. submenu .
Unit of measurement : -
Options : NONE = No linearization
32.STP
4.POIN
= 32-step linearization
= 4-point linearization
Acronym
Unit
Scrolling message
INPUT.1 (or INPUT.2 or INPUT.3) UNIT OF MEASURE
Submenu
INPUT
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the unit of measurement displayed for input in use. The unit appears on the Home.x page of the display.
For thermocouple or resistance thermometer inputs, the °C / °F selection automatically converts the temperature value; the related scale limits and setpoint limits must be set.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : NONE = No unit of measurement
°C
°F
= Degrees Celsius
= Degrees Fahrenheit
CUST = Custom, settable with GF_eXpress
Acronym Scrolling message
FILT INPUT.1 (or INPUT.2 DIGITAL FILTER
The parameter shows and sets the value of the digital filter time constant.
With 0.00 no filter is applied.
Unit of measurement : Seconds
Options : 0.00...20.00
Submenu Attributes
INPUT R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 91
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
FILT.D
INPUT.1 (or INPUT.2 or INPUT.3) DIGITAL FILTER ON DISPLAY PV INPUT R W
The parameter shows and sets the allowed tolerance between the real PV value and the value on the PV display: if the variation in real PV is within the interval displayed value - FILT.D... displayed value + FILT.D the displayed value does not change. With 0.00 no filter is applied..
Unit of measurement : The one set with the Unit parameter
Options : 0.0...9.9
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
DEC.P
INPUT.1 (or INPUT.2 or INPUT.3) DECIMAL POINT POSITION INPUT R W
The parameter shows and sets the decimal point position for the process value (PV) displayed, i.e., defines its number of decimal figures.
The number of decimal set may reduce the limits of the measurement scale used.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...3
0 / 1
= Number of decimals displayed
= Number of decimals displayed, only for TC and RTD sensors
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 92
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
LO.SCL
INPUT.1 (or INPUT.2 or INPUT.3) INPUT LOW LIMIT INPUT R W
The parameter shows and sets the lower limit of the measurement scale used for the main or auxiliary input, based on input
(or sensor) type, unit of measurement, and number of decimals selected.
The upper value of LO.SCL is not limited by the value of HI.SCL.
Unit of measurement: The one set with the Unit parameter
Options : A numerical value within the temperature range of the input or sensor
Type
G
N
PT2.TC
INFR1
INFR2
INFR3
INFR4
PT100
PT.LIM
JPT10
J.TC
K.TC
R TC
S TC
T.TC
B
E
C.TC
D.TC
L
L-GOST
U
Unit = °C
DEC.P = 0
-210…1200
-270…1372
-50…1768
-50…1768
-270…400
0…2315
0…2315
40…1820
-270…1000
-200…900
-200…800
-200…600
0…2315
-270…1300
0…1888
10...70
60...120
115...165
140...260
-200...850
-50...250
-200...600
Unit = °F
DEC.P = 0
-346…2192
-454…2502
-58…3214
-58…3214
-454…752
32…4199
32…4199
104…3308
-454…1832
-328…1652
-328…1472
-328…1112
32…4199
-454…2372
32…3430
50...158
140...248
239...329
284...500
-328...1562
-58...212
-328...1112
C.20MA
C.4-20
C.10V
C.2-10
C.5V
C.1-5V
C.1V
C.0.2-1
C2.4 VH
C1.2VH
60MV
20MA
4-20M
10V
2-10V
5V
1-5V
1V
0.2-1V
2.4 VHI
1.2VHI
C1VH
Unit = °C
DEC.P = 0
Unit = °F
DEC.P = 0
-1999...9999
-199.9...999.9
-1999...9999
-199.9...999.9
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
-1999...9999
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
HI.SCL
INPUT.1 (or INPUT.2 or INPUT.3) INPUT HIGH LIMIT INPUT R W
The parameter shows and sets the upper limit of the measurement scale used for the main or auxiliary input, based on input (or sensor) type, unit of measurement, and number of decimals selected.
The lower value of HI.SCL is limited by the value of LO.SCL.
Unit of measurement : The one set with the Unit parameter
Options : A value in the interval corresponding to the input or sensor type (see tables for LO.SCL parameter).
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 93
Acronym
OF.SCL
Scrolling message
INPUT.1 (or INPUT.2 or INPUT.3) INPUT OFFSET
Submenu
INPUT
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the offset applied to the value read in input to make it correspond to the expected value for a certain temperature. It corrects any constant read error of the sensor.
This offset is applied linearly to all reads; therefore it cannot be used to correct any sensor linearity errors.
Unit of measurement : The one set with the Unit parameter
Options : -999...999
Acronym
LO.SP
Scrolling message
INPUT.1 (or INPUT.2 or INPUT.3) LOW LIMIT FOR SETPOINT
Submenu
INPUT
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the lower limit for defining the setpoint, i.e., the minimum value for setting a setpoint.
The scale limit is ignored if the setpoint is assigned to an MFB output (or calculated by an MFB).
Unit of measurement : The one set with the Unit parameter
Options : LO.SCL...HI.SCL
Acronym
HI.SP
Scrolling message
INPUT.1 (or INPUT.2) HIGH LIMIT FOR SETPOINT
Submenu
INPUT
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the upper limit for defining the setpoint, i.e., the maximum value for setting a setpoint.
The lower value of HI.SP is limited by the value of LO.SP.
The scale limit is ignored if the setpoint is assigned to an MFB output (or calculated by an MFB).
Unit of measurement : The one set with the Unit parameter
Options : LO.SP...HI.SCL
Acronym
LO.AL
Scrolling message
INPUT.1 (or INPUT.2 or INPUT.3 ) LOW LIMIT FOR ABSOLUTE ALARMS
Submenu Attributes
INPUT
The parameter shows and sets the lower limit for defining alarms, i.e., the minimum value for setting an alarm.
R W
Unit of measurement : The one used for the alarm limit.
Options : -1999...9999
Acronym
HI.AL
Scrolling message
INPUT.1 (or INPUT.2 or INPUT.3) HIGH LIMIT FOR ABSOLUTE ALARMS
Submenu
INPUT
The parameter shows and sets the upper limit for defining alarms, i.e., the maximum value for setting an alarm.
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : The one used for the alarm limit.
Options : -1999...9999
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 94
Acronym Scrolling message
MSG.LO
INPUT.1 (or INPUT.2 or INPUT.3) NUM SCROLLING MSG WHEN INPUT IS
LOW ERR
Submenu
INPUT
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the number of the message assigned to Low (input < minimum scale limit), i.e., the scrolling message shown on the display..
For more information on scrolling messages, see paragraph “3.1.2.2. Scrolling messages” on page 44.
If the parameter is set to “0” no message will be displayed for Lou.
As default, MSG.LO is assigned the message “1” (for LANG1 corresponds to “IN 1 (or IN 2 or IN 3) UNDER LOW LIMIT”, for LANG2 corresponds to “IN 1 (or IN 2 or IN3) INFERIORE AL MINIMO”.
Unit of measurement : Message number
Options : 0...25 (con LAnG=LANG1 oppure LANG2 oppure LANG3)
0…75 (con LAnG=NONE)
Acronym Scrolling message
MSG.HI
INPUT.1 (or INPUT.2 or INPUT.3) NUM SCROLLING MSG WHEN INPUT IS HI
ERR
Submenu
INPUT
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the number of the message assigned to HIGH (input > maximum scale limit), i.e., the scrolling message shown on the display.
For more information on scrolling messages, see paragraph “3.1.2.2. Scrolling messages” on page 44.
If the parameter is set to “0” no message will be displayed for Hi GH.
As default, MSG.HI is assigned the message “2” (for LANG1 corresponds to “IN 1 (or IN 2 o IN 3) OVER HIGH LIMIT ”, for
LANG2 corresponds to “IN 1 (or IN 2 or IN3) SUPERIORE AL MASSIMO”.
Unit of measurement : Message number
Options : 0...25 (con LAnG=LANG1 oppure LANG2 oppure LANG3)
0…75 (con LAnG=NONE)
Acronym Scrolling message
MSG.ER
INPUT.1 (or INPUT.2 or INPUT.3) NUM SCROLLING MSG WHEN INPUT IS
ERR ERR
Submenu
INPUT
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the number of the message assigned to Err (Pt100 in short circuit or input values below minimum limit), i.e., the scrolling message shown on the display.
For more information on scrolling messages, see paragraph “3.1.2.2. Scrolling messages” on page 44.
If the parameter is set to “0” no message will be displayed for Err.
As default, MSG.ER is assigned the message “3” (for LANG1 corresponds to “INPUT SENSOR 1 (or SENSOR 2 or SONDA
3) FAIL CONNECTION”, for LANG2 corresponds to “ERRATA CONNESSIONE SONDA 1 (or SONDA 2 or SONDA 3)”.
Unit of measurement: Message number
Options : 0...25 (con LAnG=LANG1 oppure LANG2 oppure LANG3)
0…75 (con LAnG=NONE)
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 95
Acronym Scrolling message
MSG.SB
INPUT.1 (or INPUT.2 or INPUT.3) NUM SCROLLING MSG WHEN INPUT IS SB
ERR
Submenu
INPUT
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the number of the message assigned to Err (sensor break in short circuit or input values above maximum limit), i.e., the scrolling message shown on the display.
For more information on scrolling messages, see paragraph “3.1.2.2. Scrolling messages” on page 44.
If the parameter is set to “0” no message will be displayed for Sbr.
As default, MSG.SB is assigned the message “4” (for LANG1 corresponds to ““SENSOR BROKEN” 1 (or SENSOR 2 or
SONDA 3) , for LANG2 corresponds to “SONDA 1 (or SONDA 2 or SONDA 3) APERTA”.
Unit of measurement: Number message
Options : 0...25 (con LAnG=LANG1 oppure LANG2 oppure LANG3)
0…75 (con LAnG=NONE)
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 96
Acronym
IN.CT
Scrolling message
CT INPUT CONFIG
Password
Level 1
Description
Lets you configure the inputs of the controller’s current transformers.
Parameter
IN.CT.N
Configuring current transformers
Pag.
FILT
Digital filter
HI.SCL
Maximum scale limit
OF.SCL
Limit scale correction
Input signal from current transformer
Scale limit
HI.SCL
Offset
OF.SCL
Low pass filter
FILT
Input value ( CURRx )
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 97
Acronym Scrolling message
IN.CT.N
CURRENT TRASFORMER NUMBER
The parameter shows and sets the identifying number of the current transformer.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1...2
Submenu Attributes
IN.CT
R W
Acronym
FILT
Scrolling message
IN.CT.1 (or IN.CT.2) DIGITAL FILTER
Submenu
IN.CT
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the value of the digital filter time constant applied to the input for current transformer CT.1 or CT2.
Unit of measurement : Seconds
Options : 0.00...20.00
Acronym
HI.SCL
Scrolling message
IN.CT.1 (or IN.CT.2) HIGH LIMIT
Submenu Attributes
IN.CT
The parameter shows and sets the maximum scale limit of the input for current transformer CT1 or CT.2.
R W
Unit of measurement : A
Options : 0.0...100.0
Acronym
OF.SCL
IN.CT.1 (or IN.CT.2) OFFSET
Scrolling message Submenu
IN.CT
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the scale offset, i.e., the constant offset applied to all values measured by current transformer CT1 or CT2.
Unit of measurement : A
Options : -99.9...99.9
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 98
Acronym
ALARM
Scrolling message
ALARM CONFIG
Password
Level 1
Description
Lets you configure the generic alarms.
Parameter Pag.
ALRM.N
Selecting the alarm to be configured
rEFE
Selecting the alarm reference
di.in
Selecting direct or inverse alarm
Ab.rE
Selecting absolute or deviation alarm
no.SY
Method for applying hysteresis
PWON.E
Disabling the alarm at power-on
SP1C.E
Disabling alarm on
Setpoint1 change
SP2C.E
Disabling alarm on
Setpoint2 change
LATCH
Memorizing the alarm
HYSTE
Hysteresis
DELAY
Alarm trip delay
MSG.AL
Message associated with tripping of alarm
BLK.AL
Flashing of PV display
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 99
Alarm threshold
ALRMx
PV1/PV2
IN1/IN2/IN3
SSP1/SSP2
CURR1
CURR2
OU.KW1/OU.KW2
O.KWH1/O.KWH2
E.KWH1/E.KWH2
P.DAYS
T.INT
MAS.xx (*)
(*) xx =da 01 a 20
Min
Control limits of scale
Max
Reference variable selection
REFE
Threshold
Value
Alarm type
DI.IN
AB.RE
NO.SY
PWON.E
LATCH
Hysteresis
HYSTE
Delay
DELAY
Alarm state
( ALRMx )
Blinking display
BLK.AL
Scrolling message
MSG.AL
Alarm threshold scale limits
LO.AL
HI.AL
HI.SCL
Acronym Scrolling message
ALRM.N
ALARM NUMBER
The parameter shows and sets the alarm to be configured, identified by its number.
Submenu
ALARM
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement: Number
Options : 1...ALRM.N
= Identifying number of alarm, where ALRM.N is the total number of alarms, setting
by submenu MODE..
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 100
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
REFE ALARM.1 (o ALARM.2…ALARM.4) SELECTING REFERENCE SIGNAL ALARM R W
The parameter shows and sets the reference of alarm number “x” selected with the previous parameter ALARM, where the reference can be an input or value to be monitored.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : PV1 = Process variable for PID.1
if model with auxiliary input:
IN2 = Auxiliary input
SSP1 = Active Setpoint for PID.1
if model with CT1+CT2:
CURR1 = Current of current transformer CT1
CURR2 = Current of current transformer CT2 if energy count function is enabled in MODE.1:
OU.KW1
= Power transferred to the load ENERG.1
O.KWH1
= Energy transferred to load ENERG.1
E.KWH1
= Totalizer of energy transferred to load ENERG.1
T.INT
= Temperatura interna
IN1 = Main input
P.DAYS
= Partial working days if PID2.E function is enabled in EN.FUN:
PV2 = Process variable PID.2
SSP2 = Active Setpoint for PID.2
if energy count function is enabled in MODE.2:
OU.KW2
= Power transferred to load ENERG.2
O.KWH2
= Energy transferred to load ENERG.2
E.KWH2
= Totalizer of energy transferred to load ENERG.2
if model with auxiliary input 2:
IN3 = Auxiliary input 2 if model with Master Modbus serial and Master parameter configured::
MAS.01 = Master Value 1
MAS.02 = Master Value 2
MAS.03 = Master Value 3
MAS.04 = Master Value 4
MAS.05 = Master Value 5
MAS.06 = Master Value 6
MAS.07 = Master Value 7
MAS.08 = Master Value 8
MAS.09 = Master Value 9
MAS.10 = Master Value 10
MAS.11 = Master Value 11
MAS.12 = Master Value 12
MAS.13
= Master Value 13
MAS.14
= Master Value 14
MAS.15
= Master Value 15
MAS.16
= Master Value 16
MAS.17
= Master Value 17
MAS.18
= Master Value 18
MAS.19
= Master Value 19
MAS.20
= Master Value 20
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 101
Acronym di.in
Scrolling message
ALARM.1 (or ALARM.2…ALARM.4) DIRECT/INVERSE DEFINITION
Submenu Attributes
ALARM
The parameter shows and sets the behavior of alarm number “x” with respect to the alarm limit and hysteresis.
Direct or inverse defines when the alarm has to trip.
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : DIREC
INVRS
= Direct Alarm
= Inverse Alarm
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
Ab.rE
ALARM.1 (or ALARM.2…ALARM.4) ABSOLUTE/RELATIVE DEFINITION ALARM R W
The parameter shows and defines the reference value of alarm number “x” for the alarm limit.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : ABSLT
RELAT
= Absolute alarm
= Deviation alarm
Acronym no.SY
Scrolling message
ALARM.1 (or ALARM.2…ALARM.4) NORMAL/SYMMETRIC DEFINITION
Submenu
ALARM
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the method for applying hysteresis for alarm number “x” with respect to the alarm limit value.
With normal, hysteresis is added to / subtracted from the alarm limit(s) based on the general alarm configuration.
With symmetrical, hysteresis is added to / subtracted from the alarm limit itself. For a detailed explanation of the differen-
ce between normal and symmetrical, see paragraph “5.6.1. AL1...AL4 Generic alarms” on page 204.
Unit of measurement: -
Options: NORML
SYMMT
= Normal alarm
= Symmetrical alarm (window)
Acronym Scrolling message
PWON.E
ALARM.1 (or ALARM.2…ALARM.4) DISABLE AT SWITCH ON
Submenu
ALARM
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the behavior of the alarm (being configured) when the controller is powered on.
If the parameter is “OFF,” the alarm will trip when the controller is powered on if the process variable exceeds the alarm setpoint limits.
If the parameter is “On,” the alarm will not trip until the alarm limit value is reached at least once after the controller is powered on.
ATTENTION! The setpoint can be reached in increment or in decrement, or it may never be reached. Therefore, with “On” the alarm might never trip even if the value of the process variable exceeds the alarm setpoint limits.
Example – Minimum, inverse and absolute alarm
When the system is off, the process variable equals room temperature (20 °C). The alarm setpoint is set at 150°C ± 10°C.
The controller powers on with the system.
So with “OFF” the alarm trips as soon as the controller is powered on because the temperature of the process variable exceeds the alarm setpoint limits.
Instead, with “On” the alarm trips only after the temperature of 150°C is reached at least once for the process variable.
Unit of measurement: -
Options: OFF
On
= Alarm enabled at power-on
= Alarm disabled at power-on (until setpoint is reached)
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 102
Acronimo Messaggio a scorrimento Submenu Attributi
SP1C.E
ALARM.1 (o ALARM.2…ALARM.4) DISABLE AT SETP1 CHANGE ALARM R/W
The parameter shows and sets the behaviour of the alarm when the SETP of PID1 is changed, for the alarm being configured. Setting the parameter from OFF to ON takes effect at the next setpoint change and masks the alarm.
Example
ALARM.1 set as Direct Alarm, Absolute, Normal on PV1 with PV1 = 43 and ALARM.1 = 26 (alarm is active)
If SP1C.E = OFF and the SETP of PID1 changes, the alarm remains active.
If SP1C.E = On and the SETP of PID1 changes, the alarm is inhibited; at this point, if PV1 falls below ALARM.1 and then rises again, with the same SETP, the alarm becomes active again, until the next SETP change
Unità di misura : -
Opzioni : OFF
On
= Alarm enabled on SETP1 change
=Alarm disabled on SETP1 change
Acronimo Messaggio a scorrimento Submenu Attributi
SP2C.E
ALARM.1 (o ALARM.2…ALARM.4) DISABLE AT SETP2 CHANGE ALARM R/W
The parameter shows and sets the behaviour of the alarm when the SETP of PID2 is changed, for the alarm being configured. Setting the parameter from OFF to ON takes effect at the next setpoint change and masks the alarm.
The parameter is only displayed if PID2 is active.
Example
ALARM.1 set as Direct Alarm, Absolute, Normal on PV2 with PV2 = 43 and ALARM.1 = 26 (alarm is active)
If SP2C.E = OFF and the SETP of PID2 changes, the alarm remains active.
If SP2C.E = On and the SETP of PID2 changes, the alarm is inhibited; at this point, if PV2 falls below ALARM.1 and then rises again, with the same SETP, the alarm will become active again, until the next SETP change
Unità di misura : -
Opzioni : OFF
On
= Alarm enabled on SETP2 change
= Alarm disabled on SETP2 change
Acronym
LATCH
Scrolling message
ALARM.1 (or ALARM.2…ALARM.4) MEMORY DEFINITION
The parameter shows and sets enabling of memorization of the alarm being configured.
Memorization maintains the active alarm state even after the alarm conditions are eliminated.
The alarm state can be deleted by from the digital input, serial input, or key.
Unit of measurement : -
Options: OFF
On
= Alarm not latched
= Alarm latched
Submenu Attributes
ALARM R W
Acronym
HYSTE
Scrolling message
ALARM.1 (or ALARM.2…ALARM.4) HYSTERESIS
Submenu
ALARM
Attributes
The parameter shows and sets the hysteresis applied to the alarm setpoint value for the alarm being configured.
R W
Unit of measurement : Scale points
Options : 0...999
-999...999
= For absolute (A.r.x = ABSLT) and symmetrical alarm (n.S.x = SYMMT)
= For other types of alarms
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 103
Acronym
DELAY
Scrolling message
ALARM.1 (or ALARM.2…ALARM.4) DELAY OF ACTIVATION
Submenu
ALARM
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the alarm trip delay for the alarm being configured, i.e., the time that the value of the process variable has to exceed the alarm setpoint for the alarm to trip.
This parameter prevents repeated alarms due to instantaneous and insignificant exceeding of that value.
If the parameter is set to “0.00” the alarm will be instantaneous, regardless of the time in which the process variable exceeds the alarm setpoint.
Unit of measurement : Minutes.seconds
Options : 0.00...99.59
Acronym Scrolling message
MSG.AL
ALARM.1 (or ALARM.2…ALARM.4) SCROLLING MESSAGE AT ALARM ACT
Submenu
ALARM
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the number of the message associated with tripping of the alarm being configured, i.e., the scrolling message shown on the display.
For more information on scrolling messages, see paragraph “3.1.2.2. Scrolling messages” on page 44.
If the parameter is set to “0” no message will be displayed when the alarm trips.
The same message number can be assigned to different alarms
Unit of measurement : Message number
Options : 0...25 (with LAnG=LANG1 or LANG2 or LANG3)
0…75 (with LAnG=NONE)
Acronym
BLK.AL
Scrolling message
ALARM.1 (or ALARM.2…ALARM.4) BLINK DISPLAY PV DEF
Submenu
ALARM
The parameter shows and sets the flashing of the PV display in case of alarm, for the alarm being configured.
If the parameter is “On,” the value shown on the PV display starts to flash in case of alarm.
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= PV display does not flash in case of alarm
= PV display flashes in case of alarm
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 104
Acronym
AL.HB
Scrolling message
HEATER BREAK ALARM
CONFIG
Password
Level 1
Description
Lets you configure the Heater Break alarm, i.e., the alarm that trips when the heating element is outside normal operating parameters.
The submenu is present if the CT1+CT2 input option was previously selected.
Parameter Pag.
LOW.ON
Alarm due to insufficient current draw
HIG.ON
Alarm due to excessive current draw
HI.OFF
Alarm due to excessive current draw
TIME
HB alarm trip delay
THR.PE
Percentage of HB current compared to calibration
OUT
Control output associated with HB alarm
LoAd
Selecting type of connected load
MSG.HB
Message associated with tripping of HB alarm
BLK.HB
Flashing of PV display
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 105
Alarm due to insufficient current draw
LOW.ON
Alarm due to excessive current draw
HIG.ON
Alarm due to excessive current draw
HIG.OFF
Current input
CURR.1
Current input
CURR.2
OUT.1
OUT.2
OUT.3
OUT.4
Output selection contro
OUT
Output
Alarm
Load type
LOAD
Delay
TIME
Alarm state
AL.HBx
Blinking display
BLK.HB
Scrolling message
MSG.HB
Acronym Scrolling message
LOW.ON
LOW LOAD CURR THRESH ON TIME
Submenu
AL.HB
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the current draw value below which the Heater Break alarm trips when the control output is ON.
If the draw is too low it is assumed that the heating element is broken. The signal may also be caused by a power failure on the heating element supply line.
Unit of measurement: A
Options: 0.0...999.9
Acronym
HIG.ON
Scrolling message
HIGH LOAD CURR THRESH ON TIME
Submenu
AL.HB
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the current draw value above which the Heater Break alarm trips when the control output is ON.
If the draw is too high it is assumed that the heating element or its supply line is in short circuit.
Unit of measurement: A
Options: 0.0...999.9
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 106
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
HI.OFF
HIGH LOAD CURR THRESH OFF TIME AL.HB
R W
The parameter shows and sets the current draw value above which the Heater Break alarm trips when the control output is OFF.
If the draw is too high it is assumed that the heating element or its supply line (eg a module SSR) is in short circuit.
Unit of measurement: A
Options: 0.0...999.9
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
TIME WAITING TIME FOR ALHB TRIP AL.HB
R W
The parameter shows and sets the minimum time in which the overrun defined by LOW.ON, HIG.ON and HI.OFF must persist before the HB alarm trips.
This parameter prevents false alarms caused by momentary positive or negative peaks in current draw.
If the value is set to “0” the alarm is immediate.
Unit of measurement: Seconds
Options : 0...999
Acronym Scrolling message
THR.PE
PERCENTAGE HB ALARM SP IN HB CALIB
The parameter shows and sets the current draw value for the Heater Break alarm.
This value is expressed as a percentage of the current draw value set during calibration.
For more information on this calibration, see paragraph LOW.ON.
See also paragraph “4.33. Submenu US.CAL - Calibrazioni utente” on page 192.
Unit of measurement: %
Options: 0.0...100.0
(default value = 80.0)
Submenu Attributes
AL.HB
R W
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
OUT CONTROL OUTPUT HB AL AL.HB
R W
The parameter shows and sets the number of the control output associated with the alarm.
This is the output whose ON/OFF state is checked, as indicated in the description of the LOW.ON, HIG.ON and HI.OFF parameters.
Unit of measurement: Number
Options : 1...4
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 107
Acronym Scrolling message
LoAd TYPE OF LOAD CONFIGURATION
The parameter shows and sets the type of load connected to the control output.
For more information on load type, see paragraph “5.6.2. HB alarm” on page 205.
Submenu
AL.HB
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement: -
Options : MONO = Monophase power supply, with current transformer CT1 only (transformer CT2 present it
is ignored)
STAR = 3-phase star power supply without neutre, with CT1 and CT2
DELTA = 3-phase delta power supply with CT1 and CT2
Acronym Scrolling message
MSG.HB
SCROLLING MESSAGE AT HB ACT
Submenu
AL.HB
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the number of the message associated with tripping of the HB alarm, i.e., the scrolling message shown on the display.
For more information on scrolling messages, see paragraph “3.1.2.2. Scrolling messages” on page 44.
If the parameter is set to “0” no message will be displayed when the alarm trips.
The same message number can be assigned to different alarms.
Unit of measurement : Message number
Options : 0...25 (with LAnG=LANG1 or LANG2 or LANG3)
0…75 (with LAnG=NONE)
Acronym Scrolling message
BLK.HB
BLINK DISPLAY PV DEF HB AL
Submenu
AL.HB
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the flashing of the PV display in case of HB alarm.
If the parameter is “On,” the value shown on the PV display starts to flash with backlight at full brightness in case of HB alarm.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= PV display does not flash in case of alarm
= PV display flashes in case of alarm
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 108
Acronym
AL.PW
Scrolling message
POWER ALARM CONFIG
Password
Level 1
Description
Lets you configure the power alarm, i.e., the alarm that trips when average power deviates from a configurable stability band.
Parameter Pag.
AL.PW.N
Select the Power alarm to configure
PV.BND
Process variable stability band
PW.BND
Power stability band
TIME
Power alarm trip delay
MSG.PW
Message associated with tripping of power alarm
BLK.PV
Flashing of PV display when power alarm trips
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 109
Stability band
PV
PW.BND
PV.x
Stability control
PV
Stability
State
PV
Power stability band
PW.BND
OUT.Px
Media
Stability control power
Stability state power
Delay
TIME
Stato
AL.PWx
Blinking display
BLK.PW
Scrolling message
MSG.PW
Average power automatically power
PV in error
Acronym
AL.PW.N
POWER ALARM NUMBER
Scrolling message
The parameter shows and sets the alarm to be configured, identified by its number.
Unit of measurement: Number
Options : 1
2
= Select alarm referring to PID.1
= Select alarm referring to PID.2 (only with auxiliary input option)
Submenu Attributes
AL.PW
R W
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
PV.BND
AL.PW.1 (or AL.PW.2) PV STABILITY BAND AL.PW
The parameter shows and sets the value of the process variable stability band within which the alarm is assessed.
If the parameter is “0.0” the power alarm is disabled.
R W
Unit of measurement: %
Options : 0.0...100.0
Acronym Scrolling message
PW.BND
AL.PW.1 (or AL.PW.2) PW STABILITY
Submenu
AL.PW
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the value of the power stability band. When the process variable is in PV.BND stability band and average power exits PW.BND power stability band, the alarm activates after TIME. When the power alarm is active, it is automatically cancelled if the setpoint is changed, or by setting parameter AL.ACK = On on the user configuration menu, or by switching to Manual mode.
Unit of measurement: %
Options : 0.0...100.0
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 110
Acronym
TIME
Scrolling message
AL.PW.1 (or AL.PW.2) WAITING TIME FOR ALPW TRIP
Submenu
AL.PW
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the minimum time during which the power stability band has to be exceeded before the power alarm trips.
This parameter is used to avoid false alarms. If the value is set to “0” the alarm is immediate.
Unit of measurement: Seconds
Options : 0...999
Acronym Scrolling message
MSG.PW
AL.PW.1 (or AL.PW.2) SCROLLING MESSAGE AT PW ACT
Submenu
AL.PW
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the number of the message associated with tripping of the power alarm, i.e., the scrolling message shown on the display.
For more information on scrolling messages, see paragraph “3.1.2.2. Scrolling messages” on page 44.
If the parameter is set to “0” no message will be displayed when the alarm trips. The same message number can be assigned to different alarms.
Unit of measurement: Message number
Options : 0...25 (with LAnG=LANG1 or LANG2 or LANG3)
0…75 (with LAnG=NONE)
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
BLK.PW
AL.PW.1 (or AL.PW.2) BLINK DISPLAY PV DEF PW AL AL.PW
R W
The parameter shows and sets the flashing of the PV display in case of power alarm.
If the parameter is “On,” in case of HB alarm the value on the PV display flashes with backlight at maximum brightness.
Unit of measurement: -
Options : OFF
On
= PV display does not flash in case of alarm
= PV display flashes in case of alarm
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 111
Acronym
PID
Scrolling message
PID CONFIG
Password
Level 1
Description
Lets you configure the control parameters.
Parameter
PID.N
PID configuration
Pag.
Parameter
H.P.HI
Maximum limit of heating power
Pag.
S.TUNE
Enabling Self-Tuning
H.P.LO
Minimum limit of heating power
Parameter
A.RST
Antireset
Pag.
FEEDF
Feedforward power
SOFT.S
Enabling Soft-Start
SOFT.T
Soft-Start Time
A.TUNE
Enabling Auto-Tuning
Aut.t
Selecting type of
Auto-Tuning
Cntr
Selecting type of control
COOL
Selecting cooling fluid
C.SP
Cooling setpoint with respect to heating setpoint
C.PB
Proportional cooling band or hysteresis in
ON-OFF control
DEAD.B
Deadband
FAULT
Fault action power
GRAD.I
Setpoint gradient in increase
C.IT
Integral cooling time
GRAD.D
Setpoint gradient in decrease
C.DT
Derivative cooling time
Unit
Unit of measurement of gradient
DERV.S
Derivative sampling time
H.PB
Proportional heating band or hysteresis in
ON-OFF control
C.P.HI
Maximum limit of cooling power
C.P.LO
Minimum limit of cooling power
GRAD.O
Gradient of control output
LBA.TM
Tripping delay
H.IT
Integral heating time
RESET
Manual reset
LBA.PW
Power delivered when
LBA alarm trips
H.DT
Derivative heating time
P.RST
Reset power
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 112
Setpoint 1 multiset
M.SET1x
SETPOINT LOCALE
Setpoint 2 multiset
M.SET2x
Setpoint 3 multiset
M.SET3x
Setpoint 4 multiset
M.SET4x
Analog input
IN.3
SETPOINT REMOTO
Analog input
IN.2
Serial value
SERIAL_SPR
Local setpoint
SETPx
Setpoint programmer
P.SETP
Multiset selection
F.IN
BUT.1...BUT.3
LFB_OUT_1...LFB_OUT_32
Enabling multiset
MUL.SP
+
+
Enabling programmaer
PROGR
Enabling the remote setpoint
SP.REM
0
Selection auxiliary input
FUNC
Definition remote setpoint
SPR.T
Enabling multiset
F.IN
BUT.1...BUT.3
LFB_OUT_1...LFB_OUT_32
Gradient
GRAD.I
GRAD.D
UNIT
Active setpoint
SSPx next page
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 113
Process variable
PV.x
Active setpoint
SSPx
-
+
Selection group of PID parameters
PID group
PID.Gx
Power limitation alarm LBA
LBA.PW
Average_ power with PV in error
(If power alarm enabled and stabilized PV)
Power limitation
(Fault) with PV in error
FAULT
PID
PID power
PID POWERx page.
0
Analog input
IN.2
Analog input
IN.3
Selection auxiliary input function
FUNC
Manual power
P.MANx
Control power limitation
Local / Remote selection
F.IN
BUT.1...BUT.3
LFB_OUT_1...LFB_OUT_32
Automatic / Manual selection
F.IN
BUT.1...BUT.3
LFB_OUT_1...LFB_OUT_32
Gradiente
GRAD.0
0
ON / OFF selection
F.IN
BUT.1...BUT.3
LFB_OUT_1...LFB_OUT_32
Output power
OUT.Px
> 0
Hot power
HEATx
< 0
Cool power
COOLx
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 114
Acronym Scrolling message
PID.N
PID NUMBER
The parameter shows and sets the identifying number of the available PID.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1...2
Submenu Attributes
PID R W
Acronym Scrolling message
S.TUNE
PID.1 (or PID.2) SELF TUNING ENABLE
Submenu
The parameter shows and sets enabling of Self-Tuning.
For more information on the Self-Tuning function, see paragraph “5.10.3. Self-Tuning” on page 208.
PID
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= Self-Tuning disabled
= Self-Tuning enabled at next power-on only
On.AL
= Self-Tuning enabled at all power-on
Acronym
SOFT.S
Scrolling message
PID.1 (or PID.2) SOFT START ENABLE
The parameter shows and sets enabling of Soft-Start.
For more information on the Self-Start function, see paragraph “5.9. Soft-Start” on page 207.
This parameter appears only if S.TUNE = OFF.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= Soft-Start disabled
= Soft-Start enabled at next power-on only
Submenu Attributes
PID R W
Acronym
SOFT.T
Scrolling message
PID.1 (or PID.2) SOFT START TIME
Submenu
PID
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets Soft-Start time, i.e., the time that the control output needs to reach the value required by the PID.
This parameter appears only if SOFT.S = On.
Unit of measurement : Minutes
Options : 0.0...500.0
Acronym Scrolling message
A.TUNE
PID.1 (or PID.2) AUTO TUNING ENABLE
Submenu
PID
The parameter shows and sets enabling of Auto-Tuning.
For more information on the Auto-Tuning function, see paragraph “5.10.4. Auto-Tuning” on page 209.
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= Auto-Tuning disabled
= Auto-Tuning enabled
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 115
Acronym Scrolling message
Aut.t
PID.1 (or PID.2) AUTO TUNING SELECTION
The parameter shows and sets the type of Auto-Tuning used.
Unit of measurement: -
Options : CONTI = Continuous Auto-Tuning
O.SHOT
= One-shot Auto-Tuning
DEV0.5
= One-shot Auto-Tuning with activation when
|SP-PV| > 0,5% of full scale of main or auxiliary input
DEV1 = One-shot Auto-Tuning with activation when
|SP-PV| > 1% of full scale of main or auxiliary input
DEV2 = One-shot Auto-Tuning with activation when
|SP-PV| > 2% of full scale of main or auxiliary input
DEV4 =One-shot Auto-Tuning with activation when
|SP-PV| > 4% of full scale of main or auxiliary input
Submenu Attributes
PID R W
Acronym
Cntr
Scrolling message
PID.1 (or PID.2) TYPE OF CONTROL
The parameter shows and sets the type control performed by the controller.
For more information on the control function, see paragraph “5.10. Controls” on page 140.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : H.PROP
H.PI
H.PID
C.PROP
C.PI
C.PID
HC.P
HC.PI
HC.PID
H.ONOF
C.ONOF
= Proportional heating
= Proportional/integral heating
=
=
Proportional integral/derivative heating
Proportional cooling
= Proportional/integral cooling
= Proportional integral/derivative cooling
= Proportional heating/cooling
= Proportional/integral heating/cooling
= Proportional integral/derivative heating/cooling
=
=
Heating ON-OFF
Cooling ON-OFF
HC.ONO
= Heating/cooling ON-OFF
HP.CON
= PID heating / cooling ON-OFF
HON.CP
PID.RG
= Heating ON-OFF / PID cooling
= Heating / PID cooling with relative gain
Submenu Attributes
PID R W
Acronym Scrolling message
DERV.S
PID.1 (or PID.2) DERIVATIVE SAMPLE TIME
The parameter shows and sets the derivative sampling time.
The parameter is shown if the derivative action was enabled with parameter Cntr.
Unit of measurement : Seconds
Options :
4
8
0.240
1
Submenu Attributes
PID R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 116
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
H.PB
PID.1 (or PID.2) HEATING PROPORTIONAL BAND OR ON/OFF HYST PID R W
The parameter shows and sets the proportional heating band or hysteresis in the ON-OFF control, calculated as a percentage of full scale of the main or auxiliary input.
Unit of measurement : %
Options : 0.0...999.9
Acronym
H.IT
Scrolling message
PID.1 (or PID.2) HEATING INTEGRAL TIME
The parameter shows and sets the integral heating time.
Unit of measurement : Minutes
Options : 0.00...99.99
Submenu Attributes
PID R W
Acronym Scrolling message
H.DT
PID.1 (or PID.2) HEATING DERIVATIVE TIME
The parameter shows and sets the derivative heating time.
Unit of measurement : Minutes
Options: 0.00...99.99
Submenu Attributes
PID R W
Acronym
H.P.HI
Scrolling message
PID.1 (or PID.2) HEATING POWER HIGH LIMIT
The parameter shows and sets the maximum limit of heating power.
Unit of measurement : %
Options : 0.0...100.0
Submenu Attributes
PID R W
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
H.P.LO
PID.1 (or PID.2) HEATING POWER LOW LIMIT PID R W
The parameter shows and sets the minimum limit of heating power.
Not available for dual action. The power of PID heating/cooling control (called dual action) is limited by the values of
H.P.HI and C.P.HI.
Unit of measurement : %
Options : 0.0...100.0
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 117
Acronym Scrolling message
COOL PID.1 (or PID.2) COOLING MEDIA
The parameter shows and sets the fluid used for cooling.
The parameter appears if the parameter Cntr = PID.RGn was selected.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : FAN
OIL
= Air (relative gain H.PB/C.PB = 1)
= Oil (relative gain H.PB/C.PB = 0,8)
H2O = Water (relative gain H.PB/C.PB = 0,4)
Submenu Attributes
PID R W
Acronym
C.SP
Scrolling message
PID.1 (or PID.2) COOLING SETPOINT RELEVANT TO HEATING SETP
Submenu Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the cooling setpoint as a percentage change of the heating setpoint.
Negative values superimpose cooling on heating.
PID
Unit of measurement : %, of full scale of main or auxiliary input
Options : -25.0...25.0
Acronym
C.PB
Scrolling message
PID.1 (or PID.2) COOLING PROPORTIONAL BAND OR ON/OFF HYST
Submenu
PID
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the proportional cooling band or hysteresis in the ON-OFF control, calculated as a percentage of full scale of the main or auxiliary input.
Unit of measurement : %
Options : 0.0...999.9
Acronym
C.IT
Scrolling message
PID.1 (or PID.2) COOLING INTEGRAL TIME
The parameter shows and sets the integral cooling time.
Unit of measurement : Minutes
Options : 0.00...99.99
Acronym
C.DT
Scrolling message
PID.1 (or PID.2) COOLING DERIVATIVE TIME
The parameter shows and sets the derivative cooling time.
Unit of measurement : Minutes
Options : 0.00...99.99
Submenu Attributes
PID R W
Submenu Attributes
PID R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 118
Acronym Scrolling message
C.P.HI
PID.1 (or PID.2) COOLING POWER HIGH LIMIT
The parameter shows and sets the maximum limit of cooling power.
Unit of measurement : %
Options : setpoint
0.0...100.0
fondo scala - inizio scala
×
FEEDF
100
Submenu Attributes
PID R W
Acronym
C.P.LO
Scrolling message
PID.1 (or PID.2) COOLING POWER LOW LIMIT
Submenu
PID
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the lower limit of cooling power.
Not available for dual action. The power of PID heating/cooling control (called dual action) is limited by the values of
H.P.HI and C.P.HI.
Unit of measurement : %
Options : 0.0...100.0
Acronym
RESET
Scrolling message
PID.1 (or PID.2) MANUAL RESET
Submenu
PID
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the Manual reset value, i.e., the value which, when added to setpoint, becomes the reference for the control. It is useful in a PID control with non-variable setpoint to compensate the error at full scale.
Unit of measurement : Scale points of main or auxiliary input
Options : -999...999
Acronym Scrolling message
P.RST
PID.1 (or PID.2) RESET POWER
The parameter shows and sets the Reset power value, i.e., the value added to the control power.
For example, in proportional control it corresponds to the output at zero value (PV = SV).
Submenu Attributes
PID R W
Unit of measurement : %
Options : -100.0...100.0
Acronym
A.RST
PID.1 (or PID.2) ANTIRESET
Scrolling message Submenu
PID
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the Antireset value.
If set to other than “0”, it defines band width (below the setpoint if heating, above the setpoint if cooling) within which the integral action is applied, if provided (PI or PID control).
Unit of measurement : Scale points of main or auxiliary input
Options : 0...9999
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 119
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
FEEDF PID.1 (o PID.2) FEEDFORWARD PID R W
The parameter shows and sets the feedforward power value, i.e., the value that generates an additional factor at the control output based on the setpoint value.
U = setpoint end of scale - start of scale
X
FEEDF
100.0
Unit of measurement: %
Options : -100.0...100.0
Acronym
DEAD.B
PID.1 (or PID.2) DEAD BAND
Scrolling message Submenu
PID
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the deadband.
The deadband is symmetrical to the setpoint. If the process value (PV) stays in this band, the control output keeps the required power value constant.
Unit of measurement : Scale points of main or auxiliary input.
Options : 0...999
Acronym Scrolling message
FAULT PID.1 (or PID.2) FAULT ACTION POWER
The parameter shows and sets the fault action power, supplied if the sensor is broken.
Submenu Attributes
PID R W
Example
If Cntr = HP.CON (Proportional Heat, ON/OFF Cool), the option is On, OFF, 0.0...100.0, i.e., if you set FAULT = On the cooling output will be ON in case of fault.
Unit of measurement : %
Options : -100.0...100.0
On, OFF for P or PI or PID action for ON / OFF action
Acronym
GRAD.I
Scrolling message
PID.1 (or PID.2) SETPOINT GRADIENT IN INCREMENT
The parameter shows and sets the gradient used when the setpoint value is increased.
If the parameter is “0.0” the gradient is disabled.
Unit of measurement : digit/second or digit/minute, depending on unit parameter setting
Options : 0.0...999.9
Submenu Attributes
PID R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 120
Acronym Scrolling message
GRAD.D
PID.1 (or PID.2) SETPOINT GRADIENT IN DECREMENT
The parameter shows and sets the gradient used when the setpoint value is decreased.
If the parameter is “0.0” the gradient is disabled.
Unit of measurement : digit/second or digit/minute, depending on unit parameter setting
Options : 0.0...999.9
Submenu Attributes
PID R W
Acronym
Unit
Scrolling message
PID.1 (or PID.2) GRADIENT UNIT OF MEASURE
The parameter shows and sets the unit of measurement of gradient GRAD.I and GRAD.D.
The parameter appears only if GRAD.I or GRAD.D are greater than “0.0”.
Unit of measurement: -
Options : DIG/S
DIG/M
= Digit/second
= Digit/minute
Submenu Attributes
PID R W
Acronym Scrolling message
GRAD.O
PID.1 (or PID.2) CONTROL OUTPUT GRADIENT
The parameter shows and sets the gradient used by the control output.
The gradient is used to limit rapid changes in the control output.
If the parameter is “0.0” the gradient is disabled.
Unit of measurement : % / second
Options : 0.0...100.0
Submenu Attributes
PID R W
Acronym Scrolling message
LBA.TM
PID.1 (or PID.2) WAITING TIME FOR LBA ALARM TRIP
Submenu
PID
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the delay time for tripping of the LBA alarm.
If the parameter is “0.0” the LBA alarm is disabled.
When the LBA alarm is active, it is automatically cancelled if the PV rises (in heating) or lowers (in cooling), or by setting the parameter AL.ACK = On on the user configuration menu or by switching to Manual mode.
This parameter will not appear in the presence of ON-OFF control (of heating, cooling and heating, and heating/cooling).
Unit of measurement : Minutes
Options : 0.0...500.0
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
LBA.PW
PID.1 (or PID.2) POWER LIMITS BY LBA ALARM CONDITION PID R W
The parameter shows and sets the power value delivered when the LBA alarm trips.
This parameter will not appear in the presence of ON-OFF control (of heating, cooling and heating, and heating/cooling).
In the presence of PID control with ON-OFF heating or cooling, power . may be set for the PID part only
Unit of measurement : %
Options : -100.0...100.0
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 121
Acronym
PID.GR
Scrolling message
PID GROUP
PARAMETERS CONFIG
Password
Level 1
Description
Lets you configure groups of control parameters. Groups of control parameters must be enabled with the parameter PID.
GN = .1...4 on the MODE menu (the menu is not shown if PID.
GN = 0).
Groups are used to preconfigure sets of function parameters that can be easily called when needed, without having to reconfigure the PID parameters every time. The number of parameters available in groups is less than the number on the
PID submenu. The number of parameters available in groups is limited to those for PID heating and/or cooling control.
Parameter Pag.
PID.N
Selecting the parameter group to be configured
Parameter
C.P.LO
Minimum limit of cooling power
Pag.
PID.G.N
Selecting the parameter group to be configured
H.PB
Proportional heating band or hysteresis in
ON-OFF control
PV.THR
Threshold PV for the activation of the group of PID parameters
H.IT
Integral heating time
H.DT
Derivative heating time
H.P.HI
Maximum limit of heating power
H.P.LO
Minimum limit of heating power
C.PB
Proportional cooling band or hysteresis in
ON-OFF control
C.IT
Integral cooling time
C.DT
Derivative cooling time
C.P.HI
Maximum limit of cooling power
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 122
Acronym Scrolling message
PID.N
PID NUMBER
The parameter shows and sets the identifying number of the available PID.
Unit of measurement: Number
Options : 1...2
Submenu Attributes
PID.GR
R W
Acronym Scrolling message
PID.G.N
PID PARAMETERS GROUP NUMBER
The parameter shows and sets the parameter group to be configured, identified by its number.
Submenu Attributes
PID.GR
R W
Unit of measurement: Number
Options : 1...PD.G.N
= Numerical identification where PID.G.N is the total number of groups of parameters
set on the MODE submenu
Acronym
H.PB
Scrolling message
PID.GR.1 (or PID.GR.2…PID.GR.4) HEATING PROPORTIONAL BAND OR ON/
OFF HYST
Submenu
PID.GR
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the proportional heating band or hysteresis in the ON-OFF control, calculated as a percentage of full scale of the main or auxiliary input.
Unit of measurement: %
Options : 0.0...999.9
Acronym Scrolling message
H.IT
PID.GR.1 (or PID.GR.2…PID.GR.4) HEATING INTEGRAL TIME
The parameter shows and sets the integral heating time.
Unit of measurement: Minutes
Options : 0.00...99.99
Acronym
H.DT
Scrolling message
PID.GR.1 (or PID.GR.2…PID.GR.4) HEATING DERIVATIVE TIME
The parameter shows and sets the derivative heating time.
Unit of measurement: Minutes
Options : 0.00...99.99
Submenu Attributes
PID.GR
R W
Submenu Attributes
PID.GR
R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 123
Acronym Scrolling message
H.P.HI
PID.GR.1 (or PID.GR.2…PID.GR.4) HEATING POWER HIGH LIMIT
The parameter shows and sets the maximum limit of heating power.
Unit of measurement: %
Options : 0.0...100.0
Submenu Attributes
PID.GR
R W
Acronym
H.P.LO
Scrolling message
PID.GR.1 (or PID.GR.2…PID.GR.4) HEATING POWER LOW LIMIT
The parameter shows and sets the minimum limit of heating power.
For details, see paragraph “4.15.14. H.P.LO - Minimum limit of heating power” on page 117.
Unit of measurement: %
Options : 0.0...100.0
Submenu Attributes
PID.GR
R W
Acronym
C.PB
Scrolling message
PID.GR.1 (or PID.GR.2…PID.GR.4) COOLING PROPORTIONAL BAND OR ON/
OFF HYST
Submenu
PID.GR
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the proportional cooling band or hysteresis in the ON-OFF control, calculated as a percentage of full scale of the main or auxiliary input.
Unit of measurement: %
Options : 0.0...999.9
Acronym Scrolling message
C.IT
PID.GR.1 (or PID.GR.2…PID.GR.4) COOLING INTEGRAL TIME
The parameter shows and sets the integral cooling time.
Unit of measurement: Minutes
Options : 0.00...99.99
Acronym
C.DT
Scrolling message
PID.GR.1 (or PID.GR.2…PID.GR.4) COOLING DERIVATIVE TIME
The parameter shows and sets the derivative cooling time.
Unit of measurement : Minutes
Options : 0.00...99.99
Submenu Attributes
PID.GR
R W
Submenu Attributes
PID.GR
R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 124
Acronym Scrolling message
C.P.HI
PID.GR.1 (or PID.GR.2…PID.GR.4) COOLING POWER HIGH LIMIT
The parameter shows and sets the maximum limit of cooling power.
Unit of measurement : %
Options : 0.0...100.0
Submenu Attributes
PID.GR
R W
Acronym
C.P.LO
Scrolling message
PID.GR.1 (or PID.GR.2…PID.GR.4) COOLING POWER LOW LIMIT
The parameter shows and sets the minimum limit of cooling power.
For details, see paragraph “4.15.21. C.P.LO - Minimum limit of cooling power” on page 119.
Unit of measurement: %
Options : 0.0...100.0
Submenu Attributes
PID.GR
R W
Acronym Scrolling message
PV.THR
PID.GR.1 (or PID.GR.2…PID.GR.4) PV BEYOND WHICH THE GROUP IS ACTIVE
The parameter shows and sets the PV over which the group of PID parameters is active.
The parameter is shown only if the respective programmer is not enabled.
Unit of measurement: Scale points of main or auxiliary input
Options : LO.SCL...HI.SCL
Submenu Attributes
PID.GR
R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 125
Acronym
CAL.EV
Scrolling message
CALENDAR ENABLING
Password
Level 1
Description
Show Event Calendar settings
Parameter
Enable calendar
CAL.E
F
Enable Monday
MONDA
F
Enable Tuesday
TUESD
F
WEDNE
F
Enable Wednesday
Enable Thursday
THURS
F
Enable Friday
FRIDA
F
Enable Saturday
SATUR
F
Enable Sunday
SUNDA
Acronym
CAL.E
CALENDAR ENABLE
Scrolling message
The parameter shows and sets when the calendar is enabled.
Unit of measurement: -
Options : OFF = Calendar disabled
ONE.WE
= Single week calendar enabled
WEKLY = Weekly calendar enabled
Acronym
MONDA DAYS ENABLE
Scrolling message
The parameter shows and sets events enabled for Monday.
Unit of measurement: -
Options : None = Monday calendar disabled
ON = Monday calendar enabled
Pag.
Submenu Attributes
CAL.EV
R W
Submenu Attributes
CAL.EV
R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 126
Acronym Scrolling message
TUESD DAYS ENABLE
The parameter shows and sets when the calendar is enabled.
Unit of measurement: -
Options : None = Tuesday calendar disabled
ON = Tuesday calendar enabled
Acronym
WEDNE DAYS ENABLE
Scrolling message
The parameter shows and sets events enabled for Wednesday.
Unit of measurement: -
Options : None = Wednesday calendar disabled
ON = Wednesday calendar enabled
Acronym
THURS DAYS ENABLE
Scrolling message
The parameter shows and sets the events enabled for Thursday.
Unit of measurement: -
Options : None = Thursday calendar disabled
ON = Thursday calendar enabled
Acronym Scrolling message
FRIDA DAYS ENABLE
The parameter shows and sets the events enabled for Friday.
Unit of measurement: -
Options : None = Friday calendar disabled
ON = Friday calendar enabled
Acronym
SATUR DAYS ENABLE
Scrolling message
The parameter shows and sets the events enabled for Saturday.
Unit of measurement: -
Options : None = Saturday calendar disabled
ON = Saturday calendar enabled
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 127
Submenu Attributes
CAL.EV
R W
Submenu Attributes
CAL.EV
R W
Submenu Attributes
CAL.EV
R W
Submenu Attributes
CAL.EV
R W
Submenu Attributes
CAL.EV
R W
Acronym Scrolling message
SUNDA DAYS ENABLE
The parameter shows and sets the events enabled for Sunday.
Unit of measurement: -
Options : None = Sunday calendar disabled
ON = Sunday calendar enabled
Submenu Attributes
CAL.EV
R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 128
Acronym
CALE.C
Scrolling message
CALENDAR CONFIGURATION
Password
Level 1
Description
Show Event Calendar settings
Parameter Pag.
d.O.E
F
Calendar day selection
EVE.N
F
HH
F
Event selection on the selected day a
Hour of the selected event
Minutes of the selected event
MM
F
Seconds of the selected event
SS
F
ACt
Action of the selected event
Acronym Scrolling message d.O.E
DAY OF EVENT
The parameter shows and sets the day for the required Calendar event.
Unit of measurement: -
Options : MONDA = day selected Monday
TUESD = day selected Tuesday
WEDNE = day selected Wednesday
THURS = day selected Thursday
FRIDA = selected day Friday
SATUR = day selected Saturday
SUNDA = day selected Sunday
Acronym
EVE.N
EVENT NuMBER
Scrolling message
The parameter shows and sets the calendar event number to be selected.
Unit of measurement: number
Options : 1..4
Submenu Attributes
CALE.C
R W
Submenu Attributes
CALE.C
R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 129
Acronym Scrolling message
HH HOUR OF EVENT
The parameter shows and sets the hour of the selected Calendar event.
Unit of measurement: number (hh)
Options : 0..23
Acronym
MM MINUTE OF EVENT
Scrolling message
The parameter shows and sets the minutes of the selected Calendar event.
Unit of measurement: number (mm)
Options : 0..59
Acronym Scrolling message
SS SECOND OF EVENT
The parameter shows and sets the seconds of the selected Calendar event.
Unit of measurement: number (ss)
Options : 0..59
Acronym
ACt ACTION OF EVENT
Scrolling message
The parameter shows and sets the seconds of the selected Calendar event.
Options :
Unit of measurement: -
NONE = no event
ON.SW
= SOFTWARE ON
OFF.SW
= SOFTWARE OFF
O.S.S1
= SOFTWARE ON and Programmer 1 START
O.S.S2
= SOFTWARE ON and Programmer 2 START
ST.PR1
= Programmer 1 START
STP.P1
= Programmer 1 STOP
RESE1 = Programmer 1 RESET
ST.PR2
= Programmer 2 START
STP.P2
= Programmer 2 STOP
RESE2 = Programmer 2 RESET
ST.P12
= Programmer 1 and 2 START
STP.12
= Programmer 1 and 2 STOP
RES.1.2
= Programmer 1 and 2 RESET
TRIG1 = Trigger1 Function Block event
TRIG2 = Trigger2 Function Block event
Submenu Attributes
CALE.C
R W
Submenu Attributes
CALE.C
R W
Submenu Attributes
CALE.C
R W
Submenu Attributes
CALE.C
R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 130
Acronym
IN.DIG
Scrolling message
DIGITAL INPUT CONFIG
Password
Level 2
Description
Lets you configure the controller’s digital inputs.
The menu is present if there are digital inputs.
Parameter
I.DIG.N
Selecting the digital input
Pag.
StAt
Defining the input state
F.in
Selecting the assigned function
ST.EN.N
Setting assigned consent number
PRE.SW
Pre-scaler setting for number of input switchings
SWTCH
Setting of number of input switchings for signal
MSG.IN
Selecting the digital input message
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 131
Digital input
OFF
ON variable selection
STAT
Stato ingresso digitale
INPUT_DIG Scrolling message
MSG.IN
Digital input state
INPUT_DIG
Function
F.IN
NONE AU-MA1 LO-RE1 HOLD1
AL.ACK S.TUN1 A.TUN1 ON-OF
FKEY WRI.EN CY.CNT CY.RES
if the Multiset function is enabled in MODE.1:
SEL1.0 SEL1.1
if the Timer function is enabled in MODE.1:
T.STS1 T.RST1
if the Programmer 1 function is enabled in parameter PROGR on the EN.FUN menu:
P.STS1 P.STR1 P.STP1 P.RST1
P.SKP1 ST.SK1 ST.EN1
if the Logic options function is enables :
LFB.IN KEY.U KEY.D KEY.F
if the Programmer 1 function is enabled in parameter PROGR on the EN.FUN menu
P.PR1.0 P.PR1.1 P.PR1.2 P.PR1.3
If the Recipes of parameters function is enabled in parameter RECP.N >= 2:
REC.0
If the Recipes of parameters function is enabled in parameter RECP.N >= 3:
REC.1
If the Recipes of parameters function is enabled in parameter RECP.N = 5:
REC.2
If the PID2.E function is enabled in EN.FUN:
AU.MA2 LO.RE2 HOLD2 S.TUN2
A.TUN2
if the Multiset function is enabled in MODE.2:
SEL2.0 SEL2.1
if the Programmer 1 function is enabled in parameter PROGR on the EN.FUN menu:
P.PR2.0 P.PR2.1 P.PR2.2 P.PR2.3
P.STS2 P.STR2 P.STP2 P.RST2
P.SKP2 ST.SK2 ST.EN2
if the Timer function is enabled MODE.2:
T.STS2 T.RST2
if the Multiset function is enabled in MODE.1
and Multiset function is enabled in MODE.2:
SE12.0 SE12.1
if the Programmer 1 and 2 function is enabled in parameter PROGR on the EN.FUN menu:
P.P12.1 P.P12.2 P.P12.3 P.SS12
P.ST12 P.SP12 P.RS12 P.SK12
ST.S12 ST.E12
If valve model with auxiliary input present, function
FUnC=VALV.P and custom linear type, and with one output configured as V.OPEN and one configured as V.CLOS:
VALV.P
If valve model:
V.END.O
= Valve opening limit stop
V.END.C
= Valve closing limit stop
*) Verranno rilevate commutazioni con frequenza massima di 25 Hz con tempo di ON e di OFF pari ad almeno 20 msec.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 132
Acronym Scrolling message
I.DIG.N
DIGITAL INPUT NUMBER
The parameter shows and sets the identifying number of the digital input to be configured.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1...3
1...5
for model 850 with 3 digital inputs option for models 1650 and 1850 with 5 digital inputs option
Submenu Attributes
IN.DIG
R W
Acronym
StAt
Scrolling message
IN.DIG.1 (o IN.DIG.2 … IN.DIG.5) DIGITAL INPUT STATUS
Submenu Attributes
IN.DIG
The parameter shows and sets the state of the input with identifying number “x”.
The direct digital input is active when there is current in the digital input or the contact is closed.
The inverse digital input is active when there is no current in the digital input or the contact is open.
Digital inputs can be forced so that they are always on or off.
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : DIREC = Direct digital input
INVRS = Inverse digital input
OFF
ON
= Digital input forced off
= Digital input forced on
Acronym
F.in
Scrolling message
IN.DIG.1 (o IN.DIG.2 … IN.DIG.5) DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTION
Submenu Attributes
IN.DIG
The parameter shows and sets the function assigned to the digital input with identifying number “x”.
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : NONE = No assigned function
AU.MA1
= Automatic-Manual control for PID.1
LO.RE1
= Local-Remote setpoint mode for PID.1
HOLD1 = IN.1 Hold value of main input
AL.ACK
= Reset alarm latches
S.TUN1
= Activate Self-Tuning for PID.1
A.TUN1
= Activate Auto-Tuning for PID.1
ON-OF = Software ON-OFF
FKEY = Block F key
WRI.EN
= Enable writing of configuration parameters if the Multiset function is enabled in MODE.1
:
SEL1.0
= Setpoint M.SP1.1/M.SP2.1 or M.SP1.1…M.SP4.1 bit 0
SEL1.1
= Setpoint M.SP1.1…M.SP4.1 bit 1 if the Timer function is enabled in MODE.1:
T.STS1
= START/STOP timer TIMER.1
T.RST1
= RESET timer TIMER.1
if the Programmer 1 function is enabled in parameter PROGR on the EN.FUN menu :
(for details, see paragraph “5.13. Setpoint programmer” on page 214 ):
P.STS1
= START/STOP PROGR.1 programmer time base
P.STR1
= START PROGR.1 programmer time base
P.STP1
= STOP PROGR.1 programmer time base
P.RST1
= RESET PROGR.1 programmer time base
P.SKP1
= SKIP to end program (end cycle) PROGR.1
ST.SK1
= SKIP to end step PROGR.1
ST.EN1
= STEP ENABLE 1: input with consent function at start of PROGR.1 step
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 133
if the Logic Options function is enabled:
LFB.IN
= Function Blocks Logic Input
KEY.U
= Repetition of UP button
KEY.D
= Repetition of DOWN button
KEY.F
= Repetition of F button if the Programmer 1 function is enabled in parameter PROGR on the EN.FUN menu:
(for details, see paragraph “5.13. Setpoint programmer” on page 214 ):
P.PR1.0
= Select program for PROGR.1 bit 0
P.PR1.1
= Select program for PROGR.1 bit 1
P.PR1.2
= Select program for PROGR.1 bit 2
P.PR1.3
= Select program for PROGR.1 bit 3 if the Programmer 1 function is enabled in parameter PROGR on the EN.FUN menu:
(for details, see paragraph “5.13. Setpoint programmer” on page 214 ):
P.PR1.0
= Select program for PROGR.1 bit 0
P.PR1.1
= Select program for PROGR.1 bit 1
P.PR1.2
= Select program for PROGR.1 bit 2
P.PR1.3
= Select program for PROGR.1 bit 3
CY.CNT
= Activate switching cycle count shown in INDG.S (INFO menu) *
CY.RES
= Reset switching cycle count shown in INDG.S (INFO menu)
REC.0
= Select parameters recipe bit 0
REC.1
= Select parameters recipe bit 1
REC.2
= Select parameters recipe bit 2 if PID2.E function is enabled in EN.FUN:
AU.MA2
= Automatic-Manual control for PID.2
LO.RE2
= Local-Remote setpoint mode for PID.2
HOLD2 = Hold value of input IN.2
S.TUN2
= Activate Self-Tuning for PID.2
A.TUN2
= Activate Auto-Tuning for PID.2
if the Multiset funcion is enabled in MODE.2:
SEL2.0
= Select setpoint M.SP1.2/M.SP2.2 or M.SP1.2…M.SP4.2 bit 0
SEL2.1
= Select setpoint M.SP1.2…M.SP2.2 bit 1 if the Programmer 2 function is enabled in parameter PROGR on the EN.FUN menu:
(for details, see paragraph “5.13. Setpoint programmer” on page 214 ):
P.PR2.0
= Select program for PROGR.2 bit 0
P.PR2.1
= Select program for PROGR.2 bit 1
P.PR2.2
= Select program for PROGR.2 bit 2
P.PR2.3
= Select program for PROGR.2 bit 3
P.STS2
= START/STOP PROGR.2 programmer time base
P.STR2
= START PROGR.2 programmer time base
P.STP2
= STOP PROGR.2 programmer time base
P.RST2
= RESET PROGR.2 programmer time base
P.SKP2
= SKIP to end program (end cycle) PROGR.2
ST.SK2
= SKIP to end step PROGR.2
ST.EN2
= STEP ENABLE 2: input with consent function at start of PROGR.2 step if the Timer function is enabled in MODE.2:
T.STS2
= START/STOP timer TIMER.2
T.RST2
= RESET timer TIMER.2
if the Multiset function in MODE.1 and the Multiset function in MODE.2 are enabled:
SE12.0
= Select setpoint M.SP1.1/M.SP2.1 and M.SP1.2/M.SP2.2 or
M.SP1.1…M.SP4.1 bit 0 and M.SP1.2…M.SP4.2 bit 0
SE12.1
= Select setpoint M.SP1.1…M.SP4.1 bit 1 and M.SP1.2…M.SP4.2 bit 1
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 134
if the Programmer 1 and 2 function is enabled in parameter PROGR on the EN.FUN menu:
(for details, see paragraph “5.13. Setpoint programmer” on page 214 ):
P.P12.1
= Select program for PROGR.1 and for PROGR.2 bit 1
P.P12.2
= Select program for PROGR.1 and for PROGR.2 bit 2
P.P12.3
= Select program for PROGR.1 and for PROGR.2 bit 3
P.SS12
= START/STOP PROGR.1 and PROGR.2 programmer time base
P.ST12
= START PROGR.1 and PROGR.2 programmer time base
P.SP12
= STOP and PROGR.1 e PROGR.2 programmer time base
P.RS12
= RESET and PROGR.1 e PROGR.2 programmer time base
P.SK12
= SKIP to end program (end cycle) PROGR.1 and PROGR.2
ST.S12
= SKIP to end step PROGR.1 and PROGR.2
ST.E12
= STEP ENABLE 1/2: input with consent function at start of PROGR.1 and PROGR.2 step
If valve model with auxiliary input present, function FUnC=VALV.P and custom linear type, and with one output configured as V.OPEN and one configured as V.CLOS:
VALV.P
= Auxiliary input configuration if valve model:
V.END.O
= Valve opening limit stopa
V.END.C
= Valve closing limit stop
Acronym Scrolling message
ST.EN.N
IN.DIG.1 (o IN.DIG.2 … IN.DIG.5) ENABLE NUMBER
Submenu
IN.DIG
The parameter shows and sets the consent number assigned to the digital input identified by I.DIG.N.
The parameter appears if the parameter F.in.x = ST.EN1, ST.EN2 or ST.E12.
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1...4
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
PRE.SW
IN.DIG.1 (o IN.DIG.2 … IN.DIG.5) PRESCALER FOR SWITCHING CYCLES IN.DIG
R W
The parameter shows and sets the prescaler for the number of switchings of the digital input with CY.CNT function.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1...9999
Acronym
SWTCH
Scrolling message
IN.DIG.1 (o IN.DIG.2 … IN.DIG.5) NUMBER OF SWITCHING CYCLES
Submenu
IN.DIG
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the number of switchings of the digital input with CY.CNT function, which if exceeded generates the scrolling message DIGITAL INPUT SWITCH ALARM.
The function is disabled if the parameter equals “0”.
CAUTION: the minimum counting unit is 1000 (display 1 = 1000 counts)
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1...9999
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 135
Acronym Scrolling message
MSG.IN
IN.DIG.1 (o IN.DIG.2 … IN.DIG.5) NUMBER OF SCROLLING MESSAGE AT
INPUT ACT
Submenu
IN.DIG
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the number of the message assigned to activation of the digital input, i.e., the scrolling message shown on the display.
For more information on scrolling messages, see paragraph “3.1.2.2. Scrolling messages” on page 44.
If the parameter is set to “0” no message will be displayed when the digital input is activated.
The same message number can be assigned to different inputs.
Unit of measurement : Number identificativo del messaggio
Options : 0...25 (with LAnG=LANG1 or LANG2 or LANG3)
0…75 (with LAnG=NONE)
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 136
Acronym
OUTPU
Scrolling message
OUTPUT CONFIG
Password
Level 2
Description
Lets you configure the controller outputs.
Parameter Pag.
OUT.N
Selecting the output
StAt
Defining the output state
F.out
Selecting the function assigned to relay, logic or Triac output
tYPE
Defining the type of continuous output
F.ou.C
Selecting the function assigned to continuous output
EVNT.N
Setting the event number
FB.O.N
Setting the Function
Block output number
IN.DG.N
Setting the digital input number
SWTCH
Setting the number of switchings for signal
FAULT
State of output with broken input
MSG.OU
Selecting the output message
CY.TIM
Cycle time of output
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 137
NONE HEAT1 COOL1 ALRM1
ALRM2 ALRM3 ALRM4 OR.12
OR.123 O.1234 AND.12 AN.123
A.1234 LBA1 BUT.SR POWR1 if model with CT1+CT2:
AL.HB
if the Timer function is enabled in MODE.1:
TMR1 if the Programmer 1 function is enabled in parameter PROGR on the EN.FUN menu
P.HBB1 P.RUN1 P.HLD1 P.RDY1
P.END1 P.EVE1
if the Logic option function is enabled:
LFB.O
if model with valve control:
V.OPEN V.CLOS
if model with digital inputs:
IN.DIG
if the PID2.E function is enabled in EN.FUN:
HEAT2 COOL2 LBA2 POWR2 if the Timer function is enabled in MODE.2:
TIMR2 if the Programmer 2 function is enabled in parameter PROGR on the EN.FUN menu:
P.HBB2 P.RUN2 P.HLD2 P.RDY2
P.END2 P.EVE2
if model with Master Modbus serial (except output 1) and at least one Master parameter configured as
MASTER :
Function
F.OUT
OFF
ON
CY.TIM
PWM MANAGEMENT with analogue levels for Output 1 only of CONT.A or CONT.C type
Definition state
STAT
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 138
CY.TIM
PWM MANAGEMENT parameter only for digital outputs with
F.OUT = HEAT1/COOL1
HEAT2/COOL2
Output
Scrolling message
MSG.OU
Acronym Scrolling message
OUT.N
OUTPUT NUMBER
The parameter shows and sets the identifying number of the output to be configured.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1...4
Submenu Attributes
OUTPU R W
Acronym
StAt
Scrolling message
OUTPU.1 (o OUTPU.2… OUTPU.4) DIGITAL OUTPUT STATUS
Submenu
OUTPU
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the state of the output with identifying number “x”.
The active direct output corresponds to the relay, logic, or trial output ON (conducting).
The active inverse output corresponds to the relay, logic, or trial output OFF.
If the output is continuous, direct corresponds to minimum = 4mA and maximum = 20 mA, while inverse corresponds to minimum = 20 mA and maximum = 4 mA.
The outputs can be forced so that they are always on or off.
On models 1650-1850, if the VT1, option is present, the parameter is ON.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : DIREC = Direct output
INVRS = Inverse output
OFF
ON
= Output forced off
= Output forced on
DI.PWM
= Direct output with partialisation of ON/OFF and cycle time CY.TIM (for Output 1 of
CONT.A or CONT.C type only)
IN.PWM
= Direct output with partialisation of ON/OFF and cycle time CY.TIM (for Output 1 of
CONT.A or CONT.C type only)
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 139
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
F.out
OUTPU.1 (o OUTPU.2… OUTPU.4) OUTPUT FUNCTION OUTPU R W
The parameter shows and sets the function assigned to the output with identifying number “x”, if the output is relay, logic or Triac and is direct or inverse.
Options :
Unit of measurement : -
NONE = No assigned function
HEAT1 = Heat control output of PID.1
COOL1 = Cool control output of PID.1
ALRM1 = Output for Alarm 1
ALRM2 = Output for Alarm 2
ALRM3 = Output for Alarm 3
ALRM4 = Output for Alarm 4
OR.12
= Alarm 1 OR Alarm 2
OR.123
= Alarm 1 OR Alarm 2 OR Alarm 3
O.1234
= Alarm 1 OR Alarm 2 OR Alarm 3 OR Alarm 4
AND.12
= Alarm 1 AND Alarm 2
AN.123
= Alarm 1 AND Alarm 2 AND Alarm 3
A.1234
= Alarm 1 AND Alarm 2 AND Alarm 3 AND Alarm 4 if model with CT1+CT2:
AL.HB
LBA1
= Output for HB alarm
BUT.SR
TIMR1
= Output for LBA alarm of PID.1
= Set/Reset from key if the Timer function is enabled in MODE.1
= Timer state (end of count)
: if the Programmer 1 function is enabled in parameter PROGR on the EN.FUN menu :
P.HBB1
= HBB alarm of programmer of PROGR.1
P.RUN1
= RUN state of programmer of PROGR.1
P.HLD1
= STOP state of programmer of PROGR.1
P.RDY1
= READY state of programmer (after reset of time base) of PROGR.1
P.END1
= END state of programmer ofPROGR.1
P.EVE1
= EVENTO state of programmer of PROGR.1
if model with Logic Operations :
LFB.O
= Output of Function Blocks if model with valve control :
V.OPEN
= Output for the opening of the valve
V.CLOS
= Output for the closure of the valve if model with digital inputs:
IN.DIG
= Repetition of a digital input
POWR1 = Output for PID.1 power alarm if PID2.E function is enabled in EN.FUN:
HEAT2 = PID.2 heat control output
COOL2 = PID.2 cool control output
LBA2 = PID.2 LBA alarm output
POWR2 = Output for PID.2 power alarm if the Timer function is enabled in MODE.2:
TIMR2 = TIMER.2 timer state (end count) if the Programmer 2 function is enabled in parameter PROGR on the EN.FUN menu:
P.HBB2
= HBB programmer PROGR.2 alarm
P.RUN2
= RUN programmer PROGR.2 state
P.HLD2
= STOP programmer PROGR.2 state
P.RDY2
= READY programmer PROGR.2 state (after reset of time base)
P.END2
= END programmer PROGR.2 state
P.EVE2
= EVENTO programmer PROGR.2 state if model with Master Modbus serial (except output 1) and at least one Master parameter configured as MASTER:
MASTER = Master value (for type provided to word only) (index no. to be specified in MAST.N)
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 140
Acronym Scrolling message
TYPE CONTINUE OUTPUT TYPE
The parameter shows and sets the definition of continuous output.
The parameter applies only to Output 1 of CONT.A
Unit of measurement : -
Options : 20MA = 0...20 mA output
4-20M = 4...20 mA output
10V = 0...10 V output
2-10V = 2...10 V output
C.20MA
= 0...20 mA custom output
C.4-20 = 4...20 mA custom output
C.10V
= 0...10 V custom output
C.2-10 = 2...10 V custom output
Submenu Attributes
OUTPU R W
Acronym
F.ou.C
Scrolling message
REFERENCE SIGNAL CONTINUE OUTPUT
The parameter shows and sets the function assigned to continuous output 1, direct or inverse.
Submenu Attributes
OUTPU R W
The parameter applies only to Output 1 of CONT.A. or CONT.C.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : NONE = No assigned function
HEAT1 = Heat control output of PID.1
COOL1 = Cool control output of PID.1
PV1 = Process variable 1
SSP1 = Active setpoint of PID.1
SETP1 = Local setpoint of PID.1
DEVI1 = Deviation |SSp-PV| of PID.1
SERIA = Value set from serial line
H+C1 = PID.1 heat/cool control output if PID2.E function is enabled in EN.FUN in EN.FUNC and parameter FUNC=PV2 in INPUT.2:
HEAT2 = PID.2 heat control output
COOL2 = UPID.2 control output
H+C2 = PID.2 heat/cool control output
PV2 = Process variable 2
SSP2 = PID.2 active setpoint
SETP2 = PID.2 local setpoint
DEVI2 = PID.2 deviation |SSp-PV|
IN1 = Main input if the model with auxiliary input:
IN2 = Auxiliary input if the model with auxiliary input 2:
IN3 = Auxiliary input 2
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 141
Acronym Scrolling message
EVNT.N
OUTPU.1 (o OUTPU.2… OUTPU.4) EVENT NUMBER
The parameter shows and sets the event number.
The parameter appears if the parameter F.out = P.EVE1, P.EVE2.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1...4
Acronym Scrolling message
FB.O.N
OUTPU.1 (o OUTPU.2 … OUTPU.4) FUNCTION BLOCK OUTPUT NUMBER
The parameter shows and sets the number of the Function Block assigned to the output.
The parameter appears if the parameter F.out = LFB.O.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1...32
Submenu Attributes
OUTPU R W
Submenu Attributes
OUTPU R W
Acronym Scrolling message
IN.DG.N
OUTPU.1 (o OUTPU.2 … OUTPU.4) DIGITAL INPUT NUMBER
The parameter shows and sets the number of the digital input assigned to the output.
The parameter appears if the parameter F.out = IN.DIG.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1...3
1...5
Model 850 with option 3 digital inputs
Model 1650 and 1850 with option 5 digital inputs
Submenu Attributes
OUTPU R W
Acronym Scrolling message
MAST.N
OUTPU.1 (o OUTPU.2… OUTPU.4) MASTER PARAMETER NUMBER
This parameter shows and sets the Master parameter number associated with the output.
This parameter only appears if the F.OUT parameter = MASTER
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1...20
Submenu Attributes
OUTPU R W
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
SWTCH OUTPU.1 (o OUTPU.2 … OUTPU.4) NUMBER OF SWITCHING CYCLES OUTPU R W
The parameter shows and sets the number of switchings (x1000) of the relay, exceeding which the signal is generated
OUTX.SWITCH ALARM where X is the number of output 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 if the output is relay, logic or triac.
The function is disabled if the parameter equals “0”.
CAUTION: The minimum counting unit is 1000 ON-OFF switching operations. The alarm is therefore triggered for values strictly greater than the set SWTCH parameter (e.g. if SWTCH is set to 1, the alarm is not triggered at 1000 + 1 switches, but at 1000 + 1000 switches = 2000).
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...9999
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 142
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
FAULT OUTPU.1 (o OUTPU.2 … OUTPU.4) FAULT OUTPUT STATE OUTPU R W
The parameter shows and sets the state (ON, OFF) that the output assumes in case of sensor fault (Err, Sbr, ...), on main input IN.1 or auxiliary input IN.2, if the output is direct or inverse and automatic operation mode.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF.1
= Output OFF in case of fault on main input IN.1
On.1
= Output ON in case of fault on main input IN.1
nOnE = Output continues to function normally if the model with auxiliary input:
OFF.2
= Output OFF in case of fault on auxiliary input IN.2
On.2
= Output ON in case of fault on auxiliary input IN.2
OF.12
= Output OFF in case of fault on input IN.1 or IN.2
On.12
= Output ON in case of fault on input IN.1 or IN.2
Acronym Scrolling message
MSG.OU
OUTPU.1 (o OUTPU.2 … OUTPU.4) NUMBER OF SCROLLING MESSAGE AT
OUTPUT ACT
Submenu
OUTPU
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the number of the message assigned to activation of the output, i.e., the scrolling message shown on the display.
For more information on scrolling messages, see paragraph “3.1.2.2. Scrolling messages” on page 44.
If the parameter is set to “0” no message will be displayed when the output is activated.
The same message number can be assigned to different outputs.
Unit of measurement : Message number
Options : 0...25 (with LAnG=LANG1 or LANG2 or LANG3)
0…75 (with LAnG=NONE)
Acronym
LO.C
Scrolling message
LOW LIMIT CONTINUE OUTPUT
Submenu
OUTPU
Attributes
R W
This parameter shows and sets the low limits of the scale, corresponding to the minimum output voltage or current.
Every time the F.ou.C parameter of power control output is set, the value of this parameter is forced to 0.
This parameter only applies if Output 1 is of the CONT.A or CONT.C type.
Unit of measurement : Points on the scale of quantities associated with continuous output
Options : -1999...9999
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
HI.C
HIGH LIMIT CONTINUE OUTPUT OUTPU R W
This parameter shows and sets the high limits of the scale, corresponding to the maximum output voltage or current.
Every time the F.ou.C parameter of power control output is set, the value of this parameter is forced to 1000.
This parameter only applies if Output 1 is of the CONT.A or CONT.C type.
Unit of measurement : Points on the scale of quantities associated with continuous output
Options : -1999...9999
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 143
Acronym Scrolling message
CY.TIM
OUTPU.1 (o OUTPU.2 … OUTPU.4) CYCLE TIME
The parameter shows and sets the slicing period of the output.
The parameter appears if the parameter F.ou.x = HEAT1, HEAT2 or F.ou.x = COOL1, COOL2.
Submenu
OUTPU
Attributes
R W
The slicing period is the cycle time, i.e., the sum of ON time and OFF time proportional to the value of Heat or Cool power.
Example
Se la potenza di Heat è il 25% e la durata del ciclo è di 10.0 secondi, l’uscita è attiva per 2,5 secondi e disattiva per 7,5 secondi.
Burst Firing (BF) mode has a variable cycle time, optimized to transfer power as quickly as possible.
The minimum interval for ON or OFF equals the electrical cycle (20 ms at 50 Hz).
The ON and OFF times are multiples of the minimum time.
Example
If Heat power is 25% and the line frequency is 50 Hz, the cycle time is 80 ms. The output is active for 20 ms and inactive for 60 ms (= 3 × 20 ms, equal to the remaining 75% of the cycle time).
Unit of measurement : Seconds
Options : 0.0...20.0
1...200
for digital and Triac outputs. There is Burst Firing (BF) with 0.0
for relay output
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 144
Acronym
OUT.AN
Scrolling message
ANALOG
RETRASMISSION
OUTPUT CONFIG
Password
Level 2
Description
Lets you configure the analog output used for retransmission of analog values.
The submenu appears if the analog retransmission output is present on the controller.
Parameter Pag.
OU.AN.N
Selecting the output
StAt
Defining the state of the analog output
tYPE
Defining the type of analog output
FuNC
Selecting the function assigned to the analog output
LO.SCL
Scale minimum
HI.SCL
Scale maximum
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 145
NONE
HEAT1/HEAT2
COOL1/COOL2
H+C1/H+C2
IN1/IN2/IN3
PV1/PV2
SSP1/SSP2
SETP1/SETP2
DEVI1/DEVI2
SLV.S1/SLV.S2
SERIA
MASTER
Function
FUNC pag.
OFF
ON
CY.TIM
GESTIONE PWM with analog levels
Probe type
TYPE
Definition state
STAT
Scale limit
LO.SCL
HI.SCL
Analog output state
OUT.Ax
page
Analog output
Acronym
OU.AN.N
ANALOG OUTPUT NUMBER
Scrolling message
The parameter shows and sets the identifying number of the output to be configured.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1...2
Submenu Attributes
OUT.AN
R W
Acronym
StAt
Scrolling message
OUT.AN.1 (o OUT.AN.2) ANALOG OUTPUT STATUS
Submenu
OUT.AN
The parameter shows and sets the state of analog retransmission output A1 or A2.
The active direct output corresponds to minimum with the minimum output value in voltage or current.
The active inverse output corresponds to minimum with the maximum output value in voltage or current.
The outputs can be forced so that they are always on or off.
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : DIREC = Direct output
INVRS = Inverse output
OFF
ON
= Forced output inactive (minimum voltage or current value)
= Forced output active (maximum voltage or current value)
DI.PWM
= Direct output with partialisation of ON/OFF and cycle time CY.TIM
IN.PWM
= Inverse output with partialisation of ON/OFF and cycle time CY.TIM
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 146
Acronym Scrolling message tYPE OUT.AN.1 (o OUT.AN.2) ANALOG OUTPUT TYPE
The parameter shows and sets the definition of analog output A1 or A2.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : 20MA = 0...20 mA Output
4-20M = 4...20 mA Output
10V = 0...10 V Output
2-10V = 2...10 V Output
C.20MA
= 0...20 mA Custom output
C.4-20 = 4...20 mA Custom output
C.10V
= 0...10 V Custom output
C.2-10 = 2...10 V Custom output
Submenu Attributes
OUT.AN
R W
Acronym
FuNC
Scrolling message
OUT.AN.1 (o OUT.AN.2) REFERENCE SIGNAL ANALOG OUTPUT
Submenu Attributes
OUT.AN
The parameter shows and sets the function assigned (retransmission of values) to analog output A1 or A2.
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : NONE = No assigned function
HEAT1 = Heat control power of PID.1
COOL1 = Cool control power of PID.1
PV1
SSP1
= Process variable 1
= Active setpoint of PID.1
SETP1 = Local setpoint of PID.1
DEVI1 = Deviation |SSp-PV| of PID.1
SERIA = Value set from serial line if the Programmer 1 function is enabled in parameter PROGR on the EN.FUN menu:
SLV.S1
= Slaved setpoint of PROGR.1
H+C1 = PID.1 heat/cool control output if PID2.E function is enabled in EN.FUN:
HEAT2 = PID.2 heat control output
COOL2 = PID.2 cool control output
H+C2
PV2
SSP2
= PID.2 heat/cool control output
= Process variable 2
= PID.2 active setpoint
SETP2 = PID.2 local setpoint
DEVI2 = PID.2 deviation |SSp-PV| if the Programmer 2 function is enabled in parameter PROGR on the EN.FUN menu:
SLV.S2
= Slaved setpoint of PROGR.2
IN1 = Main input if the model with auxiliary input:
IN2 = Auxiliary input if the model with auxiliary input 2:
IN3 = Auxiliary input 2 if model with Master Modbus serial (except output 1) and at least one Master parameter configured as GF_eXpress:
MASTER = Master value (for type provided to word only) (index no. to be specified in MAST.N)
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 147
Acronym Scrolling message
MAST.N
OUT.AN.1 (o OUT.AN.2) MASTER PARAMETER NUMBER
This parameter shows and sets the Master parameter number associated with the output.
This parameter only appears if the F.ou.C parameter = MASTER.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1...20
Submenu Attributes
OUT.AN
R W
Acronym
CY.TIM
Scrolling message
OUT.AN.1 (o OUT.AN.2) CYCLE TIME
Submenu
OUT.AN
Attributes
R W
This parameter shows and sets the output partialisation period.
The parameter will appear if the StAt parameter = DI.PWM, IN.PWM.
Partialisation period is the cycle time, that is, the sum of ON time and OFF time proportional to the value to be retransmitted.
Example
If the value to be retransmitted is 25% and the duration of the cycle is 10.0 seconds, the output will be active for 2.5 seconds and deactivated for 7.5 seconds.
Unit of measurement : Seconds
Options : 1...200
Acronym Scrolling message
LO.SCL
OUT.AN.1 (o OUT.AN.2) LOW LIMIT ANALOG OUTPUT
Submenu
OUT.AN
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the scale minimum, which corresponds to minimum output value in voltage or current.
Each time you set the power control output on parameter FuNC, the parameter value is forced to 0.
The scale limit is ignored if the output is assigned to an MFB output (or calculated directly by an MFB.
Unit of measurement : Scale points of quantity assigned to analog output.
Options : -1999...9999
Acronym
HI.SCL
Scrolling message
OUT.AN.1 (o OUT.AN.2) HIGH LIMIT ANALOG OUTPUT
Submenu
OUT.AN
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the scale maximum, which corresponds to minimum output value in voltage or current.
Each time you set the power control output on parameter FuNC, the parameter value is forced to 1000.
The scale limit is ignored if the output is assigned to an MFB output (or calculated directly by an MFB).
Unit of measurement : Scale points of quantity assigned to analog output.
Options : -1999...9999
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 148
Acronym
VALVE
Scrolling message
VALVE MANAGER
Password
Level 2
Description
Lets you configure control parameters for motorized valves.
The submenu appears if the controller is set for valve control
Parameter Pag.
FuNC
Defining valve function
KEY.MO
Enabling valve operation with keys
TRAVL
Valve actuator travel time
TIM.LO
Minimum power change for valve drive
TIM.HI
Impulse mode setpoint
TIM.ON
Minimum valve impulse time or ON time in impulse mode
TIM.OF
OFF time in impulse mode
DEAD.B
Deadzone symmetrical to setpoint
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 149
Acronym Scrolling message
FuNC VALVE CONTROL FUNCTION
The parameter shows and sets the valve function, i.e., if it controls a heating or cooling system.
Submenu Attributes
VALVE R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : HEAT1 = PID.1 heat control power
COOL1 = PID.1 cool control power if it is enabled PID2.E in EN.FUN function:
HEAT2 = PID.2 heat control power
COOL2 = PID.2 cool control power
Acronym Scrolling message
KEY.MO
VALVE OPEN/CLOSE FROM IN/DEC BUTT ENABLE
Submenu
VALVE
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets enabling of valve opening and closing with controller keys and in manual mode.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= Keys do not act directly on valve opening and closing
= Keys enabled for manual valve opening and closing
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
TRAVL ACTUATOR TRAVEL TIME VALVE R W
The parameter shows and sets the time taken by the actuator to bring the valve from “full open” position to “full closed” position or vice versa.
The time is obtained by trial or deduced from the valves technical data.
Unit of measurement : Seconds
Options : 0...2000
Acronym
TIM.LO
MINIMUM PULSE TIME
Scrolling message Submenu
VALVE
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the minimum power change needed to drive the valve.
The parameter is calculated as a percentage of the TRAVL parameter and serves to prevent excess activity of the valve, with consequent electromechanical stress.
Unit of measurement : % di TRAVL
Options : 0.0...25.0
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 150
Acronym
TIM.HI
Scrolling message
IMPULSIVE MODE INTERVENTION THRESHOLD
Submenu Attributes
VALVE
The parameter shows and sets the impulse mode setpoint as a percentage of valve opening time TRAVL.
R W
Unit of measurement : % di TRAVL
Options : 0.0...100.0
Acronym
TIM.ON
Scrolling message
ON TIME FOR IMPULSIVE MODE
Submenu
VALVE
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the minimum valve impulse time or ON time in impulse mode as a percentage of valve opening time TRAVL.
Unit of measurement : % di TRAVL
Options : 0.0...100.0
Acronym
TIM.OF
Scrolling message
OFF TIME FOR IMPULSIVE MODE
Submenu
VALVE
The parameter shows and sets OFF time in impulse mode as a percentage of valve opening time TRAVL.
A value below TIM.ON is forced to TIM.ON.
The TIM.On and TIM.OF functions are both excluded if the parameter equals “0.0”.
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : % di TRAVL
Options : 0.0...100.0
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
DEAD.B
DEAD ZONE VALVE R W
The parameter shows and sets a band symmetrical to the setpoint. If PV is in this band, valve activity and the related integral action is stopped.
It prevents frequent corrections of the valve position, with consequent electromechanical stress, following small changes in the value of the PV.
Unit of measurement : % of full scale of main or auxiliary input.
Options : 0.0...25.0
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 151
Acronym
EN.FUN
Scrolling message
ENABLE FUNCTIONS
Password
Level 2
Description
Lets you configure other controller functions.
Parameter Pag.
PID2.E
F
Enabling PID.2
APP.t
F
PID control application type
CAS.R
F
Cascade control reference
PROGR
F
Enabling the setpoint programmer
RECP.N
F
Number of parameters recipes
ALRM.N
F
Number of alarms enabled
On.OF
F
Enabling software shutdown from keys dIG
F
Defining type of digital inputs
T.SAMP
F
Sampling time of main and auxiliary input
FREQZ
Defining power line frequency
Parameter
Enable mode programmer
Simplified
S.PROG
F
EN.EDI
F
Enabling
Menu configurator
Enabling webserver
WEB.E
F
Map type
MAP.t
Pag.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 152
Acronym Scrolling message
PID2.E
ENABLE OF PID 2
The parameter shows and sets enabling of second PID.
Submenu Attributes
EN.FUN
R W
The parameter appears only if the optional auxiliary input is available and if option PV2 on the FUNC parameter of the
INPUT.2 menu has been selected.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= PID.2 disabled
= PID.2 enabled
Acronym
APP.t
Scrolling message
PID APPLICATION CONTROL TYPE
The parameter shows and sets the PID control application type.
Submenu
EN.FUN
Attributes
R W
The parameter appears only if the optional auxiliary input is available, if option PV2 on the FUNC parameter of the
INPUT.2 was selected, and if parameter PID2.E is On.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : 2.PID
= For using the two PIDs (1 and 2) independently
CAS.HE
= PID.1 and PID.2 in cascade. PID.1 HEAT control output = setpoint for PID.2*
CAS.CO
= PID.1 and PID.2 in cascade. PID.1 COOL control output = setpoint for PID.2*
CAS.HC
= PID.1 and PID.2 in cascade. PID.1 HEAT + COOL control output = setpoint for PID.2*
(*) PID.1 control tends to maintain PV1 = SSP1 automatically; PID.2 control tends to maintain PV2 = OUT.P1 in remote setpoint mode. Remote setpoint mode is obtained with function keys/digital inputs /Logic Function Blocks /serial after having enabled remote setpoint SP.rEM=On.
Acronym
CAS.r
Scrolling message
CASCADE CONTROL REFERENCE
Submenu
EN.FUN
Attributes
R W
This parameter shows and sets the reference for cascade control, required for scaling of PID.1 power in the remote PID.2
setpoint.
This parameter is shown only if APP.t = CAS.HE or = CAS.CO or = CAS.HC.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : IN.SCL
SP.SCL
= PID.2 input scale
= PID.2 setpoint scale
Acronym Scrolling message
PROGR PROGRAMMER ENABLE
The parameter shows and sets enabling of the setpoint programmer for models P or PV.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On1
= Setpoint programmers 1 and 2 disabled
= Setpoint programmer 1 enabled
Submenu
EN.FUN
Attributes
R W if model with auxiliary input and function FUNC=PV2, with parameters PID2.E=On and APP.t=2.PID
On2 = Setpoint programmers 1 and 2 enabled
On.S
= Synchronous setpoint programmers 1 and 2 enabled
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 153
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
RECP.N
NUM OF PARAMETER RECIPES EN.FUN
R W
The parameter shows and sets the number of parameters recipes for which the template is defined via GF_eXpress.
If the parameter is “0” the parameters recipes are disabled.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...5
Acronym
ALRM.N
NUM OF ENABLE ALARMS
Scrolling message
The parameter shows and sets the number of alarms enabled.
No alarm is enabled if the parameter equals “0”.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...4
Submenu Attributes
EN.FUN
R W
Acronym
On.OF
SOFTWARE ON/OFF ENABLE
Scrolling message Submenu
EN.FUN
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and determines whether controller software can be shut down using keys.
The function for starting up controller software with the F key always remains enabled.
In the case of the programmer, the software shutdown option at the end of the programme End=OFF is not affected by this parameter.
In the case of timers, the software shutdown option at the end of the count End=OFF is not affected by this parameter.
In the case of the calendar, the timed software shutdown option is not affected by this parameter.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : ENABL
DISAB
= Controller software shutdown with keys is enabled
Controller software shutdown with keys is disabled
Acronym Scrolling message dIG DIGITAL INPUT TYPE
The parameter shows and sets the type of digital inputs.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : NPN = NPN digital inputs or voltage-free contact
PNP = PNP digital inputs
Acronym
T.SAMP
MAIN INPUT SAMPLE TIME
Scrolling message
The parameter shows and sets the main and auxiliary input sample time.
Unit of measurement : Milliseconds
Options : 60
120
Submenu Attributes
EN.FUN
R W
Submenu Attributes
EN.FUN
R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 154
Acronym Scrolling message
FREQZ LINE FREQUENCY
The parameter shows and sets the power line frequency.
Unit of measurement : Hz
Options : 50
60
Acronym Scrolling message
S.PROG
SIMPLIFIED PROGRAMMER MODE
This parameter shows and sets enabling of Simplified Programming mode.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= Simplified Programming Mode disabled
= Simplified Programming Mode enabled
Acronym
EN.EDI
Scrolling message
ENABLE EDITOR CONFIGURATOR
This parameter shows and sets enabling in the set-up of the editor on the tools menu.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= Menu Configurator disabled
= Menu Configurator enabled
Acronym Scrolling message
WEB.E
WEBSERVER ENABLE
This parameter shows and sets enabling of webserver mode.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF =
On =
Submenu Attributes
EN.FUN
R W
Submenu Attributes
EN.FUN
R W
Submenu Attributes
EN.FUN
R W
Submenu Attributes
EN.FUN
R W
Acronimo
MAP.t
MAP TYPE
Messaggio a scorrimento
The parameter shows and sets the type of Modbus memory map to be used.
The parameter appears if the RS485 Modbus RTU or Ethernet Modbus TCP option is present.
Unità di misura : -
Opzioni : STAND = Standard map
US+ST = User map + standard map
Submenu
EN.FUN
Attributi
R
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 155
Acronym
MODE
Scrolling message
FUNCTION MODE
MANAGER
Password
Level 2
Description
Lets you configure the controller’s functioning mode.
Parameter
MODE.N
Selecting function mode
Pag.
PID.G.N
Number of groups of control parameters
MA.AU
Defining transition from Manual to
Automatic
AU.MA
Defining transition from Automatic to
Manual
LO.rE
Defining transition from remote SP to local SP
MA.P.L
Enabling manual power latch
Parameter t.Pro
Setting the programmer base time
Pag.
ENERG
Enabling the energy counter function
MAn.P
Enabling change of manual power value
tMEr
Enabling Timer function
MUL.SP
Enabling Multiset function
SP.REM
Enabling the remote setpoint
SPr.T
Defining absolute or deviation remote setpoint
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 156
Acronym Scrolling message
MODE.N
MODE NUMBER
The parameter shows and sets the identifying number of the functions to be configured.
Submenu
MODE
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1
2
= Select modes for PID.1
= Select modes for PID.2 (only with auxiliary input option and PID.2 enabled via PID2.
E=On)
Acronym Scrolling message
PID.G.N
MODE.1 (o MODE.2) NUM OF CONTROL PARAMETERS GROUP
The parameter shows and sets the number of the groups of PID parameters.
The groups of control parameters are disabled if the parameter equals “0”.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...4
Submenu Attributes
MODE R W
Acronym
MA.AU
Scrolling message
MODE.1 (o MODE.2) MANUAL TO AUTOMATIC TRANSITION TYPE
Submenu
MODE
The parameter shows and sets controller behavior when switching from manual to automatic mode.
Attributes
R W
With STAND, the POWER output assumes the value calculated by the PID based on the local or remote SP (bumpless
PID with integral action based on actual PV-SP and power values).
With BUMPL, the local setpoint assumes the PV value (bumpless PID with integral action based on actual power value).
PV-SP = 0. With PID.1 enabled as controller of the MAN/AUTO switching ratio, RATIO = PV1 / IN2 is calculated.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : STAND
BUMPL
Acronym
AU.MA
Scrolling message
MODE.1 (o MODE.2) AUTOMATIC TO MANUAL TRANSITION TYPE
Submenu
MODE
The parameter shows and sets controller behavior when switching from automatic to manual mode.
Attributes
R W
With STAND, the control output assumes the local or remote POWER value.
With BUMPL, the value of the control output does not change. In case of remote manual control, the control acts in raise/ lower mode.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : STAND
BUMPL
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 157
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
LO.rE
MODE.1 (o MODE.2) REMOTE TO LOCAL TRANSITION TYPE MODE R W
The parameter shows and sets controller behavior when switching from remote to local setpoint, and is significant only with Func = SETP or RATIO.
With STAND, the setpoint switches to the value of the selected local SP or multiset, possibly with setpoint gradient (if set).
With BUMPL, the remote SP value is memorized in the selected local SP or multiset.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : STAND
BUMPL
Acronym
MA.P.L
Scrolling message
MODE.1 (o MODE.2) MANUAL POWER LATCH ENABLE
Submenu
MODE
The parameter shows and sets enabling of memorization (in non-volatile memory) of the manual power value.
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : LATCH = Latch enabled
NO.LAT
= Latch disabled. After Power-on, Manual power value is reset
Acronym
MAn.P
Scrolling message
MODE.1 (o MODE.2) MANUAL POWER MODIFY ENABLE
The parameter shows and sets enabling of change of the manual power value.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : MODIF = Change allowed
NO.MOD
= Change not allowed
Acronym Scrolling message tMEr MODE.1 (o MODE.2) TIMER ENABLE
The parameter shows and sets enabling of the Timer function.
The Timer function is explained in detail in paragraph “5.11. Timer” on page 212.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF = Timer disabled
ON.SEC
= Timer enabled with time base Seconds
ON.MIN
= enabled with time base Minutes
Submenu Attributes
MODE R W
Submenu Attributes
MODE R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 158
Acronym Scrolling message
MUL.SP
MODE.1 (o MODE.2) MULTISET ENABLE
Submenu Attributes
MODE
The parameter shows and sets enabling of the Multiset function.
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= Multiset disabled
= Multiset enabled
Acronym Scrolling message
SP.REM
MODE.1 (o MODE.2) REMOTE SP ENABLE
The parameter shows and sets enabling of the remote setpoint.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
SEr
= Remote setpoint disabled
= Remote setpoint enabled from analog input
= Remote setpoint enabled from serial
Acronym
SPr.t
Scrolling message
MODE.1 (o MODE.2) REMOTE SP TYPE
The parameter shows and defines the setpoint as absolute or deviation.
The absolute remote setpoint replaces the local setpoint in the control.
The deviation remote setpoint is added algebraically to the local setpoint in the control.
The parameter appears only if the parameter SP.REM is different from OFF
Unit of measurement : -
Options : ABSLT = Absolute remote setpoint
RELAT = Deviation remote setpoint
Acronym t.Pro
Scrolling message
MODE.1 (o MODE.2) PROGRAMMER BASE TIME DEFINITION
The parameter shows and sets the base time used by the programmer.
The parameter appears if the parameter PROGR = On.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : HH.MM
MM.SS
= Base time calculated in hours:minutes
= e time calculated in minutes:seconds
Submenu Attributes
MODE R W
Submenu Attributes
MODE R W
Submenu Attributes
MODE R W
Acronym
ENERG
Scrolling message
MODE.1 (o MODE.2) ENERGY COUNTER ENABLE
Submenu
MODE
The parameter shows and sets enabling of the energy counter function.
The Energy Counter function is explained in detail in paragraph “5.15. Energy counter” on page 228.
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= Energy counter disabled
= Energy counter enabled
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 159
Acronym
TIMER
Scrolling message
TIMER MANAGER
Password
Level 2
Description
Lets you configure the timer parameters.
The submenu appears only if the Timer function was enabled on the MODE submenu.
Parameter
TIME.N
Selecting timer
Pag.
FunC
Selecting timer function
St.St
Selecting the Start/
Stop timer command
S.S.t
Defining the Start/Stop timer command logic
rESE
Selecting the Reset timer command
rES.t
Defining the Reset timer command logic
BAND
Timer count band
End
Selecting the function activated at end of count
TIMER
Timer value
MSG.TM
Selection of the message associated with the end of counting
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 160
DIGITAL INPUT STATE
ALARM 1 STATE
ALARM 2 STATE
ALARM 3 STATE
ALARM 4 STATE
HB ALARM STATE
SERIAL STATE
Selecting
Start/Stop
ST.ST
AUTORESET IN STOP
DIGITAL INPUT STATE
ALARM 1 STATE
ALARM 2 STATE
ALARM 3 STATE
ALARM 4 STATE
HB ALARM STATE
SERIAL STATE
Selecting reset command
RESE
Start/Stop timer
Stabilization Timer
ON Timer
Definining logic
Start/Stop
S.S.T
Definiing logic reset
RES.T
Reset
Command
Start/Stop
Command
Function selection
FUNC
Logic timer
TIMER
BAND
END
Time elapsed
TIM.Ex
Time remaining
TIM.Rx
Scrolling message
MSG.TM
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 161
Acronym Scrolling message
TIME.N
TIMER NUMBER
The parameter shows and sets the identifying number of the timer to be configured.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1...2
Acronym
FunC
Scrolling message
TIMER.1 (o TIMER.2) TIMER FUNCTION
The parameter shows and sets the timer function mode.
The Timer function is explained in detail in paragraph “5.11. Timer” on page 212.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : ST.STP
STABL
SWITC
= Start/Stop Timer
= Stabilization Timer
= Power-on Timer
Submenu Attributes
TIMER R W
Submenu Attributes
TIMER R W
Acronym
St.St
Scrolling message
TIMER.1 (o TIMER.2) TIMER START STOP
The parameter shows and sets the “object” that commands timer Start/Stop and stabilization.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : IN.DIG
= From digital input
ALRM1 = From alarm 1
ALRM2 = From alarm 2
ALRM3 = From alarm 3
ALRM4 = From alarm 4
AL.HB
= From alarm HB
SERIA = From serial
Submenu Attributes
TIMER R W
Acronym Scrolling message
S.S.t
TIMER.1 (o TIMER.2) LOGIC TYPE OF TIMER START/STOP
The parameter shows and sets the type of logic used to command timer Start/Stop.
With positive logic, timer start corresponds to “object” active if IN.DIG input active.
With negative logic, timer start corresponds to “object” inactive if IN.DIG input inactive.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : POSIT
NEGAT
= Positive logic
= Negative logic
Submenu Attributes
TIMER R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 162
Acronym Scrolling message rESE TIMER.1 (o TIMER.2) TIMER RESET
The parameter shows and sets the “object” that commands Reset of the timer
Unit of measurement : -
Options : AUT.RS
= For autoreset with timer in Stop
IN.DIG
= From digital input with T.RST function
ALRM1 = From alarm 1
ALRM2 = From alarm 2
ALRM3 = From alarm 3
ALRM4 = From alarm 4
AL.HB
= From alarm HB
SERIA = From serial
Acronym Scrolling message rES.t
TIMER.1 (o TIMER.2) LOGIC TYPE OF TIMER RESET
The parameter shows and sets the type of logic used to command the timer reset.
With positive logic, the timer is reset with “object” active.
With negative logic, the timer is reset with “object” inactive.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : POSIT = Positive logic
NEGAT = Negative logic
Submenu Attributes
TIMER R W
Submenu Attributes
TIMER R W
Acronym
BAND
Scrolling message
TIMER.1 (o TIMER.2) SYMM SP BAND WHERE TIMER IS ACTIVE
Submenu Attributes
TIMER
The parameter shows and sets the symmetrical band around the setpoint within which the timer count is on.
The parameter appears if the parameter F.tiM = STABL
If the parameter equals “0.0” the count is immediate as soon as the setpoint is reached for the first time.
R W
Unit of measurement : % of full scale of main or auxiliary input
Options : 0.0...25.0
Acronym
End
Scrolling message
TIMER.1 (o TIMER.2) FUNCTION WHERE TIMER IS OVER
The parameter shows and sets the function that is activated when the timer ends the count.
The parameter appears if the parameter F.tiM = ST.STP or STABL.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : NONE
OFF
= None: control continues with actual setpoint
= Software off if the Multiset function is enabled :
SP1-2 = Change setpoint SP1/SP2
Submenu Attributes
TIMER R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 163
Acronym Scrolling message
TIMER TIMER.1 (o TIMER.2) ACTUAL TIME
The parameter shows and sets the timer value.
Submenu
TIMER
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : Minutes or Seconds according to the selection set in the MODE submenu, parameter tMEr
Options : 0...9999
Acronym Scrolling message
MSG.TM
TIMER.1 (o TIMER.2) MSG NUMBER WHEN TIMER OVER
Submenu
TIMER
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the number of the message assigned to end of count condition of the timer, i.e. the scrolled message seen on the display.
For more information on scrolling messages, see paragraph “3.1.2.2. Scrolling messages” on page 44.
If the parameter is set to “0” no message will be displayed at the end of the timer count.
Unit of measurement : Message number
Options : 0...25 (with LAnG=LANG1 or LANG2 or LANG3)
0…75 (with LAnG=NONE)
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 164
Acronym
ENERG
Scrolling message
ENERGY COUNTER
MANAGER
Password
Level 2
Description
Lets you configure the energy counter parameters.
The submenu appears if the energy counter function was enabled on the MODE submenu.
Pararmeter
ENRG.N
Selecting energy counter
Pag.
ENERG
Selecting the output for energy calculation
V.LINE
Nominal line voltage
P.LOAD
Nominal power of load
E.COST
Nominal cost per kWh
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 165
With CT1/CT2 options
Input signal from a current transformer
CT1
Input signal from a current transformer
CT2
Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4
Power % combinet on output
Selecting Output
ENERG
Without CT1 option
Type of load
LOAD
Current load
Power at 100%
Nominal voltage
V.LINE
Time totalizer energy
E.TIM
Power on load
OU.KWx
Totalizer energy
E.KWHx
Nominal cost
E.COST
Nominal cost
E.CSTx
Nominal power
P.LOAD
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 166
Acronym Scrolling message
ENRG.N
ENERGY COUNTER NUMBER
The parameter shows and sets the identifying number of the energy counter to be configured.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1...2
Submenu Attributes
ENERG R W
Acronym
ENERG
Scrolling message
ENERG.1 (o ENERG.2) ENERGY COUNTER ENABLE
Submenu
ENERG
The parameter shows and sets the output to be used for the energy calculation.
The controller totalizes the time during which the output is active and uses it for the energy calculation.
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OUt1 = Output 1
OUt2 = Output 2
OUt3 = Output 3
OUt4 = Output 4
Acronym
V.LINE
Scrolling message
ENERG.1 (o ENERG.2) NOMINAL VOLTAGE
The parameter shows and sets the nominal line voltage to be used for the energy calculation.
Unit of measurement : V
Options : 0...999
Submenu Attributes
ENERG R W
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
P.LOAD
ENERG.1 (o ENERG.2) LOAD NOMINAL POWER ENERG R W
The parameter shows and sets the nominal power of the load controlled by the output.
If the parameter is set to “0.00” the data used is the RMS current measured with the CT1 or CT1 + CT2 current transformer (optional).
Unit of measurement : kW
Options : 0.00...99.99
Acronym Scrolling message
E.COST
ENERG.1 (o ENERG.2) ENERGY COST / KWH
The parameter shows and sets the nominal cost of energy per kWh.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0.000...9.999
Submenu Attributes
ENERG R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 167
Acronym
SERIA
Scrolling message
SERIAL
COMMUNICATION
CONFIG
Password
Level 2
Description
Lets you configure serial communication.
The submenu appears if the RS485 Modbus RTU option or the Ethernet Modbus TCP option is present.
Parameter
CODE
Identification code
Pag.
KBAUD
Selecting communication speed
PAr
Security parity
SCANR
Slave scan delay
Acronym Scrolling message
CODE INSTRUMENT ID CODE FOR SERIAL COMM
The parameter shows and sets the identifying code of the controller in a Modbus serial network.
The parameter only appears if the RS485 Modbus TCP option is available.
Submenu Attributes
SERIA R W
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1...247
Acronym
KBAUD COMMUNICATION SPEED
Scrolling message
The parameter shows and sets the communication speed for the serial port.
Unit of measurement : kbaud
Options : 1.2
2.4
4.8
9.6
19.2
38.4
57.6
= 1200 baud
= 2400 baud
= 4800 baud
= 9600 baud
= 19200 baud
= 38400 baud
= 57600 baud
115.2
= 115200 baud
Submenu Attributes
SERIA R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 168
Acronym Scrolling message
PAr PARITY
The parameter shows and sets the parity used in serial communication.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : NONE = No parity
ODD = Odd parity
EVEN = Even parity
Submenu Attributes
SERIA R W
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
SCANR SCAN RATE MODBUS MASTER SERIA R W
The parameter shows and sets the delay, in milliseconds, between two consecutive Modbus master communications to slave nodes connected via serial when other instrumentation is connected to the RS485 Modbus RTU via an Ethernet
Modbus TCP card.
The parameter only appears if the Ethernet Modbus TCP e RS485 “bridge” option is available.
Unit of measurement : ms
Options : 0...9999
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 169
Acronym
ETHER
Scrolling message
ETHERNET
COMMUNICATION CONFIG
Password
Level 2
Description
Permits configuration of Ethernet communication.
Parameter
TYP.E
Method for assignment of network parameters
Pag.
CODE.E
Ethernet identification code
IP.AD1
Address IP 1
IP.AD2
Address IP 2
IP.AD3
Address IP 3
IP.AD4
Address IP 4
SUB.M1
Subnet mask 1
Parameter
TIM.NT
Update time from Network
Time Protocol server
Pag.
IP.NT1
IP 1 address for Network
Time Protocol server
IP.NT2
IP 2 address for Network
Time Protocol server
IP.NT3
IP 3 address for Network
Time Protocol server
IP.NT4
IP 4 address for Network
Time Protocol server
BRO.NT
Definition of broadcast for Network Time Protocol server
GMT.OF
Offset rispetto a GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time)
SUB.M2
Subnet mask 2
SUB.M3
Subnet mask 3
SUB.M4
Subnet mask 4
GT.AD1
Address Gateway 1
GT.AD2
Address Gateway 2
GT.AD3
Address Gateway 3
GT.AD4
Address Gateway 4
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 170
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes tyP.E
ASSIGNMENT MODE OF NETWORK PARAMETERS ETHER R W
This parameter shows the assignment mode of the Ethernet network’s IP address, subnet mask and gateway parameters.
Unit of measurement :
Options : FIXED
DHCP
= Parameters entered manually are used
= Parameters received from the network’s DHCP server are used
Acronym Scrolling message
CODE.E
INSTRUMENT ID CODE ETHERNET
Submenu Attributes
ETHER
This parameter shows the identification code identifying the controller in an Ethernet Modbus network.
R
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1
Acronym
IP.AD1
IP ADDRESS
Scrolling message
This parameter shows the IP 1 address identifying the controller in an Ethernet network.
The parameter is the first field in the complete IP address ( xxx .xxx.xxx.xxx).
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...255
Acronym
IP.AD2
IP ADDRESS
Scrolling message
This parameter shows the IP 2 address identifying the controller in an Ethernet network.
The parameter is the first field in the complete IP address (xxx.
xxx .xxx.xxx).
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...255
Acronym
IP.AD3
IP ADDRESS
Scrolling message
This parameter shows the IP 3 address identifying the controller in an Ethernet network.
The parameter is the first field in the complete IP address (xxx.xxx.
xxx .xxx).
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...255
Submenu Attributes
ETHER R W
Submenu Attributes
ETHER R W
Submenu Attributes
ETHER R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 171
Acronym Scrolling message
IP.AD4
IP ADDRESS
This parameter shows the IP 4 address identifying the controller in an Ethernet network.
The parameter is the first field in the complete IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.
xxx ).
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...255
Submenu Attributes
ETHER R W
Acronym
SUB.M1
SUBNET MASK
Scrolling message
This parameter shows the Subnet mask 1 identifying the controller in an Ethernet network.
The parameter is the first field in the complete Subnet mask ( xxx .xxx.xxx.xxx).
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...255
Submenu Attributes
ETHER R W
Acronym
SUB.M2
SUBNET MASK
Scrolling message
This parameter shows the Subnet mask 2 identifying the controller in an Ethernet network.
The parameter is the first field in the complete Subnet mask (xxx.
xxx .xxx.xxx).
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...255
Submenu Attributes
ETHER R W
Acronym Scrolling message
SUB.M3
SUBNET MASK
This parameter shows the Subnet mask 3 identifying the controller in an Ethernet network.
The parameter is the first field in the complete Subnet mask (xxx.xxx.
xxx .xxx).
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...255
Submenu Attributes
ETHER R W
Acronym
SUB.M4
SUBNET MASK
Scrolling message
This parameter shows the Subnet mask 4 identifying the controller in an Ethernet network.
The parameter is the first field in the complete Subnet mask (xxx.xxx.xxx.
xxx ).
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...255
Submenu Attributes
ETHER R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 172
Acronym Scrolling message
GT.AD1
GATEWAY ADDRESS
This parameter shows the Gateway 1 address identifying the controller in an Ethernet network.
The parameter is the first field in the complete Gateway address ( xxx .xxx.xxx.xxx).
Submenu Attributes
ETHER R W
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...255
Acronym
GT.AD2
GATEWAY ADDRESS
Scrolling message
IThis parameter shows the Gateway 2 address identifying the controller in an Ethernet network.
The parameter is the first field in the complete Gateway address(xxx.
xxx .xxx.xxx).
Submenu Attributes
ETHER R W
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...255
Acronym
GT.AD3
GATEWAY ADDRESS
Scrolling message
This parameter shows the Gateway 3 address identifying the controller in an Ethernet network.
The parameter is the first field in the complete Gateway address (xxx.xxx.
xxx .xxx).
Submenu Attributes
ETHER R W
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...255
Acronym Scrolling message
SUB.M4
SUBNET MASK
This parameter shows the Gateway 4 address identifying the controller in an Ethernet network.
The parameter is the first field in the complete Gateway address (xxx.xxx.xxx.
xxx ).
Submenu Attributes
ETHER R W
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...255
Acronym
TIM.NT
Scrolling message
NETWORK TIME SERVER UPDATE TIME
Submenu
ETHER
Attributes
R W
This parameter shows and updates the server update time for time synchronisation of the controller (Network Time Protocol).
If the parameter is 0, the automatic updating function will be disabled.
Unit of measurement : hours
Options : 0…9999
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 173
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
IP.NT1
NETWORK TIME SERVER IP ADDRESS ETHER
This parameter shows and updates the IP 1 address server update time for time synchronisation of the controller
(Network Time Protocol)..
The parameter is the first field in the complete IP address ( xxx .xxx.xxx.xxx).
R W
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...255
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
IP.NT2
NETWORK TIME SERVER IP ADDRESS ETHER R W
This parameter shows and updates the IP 2 address server time for time synchronisation of the controller (Network Time
Protocol).
The parameter is the first field in the complete IP address (xxx.
xxx .xxx.xxx).
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...255
Acronym
IP.NT3
Scrolling message
NETWORK TIME SERVER IP ADDRESS
Submenu
ETHER
Attributes
R W
This parameter shows and updates the IP 3 address server time for time synchronisation of the controller (Network Time
Protocol).
The parameter is the first field in the complete IP address (xxx.xxx.
xxx .xxx).
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...255
Acronym
IP.NT4
Scrolling message
NETWORK TIME SERVER IP ADDRESS
Submenu
ETHER
Attributes
R W
This parameter shows and updates the IP 4 address server time for time synchronisation of the controller (Network Time
Protocol).
The parameter is the first field in the complete IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.
xxx ).
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...255
Acronym Scrolling message
BRO.NT
NETWORK TIME SERVER BROADCAST
Submenu
ETHER
Attributes
R W
This parameter shows and updates the broadcast definition server for time synchronisation of the controller (Network
Time Protocol).
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= The server is on a local network
= The server is on a public network
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 174
Acronym Scrolling message
GMT.OF
GREENWICH MEAN TIME OFFSET
Submenu Attributes
ETHER
This parameter shows and updates the offset for time synchronisation of the GMT(Greenwich Mean Time).
R W
Unit of measurement : hh.mm
Options : -12.00…12.00
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 175
Acronym
HMI
Scrolling message
DISPLAY CONFIG
Password
Level 2
Description
Lets you configure the controller’s display.
Parameter
HoM.S
Selecting
Home page bAr.E
Enable bargraph display on Home menus
Pag.
LAnG
Selecting language for messages
SPEED
Message scrolling speed
BACKL
Backlighting level
QUICK
Quick configuration menu
Acronym
HoM.S
HOME SELECT
Scrolling message
The parameter shows and sets the Home page at power-on.
The parameter appears only if the optional auxiliary input is available and PID2 is enabled.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : HOME1 = Display Home1 at power-on and Home2 enabled
HOME2 = Display Home2 at power-on and Home2 enabled
NO.HO2
= Display Home1 at power-on and Home2 disabled
Submenu Attributes
HMI R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 176
Acronym bAr.E
BARGRAPH ENABLE
Scrolling message Submenu
HMI
The parameter enables the display of bargraphs. The parameter appears only if the controller is 1650 or 1850.
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF = Disables display of three bargraphs bAr.1, bAr.2, bAr.3, of IN/OUT frame (only for 1850),
and of figures from 1 to 8 (only for 1850)
ON.ALL
= Enables display of three bargraphs bAr.1, bAr.2 and bAr.3 including frames (default)
NO.FRA
= Enables display of three bargraphs bAr.1, bAr.2 and bAr.3 without frames
ON.3LY
= Enables display of bargraph bAr.3 only
Only for 1850
ON.AL1
= Enables display of three bargraphs bAr.1, bAr.2 and bAr.3 including frames (default).
Disables display of IN/OUT frame and of figures from 1 to 8
NO.FR1
= Enables display of three bargraphs bAr.1, bAr.2 and bAr.3 without frames.
Disables display of IN/OUT frame and of figures from 1 to 8.
ON.3L1
= Enables display of bargraph bAr.3 only.
Disables display of IN/OUT frame and of figures from 1 to 8.
Acronym
LAnG MESSAGE LANGUAGE
Scrolling message
The parameter shows and sets the language for the scrolling messages.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : LANG1
LANG2
LANG3
NONE
= Language 1 (English)
= Language 2 (Italian)
= Language 3
= No language
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 177
Submenu Attributes
HMI R W
Acronym
SPEED
Scrolling message
SCROLLING MESSAGE SPEED
Submenu
HMI
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the message scrolling speed.
“1” corresponds to maximum scrolling speed, “10” to minimum speed.
With “0” the message does not scroll and the display shows first 5 characters (on models 850 and 1650) or the first 7 characters (on model 1850).
Unit of measurement : -
Options : 0...10
(default = 3)
Acronym
BACKL BACKLIGHT LEVEL
Scrolling message Submenu
HMI
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the backlight level on the display (when the controller is on) 10 seconds after the last key has been pressed.
With “0,” the backlight does not switch off, but goes to the minimum useful level for reading the display.
The backlight goes to maximum level when any key is pressed.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : 0...10
(default = 8)
Acronym
QUICK QUICK CONFIG ENABLE
Scrolling message Submenu
HMI
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets enabling of the quick configuration menu.
The parameter appears only if the optional auxiliary input is NOT available.
At first power-on, the fast configuration menu is displayed on the controller model but is disabled for programmer or valve models.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= Quick configuration menu is not displayed
= Quick configuration menu is displayed
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 178
4.30. Submenu HOME - Configuration of display and keyboard in Home1 and Home2
Acronym
HOME
Scrolling message
HOME DISPLAY
AND KEYBOARD
Password
Level 2
Description
Lets you configure the controller’s display and keys in
Home1 and Home2.
Parameter
HOME
Home but.1
Selecting function key 1 but.2
Selecting function key 2
Pag.
LED.5
Enabling REMOT led
but.3
Selecting function key 3 dS.SP
Selecting the
SV display dS.F
Selecting the
F display
bAr.1
Selecting bargraph 1 display bAr.2
Selecting bargraph 2 display bAr.3
Selecting bargraph 3 display
LED.1
Enabling REMOTE flashing of the RUN LED
LED.6
Enabling SP1/2 led
LED.2
Enabling MANUAL led
LED.3
Enabling TUNE led
LED.4
Enabling RAMP led
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 179
Acronym Scrolling message
HOME.N
HOME NUMBER
The parameter shows and sets the identifying number of Home to configure.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1...2
Submenu Attributes
HOME R W
Acronym but.1
Scrolling message
HOME.1 (o HOME.2) KEY FUNCTION
The parameter shows and sets the function assigned to key 1 ( ) of the controller.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : NONE = No function assigned
AU-MA = Automatic-Manual control
LO-RE = Local-remote setpoint mode
HOLD = Hold main input value
AL.ACK
= Reset alarm latches
S.TUNE
= Activate Self-Tuning
A.TUNE
= Activate Auto-Tuning
OUT.S.R
= Set/reset outputs set with BUT.SR function
INT.RS
= Integral reset
Submenu
HOME
Attributes if model is CT1+CT2:
CAL.HB
= Alarm calibration HB if the Multiset function is enabled :
SP.SEL
= Select setpoint M.SP1.1/M.SP2.1
if enabled Options Logics:
LFB.IN
= Input logic Function Blocks
In the case of a valve model with auxiliary input, linear custom type FUnC=VALV.P function, and with one output set as V.OPEN and one output set as V.CLOS:
VALV.P
= auxiliary input configuration
R W
Acronym but.2
Scrolling message
HOME.1 (o HOME.2) KEY FUNCTION
The parameter shows and sets the function assigned to key 2 ( ) of the 1850 controller.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : As per but.1
Acronym but.3
Scrolling message
HOME.1 (o HOME.2) KEY FUNCTION
The parameter shows and sets the function assigned to key 3 ( ) of the 1850 controller.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : As per but.1
Submenu Attributes
HOME R W
Submenu Attributes
HOME R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 180
Acronym Scrolling message dS.SP
HOME.1 (o HOME.2) SV DISPLAY FUNCTION
The parameter shows and sets the display assigned to the SV display.
Submenu
HOME
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : NONE = None (display off)
SETP = Local setpoint / manual power or active setpoint (read only), in case of enabling Multiset
SSP
function, setpoint gradient, remote setpoint, and programmer (if enabled).
= Active setpoint (read only) if the model with auxiliary input
IN2 = Auxiliary input
OUT.P
= Power control output (on 1850 LED % on)
SP-PV = Deviation |SP-PV|
HEAT = Heating power output with 0...100% control (on 1850 LED % on)
COOL = Cooling power output with 0...100% control (on 1850 LED % on)
HE+CO = Power control output -100...100% (positive for heating, negative for cooling)
(on 1850 LED % on) if the model with CT1+CT2:
CURR1 = Current input CT1 (on 1850 LED A on)
CURR2 = Current input CT2 (on 1850 LED A on) if ENERG function enabled and model with CT1+CT2:
CURR = Load current (on 1850 LED A on) if the ENERG function is enabled
OUT.KW
= Power on load (on 1850 LED KW on)
EN.KWH
= Energy transferred to load ((on 1850 LED KWh on) if the Timer function is enabled :
TIM.RE
= Remaining timer value
TIM.EL
= Timer value lapsed if controller model with valve control:
V.POSI
= Valve position (on 1850 LED % on) if the Programmer function is enabled in parameter PROGR on the EN.FUN menu:
P.TIME
= Current step time (ramp or hold)
P.T.TIM
= Program total theoretical time (only for model 850)
P.E.TIM
= Program total real time (only for model 850)
P.R.TIM
= Program total theoretical residual time (only for model 850)
IN1 = Main input if model with auxiliar input 2
IN3 = Auxiliar input 2 if model with Modbus Master serial and Master parameter configured:
MAS.01
= Master value 1
MAS.02
= Master value 2
MAS.03
= Master value 3
MAS.04
= Master value 4
MAS.05
= Master value 5
MAS.06
= Master value 6
MAS.07
= Master value 7
MAS.08
= Master value 8
MAS.09
= Master value 9
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 181
MAS.10
= Master value 10
MAS.11
= Master value 11
MAS.12
= Master value 12
MAS.13
= Master value 13
MAS.14
= Master value 14
MAS.15
= Master value 15
MAS.16
= Master value 16
MAS.17
= Master value 17
MAS.18
= Master value 18
MAS.19
= Master value 19
MAS.20
= Master value 20
Acronym Scrolling message dS.F
HOME.1 (o HOME.2) F DISPLAY FUNCTION
The parameter shows and sets the display assigned to the F display.
The parameter appears only if the controller is 1650 or 1850.
Submenu
HOME
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : NONE
SETP
SSP
= None (display off)
= Local setpoint / manual power or active setpoint (read only), in case of enabling Multiset
function, setpoint gradient, remote setpoint, and programmer (if enabled).
= Active setpoint (read only) if the model with auxiliary input
IN2 = Auxiliary input
OUT.P
= Power control output (on 1850 LED % on)
SP-PV = Deviation |SP-PV|
HEAT = Heating power output with 0...100% control (on 1850 LED % on)
COOL = Cooling power output with 0...100% control (on 1850 LED % on)
HE+CO = Power control output -100...100% (positive for heating, negative for cooling)
(on 1850 LED % on) if the model with CT1+CT2:
CURR1 = Current input CT1 (on 1850 LED A on)
CURR2 = Current input CT2 (on 1850 LED A on) if ENERG function enabled and model with CT1+CT2:
CURR = Load current (on 1850 LED A on) if the ENERG function is enabled
OUT.KW
= Power on load (on 1850 LED KW on)
EN.KWH
= Energy transferred to load ((on 1850 LED KWh on) if the Timer function is enabled :
TIM.RE
= Remaining timer value
TIM.EL
= Timer value lapsed if controller model with valve control:
V.POSI
= Valve position (on 1850 LED % on) if the Programmer function is enabled in parameter PROGR on the EN.FUN menu:
P.TIME
= Current step time (ramp or hold)
P.T.TIM
= Program total theoretical time (only for model 850)
P.E.TIM
= Program total real time (only for model 850)
P.R.TIM
= Program total theoretical residual time (only for model 850)
IN1 = Main input if model with auxiliar input 2
IN3 = Auxiliar input 2
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 182
if model with Modbus Master serial and Master parameter configured:
MAS.01
= Master value 1
MAS.02
= Master value 2
MAS.03
= Master value 3
MAS.04
= Master value 4
MAS.05
= Master value 5
MAS.06
= Master value 6
MAS.07
= Master value 7
MAS.08
= Master value 8
MAS.09
= Master value 9
MAS.10
= Master value 10
MAS.11
= Master value 11
MAS.12
= Master value 12
MAS.13
= Master value 13
MAS.14
= Master value 14
MAS.15
= Master value 15
MAS.16
= Master value 16
MAS.17
= Master value 17
MAS.18
= Master value 18
MAS.19
= Master value 19
MAS.20
= Master value 20
Acronym bAr.1
Scrolling message
HOME.1 (o HOME.2) BARGRAPH FUNCTION
The parameter shows and sets the display assigned to the bargraph 2.
The parameter appears only if the controller is 1650 or 1850.
The parameter appears only if parameter bAr.E is at
- ON.ALL and NO.FRA (on 1650)
- ON.ALL, ON.AL1, NO.FRA and NO.FR1(on 1850)
Submenu
HOME
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : PV
SETP
SSP
= Process variable (the PV LED will light up only if this item is selected)
= Local setpoint / manual power or active setpoint (read only), in case of enabling Multiset
function, setpoint gradient, remote setpoint, and programmer (if enabled).
= Active setpoint (read only) if the model with auxiliary input
IN2 = Auxiliary input
OUT.P
= Power control output (on 1850 LED % on)
SP-PV = Deviation |SP-PV|
HEAT = Heating power output with 0...100% control (on 1850 LED % on)
COOL = Cooling power output with 0...100% control (on 1850 LED % on)
HE+CO = Power control output -100...100% (positive for heating, negative for cooling)
(on 1850 LED % on) if the model with CT1+CT2:
CURR1 = Current input CT1 (on 1850 LED A on)
CURR2 = Current input CT2 (on 1850 LED A on) if ENERG function enabled and model with CT1+CT2:
CURR = Load current (on 1850 LED A on) if the ENERG function is enabled
OUT.KW
= Power on load
: if the Timer function is enabled :
TIM.RE
= Remaining timer value
TIM.EL
= Timer value elapsed if controller model with valve control :
V.POSI
= Valve position if the Programmer function is enabled in parameter PROGR on the EN.FUN menu:
P.TIME
= Current step time (ramp or hold)
P.T.TIM
= Program total theoretical time (only for model 850)
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 183
P.R.TIM
= Program total theoretical residual time (only for model 850)
IN1 = Main input if model with auxiliar input 2
IN3 = Auxiliar input 2 if model with Modbus Master serial and Master parameter configured:
MAS.01
= Master value 1
MAS.02
= Master value 2
MAS.03
= Master value 3
MAS.04
= Master value 4
MAS.05
= Master value 5
MAS.06
= Master value 6
MAS.07
= Master value 7
MAS.08
= Master value 8
MAS.09
= Master value 9
MAS.10
= Master value 10
MAS.11
= Master value 11
MAS.12
= Master value 12
MAS.13
= Master value 13
MAS.14
= Master value 14
MAS.15
= Master value 15
MAS.16
= Master value 16
MAS.17
= Master value 17
MAS.18
= Master value 18
MAS.19
= Master value 19
MAS.20
= Master value 20
Acronym bAr.2
Scrolling message
HOME.1 (o HOME.2) BARGRAPH FUNCTION
The parameter shows and sets the display assigned to the bargraph 2.
The parameter appears only if the controller is 1650 or 1850.
The parameter appears only if parameter bAr.E is at
- ON.ALL and NO.FRA (on 1650)
- ON.ALL, ON.AL1, NO.FRA and NO.FR1(on 1850)
Submenu
HOME
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : PV
SETP
SSP
= Process variable
= Local setpoint / manual power or active setpoint, in case of enabling Multiset function,
setpoint gradient, remote setpoint, and programmer (if enabled) (LED SP on)
= Active setpoint ( LED SP on) f the model with auxiliary input
IN2 = Auxiliary input
OUT.P
= Power control output
SP-PV = Deviation |SP-PV|
HEAT = Heating power output with 0...100% control
COOL = Cooling power output with 0...100% control
HE+CO = Power control output -100...100% (positive for heating, negative for cooling) if the model with CT1+CT2:
CURR1 = Current input CT1
CURR2 = Current input CT2 if ENERG function enabled and model with CT1+CT2:
CURR = Load current (on 1850 LED A on) if the ENERG function is enabled :
OUT.KW
= Power on load
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 184
if the Timer function is enabled :
TIM.RE
= Remaining timer value
TIM.EL
= Timer value elapsed if controller model with valve control :
V.POSI
= Valve position if the Programmer function is enabled in parameter PROGR on the EN.FUN menu:
P.TIME
= Current step time (ramp or hold)
P.T.TIM
= Program total theoretical time
P.R.TIM
= Program total theoretical residual time
IN1 = Main input if model with auxiliar input 2
IN3 = Auxiliar input 2 if model with Modbus Master serial and Master parameter configured:
MAS.01
= Master value 1
MAS.02
= Master value 2
MAS.03
= Master value 3
MAS.04
= Master value 4
MAS.05
= Master value 5
MAS.06
= Master value 6
MAS.07
= Master value 7
MAS.08
= Master value 8
MAS.09
= Master value 9
MAS.10
= Master value 10
MAS.11
= Master value 11
MAS.12
= Master value 12
MAS.13
= Master value 13
MAS.14
= Master value 14
MAS.15
= Master value 15
MAS.16
= Master value 16
MAS.17
= Master value 17
MAS.18
= Master value 18
MAS.19
= Master value 19
MAS.20
= Master value 20
Acronym bAr.3
Scrolling message
HOME.1 (o HOME.2) BARGRAPH FUNCTION e parameter shows and sets the display assigned to the bargraph 3.
The parameter appears only if the controller is 1650 or 1850.
The parameter appears only if parameter bAr.E is at
- ON.ALL, NO.FRA and ON.3LY (on 1650)
- ON.ALL, ON.AL1, NO.FRA, NO.FR1, ON.3LY and ON.3L1 (on 1850)
Submenu
HOME
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : PV
SETP
SSP
= Process variable
= Local setpoint / manual power or active setpoint, in case of enabling Multiset function,
setpoint gradient, remote setpoint, and programmer (if enabled) (LED SP on)
= Active setpoint ( LED SP on) if the model with auxiliary input
IN2 = Auxiliary input
OUT.P
= Power control output
SP-PV = Deviation |SP-PV|
HEAT = Heating power output with 0...100% control
COOL = Cooling power output with 0...100% control
HE+CO = Power control output -100...100% (positive for heating, negative for cooling) if the model with CT1+CT2:
CURR1 = Current input CT1
CURR2 = Current input CT2
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 185
if ENERG function enabled and model with CT1+CT2:
CURR = Load current (on 1850 LED A on) if the ENERG function is enabled :
OUT.KW
= Power on load if the Timer function is enabled :
TIM.RE
= Remaining timer value
TIM.EL
= Timer value elapsed if controller model with valve control :
V.POSI
= Valve position if the Programmer function is enabled in parameter PROGR on the EN.FUN menu:
P.TIME
= Current step time (ramp or hold)
P.T.TIM
= Program total theoretical time
P.R.TIM
= Program total theoretical residual time
IN1 = Main input if model with auxiliar input 2
IN3 = Auxiliar input 2 if model with Modbus Master serial and Master parameter configured:
MAS.01
= Master value 1
MAS.02
= Master value 2
MAS.03
= Master value 3
MAS.04
= Master value 4
MAS.05
= Master value 5
MAS.06
= Master value 6
MAS.07
= Master value 7
MAS.08
= Master value 8
MAS.09
= Master value 9
MAS.10
= Master value 10
MAS.11
= Master value 11
MAS.12
= Master value 12
MAS.13
= Master value 13
MAS.14
= Master value 14
MAS.15
= Master value 15
MAS.16
= Master value 16
MAS.17
= Master value 17
MAS.18
= Master value 18
MAS.19
= Master value 19
MAS.20
= Master value 20
Acronym
LED.1
Scrolling message
ENABLE OF RUN LED BLINKING
The parameter enables and disabled RUN led flashing
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= Disables RUN led flashing
= Enables RUN led flashing
Submenu Attributes
HOME R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 186
Acronym Scrolling message
LED.2
ENABLE OF MANUAL LED
The parameter enables and disables the MANUAL led
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= Disables the MANUAL led
= Enables the MANUAL led
Acronym Scrolling message
LED.3
ENABLE OF TUNE LED
The parameter enables and disables the TUNE led
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= Disables the TUNE led
= Enables the TUNE led
Submenu Attributes
HOME R W
Submenu Attributes
HOME R W
Acronym
LED.4
ENABLE OF RAMP LED
Scrolling message Submenu
HOME
The parameter enables and disables the RAMP led, only if Setpoint Gradient management is active.
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= Disables the RAMP ledw
= Enables the RAMP led
Acronym Scrolling message
LED.5
ENABLE OF REMOTE LED
The parameter enables and disables the REMOTE led
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= Disables the REMOT led
= Enables the REMOT led
Acronym
LED.6
ENABLE OF SP12 LED
Scrolling message
The parameter enables and disables the SP1/2 led
Unit of measurement : -
Options : OFF
On
= Disables the SP1/2 led
= Enables the SP1/2 led
Submenu Attributes
HOME R W
Submenu Attributes
HOME R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 187
Acronimo
LNR.4.P
Messaggio a scorrimento
CUSTOM 4 POINT
LINEARIZATION
NUMBER
Password d’accesso
Level 2
Descrizione
Permits configuration of custom linearisation parameters to
4 points.
The submenu is visible only if custom linearisation has been enabled in the configuration of the main input, the auxiliary input or the third input.
Parameter
LNR.4.N
Selection of custom 4-point linearisation
Pag.
Md.4P
Selection of custom 4-point linearisation mode
X1
Abscissa of the first 4-point linearisation point
Y1
Ordinate of the first 4-point linearisation point
X2
Abscissa of the second 4-point linearisation point
Y2
Ordinate of the second 4-point linearisation point
Acronym Scrolling message
LNR.4.N
CUSTOM 4 POINT LINEARIZATION NUMBER
The parameter shows and sets the identify Number of custom linearisation to configure.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1...3
Submenu Attributes
LIN.4.P
R W
Acronym Scrolling message
Md.4P
LIN.4.P.1 (0 LIN.4-P.2 o LIN.4-P.3) CUSTOM 4 POINT LINEARIZATION MODE
The parameter allows you to set the insertion mode of the linearization points.
Submenu
LIN.4.P
Attributes
RW
Unit of measurement : -
Options :
RD.ADJ
= manual point entry mode (redirects to paragraph “5.4. 4-point input correction” on page 202
CALIB
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 188
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
X1 LIN.4.P.1 (0 LIN.4.P.2 o LIN.4.P.3) CUSTOM 4 POINT LINEARIZATION STEP LIN.4.P RW
This parameter permits setting of the abscissa of the first linearisation point in the four points. If the RD.ADJ option is active (parameter Md.4P), an editable value will be displayed, while if the CALIB option is active, the value of the corresponding input is displayed, which may be edited with a calibrator or related instrument.
Unit of measurement : Points on the scale
Options : -1999..9999
Acronym Scrolling message
Y1 LIN.4.P.1 (0 LIN.4.P.2 o LIN.4.P.3) CUSTOM 4 POINT LINEARIZATION STEP
This parameter may be used to set the ordinate of the first 4-point linearisation point.
Unit of measurement : Points on the scale
Options : -1999..9999
Submenu Attributes
LIN.4.P RW
Acronym
X2
Scrolling message
LIN.4.P.1 (0 LIN.4.P.2 o LIN.4.P.3) CUSTOM 4 POINT LINEARIZATION STEP
Submenu
LIN.4.P
Attributes
RW
IThis parameter permits setting of the abscissa of the first of the four linearisation points. If the RD.ADJ option is active
(parameter Md.4P), an editable value will be displayed, while if the CALIB option is active, the value of the corresponding input is displayed, which may be edited with a calibrator or related instrument.
Unit of measurement : Points on the scale
Options : -1999..9999
Acronym Scrolling message
Y2 LIN.4.P.1 (0 LIN.4.P.2 o LIN.4.P.3) CUSTOM 4 POINT LINEARIZATION STEP
This parameter may be used to set the ordinate of the second 4-point linearisation point.
Unit of measurement : Points on the scale
Options : -1999..9999
Submenu Attributes
LIN.4.P RW
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 189
Acronym
LINRZ
Scrolling message
CUSTOM
LINEARIZATION CONFIG
Password
Level 2
Description
Lets you configure the parameters for custom linearization in
32 steps or 4 points.
The submenu is visible only if custom linearization was enabled in the configuration of the main input or of the auxiliary input.
Parameter
LNRZ.N
Selecting custom linearization
Pag.
STP.xx
VValue of step xx
MV.STA
Setting mV at start of scale
MV.fUL
Setting mV at full scale
MV.50C
Setting mV at temperature of 50°C
Acronym Scrolling message
LNRZ.N
CUSTOM LINEARIZATION NUMBER
Submenu
The parameter shows and sets the identifying number of the custom linearization to be configured.
LINRZ
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 1...2
Acronym
STP.xx
Scrolling message
LINRZ.1 (o LINRZ.2) CUSTOM LINEARIZATION STEP
The parameter shows and sets the value of the various steps, with xx from 0 to 32.
The start scale value goes in STP.00 and the full-scale value in STP.32.
Submenu Attributes
LINRZ R W
The value of the nth step corresponds to the input: mV start scale + n*ΔmV con ΔmV = (mV full scale - mV start scale)/32.
Unit of measurement : Scale points
Options : -1999...9999
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 190
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
MV.STA
LINRZ.1 (o LINRZ.2) MV START SCALE LINRZ R W
The parameter shows and sets the value in millivolts at start of scale if the input is a thermocouple.
Unit of measurement : mV
Options : -19.99...99.99
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
MV.FUL
LINRZ.1 (o LINRZ.2) MV FULL SCALE LINRZ R W
The parameter shows and sets the value in millivolts at full scale if the input is a thermocouple.
Unit of measurement : mV
Options : MV.STA + 1...99.99
Acronym
MV.50C
Scrolling message
LINRZ.1 (o LINRZ.2) MV AT 50 ‘C
Submenu
LINRZ
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets the value in millivolts at 50°C if the input is a thermocouple.
Unit of measurement : mV
Options : -1.999...9.999
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 191
Acronym
US.CAL
Scrolling message
USER CALIBRATION
MANAGER
Password
Level 2
Description
Lets the user calibrate the controller with regard to Custom main input, HB alarm setpoints, energy reset, and partial day count.
Parameter
U.CAL
Selecting the user calibration
Pag.
FI.CAL
Resetting the factory calibration
C.LOW
Calibrating minimum current / voltage
Parameter
Mont
Setting month
Pag.
YEAR
Setting year
C.LO
Setting analog output minimum
C.HIGH
Calibrating maximum current / voltage
C.HIG
Setting analog output maximum
RTD.LO
Calibrating minimum resistance value
RTD.HI
Calibrating maximum resistance value
HOUR
Setting hours
MIN
Setting minutes
SEC
Setting seconds
dAY
Setting day of week
DATE
Setting day
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 192
Acronym Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
U.CAL
USER CALIBRATION TYPE
The parameter shows and sets the parameter, input or output to which calibration will be applied.
US.CAL
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : NONE = No calibration if model with CT1+CT2:
AL.HB
= HB alarm calibration. It is made up of 3 progressive phases:
Phase 1: OUTPUT SWITCH ON message, the output is 100% on when button F is pressed
(set in the OUT parameter in sub-menu AL.HB) and the transition to phase 2 takes place.
Phase 2: CALIBRATION RUNNING message, the percent current value
(set in parameter THR.PE in sub-menu AL.HB) is calculated and saved in the LOW.
ON parameter when button F is pressed (F), and the transition to phase 3 takes place.
Phase 3: END CALIBRATION message, calibration ends when button F is pressed.
.
RTC = Real Time Clock setting
HOUR = 0 dAY = MONDA
YEAR = 00
MIN = 0
DATE = 1
SEC = 0
Mont = JANUA if energy counting mode is enabled in MODE.1:
ENRG1
P.DAYS
= Reset energy count 1 (totalizer EN.KWH1 and time EN.TIM1)
= Reset partial day count if the main input is custom:
I.MAIN
= Calibration of custom main input (selected with parameter TYPE on INPUT.1 menu)* if the model with auxiliary input is custom:
I.AUX
= Calibration of custom auxiliar input (selected with parameter TYPE on INPUT.2 menu)* if model with CT1+CT2:
I.CT1
= CT1 input custom calibration
I.CT2
= CT2 input custom calibration if the model with analogue output OUT.A1 is custom:
OUT.A1
= Calibration of custom retransmission output (selected with parameter t.o.A1 on OUT.AN menu) if the model with analogue output OUT.A2 is custom:
OUT.A2
= Calibration of custom retransmission output (selected with parameter t.o.A2 on OUT.AN menu) if the model with continuous output (OUT.A for 850 - OUT.C for 1650-1850) is custom:
OUT.C
= Calibration of custom continuous output if energy counting mode is enabled in MODE.2:
ENRG2 = Reset energy count 2 (E.KWH2 totalizer and E.TIM2 time)
CY.RES
= Reset switching cycle count shown in INDG.S
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 193
in the case of a valve model with auxiliary input, linear custom type FUnC=VALV.P function, and with one output set as V.OPEN and one output set as V.CLOS input configuration:
VALV.P
= Auxiliary input calibration with valve position function.
It is made up of 6 progressive phases:
Phase 1: START CALIBRATION message, switch to phase 2 after approximately 4 sec.
Phase 2: VALVE OPEN message and indication of increasing percent progress, output
V.OPEN is on for the time set in parameter TRAVL in sub-menu VALVE increased by 10% and switch to phase 3.
Phase 3: SAVE MAX message, the maximum auxiliary input calibration value is saved and switch to phase 4.
Phase 4: VALVE CLOSE message and indication of decreasing percent progress, output
V.CLOS is on for the time set in parameter TRAVL in sub-menu
VALVE increased by 10% and switch to phase 5.
Phase 5: SAVE MIN message, the minimum auxiliary input calibration value is saved and switch to phase 6.
Phase 6: END CALIBRATION message, calibration ends after approximately 4 sec.
Calibration only occurs for the valve model with auxiliary input, linear custom type
FUnC=VALV.P function, and with an output set as V.OPEN and output set as V.CLOS.
Calibration can be aborted at any time by pressing the regulator key
* is the case of C.RTD, linearisation with 32 broken LIN=32STP must be enabled if model has custom auxiliary input 2:
I.AUX2
= Calibration of custom auxiliary input 2 (selected with TYPE parameter in INPUT.3 menu).
Acronym
FI.CAL
FACTORY CALIBRATION
Scrolling message Submenu
US.CAL
Attributes
R W
The parameter shows and sets resetting of the factory calibration.
This operation can be done only for inputs and outputs, if U.CAL corresponds to I.MAIN, I.AUX, I.AUX2, I.CT1, I.CT2,
OUT.A1,
OUT.A2 or OUT.C.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : no
YES
= Keep user calibration
= Reset factory calibration
Acronym
C.LOW
Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
US.CAL
The parameter appears if you are calibrating a main input or custom auxiliary input in current or voltage.
To calibrate:
• apply the current or voltage value corresponding to minimum scale value to the selected input;
• press the key to acquire the calibration value.
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : -
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 194
Acronym
C.HIGH
Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
US.CAL
The parameter appears if you are calibrating a main input or custom auxiliary input in current or voltage.
To calibrate:
• apply the current or voltage value corresponding to maximum scale value to the selected input;
• press the key to acquire the calibration value.
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : -
Acronym
RTD.LO
Scrolling message Submenu
US.CAL
Attributes
The parameter appears if you are calibrating a main input or custom RTD auxiliary input.
To calibrate:
• apply a resistance corresponding to minimum scale value to the main input (for example, 18.52 Ω for Pt100) ;
• press the key to acquire the calibration value.
R W
Unit of measurement : -
Options : -
Acronym
RTD.HI
Scrolling message Submenu
US.CAL
Attributes
R W
The parameter appears if you are calibrating a main input or custom RTD auxiliary input.
To calibrate:
• apply a resistance corresponding to maximum scale value to the main input (for example, 390.48 Ω for Pt100);
• press the key to acquire the calibration value.
Unit of measurement : -
Options : -
Acronym
HOUR
Scrolling message
The parameter shows and sets the hours on the Real Time Clock, if U.CAL = RTC.
Unit of measurement : Ore
Options : 0...23
Submenu Attributes
US.CAL
R W
Acronym Scrolling message
MIN
The parameter shows and sets the minutes on the Real Time Clock, if U.CAL = RTC.
Unit of measurement : Minutes
Options : 0...59
Submenu Attributes
US.CAL
R W
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 195
Acronym Scrolling message
SEC
The parameter shows and sets the seconds on the Real Time Clock, if U.CAL = RTC.
Unit of measurement : Seconds
Options : 0...59
Submenu Attributes
US.CAL
R W
Acronym dAY
Scrolling message
The parameter shows and sets the day of the week on the Real Time Clock, if U.CAL = RTC.
Unit of measurement : Day of week
Options : MONDA...SUNDA
Acronym Scrolling message
DATE
The parameter shows and sets the day on the Real Time Clock, if U.CAL = RTC
Unit of measurement : Number of day
Options : 1...31
Submenu Attributes
US.CAL
R W
Submenu Attributes
US.CAL
R W
Acronym
Mont
Scrolling message
The parameter shows and sets the month on the Real Time Clock, if U.CAL = RTC.
Unit of measurement : Mese
Options : JANUA...DECEM
Submenu Attributes
US.CAL
R W
Acronym
YEAR
Scrolling message
The parameter shows and sets the year on the Real Time Clock, if U.CAL = RTC.
Unit of measurement : Anno
Options : 0...99
Submenu Attributes
US.CAL
R W
Acronym
C.LO
Scrolling message Submenu
US.CAL
The parameter shows and sets the minimum analog output value.
You can change the displayed value with the and keys.
To check the real voltage/current value on the output during calibration, measure it with a voltmeter/ammeter
Attributes
R W
Unit of measurement : Converter points
Options : 0...65535
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 196
Acronym
C.HIG
Scrolling message Submenu Attributes
US.CAL
The parameter shows and sets the maximum analog output value.
You can change the displayed value with the and keys.
To check the real voltage/current value on the output during calibration, measure it with a voltmeter/ammeter.
R W
Unit of measurement : Converter points
Options : 0...65535
Acronym
PASC0 SET PASS0
Scrolling message
This parameter may be used to set the password to access User Menu parameters.
Default code: 10.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...9999
Password Attributes
Level 2 R W
Acronym
PASC1 SET PASS1
Scrolling message Password Attributes
Level 2
This parameter may be used to set the password to access the level 1 configuration submenu and User Menu parameters.
Default code: 1.
R W
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...9999
Acronym Scrolling message
PASC2 SET PASS2
The parameter lets you set the password for accessing level 2 configuration submenus.
Default code: 2.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...9999
Password Attributes
Level 2 R W
Acronym
FI.CFG
Scrolling message
ENTER DEFAULT CONFIGURATION PASS
Password Attributes
Level 2 R W
The parameter lets you set the code for resetting the controller to factory configuration, which will delete all changes made.
Default code: 99.
ATTENTION! After you have set code 99, when you press the key the controller runs the Power-on procedure, as
described in paragraph “3.2. Sequence at power-on” on page 44.
Unit of measurement : Number
Options : 0...9999
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 197
A 850 controller (model 850–D-R00-00000-1) controls a heating element via a solid-state relay connected to a logic output.
A TC sensor measures the temforature.
Each branch of the circuit is protected by a fuse.
The cooling or alarm relay is protected by a snubber.
The following diagram shows the various connections.
One switch can control more than one controller.
• With Quick Configuration you set:
• sensor type (TC);
• unit of measurement of temforature (°C);
• the logic output function (HEAT);
• the relay output function (ALRM1);
• the full-scale value of the CT1 current transformer
• (HI.CT1)
• the setpoint, i.e. the temforature to be maintained (SETP);
• the temforature value that trips the alarm (ALRM1).
Heating element fuse
L
Controller fuse
Snubber
Fuse relay cooling or alarm
19
20
Coolingor alarm relay
23
24
21
22
7
8
9
10
11
12
850 Controller
2
1
4
3
6
5
+
-
T/C
Solid state relay
Heating element
N
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 198
Home
> 2 s
> 2 s
> 2 s
> 2 s
> 2 s
> 2 s
Selecting sensor type
Selezione unità di misura
The unit of measurement can be °C or °F only if a TC or
Rtd sensor is selected
Select output 1 function
The functions proposed are based on type of logic output.
Select output 2 function
The functions proposed are based on type of logic output.
raises the value lowers the value
Setting Setpoint raises the value lowers the value
Impostazione Allarme 1
Default: assoluto di massima diretto
Enable/disable quick configuration return to select sensory type
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 199
A 850 controller (model 850–D-R00-00100-1) controls a heating element via a solid-state relay connected to a logic output.
A TC sensor measures the temforature.
Each branch of the circuit is protected by a fuse.
The alarm relay is protected by a snubber.
A current transformer is connected to a dedicated input to indirectly measure electrical consumption.
The following diagram shows the various connections.
One switch can control more than one controller.
With Quick Configuration you set:
• sensor type (TC);
• unit of measurement of temforature (°C);
• the logic output function (HEAT);
• the relay output function (ALRM1);
• the full-scale value of the CT1 current transformer
(HI.CT1)
• the setpoint, i.e. the temforature to be maintained
(SETP);
• the temforature value that trips the alarm (ALRM1).
L
Controller fuse
Snubber
Alarm relay
Fuse alarm relay
19
20
21
22
23
24
10
11
12
7
8
9
850 Controller
3
2
1
6
5
4
Heating element fuse
+
-
T/C
Solid state relay
Heating element
N
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 200
Home
> 2 s
> 2 s
> 2 s
> 2 s
> 2 s
> 2 s
> 2 s
Selecting sensor type
Selecting unit of measurement
The unit of measurement can be °C or °F only if a TC or Rtd sensor is selected
Select output 1 function
The functions proposed are based on type of logic output.
Select output 2 function
The functions proposed are based on type of logic output.
raises the value lowers the value
Full-scale of the CT1 current transformer raises the value lowers the value
Setting Setpoint raises the value lowers the value
Setting Alarm 1
Default: direct maximum absolute
Enable/disable quick configuration return to select sensory type
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 201
The value of the auxiliary analog input is shown in parameter
IN2.
The function can be:
• display only (with settable alarms if required);
• process variable for PID.2;
• reference for the PID.1 ratio controller if in REMOTE mode;
• process variable (PV) setpoint for PID.1 if the controller is in REMOTE mode;
• POWER setpoint for PID.1 if the controller is in MANUAL and REMOTE mode;
• reset power for PID.1
• valve position
The scale limit values of the input are settable on the configuration menu with parameters LO.SCL and HI.SCL (INPUT.2 menu).
The parameter IN2 is shown in read-only on the user configuration menu.
The 4-point input correction lets you correct the read of the main input and/or of the auxiliary input by setting four values:
X1, X2, Y1 e Y2.
To enable the function, set parameter Lin at 4.POIN (INPUT.1 menu for main input or INPUT.2 for auxiliary input or INPUT.3 for auxiliary input 2).
The limitations are:
•
•
X2 must always be larger than X1;
X2-X1 must be 10% larger than the full scale of the selected sensor.
The setting is limited within the defined scale LO.SCL...
HI.SCL (INPUT.1 menu for main input or INPUT.2 for auxiliary input or INPUT.3 for auxiliary input 2). parameters X2 (=value of the abscissa of the second linearisation point)
3.2) it will pass (go on to) display the fourth parameter
Y2(=value of the ordinate of the second linearisation point)
4) when the fourth parameter Y2 (=value of the ordinate of the second linearisation point) appears, use the UP\
DOWN buttons to determine the value to be assigned to this parameter. Once you have set the value, press F to assign a value to the fourth parameter Y2 (=value of the ordinate of the second linearisation point) and then exit the menu
In both modes, the effective input will appear on the instrument’s display, net of the OFFSET parameter and of correction of the 4 points (in the LIN.4.P menu, you need not disable 4-point linearisation or reset the OF.SCLx parameter, if it has been entered).
When using this function on linear scales (60mV, 1V, 5V, 10 V,
20 mA), you may invert the scale.
The four values may be set in the LIN.4.P menu, as indicated by the Md.4P parameter:
• RD.ADJ: the user manually selects the parameters in order,
X1, Y1, X2, and Y2, and edits the value appearing on the display
• CALIB: for values X1 and X2, no value is shown that can be increased or decreased, but the input is directly shown
(which can be modified with a calibrator)
If you set the second option ( Md.4P=”CALIB” ) and press F,
1) The calibrator reading will appear. Now press F
1.1) the calibrator reading will be assigned to the first of the four parameters X1 (=value of the abscissa of the first linearisation point)
1.2) display the second parameter X2 (=value of the
ordinate of the first linearisation point)
2) When the second parameter Y2 (=value of the ordinate of the first linearisation point) appears on the screen, use the
UP\DOWN buttons to determine the value to be assigned to this parameter. Once you have set the value, press F to assign a value to the second parameter Y2 (=value of the ordinate of the first linearisation point) and then go on to the next parameter
3) Enter the new parameter and display the calibrator reading. Now press F
3.1) to assign the calibrator reading to the third of the four
Example of typical use
A customer’s weights and measures division foriodically checks linearisation, which has been set to represent a straight line passing through two points (200, 210),(600, 700)
In this case, proceed as follows: a) Set the calibrator to 200°C b) Go into the new LIN.4.P menu and set parameter
Md.4P to “CALIB” c) Read the Inx parameter at 200°C and confirm the first parameter by pressing “F” d) In the second parameter, set 210°C and press “F” e) Set the calibrator to 600°C f) Press “F” to confirm the reading of 600°C on the INx parameter shown g) Set the fourth parameter to 700°C and press “F” h) Exit the menu, and the PV will appear with 4-point correction set
Note1: you do NOT need to remember to disable linearisation during the procedure
Note2: you do NOT need to remember to reset the offset
WARNING : if the FILT.D parameter is not 0, when you return to the home page, you may find a PV value different from the one set (as the INx parameter is displayed during the procedure, and not PVx ). In the LINRZ menu, on the other
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 202
hand, the PV for compatibility with the old linearisation method appears.
5.4.1. Entering linearisation parameters with the
LINRZ menu
The four values may be entered directly in the LINRZ menu, as follows:
•
•
X1 = STP.00
X2 = STP.01
•
•
Y1 = STP.02
Y2 = STP.03
In this case, however, you must obligatorily reset the
OF.SCLx parameter if it is included in the INPUT menu, and disable 4-point linearisation so that the LINRZ menu displays the input value without the contribution of offset and linearisation.
Example
Selection of Pt100 input with Lin = 4.POIN to obtain an RTD sensor with 4-point input correctio.
Pt100 input with:
• Lin = 4.POIN (Pt100 natural scale -200...850),
• DEC.P = 0
• LO.SCL = 0
• HI.SCL = 400
Indication
400
Y2= 220
170
Y1= 120
0
0
X1 = 50
200 400
X2 = 350
Without correction
With correction
Input
Figure 20 - Diagram of 4-point input correction, for the example (Pt100 input)
The reference points on the real curve (input) are:
• X1 = STP.00 = 50,
• X2 = STP.01 = 350,
X2-X1 = 300, which is 85 more (10% of 850).
The corresponding points on the corrected curve (indication) are:
• Y1 = STP.02 = 120,
• Y2 = STP.03 = 220.
With the corrected curve, an input value of 200 is displayed as 170.
The values of current inputs CT1 and CT2 are shown in parameters CURR1 and CURR2.
These values are used in generic alarms AL1… AL4 and especially for the HB alarm
The maximum scale value of the input is shown by parameter
HI.CT1 on submenu I.CT1 for CT1, and by parameter HI.CT2 on submenu I.CT2 for CT2
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 203
Generic alarms AL1…AL4 can be mainly 4 types, as described below:
Absolute alarm
AL1 inverse and absolute, AL2 direct and absolute.
Two alarm setpoints, AL1 (lower setpoint) and AL2 (upfor setpoint) are set, corresponding to two specific hysteresis values, Hyst1 (positive) and Hyst2 (negative).
The alarm trips when the measured value remains less than AL1 or greater than AL2 for the set delays.
The alarm condition ends when the measured value is greater than AL1 + Hyst 1, or less than AL2 - Hyst2.
This prevents repeated alarms caused by slight changes in the measured value.
Any alarm message at power-on, when the equipment is not at full speed, can be avoided by setting disable at power-on.
Symmetrical absolute alarm
A single alarm setpoint AL1 and a single hysteresis value
Hyst1 are set.
When a direct alarm is set, the alarm trips when the measured value is less than AL1 - Hyst1 or greater than
AL1 + Hyst1 for the set delay.
When a inverse alarm is set, the alarm trips when the measured value is greater than AL1 - Hyst1 or less than
AL1 + Hyst1 for the set delay.
AL2
AL1 alarm 1 alarm 2
AL1 inverse direct
Deviation alarm
A single alarm setpoint AL1 and a single hysteresis value
Hyst1 (negative) are set.
When a direct alarm is set, the alarm trips when the measured value is greater than SP + AL1 for the set delay.
The alarm condition ends when the measured value is less than SP + AL1 - Hyst1.
When a inverse alarm is set, the alarm trips when the measured value is less than SP + AL1 - Hyst1 for the set delay. The alarm condition ends when the measured value exceeds SP + AL1.
The deviation alarm lets you implement dynamic setpoints that automatically follow the trend.
SP+AL1
SP inverse direct
Absolute alarm
Symmetrical absolute alarm
Deviation alarm
AL2 - Hyst2
AL1 + Hyst1 time
AL1 + Hyst1
AL1 - Hyst1 time
Hyst1 time
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 204
Symmetrical deviation alarm
A single alarm setpoint AL1 and a single hysteresis value
Hyst1 are set.
When a direct alarm is set, the alarm trips when the measured value is less than SP - AL1 or greater than SP + AL1.
When an inverse alarm is set, the alarm trips when the measured value is between SP - AL1 and SP + AL2
SP+AL1
SP
SP -AL1 inverse direct
Symmetrical deviation alarm
Hyst1
Hyst1 tempo
This type of alarm calls for the use of the current transformer input (I.CT1 / I.CT2), which is assigned to a control output, from which the ON and OFF phases are considered.
CT
The alarm signals changes in load draw, discriminating the value of currents for current inputs I.CT1 and I.CT2.
The alarm is active if the rms current value:
• is below set value LOW.ON in the ON time of the of the assigned control output,
• is above set value HIG.ON in the ON time of the of the assigned control output,
• is above set value HI.OFF in the OFF time of the of the assigned control output.
Single tests are disabled by setting a value of “0.0”.
The HB alarm trips if one of the above setpoints is exceeded for the set TIME.
Each of the three conditions may indicate a problem in the process managed by the assigned control output.
HB alarm tests are activated only with ON times of the assigned output longer than 0.4 seconds.
SSR
+ -
SSR
+ -
+ -
Out logic
In
CT1
Controller
Figure 21 - HB alarm with monophase load
CT
CT Load
SSR
+ -
+ -
Out logic
In
CT1
Controller
In
CT2
Load
The alarm resets automatically if the condition that caused it is eliminated.
The load current is shown by parameters CURR1 and CURR2 on the user configuration menu..
Note : ON/OFF times refer to the cycle time set for the control output selected in OUT.
During configuration, you have to indicate load type with
LoAd, specifying if it is a monophase load with only one current transformer CT1 (MONO), a 3-phase star load no neutre with CT1 and CT2 (STAR), or a 3-phase delta load with CT1 and CT2 (DELTA).
Figure 22 - AHB alarm with 3-phase star load without Neutral
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 205
SSR
+ -
SSR
+ -
CT
CT
Load
Load
Load
The power alarm can be linked to each PID, PID1 and PID2 control LOOP. The alarm is inactive if the control is ON/OFF during Self-Tuning and in Manual.
The alarm signals possible power changes (OUT.P1 or OUT.
P2) after the process variable (PV) has stabilized on the setpoint (SSP active).
The process variable is considered stable after 300 seconds.
The reference power is refreshed only at power-on or after a setpoint change.
If the process variable exits the stabilization band after an initial stabilization, this has no effect on the alarm.
+ -
Out logic
In
CT1
Controller
In
CT2
Figure 23 - HB alarm with 3-phase delta load
A 3-phase load can be controlled by means of a logic output connected in series to two SSR modules.
HB alarm calibration
Calibration is possible:
- using U.CAL = AL.HB user calibration (with output selected in OUT 100% on)
- as a function of the settable front key (but.1 for model 850 or 1650, but.1 or but.2 or but.3 for model 850): to acquire the current value, the automatic or manual power must be
> 10%; press the key to confirm the current forcent value (set in parameter THR.PE) that is saved in parameter LOW ON.
In case of PV in SBR or Err error:
• if the PV has not yet stabilized, FAULT power is supplied;
• if the PV has stabilized, the average power for the last
5 minutes is supplied.
Set a power alarm as follows:
• If necessary, assign an output (OUTPU.1 …OUTPU.4) for the power alarm (POWR1 for PID1 or POWR2 for
PID2).
• Set the band (PV.BND) within which the process variable is considered stable after 300 seconds have elapsed.
• Set the band (PW.BND) outside of which the alarm is activated after TIME has elapsed.
The reference power is the active power after 300 seconds.
300 s TIME
This alarm signals an interrupt in the control loop as a possible consequence of a sensor in short circuit, an inverted sensor, or a load break.
Variabile di processo
SSP
+ PV.BND
- PV.BND
It trips an alarm if the variable does not increase its value in heating (or does not decrease it in cooling) when maximum power is supplied for settable time LBA.TM.
Setting the parameter LBA.TM = 0 disables the LBA function. The value of the variable is enabled only outside the proportional band.
When the alarm is active, power is limited to the value LBA.
PW and the PV display flashes.
The alarm condition is reset if the temperature increases in heating mode (if it decreases in cooling mode), by setting
AL.ACK = On in the user configuration menu, or by switching to Manual mode.
Potenza
Potenza media
Allarme di potenza
ON
+ PW.BND
- PW.BND
The alarm is reset and the reference power is refreshed only at power-on or after a change of the SSP setpoint.
The LBA alarm is disabled in the presence of ON-OFF control (of heating, cooling, and heating/cooling).
In the presence of PID control with ON-OFF heating or cooling, LBA.PW can only be set for the PID part.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 206
The retransmission output is used mainly to retransmit the
OUT.PW control power.
The forcentage of actuation value is shown by read-only parameter OUT. AN on the user configuration menu.
Keep the and keys pressed for 5 seconds to deactivate the controller.
The device goes to an “OFF” state and assumes the behavior of a controller switched off.
Keep the key pressed for 5 seconds: the controller goes from “OFF” to “ON” state.
The voltage is not switched off: the process variable (PV) display stays on, but the SV display is off.
At exit from software off condition, the programmers resume execution at the point where they stopped when software was shut off.
All outputs (control and alarms) are OFF (logic level 0, relays de-energized) and all controller functions are inhibited except
“POWER-UP”, serial communication and the Math Function
Blocks.
The programmers are suspended in their current condition.
If voltage is switched off during the “OFF” state, at the next
Power-up the controller returns to “OFF” state (the controller latches the “ON/OFF”).
Functioning is normally enabled. To disable it, set the parameter On.OF = disab. on the MODE configuration menu.
This function can be assigned to a digital input (F.in.x, parameter ON-OF), excluding deactivation from the keypad.
If enabled (by setting SOFT.S = ON on the PID configuration menu), the Soft-Start function slices power based on the forcentage of time lapsed since controller power-on compared to the time set in the parameter SOFT.T
Soft-Start is an alternative to Self-Tuning and is activated after every controller power-on.
The Soft-Start action is reset in Automatic-Manual switching.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 207
Tuning actions are divided into 3 categories:
• Proportional : action in which the contribution on the output is proportional to the deviation in input.
• Derivative : action in which the contribution on the output is proportional to the speed of change of the deviation in input.
• Integral : action in which the contribution on the output is proportional to the integral in time of the deviation in input.
The deviation is the offset between the measured value of the controlled variable and the setpoint.
Tuning actions let you achieve optimum tuning of the controlled process in every phase.
Process variable
Peak
T
Time
5.10.1.1. Influence of Proportional, Derivative and
Integral actions on response of controlled process
The response of the controlled process depends on the type of control action set. Specifically:
• Increasing the Proportional Band reduces oscillations
• but increases the deviation.
Decreasing the Proportional Band reduces the deviation but causes oscillations of the controlled variable
(excessively low Proportional Band values make the system unstable).
• Increasing the Derivative Action, corresponding to an increase in Derivative Time, reduces the deviation and prevents oscillations up to a critical value of Derivative
Time, beyond which it increases the deviation and causes prolonged oscillations.
• Increasing the Integral Action, corresponding to a decrease in Integral Time, tends to cancel the deviation at full speed between the controlled variable and the setpoint.
• If the Integral Time value is too long (weak Integral action), there may be forsistence of the deviation between the controlled variable and the setpoint.
For more information on tuning actions, contact Gefran
Customer Care.
5. Switch the controller to manual.
6. Set the calculated parameters (re-enable PID control by setting a cycle time for relay output if necessary).
7. Switch to automatic.
8. To check optimization of the parameters, change the setpoint value if possible and check transitory behavior: if oscillation forsists, increase the Proportional Band value; on the other hand, if the response is too slow, decrease the value.
Self-Tuning is a simplified and automatic tuning mode based on the process state.
The purpose of Self-Tuning is to calculate optimum control parameters at the start of the process.
The variable (for example, temforature) must be the one measurable at zero power (room temforature).
You can automatically start tuning at every power-on or start it by means of the appropriately configured ( ) key.
The procedure runs automatically by optimizing the approach in relation to the real temforature value, in case of
(relay, solid-state, Triac) control output, with automatic calculation of optimal cycle time CY.TIM.
Manual tuning is done as follows:
1. Set the setpoint to the working value.
2. Set the Proportional Band to 0.1% (with ON-OFF control).
3. Switch to automatic and watch the behavior of the variable.
There will be behavior similar to that shown in the following figure.
4. Calculate the PID parameters:
• Proportional Band P.B. value
At the end of the procedure, the following new PID parameters are saved:
• proportional band,
• integral and derivative times, calculated for the current action (heat or cool). In case of dual action (heat + cool) the parameters are calculated automatically separately for the two actions.
Active tuning condition is signaled on the display by an LED.
Attention!
Self-Tuning is not applicable with an
ON/OFF control.
Peak
P.B. = x 100
V max
- V min where V max
- V min
is the scale interval.
• Integral Time value It = 1.5 x T
• Derivative Time value dt = It / 4
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 208
Notes
• For the programmer model, if Self-Tuning starts when the controller is powered-on, the program is in STOP.
• If SP-PV deviation is less than 0.3% f.s., Self-Tuning switches to “one shot” Auto-Tuning; otherwise it calculates a point at 75% of deviation around which to start
“one shot” Auto-Tuning, considering a single Heat or
Cool action or a dual Heat/Cool action based on the type of set control.
Example single action, PV less SP/4
Target
Set point
Tune Target
Point
±1%f.s.
First overshoot
Peak to
Peak
±2%f.s.
Enabling the Auto-Tuning function blocks the settings of the
PID parameters.
There are two types: continuous and one-shot.
Continuous Auto-Tuning constantly measures system oscillations, immediately searching for PID parameter values that reduce the current oscillation.
It does not act if the oscillations drop to values below 1.0% of the Proportional Band.
It is interrupted if the setpoint changes and automatically resumes with a constant setpoint.
The calculated parameters are not latched if the device switches off, if it goes into manual, or if the configuration code is disabled.
The controller resumes with the parameters programmed before enabling Auto-Tuning.
The calculated parameters are latched when the function, enabled from digital input or key , is disabled.
One-shot” Auto-Tuning can be started manually or automatically.
It is useful for calculating PID parameters when the system is around the setpoint.
“One-shot” Auto-Tuning produces a change in the control output up to a maximum of ± 100% of current control power
(limited with H.P.HI...H.P.LO for heat and with C.P.HI...C.P.LO for cool) and evaluates the effects in time overshoot.
The calculated parameters are latched. It starts manually via digital input or via Tuning key after an undershoot/overshoot.
It starts automatically (with error band of 0.5%) when the
PV-SP error goes beyond the set band (programmable at
0.5%,1%, 2%, 4% of full-scale).
High Output
Zero Output
Low Output
Start
Self-Tuning
End
Self-Tuning
Attention!
At power-on or after a setpoint change, automatic start is inhibited for a time equal to five times the integral time (with minimum of 5 minutes).
The same time has to pass after running “Oneshot” Auto-Tuning.
Example dual heat/cool action, PV greater than SP/4
Target
Set point
Peak to
Peak
The two diagrams below show the time change in the monitored value and the change in the controlled tuning output.
• PV = Process variable
• SP + cSPo = cooling setpoint
• cSPo = C.SP (HI.SCL - LO.SCL) / 100
• C.PB = Proportional cooling band
• SP = heating setpoint
• H.PB = Proportional heating band
High
Output
Zero
Output
Low
Output
A B
A: Start of Autotune B: End of Autotune
Example with SP-PV deviation less than 0.3% f.s. dual heat/cool action
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 209
SP + cSPo
SP
C.PB
H.PB
PV
For slicing cycle times for outputs, the following values should be set:
• Air CY.TIM Cycle T Cool = 10 seconds
• Water CY.TIM Cycle T Cool = 2 seconds
• Oil CY.TIM Cycle T Cool = 4 seconds
Attention!
Cool parameters cannot be changed in this mode.
Time
+100%
0%
-100%
Tuning output only with proportional action in case of proportional heating band separate from cooling band.
setpoint
IN.1
PRIMARY
CONTROLLER
PID1
PRIMARY
SENSOR noise
IN.2
SECONDARY
CONTROLLER
PID2
SECONDARY
SENSOR
ACTUATOR
PV
PROCESS
•
•
SP + cSPo
+100%
Air
-100%
For this tuning mode (enabled on the PID menu with parameter Cntr = PID.RG) you have to specify the cooling type (COOL parameter).
The PID cooling parameters are calculated starting from heating parameters in the specified ratios:
• Oil
Example
SP
0%
Starting with the following heat data:
• COOL = oil
• H.PB = 10.0
• H.IT = 4.00
• H.DT = 1.00
there will be the following cool data:
•
•
C.PB = 12.5
C.IT = 4.00
• C.DT = 1.00
H.PB
C.PB
Time
Tuning output only with proportional action in case of proportional heating band suforimposed on cooling band.
Water relative gain H.PB / C.PB = 1 relative gain H.PB / C.PB = 0.8
relative gain H.PB / C.PB = 0.4
Two controllers are arranged in cascade when the output signal from the first becomes the input signal to the second, which in turn sends a signal to the control unit.
The primary controller compares the controlled variable to the setpoint, while the secondary controller compares the value of the controlled variable to the signal from the primary controller.
Cascade control provides faster control of the primary variable value.
In addition, the primary variable is less subject to deviations.
The secondary controller keeps the flow constant, changing it only when instructed by the primary controller.
The cascade controller is used especially in very slow processes. In these processes, the error is recovered over a long time, and when noise enters the process, you have to wait a long time before the error is revealed and before corrective action begins; therefore, the corrective action does not start immediately. After the action has started, you have to wait a long time for the result.
A cascade control is built by finding intermediate controlled variables that can forform rapid corrective actions in case of noise.
The primary and secondary controllers are arranged in cascade: each has its own process variable but only the secondary one has an output that commands the process.
The main advantages of cascade control are:
• noise in the secondary loop is corrected by the secondary controller before it can affect the primary variable;
• delays in the secondary part of the process are significantly reduced by the secondary loop, and this increases primary loop response speed;
• gain changes in the secondary part are compensated in its chain;
• the secondary loop lets the primary controller act precisely on the flow of material or energy.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 210
Cascade control is very useful when you require highly efficient control in the event of noise or when the secondary part of the process involves a long delay.
Cascade control has two controllers (a primary and a secondary); normally, the choice of control actions, based on process speed, is made as follows:
• Generally fast processes : for precise control, integral action in the primary and only proportional in the secondary is sufficient (primary controller PI, secondary controller P).
• Generally, very slow processes : for best system readiness, precision, and stability, configure the primary controller PID and the secondary controller PI.
In ratio control, the variable to be controlled is not a physical quantity but instead its ratio with another quantity, whose value must obviously be available.
This type of control is commonly used, for example, in processes where a reactor has to be fed with two reagents in a fixed ratio.
In practical applications, the primary variable is not controlled or externally controlled, as in the case of mixing two fluids
(Fluid1/Fluid2).
The simplest example of a cascade control is a controller on a valve positioner: in this application the positioner is used to overcome hystereses and to reduce valve time constants.
Cascade control is normally not required in fast control loops
(flow rates, pressures, etc.) and is more useful in temforature controls.
On series 850, 1650, 1850 controllers, the PID.1 control output is the setpoint for PID.2.
The control is obtained by simply calculating the setpoint of substance A (Fluid1), which can be controlled, as a product of substance B (Fluid2) multiplied by an appropriate coefficient
(RAT.CO), which expresses the ratio to be maintained between the two substances.
5.10.7.1. Tuning two PIDs configured for cascade control
If you need to tune two PIDs configured for cascade control
(parameter APP.t=CAS.HE\CAS.CO\CAS.HC on EN.FUN menu), do as follows:
1. Set the primary PID to Manual (for example with the
Automatic\Manual button on home page Home.1), and keep the secondary PID in Automatic
2. Set the value of power delivered by the primary PID
(secondary PID setpoint).
3. Start the Self-Tuning procedure for the secondary PID
(see paragraph “5.10.3. Self-Tuning” on page 208)
4. When the Self-Tuning procedure for the secondary
PID is done, return the primary PID to Automatic (for example with the Automatic\Manual button on home page Home.1)
5. Start the Self-Tuning procedure for the primary PID (see
IN.2
yB
RATIO
SETP1
IN.1
yA e
RATIO = IN1 / IN2 (or IN3)
PID
P(s)
IN1 = SETP1 = IN2 (or IN3) x RAT.CO.
u
RATIO is the ratio required between IN1 (PV1) and IN2 (or
IN3) (range from 0.01 to 99.99), i.e.
This ratio is automatically calculated in the transition from manual -> automatic and can be changed on the User menu.
The PID control controls IN1 so that it is always:
5.10.8.1. Activating the ratio controller
Activate ratio controller work mode as follows:
• Enable the remote setpoint (parameter SP.REM on
MODE menu = On).
• Configure the auxiliary input function (FUNC in INPUT.2) or the auxiliary input 2 function (FUNC in INPUT.3) as the reference for the ratio controller for PID.1.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 211
The timer is enabled on the MODE configuration menu by selecting tMEr = ON.SEC o tMEr = ON.MIN according to the time base to be adopted.
To enable, select the function FunC on the TIMER submenu, choosing from among:
• ST.STP: Start/Stop timer
• STABL: stabilization timer
• SWITC: power-on timer
If you set both timers with function FunC=SWITC (= Start
Timer after a POWER ON), the device will switch on (with
SW start) after the time set on the shorter timer has lapsed.
When the count is on, you can see the timer value on the SV display, on the F display, or on the bargraph by setting the parameters dS.SP = TIM.EL, dS.F = TIM.EL or bArG = TIM.
EL, respectively.
You can assign a message to be displayed at the end of the timer count.
When the set TIMER time is reached, you can:
• activate an OUT1…OUT4 output configured with
F.out = TIMR1 or TIMR2,
• go to software off with End = OFF,
• select setpoint 2 with End = SP1-2.
The timer can also be controlled (start, stop and reset) with Function Blocks. In this case, the start and reset commands are in OR with the ones defined with the StSt and rESE parameters .
The following diagrams show timer behavior when enabling from digital input and from alarm are used.
Switching between SETP1 and SETP2 is based on the value of the up gradient GRAD.I (if SETP2 > SETP1) or down gradient GRAD.D (if SETP2 < SETP1).
Switching is immediate if the gradient is set to 0 (zero).
MSP1/MSP2 are managed only if the Multiset function is enabled, as indicated in the End parameter
Enabling from digital input
Start
Stop
Reset
IN1
IN2
(*)
Controlling timer from keyboard
In the absence of enabled digital inputs, the timer is controlled when TIM.EL is displayed by using the and , keys as follows:
• pressed with timer stopped = START
• pressed with timer on = STOP
• + pressed for 2 seconds = RESET
By selecting the options, you can alternately assign the StSt start/ stop timer function to:
• a digital input IN.DIG;
• an active alarm ALRM1 or ALRM2 or ALRM3 or ALRM4 or AL.HB;
• a serial SERIA.
You can select the true POSIT state or false NEGAT state for the start/stop command.
Timer
SETP2
SETP1
Enabling from alarm
SP / SV
SETP1
ALRM1
SETP2
TIMER
(*) if the auto reset function is enabled
Time
Time
With parameter rESE, you can alternately select the timer reset mode:
• autoreset with timer in stop AUT.RS;
• from digital input IN.DIG;
• from active alarm ALRM1 or ALRM2 or ALRM3 or
ALRM4 or AL.HB;
• a serial SERIA.
You can select the true POSIT state or false NEGAT state for the reset command.
The timer setpoint is settable with a full-scale of 9999 seconds.
The reset function, always active on the state, resets the
Timer value and keeps it blocked even if start is present.
In the absence of enabling (stop), the autoreset condition can be active, which resets the timer at every stop.
Timer
Reset IN1
TIMER
Time
Time
Time
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 212
The stabilization timer is used to control a process at a certain temforature for a certain time.
The band defining stabilization of the temforature is settable in BAND (from 0.0% to 25.0 % f.s.); the time is set in TIMER.
With the band set to 0.0% the count starts the first time the setpoint is reached.
The start timer is used to start the control a certain time after the controller is powered-on.
The delay after start/power-on is settable in TIMER.
The following diagrams show how the start timer works and the state of the end count output.
temforature
M.SP1
When the function at end of count is End = SP1-2, the end count state activates when the setpoint reaches value SETP2 based on the value of the up gradient GRAD.I (if SETP2 >
SETP1) or down gradient GRAD.D (if SETP2 < SETP1).
Switching is immediate if the gradient is set to 0 (zero).
The following diagrams show how the stabilization timer works and the state of the end count output.
Switch-on
Duration of counting
TIMER time
OUT end count temforature
OFF
BAND
M.SP1
Duration of counting
TIMER time
The variables available for the timer are TIM.RE, which shows remaining time, and TIM.EL, which shows lapsed time.
OUT end count
Function at the end of counting
END M.SP2
M.SP1-2
Ramping setpoint
PV time
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 213
The Multiset function is enabled on the MODE configuration submenu by selecting MUL.SP = On.
Each change of setpoint is subject to a gradient: GRAD.I. for change from lower to higher setpoint, GRAD.D. for change from higher to lower setpoint.
This function allows to set:
• 2 setpoints (M.SP1 and M.SP2) by using a digital input with function F.in.x = SEL1.0 (for PID1) or SEL2.0 (for
PID2) or SE12.0 (for PID1 and PID2) or a configurable faceplate key (but.1 for model 850, but.1 or but.2 or but.3 for models 1650 and 1850) setting the option but.x
= SP.SEL on the HMI submenu.
• 4 setpoints (M.SP1, M.SP2, M.SP3 and M.SP4) by using two digital inputs, one with function F.in.x = SEL1.0 (for
PID1) or SEL2.0 (for PID2) or SE12.0 (for PID1 and PID2) and the other with function F.in.x = SEL1.1 (for PID1) or
SEL2.1 (for PID2) or SE12.1 (for PID1 and PID2).
The setpoint gradient is inhibited at start when Self-Tuning is enabled. The control setpoint reaches the set value with a speed defined by the gradient.
active setpoint
M.SP4
M.SP2
M.SP1
M.SP3
(*)
The selection of M.SP1 and M.SP2 is shown on the display via LED.
time
IN1 ON ON
The setpoint gradient function is enabled on the PID submenu by setting the GRAD.I (up gradient setpoint) and/ or GRAD.D (down gradient setpoint) parameters with a value other than 0.
IN2 ON time time
At start and at Automatic/Manual switching, the setpoint is assumed equal to PV. With set gradient it reaches the Local/
Remote setpoint or the setpoint selected in case of Multiset function.
(*) in case it is set to the setpoint gradient
A program is a set of steps, each having a number of parameters, that let you control the value of a process or of a device based on lapsed time, on specific conditions, and on reference values saved in the controller or supplied to it from the outside.
A program can be selected from the keypad, digital input,
Logic Function Block or serial line.
The program can be controlled from the keys, digital inputs
(START/STOP, RESET, end program), serial line, or events
(output of Function Block).
SV
Step
1
Step
2
Step
3
Step
4
Step
5
In its simplest form, a step has two parts, represented on the graphs by two segments:
• a (possible) ramp, i.e., a variable change in the setpoint value time;
• a hold, i.e., a time in which the process value is held constant after it has reached the setpoint value.
Time
Standard Programmer Mode
A program can have a maximum of 192 steps and up to 16 programs can be saved in the controller.
Each program is defined by the number of its first and last step.
The program can be run by one of the two programmers
(PROGRAMMER 1 or PROGRAMMER 2) (see paragraph
“5.13.3. Programmer functions” on page 215).
Simplified Programmer Mode
In this mode a program consists of a fixed number of steps
(maximum 16) and the instrument can store up to 12 programs of 16 steps each in memory.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 214
If there is a single programmer a) Using the digital input functions:
F.in for digital input 1 = P.PR1.0
= select program for PROGRAMMER bit 0
F.in for digital input 2 = P.PR1.1
= select program for PROGRAMMER bit 1
F.in for digital input 3 = P.PR1.2
= select program for PROGRAMMER 1 bit 2 b) With state of digital inputs: state of digital input 1 = active state of digital input 2 = inactive state of digital input 3 = active
If double programmer is enabled a) Using the digital input functions: binary value = 5 select program 6
F.in for digital input 1 = P.P12.1
= Select program for PROGRAMMER 1 and for PROGRAMMER 2 bit 1
F.in for digital input 2 = P.P12.2
= Select program for PROGRAMMER 1 and for PROGRAMMER 2 bit 2
F.in for digital input 3 = P.P12.3
= Select program for PROGRAMMER 1 and for PROGRAMMER 2 bit 3 b) With state of digital inputs: state of digital input 1 = active state of digital input 2 = inactive state of digital input 3 = active c) With state of digital inputs: state of digital input 1 = active state of digital input 2 = inactive state of digital input 3 = active binary value = 10 select program 11 for PROGRAMMER 1 select program 12 for PROGRAMMER 2 binary value = 12 select program 13 for PROGRAMMER 1 select program 14 for PROGRAMMER 2 d) With state of digital inputs: state of digital input 1 = active state of digital input 2 = inactive state of digital input 3 = active binary value = 14 select program 15 for PROGRAMMER 1 select program 16 for PROGRAMMER 2
Depending on the model, the controller can combine the two functions of controller and single loop programmer
(PROGRAMMER 1) and double loop programmer
(PROGRAMMER 1 and PROGRAMMER 2).
Base time accuracy is 4 seconds every 10 hours.
Programmer stop and restart modes
The programmer can be started or stopped from:
• digital input;
• key (START), (STOP) and + (RESET) in the absence of other enablings;
• alarm state (ON = START);
• different restart modes after a Power-off; (Power Off);
• setpoint preceding a Power-off;
• process variable value at time of Power-on;
• optimal search for setpoint forward/back in time;
• wait for Start.
Changes possible in stop state
When the programmer is stopped, you can set or change:
• program number;
• the active setpoint;
• the time assigned to the active phase of the step
(ramp or hold).
• step number;
• phase or segment (ramp or hold);
• change the work mode of the programmers from
ASYNCHRONOUS=>SYNCHRONOUS (if and only if both programmers are in STOP);
• change the work mode of the programmers from
SYNCHRONOUS =>ASYNCHRONOUS.
You can:
• make a single change of the program number. This change will take effect only after a reset command.
• make a single change of the time assigned to the active phase of the step (parameter P.TIME_x).
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 215
• Behavior when the programmer restarts is linked to the phase of the step that the programmer is in : o programmer ramp phase:
• if programmed time 0<= P.TIME_x <= RAMP.T of
step in execution: start from new time
• if programmed time P.TIME_x > RAMP.T of step
in execution: start from hold phase o programmer in hold phase:
• if programmed time 0 <= P.TIME_x <= HOLD.T
of step in execution: start from new time
• if programmed time P.TIME_x > HOLD.T of step
in execution: start from ramp phase, next step
• make a single change of the step number.
At restart, the programmer goes to the step program- med at the beginning of the ramp. Program time will equal ramp phase start time. If the programmed step is greater than the last step of the program, it goes to the last step of the program.
• make a single change of the phase (ramp or hold)
Programmer action at restart is linked to the type of switch forformed: o going from ramp to hold, the programmer goes to the start of the hold phase of the active step in hold status. Program time will equal hold phase start time.
o going from hold to ramp, the programmer goes to the start of the ramp phase of the active step.
Program time will equal ramp phase start time.
• make a single change of work mode
(from ASYNCHRONOUS to SYNCHRONOUS and
vice versa).
Going from ASYNCHRONOUS to SYNCHRONOUS mode, the second programmer will take programmer
1 time as program time (at restart)
• make a combined change of step and phase in order to obtain the following: o if you change the step number and phase equals ramp => you go to the start of the ramp of the set step, with time P.TIME_x (= duration of ramp\ hold phase) set to 0.
o if you change the step number and phase equals hold => you go to the start of the hold phase of the set step, with time P.TIME_x (= duration of ramp\hold phase) set to 0.
o if you change the step number and phase goes from ramp->hold => you go to the start of the hold phase of the set step, with time P.TIME_x
(=duration of ramp\hold phase) set to 0.
o if you change the step number and phase goes from hold->ramp => you go to the start of the ramp phase of the set step, with time P.TIME_x
(=duration of ramp\hold phase) set to 0.
Changing programmer work mode from ASYNCHRONOUS to SYNCHRONOUS invalidates any simultaneous change of:
• the time assigned to the active phase of the step
(ramp or hold).
• step number;
• the phase or segment (ramp or hold); run on programmer 2.
But if you make the same combined change on programmer 1 (change of mode\time assigned to active phase of step or change of mode\number of step or change of mode\phase), the two actions have an effect and also affect programmer 2 (following SYNCHRONOUS mode).
With asynchronous programmers (parameter PROGR =
On2), if the programs assigned to the two programmers do not have steps in common, then:
• you can edit only the steps (submenu PR.STP) of the program that is not in RUN (those in RUN can only be displayed together with all the others). All of the steps will become “editable” again only when both programmers are not in RUN (analogous to the case with synchronous programmers);
• you cannot change the structure of the two programs assigned to the two programmers (or the structure of the other 14) until at least one of the two programmers is in RUN (=> the parameters of the PR.OPT submenu are in display-only). All of the programs will become “editable” again only when both programmers are not in RUN
(analogous to the case with synchronous programmers);
On the other hand, if the two programs assigned to the two programmers have at least one step in common, the same control is maintained in case of synchronous programmers, i.e., during the RUN phase:
• all parameters of single steps (PR.STP submenu) and
• all parameters of single programs (PR.OPT submenu) are available in display-only.
Consents
You can assign up to 4 consents to each step:
• a wait step, other than the one in question, run by the other programmer.
The beginning of the step can therefore be conditioned by:
• a special state of consents;
• the start of the step indicated by the other programmer
If both of the above conditions are not satisfied, the time base stops. If the state agrees with the programmed state, execution proceeds with restart of the time base. Each digital input can be assigned to one consent.
Events
You can assign up to 4 events to each step. At the start of the ramp and at the start of the hold of each step, the events are changed as programmed. Each digital output can be assigned to one event.
Other functions
• End program signal, with or without forcing of control outputs.
• Setting of a tolerance band relative to the setpoint. If the variable is outside the band, the time base is stopped
(HBB alarm, Hold Back Band).
• Setpoint slaved with the same time base to manage a slaved controller via analog retransmission output A1.
• Total modularity of functions and parameters, with easy exclusion of ones not required.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 216
The change in local setpoint, which occurs during a program stop phase, causes the restart of the step in execution, with conservation of the set ramp time.
If the controller is switched off and then on again, program execution can continue, or restart from the first step, or search for the step with the setpoint closest to process variable PV.
5.13.5.1. ONE STEP program
Project conditions:
• ramp time = 0;
• hold;
• HBB enabling;
• switch-off
SP
Setpoint
Behavior at restart is defined by the value of the parameter
Strt on the PR.OPT submenu.
STOP/START switching at end of program resets the program and restarts the program.
PV
The Autoreset function implies that programmer reset is active in the stop phase, with consequent acquisition of PV value as active setpoint and resetting of the time base.
With the controller in manual, or with remote absolute setpoint, the programmer time base is stopped.
RSET STRT
SP
Soak time
When switching from remote to local setpoint, the setpoint assumes the value of the remote setpoint at the time of switching if the parameter LO.rE = BUMPL.
5.13.5.2. ONE STEP program
Project conditions:
• ramp time = 0;
• hold;
• HBB enabling;
• hold at end of program.
When the programmer reaches the END state, the third bargraph, used for example on models 1650-1850 to display delivered power, lights up completely.
Setpoint
At exit from programmer END state, the third bargraph once again shows the value of the quantity set in parameter bAr.3
(HOME.1 menu or HOME.2 menu).
PV
Wait band
Wait band
END display
END output tempo
Wait band
Wait band
RSET STRT Soak time END display
END output tempo
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 217
5.13.5.3. Program with assigned events
Project conditions:
• Evnt.1 On during STEP1;
• Evnt.2 On during hold of STEP1;
• Evnt.3 On during ramp of STEP2;
• Evnt.4 not used.
STEP1 - setting events at start of step:
• EVN.r.1 = On
• EVN.r.2 = OFF
• EVN.r.3 = OFF
• EVN.r.4 = nonE
STEP1 - setting events at start of hold:
• EVN.h.1 = nonE
• EVN.h.2 = On
• EVN.h.3 = nonE
STEP2 - setting events at start of step:
• EVN.r.1 = OFF
• EVN.r.2 = OFF
• EVN.r.3 = On
• EVN.r.4 = nonE
STEP2 - setting events at start of hold:
• EVN.h.1 = nonE
• EVN.h.2 = nonE
• EVN.h.3 = OFF
• EVN.h.4 = nonE
SP
Set point
Wait band
Wait band
PV
RUN
PRG
END
PRG t1 t2 Soak time t1 + t2 = Ramp time
STEP 1
Ramp time
Soak time
STEP 2
END
EV1
EV2
EV3
EV4 time
Using GF_eXpress software for the configuration, the displayed pages would be:
Program diagram
Configuration of STEP1
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 218
Configuration of STEP2
5.13.5.4. Cyclical program with 3 setpoints and 3 steps temforature
SP07
SP05
SP06
Initial
You can easily check a selected program by launching it in fast simulation mode. Enable it by setting the parameter
LIMIT = On on the PR.OPT submenu.
The program will run with ramp time limited to 20 seconds and with hold time limited to 10 seconds. If the set values are smaller they are used. In this way the maximum duration of a step is 30 seconds.
During functioning in fast simulation, the HBB alarm is inhibited and the control output assumes the FAULT value on the PID submenu.
All other enabled functions (restart, start/stop, reset, manual/ automatic, end cycle or continuous cycle, event outputs, consent from digital inputs, second channel setpoint, etc.) are active.
In the absence of enablings from digital inputs , the program is controlled when programmer state is displayed using the
•
, keys, with the following modes:
pressed with program stopped = START;
•
•
pressed with program running = STOP;
+ pressed for 2 seconds = RESET
(condition maintained with key pressed); tr5 tp5
Step 5 tr6 tp6
Step 6
CICLE 1 tr7 tp7
Step 7 tr5 tp5
Step 5
CICLE 2 time
5.13.5.5. Program with HBB (hold back band) function temforature
By setting RST.SP = ON provides that with active reset command the setpoint assumes the value of process variable PV and power is forced to zero.
Setting RST.SP = OFF maintains the active setpoint (prior to reset) and power control.
This function is valid in case of reset from digital inputs or enabled keys, as well as in case of reset following a program change (possible only in STOP) or STOP/START switching at end of program.
SP
T i tw1
HBB tr
Restart program tp1 t off
Power
OFF tw = waiting time tr = ramp time tp = formanence time tp = tp1 + tp2 time t on tw2 tp2
If configured, in case of restart the programmer can try to restart nor from the first program step but from the point of the program that corresponds, or is closest to, the value of the active process variable PV.
This function mode is called “restart with step search.”
At start, if Strt = RSCH was set on the PR.OPT submenu, the program searches for the setpoint with value equal to variable PV.
The search is conducted by shifting the current time forward or back and skipping phases or steps.
The following diagram shows a typical 5-step program profile and explains how restart with step search works.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 219
Set the Wait Step as follows with GF_eXpress:
PV / Setpoint
PV1
B B1
A1 A
Step 0 t1
Step 1 t2
Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 time
If the variable has values lower than the ones requested during a setpoint raise phase (point A, t1), restart is conducted by lowering the active time base until the setpoint profile (point
A1) is intercepted.
If the variable has values lower than the ones requested during a setpoint lower phase (point B, t2), restart is conducted by raising the active time base until the setpoint profile (point B1) is intercepted.
If interception is impossible, as in the case of variable at value PV1, the program is restarted from the active setpoint and time.
If the HBB control is on, programmer base times remain in effect until the variable re-enters the set tolerance band, symmetrical to the setpoint value.
The second input and the second PID let you activate a second programmer identical to the one described above.
The two programmers can work in:
• Asynchronous mode (parameter PROGR = On2 ), or
• Synchronous mode (parameter PROGR = On.S).
5.13.10.1. Programmers in asynchronous mode
In this work mode the two programmers have independent time bases, therefore the Start-Stop, Skip step, Skip to end of program, and Reset commands are separate for each programmer.
With asynchronous programmers:
• Consents, i.e. step enable conditions (ENABLE), are the ones defined by the single programmer for the step it is executing, i.e., only the consents for the step that the first programmer (PROG1) is executing for the process managed by PROG1 and only the consents for the step that the second programmer (PROG2) is executing for the process managed by PROG2.
• You can subordinate execution of PROG2 steps to the execution of PROG1 steps. This is done by means of the
PROG2 wait step, configurable with GF_eXpress.
The result obtained depends on the states of PROG1 and PROG2 programs when the set condition occurs.
The following cases are possible:
1. PROG.1 is already executing STEP 2 when PROG2 is about to start executing STEP 3: PROG2 continues to run STEP2 without any wait.
2. PROG.1 is already executing a step subsequent to STEP
2 when PROG2 is about to start executing STEP 3:
PROG2 continues to run STEP2 without any wait.
3. PROG.1 is in one of the following states:
• READY (programmer never started or has already ended the program and was configured to return to
READY, parameter End=rESE);
• END (programmer has already run the program and was configured to stay in this condition, parameter End=NONE or End=Off); and so PROG2 is suspended until PROG1 arrives at STEP 2.
When PROG1 starts STEP 2, PROG2 starts executing STEP 3
The start step and start hold events are the ones for the step in execution by its programmer.
The settings for SUBDUED SETPOINT and for HBB (EN-
ABLE, BAND, HBB.R, HBB.H) are the ones for the step in execution by its programmer.
Since the programmers are asynchronous it follows that, in case of HBB, only the time base of the programmer affected by the alarm will stop when the alarm trips, while the other program keeps working normally.
Example
You want to configure a wait so that PROG2 does not start executing STEP 3 until PROG1 has started executing STEP 2.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 220
Example of asynchronous PROG1 and PROG2 programmers
Example of asynchronous PROG1 and PROG2 programmers with step wait setting
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 221
5.13.10.2. Programmers in synchronous mode
In this work mode the two programmers have the same time base, and the ramp and hold times of each step of the second programmer (PROG2) are therefore the same as those of the first programmer (PROG1).
Consequently, the Start-Stop, Skip step, Skip to end program, and Reset commands are common to both programmers.
If PROG1 has to run a number of steps higher than those of
It follows that the time base is suspended until all of the consents are checked (those for the step in execution in
PROG1 and those for the step in execution in PROG2).
The start step and start hold events are the ones for the step in execution by its programmer.
PROG2, PROG2 will maintain the state of its last programmed setpoint.
If PROG1 has to run a number of steps lower than those of
PROG2, PROG2 will interrupt its program in advance without ending it.
Consents, i.e. step enable conditions (ENABLE), are the ones defined by the programmers for the step they are executing, i.e.:
The settings for SUBDUED SETPOINT are the ones for the step in execution by the respective programmer. There are no conflicts because it is decided a priori which of the two outputs each programmer will manage.
The settings for HBB (ENABLE, BAND, HBB.R, HBB.H) are the ones for the step in execution by its programmer.
Since the programmers are synchronous it follows that, in case of HBB, the time base stops when the alarm trips on
• consents for the step that the first programmer (PROG1) is executing;
• consents for the step that the second programmer (PROG2) is executing. one or both of the programmers, blocking both programs.
Example of synchronous PROG1 and PROG2 programmers
For each programmer, the User menu and Home page can display the following time values:
• Programmer theoretical time
Displayable with parameters P.t.t1 and P.t.t2, the time elapsed from the START command to END condition.
This time resets after a programmer RESET.
This time stops in case of an HB alarm or lack of consent.
The time goes from 0 to TotalTheoreticalTime = ∑ i
(ramp time + hold time)i ,with which it varies from 1 to N (where
N = number of steps).
• Programmer Real time
Displayable with parameters P.E.t1 and P.E.t2, the time elapsed from the START command to END condition.
This time resets after a programmer RESET.
As opposed to Theoretical time, Real time continues to run even in case of an HB alarm or lack of consent.
• Programmer residual theoretical time
Displayable with parameters P.r.t1 and P.r.t2, the difference between TotalTheoreticalTime and Theoretical time elapsed in the programmer.
After the controller is powered off and then powered on,
Theoretical time and Real time elapsed for each programmer resumes at the value derived from the step search (zero if the programmer is configured to start at the beginning).
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 222
In Simplified Programmer Mode you can only use the
PR.STP menu to configure programs. To enable this mode, adjust the S.PROG parameter in the EN.FUN menu (after enabling programmer mode using the PROG parameter in the EN.FUN menu).
There may be a maximum of 12 programs each, with a maximum of 16 steps, numbered from 1 to 16.
The FI.STP and LA.STP parameters in the PR.OPT menu disappear, as the first step in the selected program will always be number 1. In the PR.STP menu you may indicate which of the 16 steps will be the last step in the program using the ST.END parameter.
The scrolling string reminds you which of the 12 programs you are editing.
In simplified mode, the FI.STP and LA.STP parameters disappear and the ST.END parameter appears for selecting the last step in the programi:
WARNING : when switching the S.PROG parameter in the EN.FUN menu from ON to
OFF, you must obligatorily reset the FI.STP and
LA.STP parameters in all programs, as they are not compatible with non-simplified mode
In both simplified and non-simplified mode, the GF_eXpress tool may be used for easy program set-up.
In non-simplified mode, the FI.STP and LA.STP parameters appear and may be freely set:
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 223
In a control procedure, a motorized valve varies the flow rate of a fluid based on the signal from the controller.
In an industrial process, the fluid may be a fuel, often corresponding to the thermal energy introduced into the process.
To change the flow rate, the valve has an actuator that modifies the valve’s opening value, overcoming the resistance produced by the fluid flowing in it.
Based on process dynamics, the controller determines the output value that drives the valve actuator so that valve opening maintains the required process variable value.
It is possible to limit the valve stroke by means of two limit stop contacts connected to two digital inputs of the instrument set with function F.In=V.END.O (opening limit stop) and F.In=V.END.C (closing limit stop). Limit stop functions are also available as logical states to be set via
Logical Function Blocks.
Control valves vary the flow rate in a modulated manner, producing finite variations in the fluid flow section corresponding to finite changes in the input signal from the actuator.
A typical actuator consists of an electric motor connected to the valve gate by means of a gearbox and a mechanical drive system.
The actuator ca be integrated with various auxiliary components, such as mechanical and electrical safety limit switches, manual drive systems, and position readers.
If available, valve position is normally measured with a potentiometer (feedback valve) to obtain more accurate control.
The connection diagram with controller includes open/close relay commands.
The controller controls the valves with the following parameters of the VALVE submenu:
• TRAVL Actuator travel time : the time the valve takes to go from completely open to completely closed
(or vice versa). Settable with resolution of one second, this is a mechanical characteristic of the valve + group.
NOTE: if the actuator stroke is mechanically limited, reduce the TRAVL value proportionally.
• TIM.LO Minimum impulse : expressed as a forcentage
(with resolution of 0.1%) of actuator time, represents the minimum change in valve position corresponding to the minimum change in power supplied by the controller
(power below which the actuator physically does not respond to the command).
Raising TIM.LO lowers wear on the actuator to the detriment of precise positioning. Minimum impulse duration is settable in TIM.ON as a forcentage of actuator time.
Figure 24 - Connection diagram for floating valve
If available, the auxiliary input of the controller can be configured for the valve position function.
• TIM.HI Impulse setpoint : expressed as a forcentage
(with resolution of 0.1%) of actuator time, represents the deviation in position (requested position – real position) below which the maneuver request becomes impulsive.
TIM.HI is only active with TIM.OF=0
Impulse approach allows fine tuning of the position valve, which is especially useful in case of high mechanical inertia.
Setting TIM.HI = 0 excludes positioning modulation.
• TIM.ON
: it is the shortest time accepted for the valve command pulse, expressed as forcentage of the
“actuator time”
• TIM.OF
: it is the shortest time between two Valve
ON pulse command, expressed as forcentage of the
“actuator time”.
• Setting TIM.OF=0 this function is excluded.
• Setting TIM.OFF≠0 the Valve movement becomes pulsing; ON pulse time= TIM.ON and OFF pulse
TIM.OF
If the value TIM.OF<TIM.ON the value is forced to
TIM.ON.
Figure 25 - Connection diagram for feedback valve
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 224
• DEAD.B Deadband : this is a deviation band between the control setpoint and the process variable within which the controller does not supply any command to the valve (Open = OFF; Close = OFF).
It is expressed as a forcentage of full-scale and is symmetrical to the setpoint. Once the process is defined, the deadband is used to prevent stressing the actuator with repeated commands that would be irrelevant to the control.
By setting DEAD.B = 0 the deadband is excluded.
Valve control
Deviation
TIM.HI
TIM.LO
TIM.LO
TIM.LO
Impulsive behavior threshold
TIM.HI ≠ 0 e TIM.OF = 0 t0 t1 t2
Time
In valve control, every request for a maneuver greater than minimum impulse is sent to the actuator via the relays with function V.OPEN / V.CLOS.
In the case of floating valve each action updates the assumed position of the virtual potentiometer calculated on the basis of declared actuator travel time. This mode always provides an assumed valve position, which is compared with the controller’s position request.
After reaching an assumed end position (fully open or fully closed determined by the virtual potentiometer), the controller supplies an additional command in the same direction, thereby ensuring that the real end position is reached.
With feedback valve, the actual position is acquired via the auxiliary analog input of the controller, which reparameterizes the value as a forcentage (0.0 - 100.0%), compares it to the required position, then sends the appropriate command to the valve.
Calibration is required to store the minimum and maximum positions of the potentiometer.
The actuators are normally protected against an OPEN command in fully open position or a CLOSE command in fully closed position.
There are two setpoint approach modes:
• Non-impulsive behavior
Set TIM.HI = 0 and TIM.OF=0 for non-impulsive behavior: every request greater than TIM.LO is continually sent to the actuator via the V.OPEN / V.CLOS outputs.
The shortest pulse time is settable in TIM.ON as forcentage of the “actuator time”, it is recommended to set TIM.ON=TIM.LO
With power equal to 100.0% or to 0.0%, the corresponding output remains on.
Valve control
Deviation
TIM.OF ≠ 0
TIM.ON
TIM.OF
TIM.ON
TIM.OF
TIM.ON
Impulsive behavior
TIM.OF
TIM.ON
Time
With the controllers in manual, setting parameter KEY.MO =
On allows direct control of the valve open and close commands with the and only when HOME is displayed.
When the controller goes to automatic mode, with a floating valve, the assumed position is calculated starting from the set manual power.
• Impulsive behavior
Set TIM.HI ≠ 0 and TIM.OF=0 for impulsive behavior.
every request greater than TIM.LO is sent to the actuator via the V.OPEN / V.CLOS outputs with impulses having a duration of TIM.ON.
TIM.HI defines the deviation within which the movement becomes pulsing.
With power equal to 100.0% or to 0.0%, the corresponding output remains on.
With TIM.OF ≠ 0, every request greater than TIM.LO is sent to the actuator via the V.OPEN / V.CLOS outputs with impulses having a duration of TIM.ON and TIM.OF.
In the case of floating valve, with power ≤ 10.0%, or ≥
90.0%, the impulses are independent of TIM.LO.
With power equal to 100.0% or to 0.0%, the corresponding output remains in modulation.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 225
Valve connection diagram for models 850V (or 850PV)-X-RR-R...
default OUT2 (OPEN), OUT3 (CLOSE)
Ph L+
Mp N-
M
Power neutral
Open command (phase)
OPEN
Close command (phase)
CLOSE
Position reverse potentiometer
MAX
SIGNAL
MIN
VALVE CONNECTION
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
COM
PWR
19
20
21
22
23
24
18
17
16
15
14
13
7
8
9
10
11
12
+ VP
+ 1V
-
Auxiliary input for models with Auxiliary Input option = 2
NOTE:
To enable the valve position control, set parameter FUnC=VALV.P for the auxiliary input
Valve connection diagram for models 850V
(or 850PV)-X-RR-0... / 850V (or 850PV)-X-RR-D... default OUT2 (OPEN), OUT3 (CLOSE)
Ph L+
Mp N-
M
Power neutral
Open command (phase)
OPEN
Close command (phase)
CLOSE
Position reverse potentiometer
MAX
SIGNAL
MIN
VALVE CONNECTION
OUT2
OUT3
PWR
NO
C
NO
C
22
23
24
19
20
21
15
14
13
18
17
16
10
11
12
7
8
9
+ VP
+ 1V
-
Auxiliary input for models with Auxiliary Input option = 2
NOTE:
To enable the valve position control, set parameter FUnC=VALV.P for the auxiliary input
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 226
Valve connection diagram for models 1650V (or 1650PV)-X-RR...
for models 1850V (or 1850PV)-X-RR...
default OUT2 (OPEN), OUT3 (CLOSE)
Ph L+
Mp N-
M
Power neutral
Open command (phase)
OPEN
Close command (phase)
CLOSE
Position reverse potentiometer
MAX
SIGNAL
MIN
VALVE CONNECTION
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
36
35
34
33
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
37
38
39
40
+ VP
+ 1V
-
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
PWR
C
OUT3
NO
C
OUT2
NO
C
OUT1
NO
Auxiliary input for models with Auxiliary Input option = 2
NOTE:
To enable the valve position control, set parameter FUnC=VALV.P for the auxiliary input
The figure shows the valve feedback connection at the AUX1 input.
Alternatively, you may connect the valve feedback to the AUX2 input, if present.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 227
The Energy Counter function lets you calculate the total energy transferred to the load and estimate its cost.
The Energy Counter function can be linked to two controller outputs. The count is run only if the chosen output has HEAT
/ COOL function.
You can display the following information on the user configuration menu:
• Load current (parameter CURR). This is measured directly if the CT1 or CT1+CT2 option is present. CURR is expressed in amfores and can have values from 0.0 to 99.9.
• Power on load, parameter OU.KW_1 (or OU.KW_2), calculated in kW. Power is calculated: o if nominal power is not zero, based on nominal power
P.LOAD_1 (identical for P.LO_AD_2), as % of same o if nominal power is zero, by using line voltage
V.LINE_1 (or V.LINE_2) and current (here as well, considering PID power %)
OU.KW_1 (identical for OU.KW_2) can have values from 0.00 to 99.99.
• Time taken to count energy (parameter E.TIM_1 or
E.TIM_2) value from 0 to 999 hours
• Energy on load (parameter O.KWH_1 or O.KWH_2)
value from 0.00 to 99.99 kWh
• Energy counter transferred to load (parameter E.KWH_1
or E.KWH_2), calculated in kWh.
E.KWH_1 (identical for E.KWH_2) can have values from
0 to 9999.
The energy count does not depend on the output type,
and is also done for continuous outputs (A for 850 and C
for 1650 /1850).
The energy count stops when it reaches the maximum
of 9999 kWh or maximum time E.TIM_1 (or E.TIM_2)
at 999 hours. The count is not linked to output type.
• Cost of energy transferred to load (parameter E.CST_1 or E.CST_2). Cost is calculated based on nominal cost of energy for kWh (parameter E.COST_1 or E.COST_2) by using the formula E.CST_1 = E.KWH_1 × E.COST_1
(or E.CST_2 = E.KWH_2 × E.COST_2). E.CST_1 (identical for E.CST_2) can have values from 0 to 9999 (with rounding-off to 0.5).
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 228
BUT3
UP
DOWN By means of Logic Function Blocks, the Logic Oforations function processes the values of input variables to obtain values for the output variables.
This lets you control the processes very precisely, because you can make a number of actions subject to a series of essential requisites.
State of digital inputs
DIGITAL INPUT 1
DIGITAL INPUT 2
DIGITAL INPUT 3
DIGITAL INPUT 4
DIGITAL INPUT 5
The Function Blocks are run every 100msec in sequence, from LFB1 to LFB32.
Function block execution is suspended in Software OFF conditions.
Typical maximum delay from activation of an input and corresponding output = 100msec.
Status of auxiliary digital Inputs
AUX DIGITAL INPUT 1
AUX DIGITAL INPUT 2
AUX DIGITAL INPUT 3
AUX DIGITAL INPUT 4
AUX DIGITAL INPUT 5
AUX DIGITAL INPUT 6
AUX DIGITAL INPUT 7
AUX DIGITAL INPUT 8
The Function Blocks are programmed with GF_eXpress software.
There is a maximum of 32 Logic Function Blocks. Each Logic
Block manages up to 4 input variables and 1 variable output.
Four types of logic oforations on input variables a, b, c and d can be forformed on the Function Blocks where the AND oforator means that the linked oforands must evaluate to “true” for the result to be “true,” whereas with the OR oforator is it sufficient for only one linked oforand to evaluate to “true” for the result to be “true”.
State of digital outputs
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 4
• ( a AND b ) OR ( c AND d )
• ( a OR c ) AND ( b OR d )
• a OR b OR c OR d
• a AND b AND c AND d
Status of auxiliary digital Outputs
AUX OUTPUT 1
AUX OUTPUT 2
AUX OUTPUT 3
AUX OUTPUT 4
AUX OUTPUT 5
AUX OUTPUT 6
AUX OUTPUT 7
AUX OUTPUT 8
Parentheses change the order of evaluation of the expressions, i.e., expressions in parentheses are evaluated first, and the result is then used for expressions outside parentheses.
The input variables ( a , b , c , d ) to each Function Block can refer to:
• digital inputs (3 for model 850, 5 for models 1650 and
1850),
• auxiliary digital inputs (for model 1850),
• state of alarms,
• state of control output,
• state of controller,
• LFB_OUT_1...LFB_OUT_32,
• state of setpoint programmer,
• variables LFB_OUT_01…LFB_OUT_32 from other
Function Blocks.
•
The result of the Logic Oforations function can act on:
• state of controller,
• state of setpoint programmer,
• state of alarms,
• outputs, by directly setting the state.
The controller provides a large number of variables that can be used in input for Logic Oforations.
The controller has the following groups of homogeneous variables:
State Keys
BUT1
BUT2
Status of auxiliary relay Outputs
AUX RELAY 1
AUX RELAY 2
AUX RELAY 3
AUX RELAY 4
AUX RELAY 5
AUX RELAY 6
AUX RELAY 7
AUX RELAY 8
Menu navigation status
HOME1 MENU
HOME2 MENU
Function commands
AU-MA1 (select Automatic / Manual for PID.1)
LO-RE1 (select Local / Remote for PID.1)
HOLD1 (variable hold of main input for PID.1)
A.TUNE1 (activate Auto-Tuning for PID.1)
S.TUNE1 (activate Self-Tuning for PID.1)
AU-MA2 (select Automatic/Manual for PID.2)
LO-RE2 (select Local/Remote for PID.2)
HOLD2 (variable hold of main input for PID.2)
A.TUNE2 (activate Auto-Tuning for PID.2)
S.TUNE2 (activate Self-Tuning for PID.2)
AL ACK (reset alarms latch)
ON-OF (ON-OFF software)
FKEY (block F key)
WRI.EN (enable write configuration parameter)
REC.0 (Select parameter recipe bit 0)
(see chapter “Managing recipes”)
REC.1 (Select parameter recipe bit 1)
(see chapter “Managing recipes”)
REC.2 (Select parameter recipe bit 2)
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 229
(see chapter “Managing recipes”)
SEL1.0 (Select setpoint M.SP1.1/M.SP2.1 or
M.SP1.1…M.SP4.1 bit 0 for PID.1)
SEL2.0 (Select setpoint M.SP1.2/M.SP2.2 or
M.SP1.2…M.SP4.2 bit 0 for PID.2)
SEL1.1 (Select setpoint M.SP1.1…M.SP4.1 bit
1 for PID.1)
SEL2.1 (Select setpoint M.SP1.2…M.SP4.2 bit 1 for PID.2)
SE12.0 (Select setpoint M.SP1.1/M.SP2.1 and
M.SP1.2/M.SP2.2 r M.SP1.1…M.SP4.1
bit 0 and M.SP1.2/M.SP4.2 bit 0)
SE12.1 (Select setpoint M.SP1.1…M.SP4.1 bit 1 and M.SP1.2…M.SP4.2 bit 1)
T.STST1 (start/stop timer for TIMER1)
T.RST1 (reset timer for TIMER1)
T.STST2 (start/stop timer for TIMER2)
T.RST2 (reset timer for TIMER2)
P.PR1.0 (start/stop programmer for PROGR.1 bit 0)
P.PR1.1 (start/stop programmer for PROGR.1 bit 1)
P.PR1.2 (start/stop programmer for PROGR.1 bit 2)
P.PR1.3 (start/stop programmer for PROGR.1 bit 3)
P.STST1 (start/stop programmer for PROGR.1)
P.STRT1 (start programmer for PROGR.1)
P.STOP1 (stop programmer for PROGR.1)
P.RST1 (reset programmer for PROGR.1)
P.SKP1 (skip to end program for PROGR.1)
ST.SKP1 (skip to end step for PROGR.1)
ST.EN1.1 (consent 1 to start step for PROGR.1)
ST.EN1.2 (consent 2 to start step for PROGR.1)
ST.EN1.3 (consent 3 to start step for PROGR.1)
ST.EN1.4 (consent 4 to start step for PROGR.1)
P.PR2.0 (Select program for PROGR.2 bit 0)
P.PR2.1 (Select program for PROGR.2 bit 1)
P.PR2.2 (Select program for PROGR.2 bit 2)
P.PR2.3 (Select program for PROGR.2 bit 3)
P.STST2 (start/stop programmer for PROGR.2)
P.STRT2 (start programmer for PROGR.2)
P.STOP2 (stop programmer for PROGR.2)
P.RST2 (reset programmer for PROGR.2)
P.SKP2 (skip to end program for PROGR.2)
ST.SKP2 (skip to end step for PROGR.2)
ST.EN2.1 (consent 1 to start step for PROGR.2)
ST.EN2.2 (consent 2 to start step for PROGR.2)
ST.EN2.3 (consent 3 to start step for PROGR.2)
ST.EN2.4 (consent 4 to start step for PROGR.2)
LED.GREEN.1
LED.GREEN.2
LED.GREEN.3
LED.GREEN.4
LED.GREEN.5
LED.GREEN.6
LED.GREEN.7
LED.GREEN.8
LED.RED.1
LED.RED.2
LED.RED.3
LED.RED.4
LED.RED.5
LED.RED.6
LED.RED.7
LED.RED.8
LED.OUT.1
LED.OUT.2
LED.OUT.3
LED.OUT.4
LED.RUN
LED.MANUAL
LED.TUNE
LED.RAMP
LED.REMOTE
LED.SP1/2
CY.RES (Reset switching cycle count shown in INDG.S)
FORCED END OF ALL D.ON TIMERS
(forcing at the end of counting for all D.ON timers)
FORCED END OF ALL D.OF TIMERS
(forcing at the end of counting for all D.OF timers)
FORCED END OF ALL D.ON\D.OF TIMERS
(forcing at the end of counting for all D.ON timers and D.OF)
Function state
PID heating for PID.1
PID cooling for PID.1
PID zero for PID.1
ON/OFF heating for PID.1
ON/OFF cooling for PID.1
ON/OFF zero for PID.1
PID heating for PID.2
PID cooling for PID.2
PID zero for PID.2
ON/OFF heating for PID.2
ON/OFF cooling for PID.2
ON/OFF zero for PID.2
OR OF ALARMS (state active alarms OR)
AL1…AL4
PW ALARM 1
PW ALARM 2
(Alarm AL1…4 state)
(Power Alarm state for PID.1)
(Power Alarm state for PID.2)
LBA ALARM 1 (LBA Alarm state for PID.1)
LBA ALARM 2 (LBA Alarm state for PID.2)
HB ALARM
LO ALARM 1
LO ALARM 2
(HB Alarm state)
(input in LOW state for main input)
(input in LOW state for input)
LO ALARM MATH1 (input in LOW state for math function block 1)
LO ALARM MATH2 (input in LOW state for math function block 2)
LO ALARM MATH3 (input in LOW state for math function block 3)
LO ALARM MATH4 (input in LOW state for math function block 4)
LO ALARM MATH5 (input in LOW state for math function block 5)
LO ALARM MATH6 (input in LOW state for math function
block 6)
LO ALARM MATH7 (input in LOW state for math function block 7)
LO ALARM MATH8 (input in LOW state for math function
block 8)
HI ALARM 1
HI ALARM 2
(input in HIGH state for main input)
(input in HIGH state for auxiliary input)
HI ALARM MATH1 (input in HIGH state for math function block 1)
HI ALARM MATH2 (input in HIGH state for math function block 2)
HI ALARM MATH3 (input in HIGH state for math function block 3)
HI ALARM MATH4 (input in HIGH state for math function block 4)
HI ALARM MATH5 (input in HIGH state for math function block 5)
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 230
HI ALARM MATH6 (input in HIGH state for math function block 6)
HI ALARM MATH7 (input in HIGH state for math function block 7)
HI ALARM MATH8 (input in HIGH state for math function block 8)
ERR ALARM 1 (input in ERR state for main input)
ERR ALARM 2 (input in ERR state for auxiliary input)
ERR ALARM MATH1 (input in ERR state for math function
block 1)
ERR ALARM MATH2 (input in ERR state for math function
block 2)
ERR ALARM MATH3 (input in ERR state for math function
block 3)
ERR ALARM MATH4 (input in ERR state for math function
block 4)
ERR ALARM MATH5 (input in ERR state for math function
block 5)
ERR ALARM MATH6 (input in ERR state for math function
block 6)
ERR ALARM MATH7 (input in ERR state for math function
block 7)
ERR ALARM MATH8 (input in ERR state for math function
block 8)
SBR 1
SBR 2
(input in SBR state for main input)
(input in SBR state for auxiliary input)
SBR ALARM MATH1 (input in SBR state for math
function block 1)
SBR ALARM MATH2 (input in SBR state for math
function block 2)
SBR ALARM MATH3 (input in SBR state for math
function block 3)
SBR ALARM MATH4 (input in SBR state for math
function block 4)
SBR ALARM MATH5 (input in SBR state for math
function block 5)
SBR ALARM MATH6 (input in SBR state for math
function block 6)
SBR ALARM MATH7 (input in SBR state for math
function block 7)
SBR ALARM MATH8 (input in SBR state for math
function block 8)
O.LO ALARM MATH1 (output in LOW state for math function block 1)
O.LO ALARM MATH2 (output in LOW state for math function block 2)
O.LO ALARM MATH3 (output in LOW state for math function block 3)
O.LO ALARM MATH4 (output in LOW state for math function block 4)
O.LO ALARM MATH5 (output in LOW state for math function block 5)
O.LO ALARM MATH6 (output in LOW state for math function block 6)
O.LO ALARM MATH7 (output in LOW state for math function block 7)
O.LO ALARM MATH8 (output in LOW state for math function block 8)
O.HI ALARM MATH1 (output in HIGH state for math function block 1)
O.HI ALARM MATH2 (output in HIGH state for math function block 2)
O.HI ALARM MATH3 (output in HIGH state for math function block 3)
O.HI ALARM MATH4 (output in HIGH state for math function block 4)
O.HI ALARM MATH5 (output in HIGH state for math function block 5)
O.HI ALARM MATH6 (output in HIGH state for math function block 6)
O.HI ALARM MATH7 (output in HIGH state for math function block 7)
O.HI ALARM MATH8 (output in HIGH state for math function block 8)
CALC ALARM MATH1 (output in CALCULATION error state for math function block 1)
CALC ALARM MATH2 (output in CALCULATION error state for math function block 2)
CALC ALARM MATH3 (output in CALCULATION error state for math function block 3)
CALC ALARM MATH4 (output in CALCULATION error state for math function block 4)
CALC ALARM MATH5 (output in CALCULATION error state for math function block 5)
CALC ALARM MATH6 (output in CALCULATION error state for math function block 6)
CALC ALARM MATH7 (output in CALCULATION error state for math function blocko 7)
CALC ALARM MATH8 (output in CALCULATION error state for math function block 8)
STATUS AUTOMATIC for PID.1
STATUS MANUAL for PID.1
STATUS LOCAL for PID.1
STATUS REMOTE for PID.1
STATUS AUTOMATIC for PID.2
STATUS MANUAL for PID.2
STATUS LOCAL for PID.2
STATUS REMOTE for PID.2
OUT1 SWITCH ALARM (OUT1.S count exceeded with output 1 SWITCH threshold)
OUT2 SWITCH ALARM (OUT2.S count exceeded with output 2 SWITCH threshold)
OUT3 SWITCH ALARM (OUT3.S count exceeded with output 3 SWITCH threshold)
OUT4 SWITCH ALARM (OUT4.S count exceeded with output 4 SWITCH threshold)
DIGITAL INPUT SWITCH ALARM
(INDG.S count exceeded with
MESSAGE 01 (show message at scroll 1)
MESSAGE 02 (show message at scroll 2)
MESSAGE 03 (show message at scroll 3)
MESSAGE 04 (show message at scroll 4)
MESSAGE 05 (show message at scroll 5)
MESSAGE 06 (show message at scroll 6)
MESSAGE 07 (show message at scroll 7)
MESSAGE 08 (show message at scroll 8)
MESSAGE 09 (show message at scroll 9)
MESSAGE 10 (show message at scroll 10)
MESSAGE 11 (show message at scroll 11)
MESSAGE 12 (show message at scroll 12)
MESSAGE 13 (show message at scroll 13)
MESSAGE 14 (show message at scroll 14)
MESSAGE 15 (show message at scroll 15)
MESSAGE 16 (show message at scroll 16)
MESSAGE 17 (show message at scroll 17)
MESSAGE 18 (show message at scroll 18)
MESSAGE 19 (show message at scroll 19)
MESSAGE 20 (show message at scroll 20)
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 231
MESSAGE 21 (show message at scroll 21)
MESSAGE 22 (show message at scroll 22)
MESSAGE 23 (show message at scroll 23)
MESSAGE 34 (show message at scroll 24)
MESSAGE 25 (show message at scroll 25)
MESSAGE 26 (show message at scroll 26)
MESSAGE 27 (show message at scroll 27)
MESSAGE 28 (show message at scroll 28)
MESSAGE 29 (show message at scroll 29)
MESSAGE 30 (show message at scroll 30)
MESSAGE 31 (show message at scroll 31)
MESSAGE 32 (show message at scroll 32)
HOME 1/2 MENU (set HOME1 or HOME2 if in HOME menu) for regulator models with programmer there are also:
PROGRAMMER IN HBB ALARM for PROGR.1
PROGRAMMER IN RUN for PROGR.1
PROGRAMMER IN HOLD for PROGR.1
PROGRAMMER IN READY for PROGR.1
PROGRAMMER IN END for PROGR.1
STEP EVENT 1 for PROGR.1
STEP EVENT 2 for PROGR.1
STEP EVENT 3 for PROGR.1
STEP EVENT 4 for PROGR.1
PROGRAMMER IN HBB ALARM for PROGR.2
PROGRAMMER IN RUN for PROGR.2
PROGRAMMER IN HOLD for PROGR.2
PROGRAMMER IN READY for PROGR.2
PROGRAMMER IN END for PROGR.2
STEP EVENT 1 for PROGR.2
STEP EVENT 2 for PROGR.2
STEP EVENT 3 for PROGR.2
STEP EVENT 4 for PROGR.2
For models with Master serial you have:
MAS.01 (Master 1 value, for bit type data only)
MAS.02 (Master 2 value, for bit type data only)
MAS.03 (Master 3 value, for bit type data only)
MAS.04 (Master 4 value, for bit type data only)
MAS.05 (Master 5 value, for bit type data only)
MAS.06 (Master 6 value, for bit type data only)
MAS.07 (Master 7 value, for bit type data only)
MAS.08 (Master 8 value, for bit type data only)
MAS.09 (Master 9 value, for bit type data only)
MAS.10 (Master 10 value, for bit type data only)
MAS.10 (Master 10 value, for bit type data only)
MAS.11 (Master 11 value, for bit type data only)
MAS.12 (Master 12 value, for bit type data only)
MAS.13 (Master 13 value, for bit type data only)
MAS.14 (Master 14 value, for bit type data only)
MAS.15 (Master 15 value, for bit type data only)
MAS.16 (Master 16 value, for bit type data only)
MAS.17 (Master 17 value, for bit type data only)
MAS.18 (Master 18 value, for bit type data only)
MAS.19 (Master 19 value, for bit type data only)
MAS.20 (Master 20 value, for bit type data only)
Support coefficients (may be displayed and set in the
User menu)
L.C1 (logical coefficient 1)
L.C2 (logical coefficient 2)
L.C3 (logical coefficient 3)
L.C4 (logical coefficient 4)
L.C5 (logical coefficient 5)
L.C6 (logical coefficient 6)
L.C7 (logical coefficient 7)
L.C8 (logical coefficient 8)
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 232
L.C9 (logical coefficient 9)
L.C10 (logical coefficient 10)
L.C11 (logical coefficient 11)
L.C12 (logical coefficient 12)
L.C13 (logical coefficient 13)
L.C14 (logical coefficient 14)
L.C15 (logical coefficient 15)
L.C16 (logical coefficient 16)
L.C17 (logical coefficient 17)
L.C18 (logical coefficient 18)
L.C19 (logical coefficient 19)
L.C20 (logical coefficient 20)
L.C21 (logical coefficient 21)
L.C22 (logical coefficient 22)
L.C23 (logical coefficient 23)
L.C24 (logical coefficient 24)
L.C25 (logical coefficient 25)
L.C26 (logical coefficient 26)
L.C27 (logical coefficient 27)
L.C28 (logical coefficient 28)
L.C29 (logical coefficient 29)
L.C30 (logical coefficient 30)
L.C31 (logical coefficient 31)
L.C32 (logical coefficient 32)
Status of digital outputs from Mathematical Function
Blocks
MFB.1 DIGITAL OUTPUT
MFB.2 DIGITAL OUTPUT
MFB.3 DIGITAL OUTPUT
MFB.4 DIGITAL OUTPUT
MFB.5 DIGITAL OUTPUT
MFB.6 DIGITAL OUTPUT
MFB.7 DIGITAL OUTPUT
MFB.8 DIGITAL OUTPUT
5.16.3.1. Configuration page
The GF_eXpress program’s Logic Function Blocks configuration page lets you configure and debug the blocks.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 233
1. Button to return to previous function block.
2. Number of function block and type of logic oforations run.
3. Name of function block. You can insert an optional descriptive name of the function block.
4. Button to go to next function block.
5. Output value when result of function oforations is true.
6. Graph of DELAY TIMER.
7. Name of output. You can insert an optional descriptive name of the output.
8. Type or variable of activated output.
9. Duration of ON delay.
10. Duration of OFF delay.
11. Unità di misura dei tempi di ritardo (secondi o minuti).
12. Type or variable of input evaluated for input d .
The Input d box is used to insert an optional descriptive name of input d .
13. Type or variable of input evaluated for input c .
The Input d box is used to insert an optional descriptive name of input c .
14. Type or variable of input evaluated for input b .
The Input d box is used to insert an optional descriptive name of input b .
15. Type or variable of input evaluated for input a .
The Input a box is used to insert an optional descriptive name of input a .
16. Graph of logic oforation run. The input boxes also show the value that the input must assume in order to be considered “true”.
17. Selection of logic function applied to function block.
18. Button to print Logic Function Block in use.
19. Button for initialising Logical Functional Blocks (as upon controller power-on).
20. Button for showing an overview of the function blocks enabled.
21. Button for showing the function block shown in the box.
22. Display current status of input a (only if controller is connected).
23. Display current status of input b (only if controller is connected).
24. Display current status of input c (only if controller is connected).
25. Display current status of input d (only if controller is connected).
26. Display current status of output (only if controller is connected).
27. Display current status of ON (only if controller is connected).
28. Display current status of OFF(only if controller is connected).
5.16.3.2. Enabling logic function block and selecting the type of logic function
The logic function block page is enabled automatically as soon as you select a type of logic function.
If Disabled is selected, the page is not deleted. The configuration of inputs, outputs and delay times remains stored in the software program.
When you select the type of logic function assigned to the logic function block, its symbol changes as well, as shown in the figures below.
TYPE 1 - (
TYPE 2 - ( a a
TYPE 3 -
AND
OR a c
OR b
) AND ( b
) OR (
OR c c b
AND
OR
OR d d d
)
)
TYPE 4 - a AND b AND c AND d
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 234
TYPE 5 - SR flip-flop
The Logical Function Block output will be as shown in the table of truth of SR flip-flop appearing below.
5.16.3.3. Configuring input variables
Configure the four input variables a, b , c and d , one at a time. On the pull-down menu, select the variable to be assigned to the input.
The options are:
• ON, input always ON;
• OFF, input always OFF;
• one of the values in the groups of Digital input state,
Digital output state, and Function state variables listed
above in paragraph “5.16.2. Groups of variables” on page 229.
S
0
0
1
1
Input
R
0
1
0
1
Output
Q n+1
Q n
0
1
Undefined
Action
No Change
Reset Output
Undefined
By clicking the input’s icon you can reverse its reference state from normally open (NO) to normally closed (NC) and vice versa.
This cannot be done if you chose ON or OFF on the pulldown menu.
TYPE 6 - T flip-flop
The Logical Function Block output will be as shown in the table of truth of T flip-flop appearing below
NO NC
If digital inputs IN1, IN2, IN3, IN4, IN5 are among inputs a , b , c and d , and you want them to be used only in Function
Blocks, you have to configure the function Func = LFB.IN for them.
If you want to transmit the output state of a logic function block (LOGIC FUNCTION BLOCK OUTPUT 1…16) to an output OUT1…OUT4 of the controller, you have to configure the function F.out = LFB.O for these outputs and specify in
FB.O.N the number of the function block output.
Input
T
0
1
Output
Q n+1
Q n
NOT(Qn)
TYPE 7 – Edge detection
An impulse with a duration of one cycle of execution of logical functions (100 ms) will be generated on the Logical Function
Block output every time a source of an increase in input IN is intercepted
You can name the logic function block so that it can be easily recognized for future use
The name will be saved as part of the “configuration recipe” only on the PC. If you copy the configuration to other controllers, the controller to which the configuration is copied will not contain these descriptive names.
Complete the configuration by giving a descriptive name to each input so that it can be easily recognized for future use.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 235
The name will be saved as part of the “configuration recipe” only on the PC and will not be transferred to the controller.
Therefore, when the controllers are cloned, the controller to which the configuration was copied will not contain this descriptive name.
The counter values that have passed and remain in the ON and OFF delay times are reported in the variables:
- E.ON.01…E.ON.32 (time passed of ON)
- R.ON.01…R.ON.32 (time left of ON)
- E.OF.01…E.OF.32 (time passed of OFF)
- R.OF.01…R.OF.32 (time passed of OFF)
5.16.3.4. Configuring the output
Configure the output by selecting on the pull-down menu one of the values listed in the Function Commands group
shown above in paragraph “5.16.2. Groups of variables” on page 229.
This will be the output variable whose value will be changed by the result of the logic oforation processed with the input variables data.
If the function given the output of the function block is the same assigned to a digital input, the state of this input has priority.
By clicking the output’s icon you can reverse, from normally open (NO) to normally closed (NC) and vice versa, the transmitted state if the result of the logic oforation is “true.”
The delay times for ON (D.ON.01…D.ON.32) and OFF
(D.OF.01…D.OF.32) and the counter values that have passed and remain may be entered in the user menu.
5.16.3.6. Copy of a Logical Function Block
A copy of a Logical Function Block may be made using the dedicated window, selecting the source Function Block (a single block only) and the destination Function Block(s) (multiple blocks formitted).
The window is opened using the icon or the “Copy of
Logic Function Blocks” command in the Service menu
NO NC
End the configuration by giving a descriptive name to the output so that it can be easily recognized for future use.
The name will be saved as part of the “configuration recipe” only on the PC and will not be transferred to the controller.
Therefore, when the controllers are cloned, the controller to which the configuration was copied will not contain this descriptive name.
5.16.3.5. Configuring delays
For logical function types 1, 2, 3 and 4 only ,you can insert a delay between the result of the logic oforation and the change in value of the output variable.
These delays, which can differ from the “true” result and the
“false” result of the logic oforation, are set on the DELAY
TIMER.
Delays can be counted in seconds or in minutes
Configure both delays:
• ON, which indicates how long after a “true” result of the logic oforation the value of the output variable is changed.
• OFF, which indicates how long after a “false” result of the logic oforation the value of the output variable is changed
When the time is set to 0 (zero), the change in value of the output variable is instantaneous.
If both delays for ON and OFF equal 0, the DELAY TIMER is ignored.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 236
The math oforations function processes (with Math Function
Blocks) the values of input variables to obtain values for output variables.
Math function blocks are programmed with GF_eXpress software.
Local setpoint
NOTE: When the SETP.x is managed as a Math Function
Block output, the parameter can no longer be changed from the display or by serial connection.
SETP1 local setpoint for PID.1
SETP2 local setpoint for PID.2
Math function blocks are executed every 60 ms, in sequence from MFB1 to MFB8. Therefore, the maximum delay between the change of an input and the update of its output is 60 ms.
Math function blocks continue to be executed even in Software OFF conditions.
There is a maximum of 8 function blocks, each of which can handle up to 2 analogue variables and 2 digital variables in input and 1 analogue variable and 1 digital variable as output.
Input variables ( a , b ) can refer to:
• analog inputs,
• setpoint,
• alarm thresholds,
• control powers,
• support coefficients settable from serial or user menu,
• variables MFB_OUT_01… MFB_OUT_08 from other function blocks,
• LFB_OUT_1...LFB_OUT_32.
Multiset setpoint
M.SET1.1
M.SET2.1
M.SET3.1
M.SET4.1
M.SET1.2 multiset setpoint 1 for PID.1
multiset setpoint 2 for PID.1
multiset setpoint 3 for PID.1
multiset setpoint 4 for PID.1
multiset setpoint 1 for PID.2
M.SET2.2
M.SET3.2
M.SET4.2 multiset setpoint 2 for PID.2
multiset setpoint 3 for PID.2
multiset setpoint 4 for PID.2
Alarm thresholds
ALRM1
ALRM2 alarm 1 threshold alarm 2 threshold
ALRM3
ALRM4 alarm 3 threshold alarm 4 threshold
Control powers
OUT.P1 for PID.1
OUT.P2 for PID.2
The input variables (c, d) refer to variables LFB_OUT_01…
LFB_OUT_32 from logic function blocks.
Analog outputs
OUT.C
OUT.A1
OUT.A2 continuous output analog output 1 analog output 2 2 types of oforations on inputs variables a, b can be executed on math function blocks:
• Type 1: MATH FUNCTION (a, b);
• Type 2: MATH FUNCTION (a) + LOGIC RESET
COMMAND (c).
• Type 3: UP/DOWN COUNTER with prescaler x1, x10, x100, x1000 of the logical input (d) + reset logical input
(c) with threshold (UP) or preset (DOWN) analogue (a) and digital output at end of count + analogue counter output (b);
• Type 4: COMPARISON of (a, b) with digital output
The result of the Math Oforations function can act on:
• process variables,
• local setpoint,
• value of analog outputs.
• Reference for alarms AL1…AL4
The controller offers many variables that can be used in input for math oforations.
These include the following groups of homogeneous variables:
Analog inputs
IN1
IN2
Main input
Auxiliary input
CURR1 input from current transformer CT1
CURR2 input from current transformer CT2
Process variables
PV.1 Process variable for PID.1
PV.2 Process variable for PID.2
Support coefficients (displayable and settable on User menu)
M.C1 mathematical coefficient 1
(with setting of the decimal point position in
M.DECP1)
M.C2 mathematical coefficient 2
(with setting of the decimal point position in
M.DECP2)
M.C3 mathematical coefficient 3
(with setting of the decimal point position in
M.DECP3)
M.C4 mathematical coefficient 4
(with setting of the decimal point position in
M.DECP4)
M.C5 mathematical coefficient 5
(with setting of the decimal point position in
M.DECP5)
M.C6 mathematical coefficient 6
(with setting of the decimal point position in
M.DECP6)
M.C7 mathematical coefficient 7
(with setting of the decimal point position in
M.DECP7)
M.C8 mathematical coefficient 8
(with setting of the decimal point position in
M.DECP1)
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 237
5.17.3.1. Configuration page
SENSOR BACKUP : reports as the output of the Math
Function Block the value of the parameter connected with
“Input a”, if the first input is functioning proforly, or the value of the parameter connected with the first input, if the first input is functioning incorrectly (SBR, High, Low,…) The GF_eXpress program’s Math Function Blocks configuration pages let you configure and debug the blocks.
There are two different pages, one for each type of oforation.
EXP : reports as the output of the Math Function Block the value of the exponential ( ex ) of the parameter connected with “Input a”
ABS : reports as the output of the Math Function Block the absolute value of the parameter connected with “Input a”
Type 1 oforations: MATH FUNCTION (a, b)
ADD : reports as the output of the Math Function Block the value of the sum of the parameter connected with “Input a” and the parameter connected with “Input b”
SUBTRACT : reports as the output of the Math Function
Block the value of the difference between the parameter connected with “Input a” and the parameter connected with
“Input b”
MULTIPLY : reports as the output of the Math Function Block the value of multiplication of the parameter connected with
“Input a” and the parameter connected with “Input b”
DIVIDE : reports as the output of the Math Function Block the value of division of the parameter connected with “Input a” by the parameter connected with “Input b”
AVERAGE : reports as the output of the Math Function Block the value of the average of the parameter connected with
“Input a” and the parameter connected with “Input b”
MIN : reports as the output of the Math Function Block the value of the parameter connected with “Input a” if this parameter is less than the parameter connected with “Input b”, or the value of the parameter connected with “Input b” if the parameter is less than the parameter connected with
“Input a”
MAX : reports as the output of the Math Function Block the value of the parameter connected with “Input a” if this parameter is greater than the parameter connected with
“Input b”, or the value of the parameter connected with
“Input b” if this parameter is greater than the parameter connected with “Input a”
SQR : reports as the output of the Math Function Block the value of the square root of the parameter connected with
“Input a”
LOG10 : reports as the output of the Math Function Block the value of the logarithm to base 10 of the parameter connected with “Input a”
LOGN : reports as the output of the Math Function Block the value of the logarithm to base N of the parameter connected with “Input a”
Type 2 oforations : MATH FUNCTION (a) + LOGICAL
RESET COMMAND (c)
MIN LATCH : reports as the output of the Math Function
Block the minimum value of the parameter connected with
“Input a” starting from the last impulse that reached the block reset input via the digital parameter connected with
“Input c”. The reset remains active for as long as it stays at the high value.
MAX LATCH : reports as the output of the Math Function
Block the maximum value of the parameter connected with
“Input a” starting from the last impulse that reached the block reset input via the digital parameter connected with
“Input c”. The reset remains active for as long as it stays at the high value.
S&H : reports as the output of the Math Function Block the value of the parameter connected with “Input a” for as long as the digital parameter connected with “Input c” keeps RESET input low. As soon as the digital parameter connected with
“Input c” raises the RESET input, the Math Function Block output will remain steady at the value that the parameter connected to “Input a” had at the time of transition of the
RESET input from LOW => HIGH.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 238
Type 3 oforations: UP/DOWN COUNTER with prescaler x1, x10, x100, x1000 of the logical input (d) + reset logical input
(c) with threshold (UP) or preset (DOWN) analogue (a) and digital output at end of count + analogue counter output (b)
UP COUNTER with prescaler x 1 : increases the value of the analogue output of the Math Function every time the parameter connected with digital input “Input d” switches from low logical value to high logical value (rising edge).
The value of the analogue output of the Math Function Block will remain at zero for as long as the value of the parameter connected with digital input “Input c” keeps RESET input high.
The digital output of the Math Function Block will take on the logical value HIGH when the value appearing on the analogue output of the Math Function Block reaches the value of the parameter connected with analogue input “Input a”. Until then, the digital output of the Math Function Block will remain on LOW logical value.
UP COUNTER with prescaler x 10 : : increases the value of the analogue output of the Math Function every time the parameter connected with digital input “Input d” switches from low logical value to high logical value (rising edge) ten times.
The value of the analogue output of the Math Function Block will remain at zero for as long as the value of the parameter connected with digital input “Input c” keeps RESET input high.
The digital output of the Math Function Block will take on the logical value HIGH when the value appearing on the analogue output of the Math Function Block reaches the value of the parameter connected with analogue input “Input a”. Until then, the digital output of the Math Function Block will remain on LOW logical value.
UP COUNTER with prescaler x 100 : iincreases the value of the analogue output of the Math Function every time the parameter connected with digital input “Input d” switches from low logical value to high logical value (rising edge) one hundred times.
The value of the analogue output of the Math Function Block will remain at zero for as long as the value of the parameter connected with digital input “Input c” keeps RESET input high.
The digital output of the Math Function Block will take on the logical value HIGH when the value appearing on the analogue output of the Math Function Block reaches the value of the parameter connected with analogue input “Input a”. Until then, the digital output of the Math Function Block will remain on LOW logical value.
UP COUNTER with prescaler x 1000 : increases the value of the analogue output of the Math Function every time the parameter connected with digital input “Input d” switches from low logical value to high logical value (rising edge) one thousand times.
The value of the analogue output of the Math Function Block will remain at zero for as long as the value of the parameter connected with digital input “Input c” keeps RESET input high.
The digital output of the Math Function Block will take on the logical value HIGH when the value appearing on the analogue output of the Math Function Block reaches the value of the parameter connected with analogue input “Input a”. Until then, the digital output of the Math Function Block will remain on LOW logical value.
DOWN COUNTER with prescaler x 1 : decreases the value of the analogue output of the Math Function, starting with the value of the parameter connected with analogue “Input a”, every time the parameter connected with digital input
“Input d” switches from low logical value to high logical value
(rising edge)
The value of the analogue output of the Math Function Block will remain at zero for as long as the value of the parameter connected with digital input “Input c” keeps RESET input high.
The digital output of the Math Function Block will take on the logical value HIGH when the value appearing on the analogue output of the Math Function Block is zero. Until then, the digital output of the Math Function Block will remain on LOW logical value.
DOWN COUNTER with prescaler x 10 : decreases the value of the analogue output of the Math Function, starting with the value of the parameter connected with analogue “Input a”, every time the parameter connected with digital input
“Input d” switches from low logical value to high logical value
(rising edge) ten times
The value of the analogue output of the Math Function Block will remain at zero for as long as the value of the parameter connected with digital input “Input c” keeps RESET input high.
The digital output of the Math Function Block will take on the logical value HIGH when the value appearing on the analogue output of the Math Function Block is zero. Until then, the digital output of the Math Function Block will remain on LOW logical value.
DOWN COUNTER with prescaler x 100 : decreases the value of the analogue output of the Math Function by one, starting with the value of the parameter connected with analogue “Input a”, every time the parameter connected with the digital input of the Math Function Block remains at LOW logical value.
The value of the analogue output of the Math Function Block will remain at zero for as long as the value of the parameter connected with digital input “Input c” keeps RESET input high.
The digital output of the Math Function Block will take on the logical value HIGH when the value appearing on the analogue output of the Math Function Block is zero. Until then, the digital output of the Math Function Block will remain on LOW
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 239
logical value.
DOWN COUNTER with prescaler x 1000 : : decreases the value of the analogue output of the Math Function, starting with the value of the parameter connected with analogue
“Input a”, every time the parameter connected with digital input “Input d” switches from low logical value to high logical value (rising edge) one thousand times.
The value of the analogue output of the Math Function Block will remain at zero for as long as the value of the parameter connected with digital input “Input c” keeps RESET input high.
The digital output of the Math Function Block will take on the logical value HIGH when the value appearing on the analogue output of the Math Function Block is zero. Until then, the digital output of the Math Function Block will remain on LOW logical value. digital input “Input d” switches from low logical value to high logical value (rising edge) one hundred times.
LESS OR EQUAL keeps :
The digital output of the Math Function Block LOW if the value of the parameter connected with “Input a” is greater than the value of the parameter connected with “Input b”.
The digital output of the Math Function Block HIGH if the value of the parameter connected with “Input a” is less than or equal to the value of the parameter connected with “Input b”.
EQUAL keeps :
The digital output of the Math Function Block LOW if the value of the parameter connected with “Input a” is different from the value of the parameter connected with
“Input b”.
The digital output of the Math Function Block HIGH if the value of the parameter connected with “Input a” is the same as the value of the parameter connected with
“Input b”.
NOT EQUAL keeps :
The digital output of the Math Function Block LOW if the value of the parameter connected with “Input a” is equal to the value of the parameter connected with “Input b”.
The digital output of the Math Function Block HIGH if the value of the parameter connected with “Input a” is different from the value of the parameter connected with
“Input b”.
Type 4 oforations : COMPARISON of (a, b) with digital output
GREATER keeps :
The digital output of the Math Function Block LOW if the value of the parameter connected with “Input a” is less than or equal to the value of the parameter connected with “Input b”.
The digital output of the Math Function Block HIGH if the value of the parameter connected with “Input a” is greater than the value of the parameter connected with “Input b”.
LESS keeps :
The digital output of the Math Function Block LOW if the value of the parameter connected with “Input a” is greater than or equal to the value of the parameter connected with “Input b”.
The digital output of the Math Function Block HIGH if the value of the parameter connected with “Input a” is less than the value of the parameter connected with “Input b”.
GREATER OR EQUAL keeps :
The digital output of the Math Function Block LOW if the value of the parameter connected with “Input a” is less than the value of the parameter connected with “Input b”.
The digital output of the Math Function Block HIGH if the value of the parameter connected with “Input a” is greater than or equal to the value of the parameter connected with
“Input b”.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 240
1 2
14 15
3 4
13
12
5
11
10
9
1. Button to return to previous Math Function Block.
2. Number of Math Function Block.
3. Name of Math Function Block. You can enter an optional descriptive name of the Math Function Block.
4. Button to go to next Math Function Block.
5. Button to print Math Function Block in use.
6. Name of output. You can enter an optional descriptive name of the output.
7. Output type or variable activated.
8. Setting limits control mode (Disabled => Limits calculated automatically, Enabled => Limits set by user)
9. Type of oforation executed by Math Function Block in use.
10. Input type or variable evaluated for input b. Input b box is used for entering an optional descriptive name of input b.
11. Input type or variable evaluated for input a. Input a box is used for entering an optional descriptive name of input a.
12. Graphic representation of type of inputs (analog or digital) used by Math Function Block in use.
13. Selection of type of Math Function Block
14. Button for showing an overview of the Math Function
Block enabled.
15. Button for showing the Math Function Block shown in the box.
By enabling manual mode for setting maximums and minimums, you see the following:
16. Minimum value that Math Function Block output can assume.
17. Maximum value that Math Function Block output can assume.
18. Value of decimal figures attributable to output.
6
7
8
16
17
18
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 241
When onLine mode is activated, the virtual values of the respective quantities, including the minimum and maximum limits used (see yellow fields) will be shown for the analog input and output terminals.
Following a reboot of the controller after a Power ON, type
2 math function blocks always restart at their initial value.
Specifically:
• 9999 for the block that memorizes the minimum,
• -1999 for the block that memorizes the maximum,
• 0 for Sample and Hold.
5.17.3.2. Enabling a function block and selecting the type of math function
The function block page is enabled automatically as soon as a type of math function is selected.
The page is not cancelled if you select Disabled. The input and output configuration stays memorized in the program software, ready to be reused without requiring a new configuration.
When you select the type of math function assigned to the function block, its symbol changes as well as shown in the figures below.
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 1
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 242
TYPE 4
(
You can name the function block so that it can be easily recognized for future use.
The name will be memorized as part of the “configuration recipe” only on the PC. If you copy the configuration to another controller, the controller to which the configuration is copied will not contain the descriptive name.
5.17.3.3. Configuring input variables
Configure the input variables ( a, b ) to TYPE 1 and TYPE 4 or a , c ) to TYPE 2 or ( a, c, d ) to TYPE 3, by selecting (on the pull-down menu) which variable will be assigned to the input.
In case of the logical inputs (c, d) y clicking the input’s symbol you can invert its reference state between normally open
(NO) and normally closed (NC).
5.17.3.4. Configuring the output
Configure the output by selecting (on the pull-down menu) one of the possible values listed in the Function Commands groups shown above in “5.17.2. Groups of variables” on page 201.
This will be the output variable whose value will be changed by the result of the logic oforation conducted with the input variables data.
End the configuration by giving a descriptive name to the output so that it can be easily recognized for future use.
The name will be memorized as part of the “configuration recipe” only on the PC and will not be transferred to the controller.
Therefore, when the controllers are cloned, the controller to which the configuration is copied will not contain the descriptive name.
NO NC
ATTENTION : Following a reboot of the controller after a
Power ON, type 2 math function blocks always restart at their initial value. Specifically:
•
•
•
9999 for the block that memorizes the minimum,
-1999 for the block that memorizes the maximum,
0 for Sample and Hold.
In types 3 and 4, the status of the digital output shown may then be processed as input for the Logical Function Blocks.
5.17.3.5. Copy of Math Function Blocks
A copy of a Math Function Block may be made using the dedicated window, selecting the source Function Block
(a single block only) and the destination Function Block(s)
(multiple blocks formitted).
If you want to transmit the output state of a math function block (MATH FUNCTION BLOCK OUTPUT 1…8) to an analog output of the controller, simply assign the selected analog output to the MFB output.
The window may be opened using the icon or the
“Copy of Math Function Blocks” command on the Service menu
If you select support coefficients as input variables, you have to set their value in the field provided.
Complete the configuration by giving a descriptive name to each input so that it can be easily recognized for future use.
The name will be memorized as part of the “configuration recipe” only on the PC and will not be transferred to the controller.
Therefore, when the controllers are cloned, the controller to which the configuration is copied will not contain the descriptive name.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 243
Parameters recipes are defined so that the user can compile a list of N parameters (with N ≤ 25), selected from all of the parameters provided by the controller, and assign each one up to 5 values.
When the user has to use one of the five groups of parameters, he/she can select the recipe and load it in memory.
You can save values assigned to recipe parameters in the active recipe (shown in parameter REC.AC) by using parameter REC.SV (settable on the User Menu and by GF_ eXpress).
The parameters recipe list is defined in GF_eXpress by:
• the GF_eXpress RECIPE EDITOR wizard, “Template” tab (recommended);
• the GF_eXpress “Recipe template” menu by assigning, in the “Name”\”Value” column, the IPA of the parameter to be added.
With GF_eXpress, you can also copy the contents of one of the 5 recipes to the other 4 (from 1 to 4), by clicking:
•
• the icon the “Copy Recipes” command on the Service menu
You will see a form on which you can select the source recipe
(single) and the destination recipe(s).
nare la ricetta sorgente (unica) e la\e ricetta\e destinataria\e.
Parameters values in the nth recipe will be set:
• in the GF_eXpress RECIPE EDITOR wizard, Recipe_x tab (recommended);
• in the “RECIP_X” submenus of the GF_eXpress “RECIP” menu.
The RECIPE submenu on the configuration menu will show only the values contained in the recipes (Read Only parameters).
You can run a check of correct configuration of the Recipes template by clicking the icon in
GF_eXpress (or the “Check user recipes template coherence” command on the GF_eXpress Service menu).
The active recipe is set by:
• parameter REC.AC inserted in the User menu;
• digital input function;
• Logic Function Block function
The recipe is loaded after every change of parameter REC.
AC (directly by the parameter, by digital input or by Logic
Function Block).
Congruity between parameters in execution on the controller and recipe parameters is checked during loading.
If a value is rejected, the fault is signaled with a clear scrolling message that cannot be changed by the user (“Error on recipe 1”, “Error on recipe 2”, “Error on recipe 3”, “Error on recipe 4“ and “Error on recipe 5”).
Exampled of setting from digital input and LFB if the Parameters recipe function RECP.N >= 2 is enabled:
REC.0
= Select parameters recipe bit 0
with RECP.N=2 select recipe 1 or recipe 2
with RECP.N=3 select recipe 1…recipe 3 bit 0
with RECP.N=4 select recipe 1…recipe 4 bit 0
with RECP.N=5 select recipe 1…recipe 5 bit 0 if the Parameters recipe function RECP.N >= 3 is enabled:
REC.1
= Select parameters recipe bit 1
with RECP.N=3 select recipe 1…recipe 3 bit 1
with RECP.N=4 select recipe 1…recipe 4 bit 1 if the Parameters recipe function RECP.N >= 5 is enabled:
REC.2
= Select parameters recipe bit 2
with RECP.N=5 select recipe 1…recipe 5 bit 2
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 244
With option “G = Master Modbus RTU Communication”, the device offers the Master Modbus RTU communication mode.
The Master Modbus RTU mode provides the user with up to
20 Modbus objects from devices connected to the controller as slave nodes or formits writing of the value of an internal controller value onto remote devices.
ACCESS=WRITE ONLY objects may be used to write the value of a controller value on a remote device (e.g. power calculated by PID).
Objects may be grouped into two types of task
(SPEED=LOW or SPEED=HIGH) on the basis of the reading and/or writing speed forformance desired.
Tasks are forformed alternately, and scanning times depend on the number of objects with the same value for the SPEED parameter.
The features of these objects are defined in the Master communication blocks and can be intuitively set in the dedicated set-up page, “Master Communication” on GF_eXpress.
ACCESS=READ ONLY or AC-CESS=READ/WRITE objects may be used as:
• references for alarms (REFE)
• references for digital outputs (F.out) if the data is bit type
• references for analogue outputs (F.ou.C, Func) if the data is word type
• input for Math Functions if the data is of word type
• input for Logic Functions if the data is bit type
Attention ! Modbus data exchange may be managed to slave devices guaranteeing response times below the MASTER_TIM parameter (range
60…1000ms, default = 60ms). If no response is received, scanning of the master will continue, but the error will be recorded in the parameter
ERR.x= tim.O with x from 1 to 20 in the MASTE submenu.
and may be:
• displayed in Home.x as numerical data (dS.SP, dS.F) or as a bar graph form (bAr.1, bAr.2, bAr.3)
• displayed and/or set in the “MASTE” submenu or the User
Menu
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 245
5.19.2.1. Set-up page
The set-up page for Master Communication Blocks in the
GF_ eXpress program formits set-up and debugging.
3 1 4 2 5
6
12
13
14
15
10
11
7
8
16
17
18
9
21 22 19 23 20
1. Button for showing an overview of the communication blocks enabled.
2. Button for showing the communication block shown in the box.
3. Button for going back to the previous function block.
4. Communication block number.
5. Button for going on to the next communication block.
6. Selection enabling/disabling the communication block.
7. Selection for configuring the type of task (SPEED=LOW,
HIGH).
8. Selection of the Modbus slave node.
9. Selection of the maximum Modbus slave node
(ACCESS=WRITE_ONLY in the case of multi-node writing NODE to consecutive NODE_MAX).
10. Selection of the variable’s address in the Modbus slave.
11. Selection of the type of variable in the Modbus slave
(TYPE=WORD, BIT, BIT(S) OF WORD).
12. Selection of the type of variable access in the Modbus slave (ACCESS=READ/WRITE, READ ONLY, WRITE
ONLY).
13. Selection of the minimum value of the variable in the
Modbus slave (for TYPE=WORD only).
14. Selection of the maximum value of the variable in the
Modbus slave (for TYPE=WORD only).
15. Selection of the position of the decimal point in the variable in the Modbus slave (for TYPE=WORD only).
16. Selection of the mask for selection of the bits in the variable in the Modbus slave (for TYPE=BIT(S) OF
WORD only).
17. Setting the description of the variable in the Modbus slave.
18. Selection of the internal variable to be retransmitted in the Modbus slave (for ACCESS=WRITE ONLY only).
19. Display acronym of the internal variable to be retransmitted in the Modbus slave.
20. Display description of the internal variable to be retransmitted in the Modbus slave.
21. Display current data read by the Modbus slave or written in the Modbus slave (only if the controller is connected).
22. Display current error of data (only if controller is connected).
23. Display current data update time (only if controller is connected).
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 246
5.19.2.2. Enabling communication block
The communication block page is automatically enabled when you select “Enabled” block type.
If you select “Disable”, the parameter configuration will be stored in memory by the software program, ready to be reused at a later time with no need for a new configuration.
5.19.2.3. Selecting scanning speed
Communication blocks are executed by alternating two tasks, referred to as SPEED=LOW and SPEED=HIGH. Each communication block may be associated with one of the two tasks to obtain the desired parameter scanning speed.
Master communication is managed every 20ms; effective scanning times depend on this time, the slave device’s latency time and the communication speed set.
Scanning time also depends on the baud rate used (MASTER_
KBAU=19200, 38400, 57600, 115200) and the latency time of the slave’s response.
Example:
850/1650/1850 connection with Gefran 19200 baud devices:
- Power controllers: GTF
- Controllers and programmers: 400/401, 450, 600/1200/1300,
800/1600/1800, 2500, 650/1250/1350, 850/1650/1850
- Indicators and alarm units: 4/40 T/B, 40TB, 2400, 650L/1250L
➡
⬅
Example:
➡
⬅
With a latency time for Modbus communication in the slave of 0 to 20ms, the total duration of a message will be a maximum of: with the following set-up:
MCB.01
SPEED=HIGH
MCB.02 SPEED=LOW
MCB.03 SPEED=LOW
MCB.04 SPEED=LOW
The communication sequence will be:
… MCB.01
…MCB.02… MCB.01
…MCB.03… MCB.01
…
MCB.04…
(TX message=4.2ms) + (Response latency=20ms) +
(RX message=4.2ms) =
28.4
ms (+ time of management of the RTS signal, if any)
Therefore:
• With 1 object: update every 40 ms
• With 2 objects, one of which has SPEED=HIGH while the other has SPEED=LOW: update 1 = update 2 = every 80 ms
• With 3 objects, one of which has SPEED=HIGH while two have SPEED=LOW: update 1 = 80 ms, update 2 = update 3
= every 160 ms
In the case of ACCESS=WRITE ONLY objects, the same value of a controller variable may be sent to multiple slave noes with a node number between consecutive NODE and
NODE_MAX values.
In this case, scanning time is lengthened proportionately.
Example :
850/1650/1850 connection with Gefran 19200 baud devices:
- Power controllers: GFX4/GFXTERMO4/GFX4-IR/GFW
Example: with the following set-up:
MCB.01
SPEED=HIGH NODE=1 NODE_MAX=3
MCB.02 SPEED=LOW
MCB.03 SPEED=LOW
MCB.04 SPEED=LOW
The communication sequence will be:
… MCB.01
NODE=1…MCB.02… MCB.01
NODE=2…
MCB.03… MCB.01
NODE=3…MCB.04…
With a latency time for Modbus communication in the slave of
0 to 5ms, the total duration of a message will be a maximum of:
(TX message= 4.2
ms) + (Response latency= 5 ms) +
(RX message= 4.2
ms) =
13.4
ms (+ time of management of the RTS signal, if any)
Therefore:
• With 1 object: update every 20 ms
• With 2 objects, one of which has SPEED=HIGH while the other has SPEED=LOW: update 1 = update 2 = every 40 ms
• With 3 objects, one of which has SPEED=HIGH while two have SPEED=LOW: update 1 = 40 ms, update 2 = update 3
= every 80 ms
Only if the instrument is connected will the effective update time for each communication block in the variable UPD.x with x from 1 to 20 be reported in the set-up page.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 247
5.19.2.4. Selecting remote device parameters
The communication block parameters determining the objects in the remote device are:
• NODE : remote device node
• NODE_MAX : maximum remote device node (for
ACCESS=WRITE_ONLY only in the case of multi-node writing from NODE to consecutive NODE_MAX)
• ADDRESS : Modbus address of the object in the remote device to be read and/or written with the variable
• TYPE :
• ACCESS : type of object in the remote device type of object access in the remote device
• MIN : minimum value of the object in the remote device
•
•
MAX :
DEC.P
: maximum value of the object in the remote device position of the decimal point value of the object in the remote device
• MASK : bit mask of the object in the remote device
• DESCRIPTION : description value of the object in the remote device. The description will appear on the instrument as a scrolling message when the data appears in the “MASTE” menu or the User menu.
slave are subject to these limits. In the case of access in read-only mode, ACCESS=READ_ONLY, the MIN...MAX limits still apply, and the value written in the parameter MAS.
xx , starting with the value read on the slave, is subject to these limits.
The limits on the data appearing on the controller display are between -1999…9999.
Example :
To assess bit3 in a word:
MASK=8 (0x08) and MAS.xx may take on the values
= 8 (bit3=1) or = 0 (bit3=0).
Volendo valutare il bit3 e il bit6 di una word:
MASK=72 (0x48) e MAS.xx potrà assumere i valori
= 72 (bit3=1 e bit6=1) oppure 64 (bit6=1) oppure 8
(bit3=1) oppure 0 (bit3=0 e bit6=0)
MIN and MAX parameters
The MIN and MAX limits are significant when the TYPE=WORD parameter or the TYPE=BIT(S) OF WORD parameter and the parameter:
- ACCESS=WRITE_ONLY or ACCESS=READ_WRITE: to limit the value written on the slave.
- ACCESS=READ_ONLY: to set the limits on the scale if the value is used as input for a Math Function Block or retransmitted to an analogue output (if the MIN and MAX limits are not taken into account, the dynamic of the output is rescaled over a maximum range of [0…65535] points).
TYPE parameter
The TYPE=WORD parameter is used to assess word data.
This data is shown in the MAS.xx parameter in the MASTE menu or in the User Menu.
This data may be used in Math Function Blocks or retransmitted on an analogue output.
In the case of ACCESS=WRITE_ONLY write access or
ACCESS=READ/WRITE access, the MIN...MAX limits apply and the value written in the MAS.xx parameter and in the slave are subject to these limits.
In the case of access in read-only mode, ACCESS=READ_
ONLY, the MIN...MAX limits still apply, and the value written in the parameter MAS.xx , starting with the value read on the slave, is subject to these limits.
The limits on the data appearing on the controller display are between -1999…9999.
Example :
When reading a word with an effective range of [0…1000] points, if it is to be retransmitted to an analogue output of
0-10V where 0 points=0V and 1000 points=10V, set MIN=0 and MAX=1000.
Warning!
In order to be correctly displayed and set in the controller, data read and written in the slave must be within the range [-1999…9999].
In the case of TYPE=BIT(S) OF WORD, you may therefore read and write from bit0 to bit12
[0…8191].
5.19.2.5. Selecting an internal variable to be retransmitted
In the case of a communication block with WRITE_ONLY access, the instrument will send the remote device the value of an internal variable selected through the OUT parameter.
The TYPE=BIT parameter is used to assess bit data. This data appears in the MAS.xx parameter in the MASTE menu or in the User Menu.
This data may be used in Logical Function Blocks or retransmitted on an analogue output.
The limits on the data are 0…1.
The TYPE=BIT(S) OF WORD parameter is used to assess word data in AND with the MASK mask.
The result of the oforation appears in the MAS.xx parameter
MAS.xx nel menu MASTE oppure inserito nello User Menu.
This data may be used in Math Function Blocks or retransmitted on an analogue output.
In the case of ACCESS=WRITE_ONLY write access or
ACCESS=READ/WRITE access, the MIN...MAX limits apply and the value written in the MAS.xx parameter and in the
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 248
GF_eXpress may be used to set the communication speed
(MASTER_KBAU=19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 baud), parity type (MASTER_PAR=NO_PARITY, ODD, EVEN) and timeout (MASTER_TIM=60…1000ms) of the Master Modbus serial.
The “Overview” page in the Master Communication section of GF_eXpress may be used to obtain an overview of the
Modbus parameters the device is exchanging with the connected nodes.
Information on Master device variables appears in the section on the left:
• “OUT” column: name of the parameter sent (ONLY in the case of a writing oforation).
• “MAS” column: value of the parameter written and\ or read.
• “ERR” column:
.
• “UPD” column: status of communication with the slave device..
real parameter update time
• “ACCESS” column: type of oforation configured:
Write Only:
Read Only:
Read and Write:
The parameters set for communication with the Slave node(s) appear on the right:
• “NODE” column: number of the Slave node with which to conduct Modbus communication
• “ADDRESS” column: Modbus address of the parameter to be exchanged (in read and\or write mode)
• “DESCRIPTION” column: description of the object to be exchanged (in read and\or write mode)
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 249
The “E0 = Ethernet Modbus TCP” option may be used to access the device using the Modbus TCP protocol.
Access may take place via any client (including the
GF_eXpress set-up), implementing the following Modbus commands :
• 01 : Read Coils
• 02 : Read Discrete Inputs
• 03 : Read Holding Registers
• 04 : Read Input Registers
• 05 : Write Single Coil
• 06 : Write Single Register
• 15 : Write Multiple Coils
• 16 : Write Multiple registers
In order to connect with the device using the Modbus TCP protocol via a client, you must assign network parameters, and specifically:
• IP address (default 192.168.1.50)
• Subnet Mask (default 255.255.255.0)
• Gateway (default 192.168.1.1)
Attribution of these parameters may take place in two ways:
• acting on the parameters in the instrument’s ETHER submenu (enter reference to paragraph "4.24. ETHER submenu - “Configuration of Ethernet parameters” )
• using the “SetIP_850” Set-up Tool run on the PC
As this is a case of a Slave device connected via the
Modbus TCP protocol acting as a bridge, it will also be necessary to indicate the node number (NodeID) of the device you want to connect to. The NodeID of the controller with the optional card is 1.
1. list of devices in the Forformance family (850-1650-
1850) with the network option,
2. button for searching for devices in the Forformance family (850-1650-1850) with the network option,
3. selector for the network interface card on the PC to which the search for devices in the Forformance family
(850-1650-1850) with the network option will be conveyed,
4. network parameters of the device selected in the list appearing on the left (see point 1)
5. enabling\disabling assignment of device network parameters via DHCP server
6. button for sending the set network parameters (see point 4) to the device selected in the list appearing on the left (see point 1).
Once you have selected the network interface card of the PC to which you wish to convey the search for devices in the Forformance family (850-1650-1850) with the network option (see point 3), press the button identified in point 2 and the scan will begin). When the search has been completed, a list of the devices found will appear in the area on the left (see point 1 and illustration below).
As stated above, network parameters may be assigned using the set-up tool
“SetIP_850” running on a PC.
When you run this tool, the following dialogue box appears
Once you have obtained a list of devices in the Forformance family (850-1650-1850) with the network option, if you select one of the items in the list, the corresponding network parameters will appear in the top right (see illustration below).
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 250
There are only two ways of assigning values different from the default values, and they are mutually exclusive :
• Fixed network parameters: set the new network parameter values to be assigned to the device and press “Apply changes” (see illustration below)
• Network parameters automatically assigned by DHCP server: enable the corresponding item and press
“Apply changes” (see illustration below)
Warning ! Once the network parameters have been changed by one of the two methods described above, the device must be turned off and on again to implement the change.
If no devices in the Forformance family (850-1650-1850) with the network option are found upon completing the initial search (begun using the “Refresh list” button), the area at the top left will remain empty.
If the Modbus TCP communication option is installed but there are errors exchanging data with the device where the network interface card is assembled :
• the MAC.E parameter in the INFO submenu (add reference to paragraph “4.4.6. MAC.E – Controller Ethernet address” ) will display the value 0x:00:00:00:00:00:00.
• The INFO.E submenu (add reference to paragraph
“4.5. INFO.E Submenu - Displaying Ethernet information” ) and the ETHER submenu (add reference to paragraph
“4.24. ETHER Submenu - Ethernet parameter set-up” ) will not appear
If there are no errors, you will be able to obtain network connection status by accessing the parameters in the INFO.E submenu (add reference to paragraph “4.5. INFO.E Submenu - Displaying Ethernet information” ).
Whichever method is used, if the assignment of new network parameters is successful the following screen will appear.
If it is not, nothing will appear in the box in the lower left.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 251
With the “ME = Ethernet Modbus TCP\RTU Bridge” option, the device can oforate as a Modbus TCP\RTU bridge, formitting connection of other devices using the serial number appearing on the terminals on the bottom of the box (see enter reference to paragraphs “2.3. 850 wiring diagrams” , “2.4. 1650 wiring diagrams” and “2.5. 1850 wiring diagrams” ), obtaining the following architecture:
As shown in the figure above, the maximum number of nodes that may be connected is 15.
IThe value of the node number on the various devices connected may vary within the range of [2…247], in that the value 1 is reserved for the device with the Modbus TCP card mounted on it. The value of the serial parameters
• BadRate
• Parity
• Stopbit
(see “Add reference to paragraph 4.23. SERIA Submenu
- Serial configuration” ), must be the same for all Slaves.
The SCANR parameter in the SERIA submenu may be used to introduce a delay between two consecutive Modbus requests in order to formit exchange of data with other devices with higher response times.
This delay will affect all communications, data scan time via
Modbus.
The “E0 = Ethernet Modbus TCP” and “ME = Ethernet
Modbus TCP\RTU Bridge” options may be used to permit use of the device’s internal clock synchronisation service
(RTC) with an NTP (Network Time Protocol) server in the same sub-network as the controller or in an external network.
The service is activated by setting the value of the parameter
TIM.NT to a value other than zero (see paragraph “4.24.15.
TIM.NT – Update time from Network Time Protocol server” ). Once started, the controller will periodically ask the server identified by the network address specified in the IP.NTX parameters (see paragraph “4.24.16. IP.NT1
– Indirizzo IP 1 for server Network Time Protocol” and subsequent points) for the new date and time value to be used and copy it into its internal clock.
This service ensures that events programmed with the
Calendar (see paragraph “5.23. Calendario” ) on different devices, each of which is connected with the same NTP server, all refer to the same basic time.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 252
following ports need to be open (provide this list to the IT administrator):
The connection networks may be private or public.
A private network is a closed network with no connections to the outside world, which is intrinsically more secure.
The public network (Internet), in contrast, allows you to access devices connected to the network from anywhere in the world but, because of this, it is less secure.
Port
502
8080
Service
Modbus TCP
Webserver
Finally, there is the option of connecting a private network to a public network through a device called a firewall, which keeps it isolated except for duly authorised traffic.
In this type of configuration, a private network is often identified with the acronym LAN (Local Area Network), while the public network is referred to with the acronym WAN
(Wide Area Network).
Other ways to identify them are intranet and extranet.
Note that the private network may consist of a single devic.
In cases of particularly complex or extensive Ethernet networks, or networks subject to intense broadcast traffic, the connection to the 850, 1650 and 1850 controllers must be isolated. This is achieved by structuring the network into subnets (corporate/machine), or by limiting TCP/IP traffic to the traffic strictly necessary for hubs or services.
This rule should normally also be observed when connecting
850, 1650 and 1850 controllers in small networks, or with remote access systems.
The recommended solution is to connect the 850, 1650 and
1850 controllers via a router.
A router is a layer 3 device that allows you to route the communication packets between different networks, that is, to determine which specific port to release the package in arrival from on the basis of the target IP address.
Use of a router ensures that Ethernet traffic to or from the
850, 1650 and 1850 controllers is filtered and remains isolated from the rest of the corporate network or from the
.
external network
A firewall is a physical device or a software application that isolates a device or a section in a network from the rest of the connection network.
Several firewalls may need to be crossed to reach a device.
For example, there might be a firewall between the corporate LAN and the Internet, and another firewall that isolates the device from the corporate network.
To access a multi-purpose controller behind a firewall you need to configure the access channels or firewall traffic rules and implement connections via VPN (Virtual Private Network) or directly through a modem.
Consult the corporate IT system administrator to properly configure firewalls or find out about the parameters required to implement a VPN or connect via modem.
In order to connect to an external multi-purpose controller and ensure the proper operations of all the services, the
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 253
The Modbus TCP option also formits use of the webserver function, which provides a series of web pages with a selection of device parameters, accessible using any internet browser.
To access these pages, simply open any internet browser and set the device’s IP address. After a few seconds, the login window shown below will appear.
2 users are available:
• admin with webadmin password
• webuserD with webuserD password. This user is read-only, and so any writing options will be rejected.
if you cannot obtain access and select the Cancel command, the screen shown below will appear in the browser:
When you press this button, a dialogue box will appear with:
• a “Current Password” field displaying the current password plain text
• a “New Password” field in which you can set the new password in encrypted form.
• a “Confirm new password” field where you will be asked to confirm the new password in encrypted form
• a “Clear” button for resetting the default password
• OK\Cancel buttons to confirm and/or cancel the setting
Caution!
User and Password are NOT encrypted.
You can change the default access passwords associated with the two users by editing them via GF_eXpress
The value assigned to the access passwords associated with the two webserver users are in no way visible on the instrument, but only via GF_eXpress.
Caution!
Passwords are case-sensitive and must be at least four characters long.
The admissible characters are:
• ‘A’... ‘Z’ e ‘a’...’z’
• ‘0’...’9’
• ‘! ‘ , ‘$’ , ‘%’ , ‘&’ , ‘>’ , ‘<’ , ‘;’ , ‘:’ , ‘,’ , ‘.’ , ‘#’ , ‘@’ , ‘_’ ,
‘-’
Use of a character other than those listed above, or a sequence of permitted characters shorter than the minimum length, will make the password unacceptable and cause an error message to appear in the password setting dialogue box when you press “OK”.
To give the password parameter a different value from the default value, select the appropriate button in the grid
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 254
The main page appears, as shown below • Programmer actual step (Number of the step currently running)
• Programmer actual segment (Ramp, Hold, end)
• Programmer actual time (time of the ramp/step currently running)
• Programmer actual set point (setpoint of the step currently running)
Click on the Maintenance link to go to the page
Quantities are displayed (editable variables appear in blue)
• PV1,PV2 (process vale)
• SP1,SP2 (active setpoints)
• OUTP1, OUTP2 (output powers)
• Status of Relay/Logical outputs OUT1,2,3,4 . Text in red means it is active
• Active Alarms (Window containing mnemonic alarm messages)
• The page has a mechanism for refreshing every 2.5 seconds
• Serial Slave Number : formits selection of the serial code
(node number) of a device in the 850 family connected via serial 485 and view its pages. Follow these steps to change the node number:
- Click on the Stop Refresh button and wait for the button caption to say “Refresh stopped”
- Enter a node number between 1 and 247
- Press “Submit” to change the setting
The page includes:
1. Counter switch (1,2,3,4) , thousands of switches
2. Total energy 1,2 used by pid 1,2
Go to the Info page to view the information listed below
If a device connected to the serial sub-network does not respond, the pages will show the variables
PV1,PV2,SP1,SP2,OUTP1,OUTP2 with the value Err!
Click on the Sp_Profile link to go to the SP Profile Monitor page, where the status of the two available programs is displayed
There are two paragraphs on this page:
• MODELINFO WITH:
- SW version
- Serial code
- Input error1 and 2
- Sap code
- Serial Number
- Opt Hw and SW
The following information is displayed for programmers 1 and 2
• Programmer Status (Run,Ready,End,Hbb)
• Programmer actual program (Number of the program currently running)
• DIAGNOSTICS with:
- Working days ; total days of oforation
- Internal temp , internal temforature
- Min temp, minimum internal temforature
- Max temp, maximum internal temforature
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 255
Go to the WIZARD page and click on the link to access the corresponding page
• OFF.SCL 1 and 2 , offset input
• FILT.D 1 and 2, display filter for process variables
• HI.SCL 1 and 2, high end of scale
• HI.AL1 and 2, high end of scale for absolute alarms
• HI.SP1 and 2, high end of scale for setpoints
• FUNC function of input 2
Shows information on main inputs 1 and 2:
The information appearing on the page is as follows:
• OFF/ON instrument power down command
• P.MAN1,2 Power 1,2 delivered manually by the corresponding PID
• MAN/AUTO 1 and 2, manual/automatic PID command
• REM/LOC 1 and 2, remote/local PID command
• The page is refreshed every 2.5 seconds. Proceed as follows to set the parameters:
1. Click on Stop Refresh
2. Set the desired values
3. Select Submit
• The WIZARD page then starts refreshing again
The page input attached below
The ALARMS page contains the following information:
• ALARM.N
number of alarms enabled
• ALRM 1,2,3,4 alarm set point value
• REFE 1,2,3,4 alarm setpoint reference
• DI.IN 1,2,3,4 definition for direct / inverse alarm
• AB.RE 1,2,3,4 definition for relative / absolute alarm
• NO.SY 1,2,3,4 definition for normal / symmetrical alarm
• LATCH 1,2,3,4 definition for alarm on/off memory. The page is refreshed every 2.5 seconds. Follow the steps listed on the previous page to edit these fields
The SETPOINT page contains the information listed below
Shows information on main inputs 1 and 2:
• Type 1 and 2 formit selection of the type of sensor of the main inputs
• Dec.P1 and 2 identify the decimal point used for processing the main inputs
• FILT 1 and 2 , input time filter
• LO.SCL 1 and 2, low end of scale
• LO.AL1 and 2, low end of scale for absolute alarms
• LO.SP1 and 2, low end of scale for setpoints
•
•
•
•
•
•
SETP 1,2
MUL.SP
M.SET1
M.SET2
M.SET3
M.SET4
: Set point
1,2 : Multiset enabling
: Multiset point 1,2
: Multiset point 1,2
: Multiset point 1,2
: Multiset point 1,2
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 256
• SP.REM
: Remote setpoint enabling 1,2
• SERIAL_SPR : remote setpoint from seriale 1,2
• GRAD.UNIT
: unit of measurement of gradient 1,2
• GRAD.I
: Gradient increasing 1,2
• GRAD.D
: Gradient decreasing 1,2
• M.SET
: multiset selection 1,2
• The page is refreshed every 2.5 seconds. Follow the steps listed on the previous page to edit these fields
The CONTROLS page contains the information listed below the following information on outputs:
F.OUT
: reference to output 1,2,3,4
CY.TIM
: cycle time for outputs 1,2,3,4 (relay, triac, logical)
The HMI page
Parameters:
• CNTR : type of pid 1,2 controller
• H.PB
: proportional heating band 1,2
• H.IT
: integral heating time 1,2
• H.DT
: derivative heating time 1,2
• C.PB
: proportional cooling band 1,2
• C.IT
: integral cooling time 1,2
• C.DT
: derivative cooling time 1,2
• COOL : type of cooling fluid 1,2
• S.TUNE
: self-tuning enabled 1,2
• A.TUNE
: autotuning enabled 1,2
• ATU.T
: type of autotuning 1,2
• SOFT.S
: soft start enabled 1,2
• SOFT.T
: soft start time 1,2
• SELFTUN : self-tuning status 1,2
• AUTOTUN : autotuning status 1,2
• SoftStart : softstart status 1,2
• PID.E : pid 2 enabled
• APP.T
: PID control type
• The page is refreshed every 2.5 seconds. Follow the steps listed on the previous page to edit these fields
The OUTPUTS page may be used to display contains the following fields:
• BUT.1
: M/A function key for home 1 and 2
• BUT.2
: Key2 function key for home 1 and 2
• BUT.3
: Key3 function key for home 1 and 2
• DS.SP
: SV display function for home 1 and 2
• DS.F
: F display function for home 1 and 2
• BARG.1
: Bargraph 1 for home 1 and 2
• BARG.2
: Bargraph 2 for home 1 and 2
• BARG.3
: Bargraph 3 for home 1 and 2
• LED.1,2,3,4,5,6 : Led function for home 1 and 2
• The page is refreshed every 2.5 seconds. Follow the steps listed on the previous page to edit these fields.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 257
The instrument set-up menu may be customised, selecting the menus and parameters in each menu that must be visible or invisible while browsing. For selecting the menus and menu parameters to be displayed in the instrument’s editor, there is a new button on the WIZARD di GF_ eXpress page
(which may be activated using the “EN.EDI” parameter in the
EN.FUN menu):
Select one of the n menus and another window will open formitting selection of individual menu parameters:
This button opens a new window containing all the menus that may be displayed on the instrument
You may select / deselect all parameters at the same time with the “SELECT ALL” and “UNSELECT ALL” buttons.
The “ROOT” and “NUMBER” checkboxes (the second only in the case of a menu with multiple instances, such as INPUT1, INPUT2, etc.) above these buttons cannot be selected by the user, but indicate the two editor views which are obligatory if there is at least one menu parameter selected. The corresponding variables may be viewed in the
EXForT menu under the “Enable Menu” group.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 258
The option “CK = RTC+Logical + Mathematical Options” may be used to configure the device to trigger a series of actions over time.
The calendar may be set in the EN.FUN menu using the CAL.
EN parameter
As follows:
• Weekly: continuous calendar (“WEEKLY” option)
• Single week (“ONE.OF option”): the calendar triggers events for up to seven days, then switches OFF, while keeping all information on events and enabling of days set to ON stored in memory.
The calendar can only be configured using the GF_eXpress tool:
The actions that may be scheduled are:
• SW ON (starting up the software, or terminating software off condition – see paragraph 5.8)
• SW OFF (turning off the software - see paragraph 5.8)
• START PROGRAMMER 1
• STOP PROGRAMMER 1
• RESET PROGRAMMER 1 (the programmer goes into
“READY” condition)
• START PROGRAMMER 2
• STOP PROGRAMMER 2
• RESET PROGRAMMER 2 (the programmer goes into
“READY” condition)
• SW ON and START PROGRAMMER 1 (if software is of, software on will be forced, followed by start programmer)
• SW ON and START PROGRAMMER 2 (if software is of, software on will be forced, followed by start programmer)
• P.ST12: START programmer time base PROGR.1 and
PROGR.2
• P.SP12: STOP programmer time base PROGR.1 and
PROGR.2
• P.RS12: RESET programmer time base PROGR.1 and
PROGR.2
• TRIGGERED TIME EVENT 1 (as in FB input)
• TRIGGERED TIME EVENT 2 (as in FB input)
Select everything you need to set scheduled events in the
WEEKLY CALENDAR:
• Enable single week or weekly calendar
• Enable day of the week
• 4 events
• Hour, minute and second when the event will be triggered
The TRIGGERED TIME EVENT 1 action and the TRIGGERED
TIME EVENT 2 action are set as input for the LFBs to define any internal status currently managed by the LFBs. The LFBs may be used to force statuses (see Function Commands)
Up to 4 events are available for each day of the week; a single day may be enabled or not, as required.
Warning : in a ONE WEEK calendar, at midnight, the previous day is considered completed in terms of the associated events, which will therefore no longer take place, even if the day is still enabled. In the event of a power supply failure and return, events associated with the days during which the power supply was off will remain active.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 259
In addition to the weekly calendar, two one-shot events may be set via the usermenu, either on the instrument or in GF_ eXpress:
Warning : remember to enter all the parameters listed above, as a single event requires complete date and time information to be triggered (it is not a weekly trigger)
On the main menu, the Calendar may be set in the “Calendar
Events Blocks” submenu, where the days of the week and the two one-shot events appear.
For each day of the week, you may set:
• HOUR_EVENT_X: time of events 1 to 4
• MINUTE_EVENT_X: minute of events 1 to 4
• SECOND_EVENT_X: second of events 1 to 4
• ACTION_EVENT_X: action to be forformed in events 1 to 4
• CALENDAR_DAYS_ENABLE_X: enable day of the week
For one-shot events, you may set:
• ONE_SHOT_HOUR_EVENT: time of the single event
• ONE_SHOT_MINUTE_EVENT: minute of the single event
• ONE_SHOT_SECOND_EVENT: second of the single event
• ONE_SHOT_DAY_EVENT: day of the month of the single event
• ONE_SHOT_MONTH_EVENT: month of the single event
• ONE_SHOT_YEAR_EVENT: year of the single event
• ONE_SHOT_TYPE_EVENT: type of action of the single event
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 260
The actions that may be scheduled in the weekly calendar are:
• ON SW (start software or exit the software off condition - see section 5.8)
• SW OFF (shut down the software - see paragraph 5.8)
• START PROGRAMMER 1
• STOP PROGRAMMER 1
• RESET PROGRAMMER 1 (the programmer goes into
“READY” condition)
• START PROGRAMMER 2
• STOP PROGRAMMER 2
• RESET PROGRAMMER 2 (the programmer goes into
“READY” condition)
• SW ON and START PROGRAMMER 1 (if software is off, software on will be forced, followed by start programmer)
• SW ON and START PROGRAMMER 2 (if software is off, software on will be forced, followed by start programmer)
• P.ST12: START programmer time base PROGR.1 and
PROGR.2
• P.SP12: STOP programmer time base PROGR.1 and
PROGR.2
• P.RS12: RESET programmer time base PROGR.1 and
PROGR.2
• TRIGGERED TIME EVENT 1 (as in FB input)
• TRIGGERED TIME EVENT 2 (as in FB input)
The possible time-manageable actions for ONE_SHOT events (ONE_SHOT_TYPE_EVENT parameter) are:
• SW ON (start up the software, or exit the software off condition – see paragraph 5.8)
• SW OFF (shut down the software - see paragraph 5.8)
• START PROGRAMMER 1
• RESET PROGRAMMER 1 (the programmer goes into
“READY” condition)
• START PROGRAMMER 2
• RESET PROGRAMMER 2 (the programmer goes into
“READY” condition)
• P.ST12: START programmer time base PROGR.1 and
PROGR.2
• P.RS12: RESET programmer time base PROGR.1 and
PROGR.2
• TRIGGERED TIME EVENT 1 (as in FB input)
• TRIGGERED TIME EVENT 2 (as in FB input)
The calendar can also be managed via the instrument keyboard, using the CAL.EV and CALE.C sub-menus.
In CAL.EV it is possible to enable the single week or weekly calendar and the individual days of the week to be set.
Calendar event settings are in CALE.C.
Entering the CALE.C menu, you will be asked to select the day of the week to be set, followed by the event number that can be set (from 1 to 4). Selecting the event will then prompt the event time in HH, MM and SS (parameters in sequence) and the action to be taken for the selected event.
The Modbus memory map of the instrument appears in the document 80288_MEMORY_MAP_850-1650-1850, but it can be modified via GF_eXpress:
- Custom map
permits definition of a word memory area of 32 contiguous elements in order to make use of the Modbus multi-word read and write commands and thus speed up data exchange with a Modbus Master SCADA
- User map
allows you to replace the instrument’s standard word and bit map with a user-definable one with the following properties:
• WORD map (16bit access) of 20 read/write elements that can be scaled up if necessary
• WORD map (16bit access) of 2 elements with read-only bit structure
• WORD map (16bit access) of 2 elements with read/write bit structure
• BIT map (bit access) of 20 read/write elements
Addresses outside the user map remain those of the standard map.
This management is activated via the MAP.t parameter in the EN.FUNC menu when the RS485 Modbus RTU or the
Ethernet Modbus TCP option is present.
The complete standard map remains valid through the service serial port (microUSB connector) always present in the device.
Example 1:
The address 45400 is not present in the standard map in WORD and can be added to the user map by redirecting a parameter from the standard internal map. In this case, the entire standard map plus the user map remains active. Since GF_eXpress is based on the standard map, it can be used on the service serial port (microUSB connector), which is always present in the device, on the optional RS485 Modbus RTU serial port, and on the optional
Ethernet Modbus TCP port.
Example 2:
The address 5400 is present in the standard map at
WORD (5400 = SETP_1), but can be added to the user map by redirecting another parameter in the standard internal map. In this case, the user map has priority over the standard internal map. Since it is based on the standard map, GF_eXpress can only be used on the service serial
(microUSB connector), which is always present in the device.
CAUTION!
In the presence of the Ethernet Modbus
TCP option:
- Activating the user map MAP.t=USER automati-
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 261
cally deactivates the Webserver function (WEB.
E=OFF).
- The following addresses cannot be used in the
WORD user map: 6001 to 6013, 6640 to 6651,
22200 to 22213, 22300 to 22307, 22332 to
22339, 22424 to 22435, 22441 to 22444.
CAUTION!
PIn order to:
1.configure the user map on a target
2.transfer a recipe using the user map to a target
3.read a recipe using the user map from a target it is necessary to be connected to the service\
debug serial line described in Chapter “6. PRO-
GRAMMING WITH PC” in the manual.
Once the recipe has been configured/written/read, either the RS-485 serial port or the Ethernet port may be used to access the User Map parameters.
CAUTION!
When preparing the User Map using the GF_ eXpress tool, make sure:
1.that there are no unused addresses (65535 = none) between one set address and another (in the case of multiple writes or multiple reads, addresses not on the user map will not be ignored but those on the standard map will be used);
2.to correctly use the Modbus commands relating to the WORD and BIT sections (if a BIT address is queried with WORD commands, the address on the standard map will be used, if not present in the WORD user map);
3.that the multiple Modbus commands used have a correspondence in terms of the number of parameters handled with the User map set (again, in the case of multiple address reads/writes, the addresses in the standard map will be written/ read if not defined in the User map);
The parameters defining the 32 internal variables, to be read or written contiguously, are available in GF_eXpress → Expert → Custom Map → Address:
• CustAddr01…32 while in GF_eXpress → Expert → Custom Map → Data the corresponding data is shown (by way of example):
• CustData01…32
In GF_eXpress the data is always reported with read-only access to ensure that the same data cannot take on two values in the .GFE recipe, while with a Modbus Master
SCADA, access depends on the type of internal variable selected.
Example:
With CustAddr01 = 5294, CustAddr0 2 = 5296 e
CustAddr03 = 5298 it is possible to use the multi-word read command to access the data 5294 = PV_1 - Process Variable, 5296 =
SSP_1 - Active Setpoint and 5298 = OUT.P_1 - Control outputs value in a single Modbus message starting from the first CustData01 address.
The parameters defining the WORD-type user map (20 elements) are available in GF_eXpress → Expert → -User
Map → Word (16 bits access):
• ADDRESS_USER_WORD_1…_20 : are the addresses of the user map in WORD, while
• INTERNAL_USER_WORD_1…_20 : are the corresponding addresses of the standard internal map to WORD, and
• RESCALE_USER_WORD_1…_20 : are the settings of any rescaling, i.e.
= NONE = No rescaling
= DIVISION BY 10 = division of the data by
10
= DIVISION BY 100 = divisione per 100 del dato
CAUTION!
If the division factor DIVISION BY 10 or DIVISION
BY 100 is used, the value read by the internal instrument variable will be divided by 10 before being sent via Modbus; on the contrary, when writing, the parameter written will be multiplied by the same value.
PLEASE NOTE: Make sure that the write value given that is multiplied by a factor of 10 or
100 does not exceed the limits allowed for the variable itself; otherwise a Modbus error will be receive.
- Support variables
allows free use of 4 non-volatile 16bit memory cells of the controller by accessing them via:
• the WORD map (16bit access) for the 4 word variables
• the BIT map (bit access) for the first 8 bits of the first word variable
These variables are not shown on the instrument display.
Example 1:
With ADDRESS_USER_WORD_1 = 57, INTERNAL_USER_
WORD_1 = 5400 and RESCALE_USER_WORD_ 1 = NONE you want to map the internal address 5400 of the standard map in WORD to address 57 of the user map (5400 =
SETP_1 - Local Setpoint) without any rescaling.
With SETP_1=100 at address 57 the data is =100.
Example 2:
With ADDRESS_USER_WORD_2 = 58, INTERNAL_USER_
WORD_2 = 5302 e RESCALE_USER_WORD_2 = DIVISION BY
10 you want to map the internal address 5302 of the standard map in WORD (5302 = CURR1 - Current input CT1) to address 58 of the user map in WORD with the data divided by 10.
With CURR1=10.3A (i.e. Modbus data without formatting
=103) at address 58 the data is =10A.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 262
The type of access (read-only or read/write) depends on the selected data type of the internal map. The value of user address = 65535 means not configured.
Parameters defining the WORD-type user map with bit meaning read-only (2 elements) are available in GF_eXpress → Expert → User Map → Word (16 bits access) with bit structure R/O:
• ADDRESS_USER_ WORDBIT_R_1…_2 : are the addresses of the user map in WORD, while
• INTERNAL_USER_WORDBIT_R_1_BIT00…_2_BIT15 : these are the corresponding addresses of the standard read-only internal BIT map, one for each of the 16 bits to be configured
The parameters defining the BIT-type user map (20 elements) are available in GF_eXpress → Expert → User Map → Bit access:
• ADDRESS_USER_BIT_1…_20 : are the addresses of the user map in BIT, while
• INTERNAL_USER_BIT_1…_20 : are the corresponding addresses of the standard internal BIT map
Example:
With ADDRESS_USER_BIT_1 = 33 and INTERNAL_USER_
BIT_1 = 10 you want to map to address 33 of the BIT user map the internal address 10 of the BIT standard map (10 = bit_
HOLD_1 - Main input hold).
The type of access (read-only or read/write) depends on the selected data type of the internal map. The value of user address = 65535 means not configured.
Example:
With ADDRESS_USER_WORDBIT_R_1 = 34, INTERNAL_
USER_WORDBIT_R_1_BIT00 = 60 and
INTERNAL_USER_WORDBIT_R_1_BIT01 = 61 the read-only variable made up of bit 0 that reports the internal address 60 of the standard BIT map (60 = bit_AL_1
- Alarm 1 status) and bit 1 that reports the internal address
61 of the standard BIT map (61 = bit_AL_2 - Alarm 2 status) is to be mapped in WORD user map address 34.
The value of user address = 65535 means not configured.
The parameters defining the support variables are available in GF_eXpress → Expert → Parameters → Global:
• USER_VARIABLE_1…_4 : these are the 4 variables with
16bit access and in GF_eXpress → Expert → Bit access → Global:
• Bit_USER_VARIABLE_1_bit0…_bit7 : are the 8 variables with bit access corresponding to the first 8 bits of the first word variable USER_VARIABLE_1
Parameters defining the WORD-type user map with bit meaning in read/write (2 elements) are available in GF_ eXpress → Expert → User Map → Word (16 bits access) with bit structure R/W:
ADDRESS_USER_WORDBIT_RW_1…_2 are the addresses of the user map in WORD, while
• INTERNAL_USER_WORDBIT_RW_1_BIT00…_2_BIT15 are the corresponding addresses in the standard internal
BIT map with read/write access, one for each of the 16 bits to be configured
Example:
By setting USER_VARIABLE_1 = 15 this value is saved in the non-volatile memory of the instrument and can be read/ reset via bit commands:
Bit_USER_VARIABLE_1_bit0 = 1
Bit_USER_VARIABLE_1_bit1 = 1
Bit_USER_VARIABLE_1_bit2 = 1
Bit_USER_VARIABLE_1_bit3 = 1
Bit_USER_VARIABLE_1_bit4 = 0
Bit_USER_VARIABLE_1_bit5 = 0
Bit_USER_VARIABLE_1_bit6 = 0
Bit_USER_VARIABLE_1_bit7 = 0
Example:
With ADDRESS_USER_WORDBIT_RW_1 = 13, INTERNAL_
USER_WORDBIT_RW_1_BIT04 = 2,
INTERNAL_USER_WORDBIT_RW_1_BIT11 = 0 and INTER-
NAL_USER_WORDBIT_RW_1_BIT14 = 3 you want to map at address 13 of the user map in WORD the read/write variable composed of bit 4, which shows the internal address 2 of the standard BIT map (2 = bit_ON_
OFF - software On/Off), bit 11, which shows the internal address 0 of the standard BIT map (0 = bit_AUTO_MAN_1 -
Auto/Manual), and bit 14, which shows the internal address
3 of the standard BIT map (3 = bit_SELFT_STOP_START_1
- Selftuning Stop/Start).
The value of user address = 65535 means not configured.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 263
Starting with firmware version 3.00, it is possible to protect access via the GF_eXpress configurator to certain controller parameters by means of a password that can be set freely by the user.
This password can only be configured only via GF_eXpress
(parameter “PASCW_GEFCONFIG” in the “Password” menu).
The default value of this parameter, equal to “GEFSPA12”, renders the protection inactive, thus guaranteeing full operation of the GF_eXpress configurator.
Caution!
The value assigned to the password that protects configuration of parameters on the controller is in no way visible on the instrument, but only via GF_eXpress.
The user must store the specific password set on the individual controller independently.
If the user forgets the password set on the target, it will not be possible to recover it, so the user must perform a factory reset of the controller to be able to access all configuration parameters again via GF_eXpress.
If the user sets a password on the controller that differs from the default password, it will be necessary to know this password in order to have full read and write access to all parameters and wizards via the GF_eXpress configurator.
If the user who connects to the device via the GF_eXpress configurator does not know the password set on the controller (to a value other than the default), the user’s access will be limited to a subset of parameters and he or she will be able to view/edit them only via the grid (all wizards will be disabled).
Functions whose configuration via GF_eXpress can be protected by a password are:
• Linearisation of inputs
• Auxiliary Digital Inputs and Outputs
• Internal recipes
• Programmers in Synchronous and Asynchronous Mode
• Logical Blocks
• Mathematical blocks
• Configurable Messages
• Master Communication
• User menu
• Events calendar
• Configuration of parameters displayed in the on-board configuration menu
Access to the controller’s parameters via a generic Modbus client (either RTU or TCP) will not be affected in any way by setting a password other than the default.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 264
To give the password parameter a different value from the default value, select the appropriate button in the grid
The first time you use the GF_eXpress configurator to access a device on which a password other than the default was previously set (see paragraph “5.25.1. Password Setup”), you will be prompted to enter the password,
When you press this button, a dialogue box will appear with:
• the “Current Password” field displaying the current value of the password as plain text
• the “New Password” field in which you can set the new password value in encrypted form.
• a “Confirm new password” field where you will be asked to confirm the new password in encrypted form
• a “Clear” button for resetting the password to the default value
• OK\Cancel buttons to confirm and/or cancel the setting whether you are opening a configuration file (.gfe file) or creating a new configuration file.
Once the correct value has been set, the GF_eXpress configurator will be fully operational.
If
• the password entered is different from the one set on the controller
• the user does not enter a password
The following warning window will appear
Caution!
Passwords are case-sensitive and must be at least four characters long.
The admissible characters are:
• ‘A’... ‘Z’ e ‘a’...’z’
• ‘0’...’9’
• ‘! ‘ , ‘$’ , ‘%’ , ‘&’ , ‘>’ , ‘<’ , ‘;’ , ‘:’ , ‘,’ , ‘.’ , ‘#’ ,
‘@’ , ‘_’ , ‘-’
Use of a character other than those listed above, or a sequence of permitted characters shorter than the minimum length, will make the password unacceptable and cause an error message to appear in the password setting dialogue box when you press “OK”.
Informing the user that from now on the configurator will work in reduced mode.
To exit this mode it will be necessary to close the current session of the GF_eXpress configurator and start a new one.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 265
Caution!
All configuration parameters that are not accessible in GF_eXpress in protected mode will be forced to their default value in the configuration file (.gfe file).
If the user tries to open a password-protected configuration file in GF_eXpress and there is no way to establish communication with any target, it will be necessary to know the value of the password saved in the configuration file in order to obtain full access to the parameters.
If
• the password entered is different from the password saved in the configuration file
• the user does not enter a password
The following warning window will appear informing the user that from now on the configurator will work in reduced mode.
This condition will persist even if the user connects to a controller at a later date.
To exit this mode it will be necessary to close the current session of the GF_eXpress configurator and start a new one.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 266
The controller has a port to connect the device to a PC.
The following photos show where the port is located on the different controller models.
Models 1650 and 1850 differ only in the size of the case.
The connection requires a special accessory cable (code
F060800), which acts as a USB-serial interface/converter and communicates as a Virtual COM Port with a USB port on the computer.
Attention!
To use this interface you have to install the VCP driver, downloadable from: www.gefran.com/en/products/261-gf_express#downloads.
When the controller is connected to the PC you can configure it rapidly even when it is not powered.
The instrument configuration memory is powered by the USB connection.
Connecting the controller to the primary power supply while the USB cable is still connected DOES NOT activate normal
Power-on. You must first disconnect the controller from the
PC and then apply primary power.
The GF_eXpress software lets you:
• read and write the configuration of controller (set of parameters);
• save recipes on the PC (recipe archive);
• display as graph / set all parameters needed for the
Programmer function;
• display/set Logic Oforations (Function Blocks);
• display/set math Oforations (function blocks);
• set structure of parameters recipes;
• set sequence and parameters of user configuration menu;
• set message strings (3 selectable languages);
• transfer any firmware updates
The software is available on CD-rom (code F043958).
The program can be updated automatically from www.gefran.com.
6.2.1.1. System requirements
Oforating system
Processor
RAM
Free space on Hard Disk
Resolution
Browser
XGA
(1024 x 768 pixel)
Microsoft Internet
Explorer 8.0
Ethernet port
Minimum
Windows XP SP2 or Windows Vista or
Windows 7 (32 bit)
Intel Pentium
1 GHz
2 GB
2 GB
Recommended
Windows 7 (64 bit)
Intel Core i5 2,5
Ghz or higher
4 GB or higher
4 GB or higher
1 RJ45
DVD reader Yes
USB port 1 USB 2.0
SXGA (1280 x 1024 pixel) or higher
Microsoft Internet
Explorer 9.0 or higher
1 RJ45
Yes
1 USB 2.0
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 267
The display and keys for each model are described in paragraphs “1.3.1. Display and keys” on page 13 for the
850, “1.4.1. Display and keys” on page 15 for the 1650, and
“1.5.1. Display and keys” on page 17 for the 1850.
Each time the key is pressed, you go back to the previous menu item or to the higher menu level, according to the context.
Keep the key pressed for more than 2 seconds to return to the Home page.
Keys are used for navigating menus and submenus, changing parameters, and confirming choices.
Their function depends on the context and on how long they are pressed.
Press the key to enter a submenu or to lower the displayed parameter value, according to the context.
Keep the key pressed to progressively increase the speed of lowering the displayed parameter.
The LEDs above the keys not only give confirmation that each key has been pressed (by flashing), but also show which keys can be used in each situation.
Press the key to raise the value of the displayed parameter.
Keep the key pressed to progressively increase the speed of raising the displayed parameter.
The following navigation functions are assigned to the keys:
Scroll User Configuration menu (Setpoint, Alarm setpoints, Control output, etc.).
Each time the key is pressed, it confirms the value of the displayed parameter and goes to the next item on the menu.
Keep the key pressed for more than 2 seconds to enter the Programming/Configuration Menu.
When the process variable is displayed, in standard configuration the ) key switches the controller function mode (manual/automatic).
The controller runs a self-diagnostics test immediately after power-on.
During the test all segments of the display flash and a checksum is run.
The hardware resources present are also acquired.
If any system errors are detected, the controller displays the related information.
If the error is caused by a damaged program, update the firmware.
If the error is caused by incorrect configuration, reconfigure the controller with PC and GF_eXpress software.
If the self-diagnostics test detects no errors, the controller enters normal functioning state (display shows Home page).
Errors are saved in a register and can be displayed with the
Error function on the INFO menu.
The device’s normal operating mode is controller-only.
The display shows the following information:
• PV displays the process variable value;
• SV displays the setpoint value (if dS.Sp = setp);
• models 1650 and 1850 also display the control output value (if dS.F = OUT.P);
• by pressing the key the PV display shows, in sequence the significant values that condition controller function: setpoint, alarm setpoints, control output, etc., which can be changed if necessary (parameters in the user menu).
Use the and keys to raise and lower the setpoint to the value required.
Press the key to save the SP value; otherwise, the set value is saved about 15 seconds after the last change
Keep the key pressed for more than 2 seconds to enter the Programming/Configuration menu.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 268
To enable the Programmer function, set parameter PROGR =
On1, On2, On.S. on the EN.FUNC menu.
The following parameters are entered as default on the user menu:
• PROG.STATUS_1 which lets you request the display/ check of PROGRAMMER 1
• PROG.STATUS_2, which lets you request the display/ check of PROGRAMMER 2
The different controller models display programmer status information in different ways.
The following examples show how the same information is displayed on the 850, 1650, and 1850 controllers.
Compared to the model 850, models 1650 and 1850 also show the process variable value (PV_1 PROG.STATUS_1 and PV_2 PROG.STATUS_2).
Compared to the other two models, the model 1850 also shows the setpoint value of the active step.
1. Indication of programmer status. When on, programmer
is on.
2. Number of program running (number 2 in example).
3. Number of program step running (number 5 in example).
4. LED RUN: on indicates that program is running; flashing
indicates that program is in STOP, END or HOLD, and
that the time base is stopped.
5. LED RAMP: on indicates that program is running the ramp
segment of the step; off means that it is in the hold
segment of the step or at end of program (in example:
running ramp of step 5).
6. Current time of segment (ramp or hold) of step. The time
value depends on the set base times, hh:mm or mm:ss
(in example: elapsed time is 20 minutes and 42 seconds).
7. Process variable PV_1 or PV_2 depending on whether
you are in PROG.STATUS_1 or in PROG.STATUS_2
(in example: 118).
8. Setpoint of current step, i.e. the value to be reached
(in example: 120).
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 269
If errors occur during normal operation, the HOME.x pages will show:
• the name of the error on the PV display
• the value of the setpoint or control output on the SV display (only on models 1650 and 1850).
• a scrolling message with errors detected, on display SV
(model 850) or on display F (models 1650 and 1850).
The most common error messages are:
Lou Process variable is below minimum scale limit
(parameter LO.SCL on I.MAIN).
High Process variable is above maximum scale limit
(parameter HI.SCL on I.MAIN).
Err PT100 in short circuit or input values below minimum limits (for example, thermocouple with incorrect connection) or 4...20 mA transmitter broken or not powered.
Sbr Sensor broken or input values above maximum limit.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 270
Every operator has a freely accessible menu (no password required) on which he can configure some controller parameters.
The User Configuration menu can be built according to need with the GF_express software, grouping up to 100 parameters from those available for controller configuration (see chapter
“4. Configuration” on page “4. CONFIGURATION” on page
“4. CONFIGURATION” on page 52).
The parameters that may be selected to build the user set-up menu include PASS0 and PASS1; it may be useful to submit a password to the parameters of the user menu.
The controller leaves the factory with a preconfigured user configuration menu (shown below for models:
850-x-xxx-00000-x-xxx and 1650-x-xxx-00000-x-xxx).
This menu can subsequently be modified. The related parameters are shown for models with options; the complete list of parameters is shown on the GF_eXpress user menu page.
Press the key to access the User Configuration menu.
GF_eXpress can be used to set the generic user menu parameter to set automatic back to PV\Home when positioned on the parameter and no key is pressed within
15 seconds.
Description Unit of misura Valid values Notes
Local setpoint 1
SETP1 scale points LO.SP1...HI.SP1
ALRM1
Alarm 1 limit scale points
LO.AL1...HI.AL1
-999...999
If absolute alarm.
If deviation alarm.
ALRM2
Alarm 2 limit scale points
LO.AL1...HI.AL1
-999...999
If absolute alarm.
If deviation alarm.
ALRM3
Alarm 3 limit scale points
LO.AL1...HI.AL1
-999...999
If absolute alarm.
If deviation alarm.
ALRM4
AL.ACK
MS.ACK
Alarm 4 limit
Reset alarms latch and
LBA alarm
Reset scrolling message scale points
LO.AL1...HI.AL1
-999...999
If absolute alarm.
If deviation alarm.
Off
On
Off
On
Appears if at least one alarm with latch was set or if LBA alarm was enabled. The reset command is temporary and is not saved.
Appears if a scrolling message is present.
The reset command is temporary and is not saved.
OUT.P1
Control output value 1
-100.0...100.0
On / OFF
Value Read Only
Visualizzazione Home
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 271
You can enter the following on the user menu:
• simple parameters (for example, software version
SW.Ver or password 1 PASS1);
• single instances of indexed parameters (for example, configuration of main channel type tYPE.1 and of auxiliary channel type tYPE.2) ;
• subsets of parameters pertaining to an indexed configuration menu (for example, some parameters of the step configuration menu of the PR.STP program, such as the Setpoint of the SETP programming step, the Ramp Time of the rAMP.T step, and the Hold Time of the HOLD.T step).
If the user changes the User Menu configuration while the controller is working in this menu (i.e., the display is showing one of the User Menu parameters), the switch to Home.1 is automatically forced.
To enter subsets of parameters pertaining to an indexed configuration menu, the objects in the diagram at the right must be entered IN THE FOLLOWING ORDER:
1. the Modbus object for the indexed configuration menu
(in the example, PR.STP);
2. the Modbus object for the index selector of the indexed configuration menu (in the example, PR.STP.N);
3. the Modbus object for the first instance of the first parameter to be managed on the User Menu, pertaining to the configuration menu specified at point 1 (in the example, SETP.1);
4. the Modbus object for the first instance of the second parameter to be managed on the User Menu, pertaining to the configuration menu specified at point 1 (in the example, rAMP.T.1);
5. the Modbus object for the first instance of the third parameter to be managed on the User Menu, pertaining to the configuration menu specified at point 1 (in the example, HOLD.T.1);
6. the Modbus object for the first instance of the nth parameter to be managed on the User Menu, pertaining to the configuration menu specified at point 1.
If you try to enter:
• a Modbus object that does not pertain to the configuration menu specified at point 1, or
• a Modbus object for an instance other than the first, even if pertaining to the specified configuration menu, you will exit the indexed configuration menu.
Failure to follow points 1 and 2 will block correct navigation of the indexed configuration menu.
You can run a check of correct configuration of the
Recipes template by clicking the icon in GF_eXpress
(or the “Check user recipes template coherence” command on the GF_eXpress Service menu).
If:
• the value 0, or
• a wrong Modbus address is entered in the Value column of the GF_eXpress User Menu, navigation on the User Menu interrupts and you return to the
Home.1 page.
During navigation on an indexed menu, when you return to the menu with index (parameter PR.STP.N in the following figure), the number of the indexed submenu is always 1.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 272
Attention!
The controller must be repaired only by technicians trained and authorized by Gefran. Any attempt by unauthorized personnel to repair or change the hardware characteristics of the controller will void the warranty.
The instrument (display + electronic circuits) can be replaced without having to remove the entire controller from the panel and disconnect its cables.
First switch off the power supply to the controller and to the other devices connected to it.
Then release the top and bottom of the faceplate and remove the instrument (see figure).
Insert the new instrument and switch on the power supply.
Attention! Replace the entire controller if the blade contacts inside the instrument or the protective case show traces of burns or are not in perfect condition.
1
1
2
The gasket may lose efficiency over time and due to environmental conditions.
To maintain IP65 faceplate protection, replace the gasket
(between faceplate and case and between case and panel) at regular intervals.
To replace the gasket between the case and the panel you have to disassemble the controller from the panel and then reassemble it; to replace the gasket between the faceplate and the case, follow the instructions for replacing the controller).
The configuration of one controller can be cloned to another controller by means of a PC or the optional ZAPPER accessory.
With a PC (and GF_eXpress software):
1. With the appropriate cable, connect the controller
6.
(with the configuration to be cloned) to the PC.
2. Read all of the controller configuration parameters and save them in a file (recipe).
3. Disconnect the controller.
4. Connect the controller to be configured to the PC.
5. Download the saved configuration to the controller.
Disconnect the configured controller
With the ZAPPER accessory:
1. Connect the ZAPPER to the controller with the configuration to be cloned.
2. Press the read key on the ZAPPER: the green LED starts flashing. DO NOT disconnect the ZAPPER while the LED is flashing.
3. After a short time the green LED lights up steadily.
A rapidly flashing red LED means that the read proce- dure failed. Disconnect the controller.
4. Connect the ZAPPER to the controller to be configured.
5. Press the write key on the ZAPPER: the green LED starts flashing. DO NOT disconnect the ZAPPER while the LED is flashing.
6. After a short time the green LED lights up steadily.
A rapidly flashing red LED means that the write proce- dure failed.
7. Disconnect the configured controller.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 273
To clean the faceplate and the case, use only a soft cloth dampened with water or alcohol. DO NOT use hydrocarbon solvents (trichloroethylene, gasoline, etc.).
Do not use compressed air to remove dust from the electronic cards. If necessary, use a clean brush with soft bristles.
You can also clean the inside of the controller if necessary.
To do this, first switch off the power supply to the controller and to the other devices connected to it.
Then slide out the controller as explained in paragraph ”8.1.
Replacing the controller” to access and clean the inside of
the case (page”8.1. Replacing the controller” on page 273).
The following table shows the most common controller faults and their remedies.
Message or problem Possible cause Remedy
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 274
Type
Screen area (L x H)
Lighting
PV display
DISPLAY
SV display
Unit of measurement
Controller state signals
Output state signals
KEYPAD
LCD black background
35 × 30 mm
Backlit with LEDs, life > 40.000 hours @ 25 °C
(with brightness level BACKL = 8)
Number of digits: 4 to 7 segments, with decimal point
Digit height: 17 mm
Color: white
Number of digits: 5 to 14 segments, with decimal point
Digit height: 7.5 mm
Color: green
Selectable, °C, °F or custom 1
Color: same as PV display
Number: 6 (RUN, MAN, _/-, REM, SP1/2)
Color: amber
Number: 4 (1, 2, 3, 4)
Color: red
Number of keys: 4 silicon (Man/Auto, INC, DEC, F)
Type: mechanical
1) Programming is done with the GF_eXpress configuration program
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 275
INPUTS
Sensor type • Thermocouples, RTD (PT100, JPT100), IR Pyrometers with type
K output, 4…20mA, 0…20mA, 10V, 5V, 1V, 60mV, potentiometer
•Reading accuracy: ±0.1% of value read
MAIN AND AUXILIARY
INPUT
TA
(ammeter)
INPUT
DIGITAL INPUTS
Thermocouple Input
RTD input
(Pt100 and JPt100)
Linear DC input
Sampling time
Digital filter
Rejection to network disturbance
(48-62Hz)
Temperature unit of measure
Reading interval
Insulation
Isolation
Accuracy
Type
Type
Isolation
Number
This Gefran controller, when subjected to the necessary calibration operations in the field, is suitable for use in Nadcap applications for any class of oven, from 1 to 6, according to specification
AMS2750F, paragraph 3.3.1.
• Types: J, K, R, S, T, C, D, B, E, L, L-GOST, U, G, N,Pt20Rh-
Pt40Rh Custom linearisation available
• Linearisation accuracy: according to standard ITS90 polynomes; refer to user manual for details
• Cold joint accuracy: < ± 1°C at 25°C ambient temperature
• Cold joint compensation: greater than 40:1, rejection at changes in room temperature exceeding 25°C
• Diagnostics: Indication of faulty probe and out of scale
• Types: Pt100, JPt100. Custom linearisation available
• Calibration precision: < ±0.1% of the value read in °C ± 0.4°C
• Linearisation accuracy: <±0.062°C
• Thermal shift: < (±0.002% of read value/°C, starting from 25°C room temperature) ± 0.1°C
• Diagnostics: Indication of faulty probe and out of scale
• Tipes : 0...60 mV, 0…20mA, 4…20mA, 0…1V, 0…5V, 0…10V
• Input impedance :
0…60mV, 0…1V : > 100 MΩ
0…5V, 0…10V : > 400 kΩ
0…20mA, 4…20mA : 50 Ω
• Linearisation: linear or custom
• Calibration accuracy: < 0.1% full scale
• Thermal shift: <±0.003% full scale/°C, starting from 25°C room temperature
60 ms or 120 ms, selectionable
0,0...20,0 s configurable
Rejection to differential mode: >80 dB
Rejection to common mode: >150 dB
Grade C / F, selectable on the keypad
Tipe: linear
Scale: -1999...9999,settable decimal point
Functional insulation between main and auxiliary inputs
Isolated via external transformer
±2% f.s. ±1 digit @25 °C
Number: 2 max
Max. capacity: x / 50 mA AC
Line frequency: 50/60 Hz
Input impedance (Ri): 10 Ω voltage-free contact, or
NPN 24 V - 4,5 mA, o
PNP 12/24 V - max 3,6 mA for detail see electrical connections
250 V
3 max
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 276
OUTPUTS
Relay
(R)
Logic
(D)
Isolated logic
(M)
Triac ( long life relay)
(T)
Continue
(A)
Analog retransmission
(A1)
Number of alarm functions
Possible configurations
ALARMS
POWER SUPPLY
For sensor VT1, VT2
For potentiometer VP
Number : 3 max (4 if 3 relè has a common wire)
Type of relè contact :NO
Maximum current : 5A (2A for UL applications), 250Vac
Minimum load : 5V, 10mA
Number of operations: > 600,000 @ 2A load current
Double insulation
Installation of an external R-C suppressor (“snubber”) is recommended
Number: 4 max
Type: for solid-state relays
Voltage: 24 V ±10% (min 10 V @20 mA)
Isolated from main input
Number: 2 max
Type: MOS optically isolated inputs for PLC and AC / DC
Voltage: 30 V AC/DC max
Current: 100 mA max
Resistance ON: 0,8 Ω max
Isolation: 1500 V
Number: 1 max
Load: resistive
Voltage: 75...240 VAC
Current max: 1 A
Isolation 3 kV snubber circuit integrated zero crossing switching
Number: 1 max
0...10 V, max 20 mA, Rload: > 500 Ω
0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, Rload: < 500 Ω
Resolution: 12 bit
Insulation compared to main input
Number: 1 max
0...10 V, max 20 mA, Rload: > 500 Ω
0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, Rload: < 500 Ω
Resolution: 12 bit
Insulation compared to main input
4 max, assignable to an output
Maximum, minimum, symmetric, absolute/relative, exclusion at power-on, memory, reset from keypad and/or contact, LBA, HB
HBB Hold Back Band if enabled with Programmer function
Power variation alarm
Voltage: 24 VDC ± 10%
Current max: 30 mA
Voltage: 1 VDC ± 1%
Current max: 30 mA
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 277
CONTROL
SETPOINT
PROGRAMMER
(double Programmer if double loop)
MULTIPLE
SETPOINTS
LOGIC
OPERATIONS
OPERATIONS
1
MATHEMATICAL 1
TIMER FUNCTION
Type
Control
Control output
Control output for motorized valves
Number of programs
Number of steps
Number of setpoints
Digital function blocks
Analog function blocks
Number timer
Modes
Single loop, double loop
PID, ON/OFF, single action heat or cool, double action heat/cool
Continuous or ON/OFF
Cycle time: constant or optimized (BF)
OPEN/CLOSE for floating motorized valve or with feedback with position control by potentiometer on Relay, Solid-state, Triac outputs.
Max 16 (if double loop 8 + 8) (*)
Start / Stop / Reset / Skip via digital inputs and/or outputs from logic operations
Output state: Run /Hold / Ready / End
Max 128, each with own setpoint, ramp time and hold time(**)
Times settable in HH:MM or MM:SS
Max 4 consents, configurable for ramp and for hold
Max 4 events, configurable in ramp and in hold
Max 4, selectable from digital input
Each setpoint change is subject to set ramp, different for up and down ramp
Max 32, with 4 input variables per block
The result can act on the state of the controller, of the programmer on alarms and outputs.
Each function has an AND, OR with TIMER block.
Max 8, with 2 input variables per block, with operators such as + , - ,
× , : , average, square root,
The result may act on analog variables in input to PID loops (controlled variable, setpoint) or analog outputs
Standard: 1
If double loop: 2 independent
START / STOP
STABILIZATION (timer is on when PV enters a band set around setpoint; at end of count you can activate an output, shut down
SW or change SP1/SP2)
FIRING (timed activation of control after power on)
ENERGY COUNTER
DIAGNOSTIC
Calculation done on nominal line voltage and nominal load power or on rms current measured on load via CT
Short circuit or open circuit (LBA alarm)
Interrupted or partially interrupted load (HB alarm)
Short circuit of control output (SSR alarm)
RETENTIVE MEMORY
Type
Writes
FRAM
Max. number: > 10 10 cycles
Retention: > 10 years
(*) if in standard mode; if in “Simplified programmer” mode, Max 12 programs
(**) freely selectable in any program, if in standard mode; if in “Simplified programmer” mode, MAX 16 steps per program, in a set order: Program 1 Step 1-16, Program 2 Step 17 – 32, and so on
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 278
GENERAL DATA
POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTIONS
AMBIENT
CONDITIONS
PROTECTION LEVEL
ASSEMBLY
DIMENSIONS
WEIGHT
NORME CE
CERTIFICATIONS
Operating voltage
Power dissipation
Protections
Connection
Serial configuration port
RS485
(option)
Master Modbus
RTU Bridge
Ethernet Modbus TCP and Webserver (optional)
Inputs and outputs
Use
Altitude
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
Positioning
Installation regulations
EMC conformity
(electromagnetic compatibility)
LVD safety
Generals
Europe
USA, Canada
Russia
1) Programming is done through the GF_eXpress configuration program
100...240 VAC/VDC ±10%, 50/60 Hz
(20...27 VAC/VDC ±10%, 50/60 Hz)
10 W max
Overvoltage 300 V / 35 V
Screw terminals and crimp connector, max. wire section 1 mm 2
Connector: microUSB
Baudrate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.200, 38.400, 57.600, 115.200 bit/s
Protocol: Modbus RTU slave
Insulation respect to main input
Screw terminals and crimp connector, max. wire section 2,5mm 2
Baudrate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.200, 38.400, 57.600,
115.200 bit/s
Protocol: Modbus RTU Master
Screw terminals and crimp connector, max. wire section 2,5mm 2
Baudrate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.200, 38.400, 57.600,
115.200 bit/s
Protocol: Modbus RTU Master
Screw terminals and crimp connector, max. wire section 2,5mm 2
Baudrate : 10/100BaseTX, 10/100Mbit/s
Protocol : Modbus TCP slave, Webserver integrato
Isolation from other peripherals
Standard RJ45 conector
Screw terminals and crimp connector, max. wire section 2,5 mm 2
Internal
2000 m max
-10 ... +55 °C (as per IEC 68-2-14)
-20 ... +70 °C (as per IEC 68-2-14)
20...85% RH non-condensing (as per IEC 68-2-3)
IP 65 on front panel (as per IEC 68-2-3)
On panel, removable faceplate
Installation category: II
Pollution degree: 2
Isolation: double
48 X 48 mm (1/16 DIN),
Depth: 100 mm
0,16 kg
Conforms to Directive 2014/30/EU norme EN 61326-1
Emissions in industrial environment classe A
Conforms to Directive 2014/35/EU norme EN 61010-1
This Gefran controller, when subjected to the necessary calibration operations in the field, is suitable for use in Nadcap applications for any class of oven, from 1 to 6, according to specification AMS2750F, paragraph 3.3.1.
CE, RoHS, REACH
UL, cUL
EAC
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 279
Type
Screen area (L x H)
Lighting
PV display
DISPLAY
SV display
F display
Unit of measurement
Controller state signals
Output state signals
Bargraph indicator, configurable
Bargraph indicator
KEYPAD
LCD black background
37 × 68 mm
Backlit with LEDs, life > 40.000 hours @ 25 °C
(with brightness level backl = 8)
Number of digits: 4 to 7 segments, with decimal point
Digit height: 17 mm
Color: white
Number of digits: 4 to 7 segments, with decimal point
Digit height: 14 mm
Color: green
Number of digits: 5 to 14 segments, with decimal point
Digit height: 9 mm
Color: amber
Selectable, °C, °F or custom 1
Color: same as PV display
Number: 6 (RUN, MAN, _/-, REM, SP1/2)
Color: amber
Number: 4 (1, 2, 3, 4)
Color: red
Type: graphic bargraph,11 segments
Power indication: 0 ... 100% o -100 ... 100%
Current indication: 0 ... 100% f.s.
Valve position indication: 0 ... 100%
Type: double bar, 11 segments
Indication of process variable and setpoint: 0...100% f.s.
Keys number: 4, silicone ( Man/Auto, INC,DEC,F)
Type: mechanical
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 280
INPUTS
TA (ammeter)
INPUT
DIGITAL INPUTS
Sensor type
Thermocouple
(only Main and Aux1)
MAIN AND AUXILIARY
INPUT
(Main, Aux1, Aux2)
RTD input
(Pt100 and JPt100)
(only Main and Aux1)
Linear DC input
Sampling time
Digital filter
Rejection at network disturbance
(48-62Hz)
Temperature unit of measure
Reading interval
Insulation
Isolation
Accuracy
Type
Number
Type
Isolation
• Thermocouples, RTD (PT100, JPT100), IR pyrometers with type
K output, 4…20mA, 0…20mA, 10V, 5V, 1V, 60mV, potenziometer
• Reading accuracy : ±0,1% of value read
This Gefran controller, when subjected to the necessary calibration operations in the field, is suitable for use in Nadcap applications for any class of oven, from 1 to 6, according to specification AMS2750F, paragraph 3.3.1.
• Types : J, K, R, S, T, C, D, B, E, L, L-GOST, U, G, N,Pt20Rh-
Pt40Rh Custom linearisation available
• Linearisation accuracy: according to standard ITS90 polynomes; refer to user manual for details
• Cool junction accuracy: < ± 1°C a 25°C room temperature
• Cool junction compensation : greater than 40:1 rejection at changes in room temperature exceeding 25°C
Diagnostics: Indication of faulty probe and out of scale
• Types: Pt100, JPt100. Custom linearisation available
• Calibration accuracy: < ±0,1% of the value read in °C ± 0,4°C
• Linearisation accuracy: <±0,062°C
• Thermal shift: < (±0.002% of read value/°C, starting from 25°C room temperature) ± 0.1°C
• Diagnostics: Indication of faulty probe and out of scale
• Types : 0...60 mV, 0…20mA, 4…20mA, 0…1V, 0…5V, 0…10V,
0…2.
4 V high impedance, 0…1.2V high impedance
•Input impedance :
0…60mV, 0…1V, 0…1.2V, 0…2.
4 V : > 100 MΩ
0…5V, 0…10V : > 400 kΩ
0…20mA, 4…20mA : 50 Ω
• Linearisation: linear or custom
• Calibration accuracy: < 0.1% full scale
• Thermal shift: <±0.003% full scale/°C, starting from 25°C room temperature
60 ms or 120 ms, selectable
0,0...20,0 s configurable
Rejection at differential mode: >80 dB
Rejection at common mode: >150 dB
Grado C / F, selectable on the keypad
Tipe: linear
Scale: -1999...9999, settable decimal point
Functional insulation between main and auxiliary inputs
Isolated via external transformer
±2% f.s. ±1 digit @25 °C
Number: 2 max
Max. capacity: x / 50 mA AC
Line frequency: 50/60 Hz
Input impedance (Ri): 10 Ω
5 max
Voltage-free contact, or
NPN 24 V - 4,5 mA, o
PNP 12/24 V - max 3,6 mA
For detail see electrical connections
250 V
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 281
OUTPUTS
Relay
(R)
Logic
(D)
Isolated logic
(M)
Triac ( long life relè)
(T)
Continuous
(C)
Analog retransmission
(A1) (A2)
Number of alarm functions
Possible configurations
ALARMS
For sensor VT1, VT2
POWER SUPPLY
For potentiometer VP
Nuumber: 4 max
Type of relay contact: NO
Max. current: 5A (2A at ambient temperature up to 45 ° C for certification UL), 250VAC / 30 VDC, cos φ = 1
Minimum load: 5 V, 10 mA
Number of operations: > 600,000 @ 2A load current
Double isolation Installation of an external R-C suppressor (“snubber”) is recommended
Number: 2 max
Type: for solid-state relays
Voltage: 24 V ± 10% (min 10 V @20 mA)
Isolated from main input
Number: 2 max
Type: MOS optoisolated for PLC inputs and AC/DC load
Voltage: 30 V AC/DC max
Current: 100 mA max
Resistance ON: 0,8 Ω max
Isolation: 1500 V
Number: 1 max
Load: resistive
Voltage: 75...240 VAC
Current max: 1 A
Isolation 3 kV snubber circuit integrated zero crossing switching
Number: 1 max
Current: 4...20mA
R out
< 500 Ω
Resolution: 12 bit
Isolated from main input
Number: 2 max
0...10 V, max 20 mA, R out
: > 500 Ω
0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, R out
Resolution: 12 bit
: < 500 Ω
Isolated from main input
4 max, assignable to an output
Maximum, minimum, symmetric, absolute/relative, exclusion at firing, memory, reset from keypad and/or contact, LBA, HB, HBB
Hold Back Band if enabled with Programmer function, alarm after power variation at full power
Voltage: 24 VDC ±10%
Current max: 30 mA
VT1 option of Out3
Voltage: 1 VDC ±1%
Current max: 30 mA
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 282
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
Type Single loop, double loop
CONTROL
Control
Control output
Control output for motorized valves
PID, ON/OFF, single action heat or cool, double action heat/ cool
Continuous or ON/OFF
Cycle time: constant or optimized (BF)
OPEN/CLOSE for floating motorized valve or with feedback with position control by potentiometer on Relay, Solid-state, Triac
SETPOINT
PROGRAMMER
(Double programmer if double loop)
MULTIPLE
SETPOINTS
LOGIC
OPERATIONS
OPERATIONS
1
MATHEMATICAL 1
TIMER FUNCTION
ENERGY COUNTER
DIAGNOSTIC
Number of programs
Number of steps
Number of setpoints
Digital function blocks
Analog function blocks
Modes
Type outputs.
Max 16 (if double loop 8 + 8) (*)
Start / Stop / Reset / Skip via digital inputs and/or outputs from logic operations
Output state: Run /Hold / Ready / End
Max 192, each with own setpoint, ramp time and hold time (**)
Times settable in HH:MM or MM:SS
Max 4 consents, configurable for ramp and for hold
Max 4 events, configurable in ramp and in hold
Max 4, selectable from digital input
Each setpoint change is subject to set ramp, different for up and down ramp
Max 32, with 4 input variables per block.
The result can act on the state of the controller, of the programmer on alarms and outputs.
Each function contains a block type AND, OR with TIMER
Max 8, with 2 input variables per block, with operators such as +
, - , × , : , average, square root, ...
The result may act on analog variables in input to PID loops (controlled variable, setpoint) or analog outputs .
START / STOP (2 timer if double loop)
STABILIZATION (timer is on when PV enters a band set around setpoint; at end of count you can activate an output, shut down
SW or change SP1/SP2)
FIRING (timed activation of control after power on)
Calculation done on nominal line voltage and nominal load power or on rms current measured on load via CT
Short circuit or open circuit (LBA alarm)
Interrupted or partially interrupted load (HB alarm)
Short circuit of control output (SSR alarm)
FRAM
RETENTIVE MEMORY Max. number of writes Number max: > 10 10 cycles
Retention: > 10 anni
(*) if in standard mode; if in “Simplified programmer” mode, Max 12 programs
(**) freely selectable in any program, if in standard mode; if in “Simplified programmer” mode, MAX 16 steps per program, in a set order: Program 1 Step 1-16, Program 2 Step 17 – 32, and so on
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 283
GENERAL DATA
POWER SUPPLY
Operating voltage
Power dissipation
Protections
Connection
Serial configuration port
RS485
(option)
CONNECTIONS
Master Modbus
RTU Bridge
AMBIENT
CONDITIONS
PROTECTION LEVEL
Ethernet Modbus TCP e
Webserver
(opzione)
Inputs and outputs
Use
Altitude
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
ASSEMBLY
Positioning
Installation regulations
DIMENSIONS
WEIGHT
CE STANDARDS
CERTIFICATIONS
EMC conformity
(electromagnetic compatibility)
LVD safety
Generals
Europe
USA, Canada
Russia
100...240 VAC/VDC ±10%, 50/60 Hz
(20...27 VAC/VDC ±10%, 50/60 Hz)
10 W max
Overvoltage 300 V / 35 V
Screw terminals and crimp connector, max. wire section 1 mm 2
Connector: microUSB
Baudrate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.200, 38.400, 57.600,
115.200 bit/s
Protocol: Modbus RTU
Insulation compared to main entrance
Screw terminals and crimp connector, max. wire section 2.5mm
2
Baudrate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.200, 38.400, 57.600,
115.200 bit/s
Protocol: Modbus RTU Master
Connector: RJ10
Baudrate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.200, 38.400, 57.600,
115.200 bit/s
Protocol: Modbus RTU Master
Screw terminals and crimp connector, max. wire section 2.5mm
2
Baudrate : 10/100BaseTX, 10/100Mbit/s
Protocol : Modbus TCP slave, integrated Webserver
Isolamento compared to other peripherals
RJ45 Standard connector
Screw terminals and crimp connector, max. wire section 2.5mm
2
Indoor
2000 m max
-10 ... +55 °C (as per IEC 68-2-14)
-20 ... +70 °C (as per IEC 68-2-14)
20...85% RH non-condensing (as per IEC 68-2-3)
IP 65 on front panel (as per IEC 68-2-3)
On panel, removable faceplate
Installation category: II
Pollution degree: 2
Isolation: double
48 X 96 mm (1/8 DIN)
Depth: 80 mm
0,24 kg
Conforms to Directive 2014/30/EU norme EN 61326-1
Emissions in industrial environment classe A
Conforms to Directive 2014/35/EU norme EN 61010-1
This Gefran controller, when subjected to the necessary calibration operations in the field, is suitable for use in Nadcap applications for any class of oven, from 1 to 6, according to specification AMS2750F, paragraph 3.3.1.
CE, RoHS, REACH
UL, cUL
EAC
1) Programming is done with the GF_eXpress configuration program.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 284
OPERATOR INTERFACE
Type
Screen area (L x H)
Lighting
PV display
DISPLAY
KEYPAD
SV display
F display
Unit of measurement
Controller state signals
Output state signals
Bargraph indicator, configurable
Bargraph indicator
Inputs/outputs state signal
(only with option)
LCD black background
83 × 68 mm
Backlit with LEDs, life > 40,000 hours @ 25°C
(with brightness level backl = 0.8)
Number of digits: 4 to 7 segments, with decimal point
Digit height: 23 mm
Color: white
Number of digits: 4 to 7 segments, with decimal point
Digit height: 11 mm
Color: green
Number of digits: 7 to 14 segments, with decimal point
Digit height: 9 mm
Color: amber
Selectable, °C, °F or custom 1
Color: same as PV display
Number: 6 (RUN, MAN, _/-, REM, SP1/2)
Color: amber
Number: 4 (1, 2, 3, 4)
Color: red
Type: graphic bargraph,11 segments
Power indication: 0...100% or -100...100%
Current indication: 0...100% f.s.
Valve position indication: 0...100%
Type: double bar, 11 segments
Indication of process variable and setpoint: 0...100% f.s.
Number: 8 inputs, 8 outputs
Color: green for inputs, red for outputs
Control via FB outputs
Keys number: 6, silicone (Man/Auto, L/R, *, INC, DEC, F)
Type: mechanical
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 285
INPUTS
INGRESSI PRINCIPALE
ED AUSILIARIO
(Main, Aux1, Aux2)
TA
(ammeter) input
DIGITAL INPUTS
Sensor type
Thermocouple
(only Main and Aux1)
RTD input
(Pt100 and JPt100)
Linear DC input
Sampling time
Digital filter
Rejection to network disturbance
(48-62Hz)
Temperature unit of measure
Reading interval
Insulation
Type
Isolation
Accuracy
Type
Numero
Type
Isolation
• Thermocouples, RTD (PT100, JPT100), IR pyrometers with type K output, 4…20mA, 0…20mA, 10V, 5V, 1V, 60mV, potentiometer
• Reading accuracy: ±0.1% of value read
This Gefran controller, when subjected to the necessary calibration operations in the field, is suitable for use in Nadcap applications for any class of oven, from 1 to 6, according to specification
AMS2750F, paragraph 3.3.1.
• Types: J, K, R, S, T, C, D, B, E, L, L-GOST, U, G, N,Pt20Rh-
Pt40Rh Custom linearisation available
• Linearisation accuracy: according to standard ITS90 polynomes; refer to user manual for details
• Cold joint accuracy: < ± 1°C at 25°C ambient temperature
• Cold joint compensation: greater than 40:1, rejection at changes in room temperature exceeding 25°C
• Diagnostics: Indication of faulty probe and out of scale
• Types: Pt100, JPt100. Custom linearisation available
• Calibration accuracy: < ±0,1% of the value read in °C ± 0,4°C
• Linearisation accuracy: <±0,062°C
• Thermal shift: < (±0.002% of read value/°C, starting from 25°C room temperature) ± 0.1°C
• Diagnostics: Indication of faulty probe and out of scale
• Tipi : 0...60 mV, 0…20mA, 4…20mA, 0…1V, 0…5V, 0…10V,
0…2.4V high impedance, 0…1.2V high impedance
• Input impedance :
0…60mV, 0…1V, 0…1.2V, 0…2.4V : > 100 MΩ
0…5V, 0…10V : > 400 kΩ
0…20mA, 4…20mA : 50 Ω
• Linearisation: linear or custom
• Calibration accuracy: < 0,1% out of scale
• Thermal shift: <±0.003% full scale/°C, starting from 25°C room temperature
60 ms or 120 ms, selectable
0,0...20,0 s configurable
Rejection to differential mode: >80 dB
Rejection to common mode: >150 dB
Grade C / F, selectable on the keypad
Type: linear
Scale: -1999...9999, settable decimal point
Functional insulation between main and auxiliary inputs
Isolato tramite trasformatore esterno
Number: 2 max
Maximum load: x / 50 mA AC
Network frequency: 50/60 Hz
Input impedance (Ri): 10 Ω
Isolated via external transformer
±2% f.s. ±1 digit @25 °C
Number: 2 max
Max. capacity: x / 50 mA AC
Line frequency: 50/60 Hz
Input impedance (Ri): 10 Ω
5 max voltage-free contact, or
NPN 24 V - 4,5 mA, o
PNP 12/24 V - max 3,6 mA
For detail see electrical connections
250 V
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 286
OUTPUTS
Relay
(R)
Logic
(D)
Isolated logic
(M)
Triac ( long life relè)
(T)
Continuous
(C)
Analog retransmission
(A1) (A2)
Number of alarm functions
Possible configurations
ALARMS
For sensor VT1, VT2
POWER SUPPLY
For potentiometer VP
INPUTS / OUTPUTS OPZIONALI
Digital Inputs/Outputs
Relay
Number: 4 max
Type of relay contact: NO
Max. current: 5A (2A at ambient temperature up to 45 ° C for certification UL), 250VAC /30 VDC, cos φ = 1
Minimum load: 5 V, 10 mA
Number of operations: > 600,000 @ 2A load current
Double isolation
Installation of an external R-C suppressor (“snubber”) is recommended
Number: 2 max
Type: for solid-state relays
Voltage: 24 V ±10% (min 10 V @20 mA)
Isolated from main input
Number: 2 max
Type: MOS optoisolated for PLC inputs and AC/DC load
Voltage: 30 V AC/DC max
Current: 100 mA max
Resistance ON: 0,8 Ω max
Isolation: 1500 V
Number: 1 max
Load: resistive
Voltage: 75...240 VAC
Current max: 1 A
Isolation 3 kV snubber circuit integrated zero crossing switching
Number: 1 max
Current: 4...20mA
R out
< 500 Ω
Resolution: 12 bit
Isolated from main input
Number: 2 max
0...10 V, max 20 mA, R out
: > 500 Ω
0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, R out
Resolution: 12 bit
: < 500 Ω
Isolated from main input
4 max, assignable to an output
Maximum, minimum, symmetric, absolute/relative, exclusion at firing, memory, reset from keypad and/or contact, LBA, HB, HBB
Hold Back Band if enabled with Programmer function, alarm after power variation at full power
Voltage: 24 VDC ±10%
Current max: 30 mA
VT1 option of Out3
Voltage: 1 VDC ±1%
Current max: 30 mA
Number: 8, in two groups (5 + 3 with separate power supply)
Input: PNP 24 VDC, 5 mA
Output: PNP with 24 VDC external power supply, ±25%, max 100 mA, short circuit protection with PTC
Isolation: 250 V
Number: 8, in two groups (5 + 3 relays with common contact)
Type of relay contact: NO
Max. current: 5A (at ambient temperature up to 45 ° C for certification UL), 250VAC / 30VDC, cos ϕ =1
Max. current for each common: 5 A
Number of operations: > 600,000 @ 2A load current
Double isolation
Installation of an external R-C suppressor (“snubber”) is recommended
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 287
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
Type Single/Double loop
CONTROL
Control
Control output
Control output for motorized valves
Number of programs
PID, ON/OFF, single action heat or cool, double action heat/ cool
Continuous or ON/OFF
Cycle time: constant or optimized (BF)
OPEN/CLOSE for floating motorized valve or with feedback with position control by potentiometer on Relay, Solid-state, Triac outputs.
Max 16 (if double loop 8 + 8) (*)
Start / Stop / Reset / Skip via digital inputs and/or outputs from logic operations SETPOINT
PROGRAMMER
(Double programmer if double loop)
MULTIPLE
SETPOINTS
LOGIC 1
OPERATIONS
OPERATIONS
MATHEMATICAL 1
Number of steps
Number of setpoints
Digital function blocks
Analog function blocks
Output state: Run /Hold / Ready / End
Max 192, each with own setpoint, ramp time and hold time
Times settable in HH:MM or MM:SS
Max 4 consents, configurable for ramp and for hold
Max 4 events, configurable in ramp and in hold
Max 4, selectable from digital input
Each setpoint change is subject to set ramp, different for up and down ramp
Max 32, with 4 input variables per block.
The result can act on the state of the controller, of the programmer on alarms and outputs.
Each function has an AND, OR with TIMER block
Max 8, with 2 input variables per block, with operators such as + , - ,
× , : , average, square root, ...
The result may act on analog variables in input to PID loops (controlled variable, setpoint) or analog outputs .
START / STOP (2 timer if double loop) Modes
TIMER FUNCTION
ENERGY COUNTER
DIAGNOSTIC
STABILIZATION (timer is on when PV enters a band set around setpoint; at end of count you can activate an output, shut down
SW or change SP1/SP2)
FIRING (timed activation of control after power on)
Calculation done on nominal line voltage and nominal load power or on rms current measured on load via CT
Short circuit or open circuit (LBA alarm)
Interrupted or partially interrupted load (HB alarm)
Short circuit of control output (SSR alarm)
FRAM Type
RETENTIVE MEMORY Writes Number max: > 10 10 cycles
Retention: > 10 years
(*) if in standard mode; if in “Simplified programmer” mode, Max 12 programs freely selectable in any program, if in standard mode; if in “Simplified programmer” mode, MAX 16 steps per program, in a set order: Program 1 Step 1-16, Program 2 Step 17 – 32, and so on
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 288
GENERAL DATA
POWER SUPPLY
Operating voltage
Power dissipation
Protections
Connection
Serial configuration port
RS485
(option)
CONNECTIONS
Master Modbus
RTU Bridge
AMBIENT
CONDITIONS
PROTECTION LEVEL
Ethernet Modbus TCP and Webserver
(option)
Inputs and outputs
Use
Altitude
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
ASSEMBLY
DIMENSIONS
WEIGHT
CE STANDARDS
CERTIFICAZIONI
Positioning
Installation regulations
EMC
(electromagnetic compatibility)
LVD safety
Generals
Europe
USA, Canada
Russia
100...240 VAC/VDC ±10%, 50/60 Hz
(20...27 VAC/VDC ±10%, 50/60 Hz)
12 W max
Overvoltage 300 V / 35 V
Screw terminals and crimp connector, max. wire section 1 mm 2
Connector: microUSB
Baudrate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.200, 38.400, 57.600, 115.200 bit/s
Protocol: Modbus RTU
Insulation compared to main entrance
Screw terminals and crimp connector, max. wire section 2.5 mm 2
Baudrate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.200, 38.400, 57.600,
115.200 bit/s
Protocol: Modbus RTU Master
Connettore RJ10
Baudrate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.200, 38.400, 57.600,
115.200 bit/s
Protocol: Modbus RTU Master
Screw terminals and crimp connector, max. wire secti on 2.5 mm 2
Baudrate : 10/100BaseTX, 10/100Mbit/s
Protocol : Modbus TCP slave, integrated Webserver
Isolation from other peripherals
Standard RJ45 connector
Screw terminals and crimp connector, max. wire section 2.5 mm 2
Internal
2000 m max
-10 ... +55 °C (as per IEC 68-2-14)
-20 ... +70 °C (as per IEC 68-2-14)
20...85% RH non condensante (as per IEC 68-2-3)
IP 65 on front panel (as per IEC 68-2-3)
On panel, removable faceplate
Installation category: II
Pollution degree: 2
Isolation: double
96 X 96 mm (1/4 DIN)
Depth: 80 mm
0,24 kg
Conforms to Directive 2014/30/EU norme EN 61326-1
Emissions in industrial environment classe A
Conforms to Directive 2014/35/EU norme EN 61010-1
This Gefran controller, when subjected to the necessary calibration operations in the field, is suitable for use in Nadcap applications for any class of oven, from 1 to 6, according to specification AMS2750F, paragraph 3.3.1.
CE, RoHS, REACH
UL, cUL
EAC
1) Programming is done with the GF_eXpress configuration program.
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 289
SENSOR
INPUT
PV
AUXILIARY
INPUT
CT1, CT2
INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
DI1...DI3 or
TRANSMITTER
POWER
SUPPLY
LCD +
CONTROLLER
BACK LIGHT
4 keys
CPU
Main Processor ARM
FLASH memory
FRAM
Internal Temperature
RTC
SRAM
CONFIGURATION
PORT
COMMUNICATION
INTERFACE
OUT 1, 2, 3, 4
PC INTERFACE
FIELDBUS
TRIAC, RELAY, MOS
DC OUTPUT
LOGIC OUTPUT (SSR drive)
OUT1 G (Master Modbus)
Modbus
TCP
POWER IN
(90...260 VAC / 18...30 VAC/VDC)
POWER
SUPPLY
FIELDBUS
+24 V
+5 V
3,3 V Auxiliary Input
+3,3 V
Sensor input, CT Input, Configuration port
Transmitter power supply (VT1)
Auxiliary input (PV2), Transmitter power supply (VT2)
Potentiometer power supply (VP)
Fieldbus communication interface
Ethernet communication interface
Digital input, Logic output (SSR drive), DC output 1,
Analog DC output 1, DC output A1
MOS digital output
Relay output 1
Relay outputs 2, 3, 4
Relay output 2
Relay or Triac output 3
Functional isolation
Reinforced isolation
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 290
SENSOR
INPUT
PV
AUXILIARY
INPUT 1
AUXILIARY
INPUT 2
CT1, CT2
INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
DI1...DI5
TRANSMITTER
POWER
SUPPLY only for 1850
DIGITAL INPUT
EDI1...
EDI8
LCD +
CONTROLLER
BACK LIGHT
1650 4 keys
1850 6 keys
CPU
Main Processor ARM
FLASH memory
FRAM
Internal Temperature
RTC
SRAM
CONFIGURATION
PORT
COMMUNICATION
INTERFACE
OUT 1, 2, 3, 4
Modbus
TCP only for 1850
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
EDO1... EDO8
POWER
SUPPLY
PC INTERFACE
FIELDBUS
TRIAC, RELAY, MOS
DC OUTPUT
LOGIC OUTPUT (SSR drive)
OUT1 G (Master Modbus)
POWER IN
(90...260 VAC / 18...30 VAC/VDC)
FIELDBUS
External +24 V
+24 V
+24 V
+5 V
3,3 V Auxiliary Input
+3,3 V
Auxiliary Input 2
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 291
Sensor input, CT Input, Configuration port,
OUT1 G (Mster Modbus)
Auxiliary input (PV2), Transmitter power supply (VT2)
Potentiometer power (VP))
Fieldbus
Communication interface
Ethernet communication interface
Digital input, Logic output (SSR drive), DC output 1,
A1, A2 DC outputs, Transmitter power supply (VT1)
8 digital inputs, 8 digital outputs
(only for 1850)
MOS digital output
Relay output
Relay output 2
Relay output 3
Uscita 34 relè o Triac
Functional isolation
Reinforced isolation
Isolamento rinforzato
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 292
Ordering code:
A B
850 X X -
C D E F G H
X X X X X X X
I L
X -
M N
X X 00
O
X -
P
X X
Model (A)
Controller
Programmer
Valve (*)
Programmer+valve (*)
P
V
PV
Output 1 (B)
Relay
Logic
Analog
Master Modbus RTU communication
Output 2 (C) - Output 3 (D)
Relay - Relay
Logic - Logic
R R
D D
Isolated logic - Isolated logic M M
Isolated logic - Long Life relay M T
R
D
A
G
Output 4 (E)
Absent
Logic
Relay (1)
Power supply sensor VT1 for main input (F)
Absent
VT1 24 V (2)
0
1
0
D
R
Function (P)
00 Absent
FB Logical + mathematical operations
CK
RTC + Logical operations + mathematical
Supply (O)
0 20...27 VAC / VDC
1 100...240 VAC / VDC
Communication (M)
00 Absent
M0 RS485 Modbus RTU
E0 Ethernet Modbus TCP (4)
ME Ethernet Modbus TCP / RTU bridge (4)
Digital inputs (L)
0 Absent (3)
3 3 DI
CT Inputs
Auxiliary inputs (H-I)
00 Absent
20 CT1 + CT2
01 Input Aux: TC,RTD,60mV
02 Input Aux : 1V/5V/10V/20mA
+ VP 1V
03 Input Aux : 1V/5V/10V/20mA
+ VT2 24 V
Retransmission (G)
0 Absent
1 Analogue A1
Notes
1) Only with: (C) = R and (D) = R
2) Alternative PT100
3) Only with option H-I = 0
4) Only with option (E)=0/R; (G)=0; (L)=3
Check before each request a list of codes available on the following pages
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 293
Ordering code:
A B
1650 X X -
C D E F G H
X X X 0 X X X
I L
X -
M N
X X 0 0
O
X -
P
X X
Model (A)
Controller
Programmer
Valve (1)
Programmer+valve (1)
Output 1 (B)
Relay
Logic
Analog
Master Modbus RTU communication
P
V
PV
Output 2 (C) Output 3 (D)
Relay - Relay
Logic - Logic
R R
D D
Isolated logic - Isolated logic M M
Relay - VT1 24 V
Logic - VT1 24 V
Isolated logic - VT1 24 V
R V
D V
M V
Output 4 (E)
Absent
Relay
Long Life relay
0
R
T
Retransmission (G)
Absent
Analogue A1
Analogue A1 + A2
0
1
2
C
G
R
D
Function (P)
00 Absent
FB
CK
Logical + mathematical operations
RTC + Logical operations + mathematical
Supply (O)
0 20...27 VAC / VDC
1 100...240 VAC / VDC
Communication (M)
00 Absent
M0 RS485 Modbus RTU (slave)
E0 Ethernet Modbus TCP
ME Ethernet Modbus TCP / RTU bridge
Digital inputs (L)
0 Absent (2)
5 5 DI
Auxiliary input (I)
0 Absent
1 Input Aux : TC, RTD, 60mV
2 Input Aux: 1V/5V/10V/20mA
+ VP 1 V
3 Input Aux : 1V/5V/10V/20mA
+ VT2 24 V
Input CT / 3° Analog input (H)
0 Absent
2 CT1 + CT2
3 3° Input Aux + VP 2 1 V (3)
Note
1) Only with option (C) = R e (D) = R
2) Only with option E-M = 0
3) Only with option (I) = 1,2,3
Check before each request a list of codes available on the following pages
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 294
Ordering code:
A B
1850 X X -
C D E F G H
X X X 0 X X X
I L
X -
M N
X X X X
O
X -
P
X X
Model (A)
Controller
Programmer
Valve (1)
Programmer+valve (1)
P
V
PV
Output 1 (B)
Relay
Logic
Analog
Master Modbus RTU communication
Output 2 (C) Output 3 (D)
Relay - Relay
Logic - Logic
R R
D D
Isolated logic - Isolated logic M M
Relay - VT1 24 V
Logic - VT1 24 V
Isolated logic - VT1 24 V
R V
D V
M V
C
G
R
D
Output 4 (E)
Absent
Relay
Long Life relay
Retransmission (G)
Absent
Analogue A1
Analogue A1 + A2
0
1
2
0
R
T
Fonction (P)
00 Absent
FB
Logical + mathematical operations
CK
RTC + Logical operations + mathematical
Supply (O)
0 20...27 VAC / VDC
1 100...240 VAC / VDC
I/O opzionali (N)
00 Assenti
10 8 IN/OUT (4)
01 8 relè (4)
11 8 IN/OUT + 8 relè (4)
Communication (M)
00 Absent
M0 RS485 Modbus RTU (slave)
E0 Ethernet Modbus TCP
ME Ethernet Modbus TCP /
RS485 bridge
Digital inputs (L)
0 Absent (2)
5 5 DI
Auxiliary input (I)
0 Absent
1 Input Aux : TC, RTD, 60mV
2 Input Aux: 1V/5V/10V/20mA
+ VP 1 V
3 Input Aux : 1V/5V/10V/20mA
+ VT2 24 V
Input CT / 3° Analog input (H)
0 Absent
2 CT1 + CT2
3 3° Input Aux + VP 2 1 V (3)
Notes
1) Only with option (C) = R and (D) = R
2) Only with option E-M = 0
3) Only with option (I) = 1,2,3
4) The option (N) require option (P) =FB or CK
Check before each request a list of codes available on the following pages
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 295
Code Description
F060800 Cable for programming with PC, USB-TTL 3 V with USB – microUSB connectors, length 1.8 m
F043958 “GF_eXpress” software CD
F060909 Configuration kit for new instruments GF_eXK-3-0-0
51968 Rubber gasket 48×48 front-box
51969 Rubber gasket 48×96 front-box
51970
51292
51068
Rubber gasket 96×96 front-box
Rubber gasket 48×48 box-panel
Rubber gasket 48×96 box-panel
Rubber gasket 99×96 box-panel 51069
51250
49030
51294
51328
Fastening box to panel
Fastening box to panel
Protection of contacts at box bottom
Protection of contacts at box bottom
18 contacts at box bottom 51454
51453
51738
24 contacts at box bottom
36 contacts at box bottom
330200 Current transformer (CT) 50/0.05 A
330201 Current transformer (CT) 25/0.05 A
•
•
•
Compatible
850 1650 1850
• • •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• •
•
• •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
80290E_MHW_850-1650-1850_06-2021_ITA_pag. 296
The public link to your chat has been updated. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Advertisement
Double PID control for precise temperature regulation
Configurable alarms including heater break alarm
Self-tuning and auto-tuning capabilities
Programmable steps for complex temperature profiles
Serial communication and Ethernet connectivity options
Analog and digital I/O for versatile integration
You can configure the alarm parameters within the ALARM submenu, selecting the alarm reference, direct or inverse alarm action, and hysteresis.
Navigate to the PID submenu to access and configure parameters such as proportional band, integral time, derivative time, and output limits.
The configuration of the digital inputs can be done within the IN.DIG submenu, where you can define the input state and assign specific functions.
How to navigate the menu and change the SBR.E parameter to OFF?
Use the four keys on the front panel to navigate. Hold the F key for more than 2 seconds to enter the programming/configuration menu. Access the INPUT submenu using Password 1. Use the Up and Down arrow keys to change the SBR.E value to OFF, and press the F key to confirm and move to the next parameter.
Login to continue